JP7463044B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines) and reel gaming machines (slot machines).

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is common to provide obstacles in the playing area of the game board that change the direction in which the game ball falls, as well as prize holes, starting holes, variable prize holes, and the like into which the game ball can enter. When a game ball enters these holes, the player is given a special privilege, such as the payment of a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1, etc.).

Furthermore, some of these gaming machines are known to be equipped with display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

However, there is room for improvement in the display means of conventional gaming machines.

In view of the above circumstances, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine with distinctive display means.

The gaming machine of the present invention that solves the above object is:
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
the display means is capable of displaying an icon image using a first display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying the icon image using a second display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying the icon image using a third display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying an image related to a first effect (hereinafter referred to as a "first title image");
the display means is capable of displaying an image related to a second effect (hereinafter referred to as a "second title image");
the first title image is an image suggesting the expectation that a player will have an advantage due to a display mode used as a display mode of the first title image,
the second title image is an image that does not suggest the degree of expectation by a display mode used as a display mode of the second title image,
the display means is capable of displaying the first title image using the second display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying the first title image using the third display mode,
When the first title image is displayed using the third display mode, the expectation is higher than when the first title image is displayed using the second display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying the second title image using the second display mode,
the display means does not display the second title image in the third display manner,
The icon image can be displayed before the first title image is displayed, but the icon image is not displayed while the first title image is being displayed.
It is characterized by:

The gaming machine of the present invention can realize a gaming machine with distinctive display means.

1 is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100. 1 is a simplified front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine 100. These are examples of display patterns of a pachinko machine 100, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a normal pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a role ratio/setting display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. 1. (a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game status after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a stepwise transition from the normal stage to the rear stage. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12. This is a diagram showing an example of the stages from entering the sea zone to the sky zone to hitting the jackpot. 15A to 15C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14. This is a diagram showing an example of a case where power is interrupted during the confirmed display of a decorative pattern but is immediately restored. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of event look-ahead prediction in stages. 18A to 18C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 17. 19A to 19C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 18. A diagram showing a modified example of event look-ahead prediction in stages. 1A is a diagram showing a table relating to reel vibration performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table relating to reel vibration performance B. FIG. This is a diagram showing the stages when the reel vibration effect A is performed and when it is not performed. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example step by step, continuing from FIG. 22(3). A figure showing another example in which the reel vibration effect B is performed in stages. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a table relating to button vibration effects. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing an example of a button vibration effect in stages. 1A is a diagram showing a table relating to background effects, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table relating to mini-character effects. A diagram showing an example of mini character presentation in stages. This is a diagram showing an example of the reel vibration effect B and mini character effect in stages. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the amount of operation of the performance button 136, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the amount of operation of the up button 1910 arranged on the operation key unit 190, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the amount of operation of the operation lever 137. A figure showing a table summarizing button-related images related to the performance button 136. FIG. 13 is a table showing lever-related images related to the operating lever 137. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect, the type of development effect, and the expected probability of a jackpot, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a determination table for the introductory effect that starts during a normal reach. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the expectation of a jackpot, (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the cut-in effect performed during SP Reach 1 and the expectation of a jackpot, and (c) is a diagram showing the determination table for the introductory effect started during SP Reach 1. 13A is a diagram showing a gold cut-in image, and (b1) to (b4) are diagrams showing introduction performance pattern 3. 13A is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the expected probability of a jackpot, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a determination table for the introductory effect that starts during SP Reach 2. 1 is a timing chart showing four specific examples (A) to (D). FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 37(A) in stages. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 37(B) in stages. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 37(C) in stages. This figure shows the continuation of Figure 40. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 37(D) in stages. This figure shows the continuation of Figure 42. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 37(A) in stages. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 37(B) in stages. A diagram showing what happens when the front frame door 106 is opened while an operation performance is being performed. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, as seen from the front side (player side). 1 is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine according to this embodiment, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a simplified front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board located on the game board. A diagram explaining the configuration of the variable winning device. FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. These are examples of display patterns on a pachinko machine, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a regular pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether a regular drawing is correct or not, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether a special drawing 1 is correct or not, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether a special drawing 2 is correct or not, (d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the allocation table for determining special drawing 1, (e) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the allocation table for determining special drawing 2, (f) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing miss 1 variation pattern table, and (g) is a diagram explaining the transition of the variation pattern table for special drawing 1. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table during normal times, (a-1) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the miss fluctuation pattern selection table during normal times with reach, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table during time reduction a, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table during time reduction b/c, (d) is a diagram showing an example of the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table during quick time, and (d-1) is a diagram showing an example of the miss fluctuation pattern selection table during quick time with reach. These are flowcharts showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a role ratio/setting display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. 1 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a presentation relating to the decorative pattern changing display centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. A figure showing the continuation of the example of the presentation shown in Figure 61 in stages. A diagram showing an example of the presentation in a jackpot game centered around a decorative pattern display device in stages. A diagram showing in stages an example of a presentation in an electric support state (a time-saving state) centered on a decorative pattern display device. A figure showing the continuation of the example of the presentation shown in Figure 64 in stages. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a performance before and after a power cut in stages. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the presentation before and after a power cut. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the presentation before and after a power cut. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the presentation before and after a power cut. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the presentation before and after a power cut. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of the transition to and end of Sakusaku Time in stages. A diagram showing an example of a presentation involving a decorative pattern change display centered on a decorative pattern display device in stages. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of the effects that occur after the transition to and end of revival time. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the presentation before and after a power cut. This is a diagram showing the stages in which an example of a preview performance is performed in a decorative pattern change display. This is a diagram showing the stages in which an example of a preview performance is performed in a decorative pattern change display. This is a diagram showing the stages in which an example of a preview performance is performed in a decorative pattern change display. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, as seen from the front side (player side). These are diagrams showing gaming machines according to modified examples of the present invention, where (a) shows a casino machine 2000, (b) shows a mobile phone 3000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data realizing the present invention, (d) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data realizing the present invention, (d) shows a home video game machine 5000 having a memory unit for storing electronic data realizing the present invention, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data realizing the present invention. 1 is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine according to this embodiment, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a simplified front view of the game board as seen from the front (player's side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board located on the game board. FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. These are examples of display patterns on a pachinko machine, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a normal pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a table for determining whether a regular drawing is correct or not, (b) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a table for determining whether a special drawing 1 or 2 is correct or not, and (c) is a figure showing an example of the contents of a distribution table for determining a special drawing. These are flowcharts showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a role ratio/setting display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. This is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a presentation centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 81. A figure showing the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 81. A diagram showing the decorative body provided on the second performance movable body 8. This is a diagram showing in stages an example of a presentation in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background when displaying a reach title are related. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of a zone effect in which animation is displayed on the sub LCD device in stages. This is a diagram showing in stages an example of a performance in which a super reach is achieved by relating the display mode of the hold icon to the lighting mode of the star-shaped performance lamp 206. This is a diagram showing in stages an example of a presentation in which the display mode of the pending icon and the display mode of the decorative body provided on the second presentation movable body 8 are related. This is a figure showing in stages an example of a performance similar to the performance in which the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 98 moves. 13A is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a light emission color determination table for the light emitting unit 71, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a lord's kimono color determination table. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side). 1 is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100. 1 is a simplified front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine 100. These are examples of display patterns of a pachinko machine 100, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a normal pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a role ratio/setting display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. 10(a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game status after a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the time-shortened game state ending and transitioning to a non-time-shortened game state shortly before the time-shortened game state ends. 114 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 113 in stages. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example in which the length of the pullback period differs stepwise from the example shown in FIG. 114 . FIG. 116 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of a case where there is no pullback period. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a specified condition is not met, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a specified condition is met. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a list of songs that are selected after a predetermined condition is met at least once. 113(h), which shows an example different from the example shown in FIG. 113 in stages. This figure shows a step-by-step example in which the first reserved icon h21 among the reserved icons of special chart 2 is displayed in gold at the time when the pattern change display of the last special chart that allows the time-saving game state to be maintained has ended. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing an example of operating the operation key unit 190 in a stepwise manner while the music selection display MC is being displayed. This is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game that is started without a specified condition being met. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, as seen from the front side (player side).

Below, using Figures 1 to 47, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 1 to 47 will be used in principle only in the explanation using Figures 1 to 47, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 1 to 47 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 1 to 47.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 1. Fig. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine where the player can win a profit when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a door member that is equipped with a locking function and serves as the base body of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 on the inside. The staff of the store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 104S is provided to detect when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door member that is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely and has a frame shape, with an opening 116 on the inside. The front frame door 106 can also be opened and closed by the staff of the game arcade, and a front frame door sensor 106S is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 form a partitioned space in which the play area 124 is provided. In this embodiment, a lamp is also called a lamp when the light source is an LED.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing an opening lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. In addition, a ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The ball storage tray door 108 includes an upper tray 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and having a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and a ball launch handle 134 for shooting the game balls guided to the launching device 110 into the game area 124 of the game board by the player's operation. 34, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, a button lamp 138 built into the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to emit light, an operation lever 137, a lever lamp 139 built into the operation lever 137 and causes the operation lever 137 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade, a return operation button 142 that issues an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the card unit's status. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is also provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is full of game balls. In addition, an operation key unit 190 is also provided. The operation key unit 190 is provided with a decision button 1930 between the upper button 1910 and the lower button 1920, and this decision button 1930 may function as a second performance button. The upper button 1910 is operated to increase the volume of the speaker 120 or the light intensity of the frame lamp 122, and the lower button 1920 is operated to decrease the volume of the speaker 120 or the light intensity of the frame lamp 122, so that they also function as operation means for adjusting the volume and light intensity.

The effect button 136, operation lever 137, up button 1910, down button 1920 and decision button 1930 shown in FIG. 1 are all in their initial positions before being operated. That is, when the effect button 136, up button 1910, down button 1920 and decision button 1930 are operated (pressed) from a state in which their respective operation surfaces (top surfaces) are in their initial positions, the operation surfaces are lowered. Also, the initial position of the operation lever 137 is vertical, and when operated, it becomes tilted. That is, in terms of the direction of the cross, it can tilt towards you, towards the back, to the right, or to the left. It can also tilt in a diagonal direction between the directions of the cross.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104 and includes a launch rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launch rod 146. This launching device 110 launches the game ball toward the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is being continuously operated by the player, and corresponds to an example of a launching means.

The ball launch handle 134 is provided on the opposite side to the side where the hinge section 112 is provided. Also, the operating lever 137 is provided on the ball launch handle 134 side rather than the performance button 136. When the front frame door 106 is opened, if the operating lever 137 is provided on the hinge section 112, it is likely to interfere with the pachinko machine 100 installed adjacently. However, if the operating lever 137 is provided on the ball launch handle 134 side opposite the hinge section 112, it is less likely to interfere with the pachinko machine 100 installed adjacently.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front, and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. After the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104, the play area 124 can be observed through the opening 116. Note that the specific configuration of the play area 124 is omitted in Figure 1, and its specific configuration is shown in Figure 3.

Figure 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 1.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member and is equipped with a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown). The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a specified position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and by driving the payout motor to rotate it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of a gaming ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4) when a gaming ball is passing, and outputs either a high or low signal when a gaming ball is not passing. The payout sensor is configured so that gaming balls that pass through it pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined awarding condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 awards (pays out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to the awarding condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing for the overall game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing for the presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing for the presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and an error release switch that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and is operated by a gaming store clerk to release an error. The system is provided with a payout board case 172 housing a payout board 170 having a switch 168, a launch board case 176 housing a launch board 174 constituting a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the launch of game balls, a power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 constituting a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric gaming devices and that has a power switch 178 that is operated by a gaming store clerk to turn the power on and off, and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on to output a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 606 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which at least one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The role ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store staff. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the role ratio/setting display 196 is a modularized 7-segment LED board with two digits arranged above and below, and a 7-segment LED board with one digit on the right side. The role ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the role ratio (YH) and the continuous role ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The role ratio/setting display 196 is composed of a single-color LED of, for example, red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors, red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a part of the role ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visible to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the rear surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 3 is a simplified front view of the game board 200. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes called the front-to-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the near side sometimes called the front or front, and the far side sometimes called the back or rear. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-to-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the left hand sometimes called the left and the right hand sometimes called the right when viewed from the front. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes called the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher side sometimes called the top and the lower side sometimes called the bottom.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, a structure can be used in which the left side 200a of the game board 200 as seen from the front is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front (the hinge part 112 side), and the game board 200 is rotated around this as the rotation center while the right side 200b as seen from the front of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to set it in place. Such a structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the main body 201. If a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game so that the game cannot continue) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor, such as a magnetic sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 is defined in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

The area of the game board 200 other than the game area 124 may be called a non-game area. The game area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished from each other by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the launch strength of the game ball is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 may be called a flow-down area because the game ball flows down during play, and the non-game area may be called a non-flow-down area because the game ball does not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire game area 124 may be called a flow-down area, but an area through which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may be called a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area 124. Below the play area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol reserve lamp 216, a first special symbol reserve lamp 218, and a second special symbol reserve lamp 220 are disposed. Note that, hereinafter, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative patterns and various displays used for performance, and in this embodiment is configured with a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a performance display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display different decorative patterns, and the performance display area 208d displays an image used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are configured to display various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying general maps, and in this embodiment is configured with a 7-segment LED. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are configured with a 7-segment LED.

The regular symbol reserved lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved regular symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular symbol variable games. The first special symbol reserved lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. The second special symbol reserved lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games.

There are also a time-saving lamp TL, a right-hit indicator lamp RL, and a high-probability lamp HL. The time-saving lamp TL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, in which the normal map's variable display time is shortened and the wing member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chute), which will be described later, is likely to open for a long time. The right-hit indicator lamp RL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state, in which the player can benefit by hitting the right. The high-probability lamp HL is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high-probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or that it will become a high-probability state.

Around the periphery of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are arranged predetermined ball entrance openings, such as general winning openings 226a, 226b, a general symbol start opening 228, a first special symbol start opening 230, a second special symbol start opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234.

One or more general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on each of the left and right sides of the play area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the play area 124 is referred to as the general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the play area 124 is referred to as the general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning entry into the general winning opening 226a, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls) are discharged as prize balls to the upper tray 126. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning entry into the general winning opening 226b, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 1 ball) are discharged as prize balls to the upper tray 126. The balls discharged into the upper tray 126 can be freely removed by the player, and these configurations allow prize balls to be paid out to the player based on the winning. In this embodiment, the game balls that enter the general winning opening 226a and the game balls that enter the general winning opening 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. In addition, if multiple general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the play area 124, the ball paths that guide the game balls that have entered may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor, or each may be detected by a different ball detection sensor. In addition, if multiple general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the play area 124, the ball paths that guide the game balls that have entered may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor, or each may be detected by a different ball detection sensor. Note that the balls that enter the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the play island side.

The normal map start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or through chucker, which is used to determine whether or not the ball has passed through a specified area of the play area 124, and in this embodiment, one is provided on the right side of the play board 200. Unlike balls that enter the general winning ports 226a and 226b, balls that pass through the normal map start port 228 are not discharged to the play island side. When a specified ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable play using the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special chart start hole 230 is arranged at the bottom center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special chart start hole 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (for example, three balls) as prize balls into the upper tray 126, and a special chart variable game is started by the first special chart display device 212. The ball that entered the first special chart start hole 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special chart start hole 230, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first special chart start hole 230 when hitting from the right. In this embodiment, the specification is such that the variable display of special chart 2 is started in priority to special chart 1 (a pachinko machine with such a specification may be called a "special chart 2 priority variable machine").

The second special chart start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chute) and is located below the first special chart start port 230. It has a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible for a ball to enter the normal chart variable game. When a player wins the game and the normal chart display device 210 displays a winning symbol, the wing member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special chart start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (e.g., three balls) into the upper tray 126 as prize balls, and the special chart variable game is started by the second special chart display device 214. The ball that enters the second special chart start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal starting hole 228 (due to the game pins not shown), it is difficult for a game ball to enter the normal starting hole 228 when hitting from the left. Therefore, as a rule, it is not possible to win the normal variable game during left hitting, and therefore the blade member 232a does not open or close as a rule. On the other hand, when hitting from the right, it is possible to expect a game ball to enter the normal starting hole 228, and therefore the blade member 232a may open or close when the game is won in the normal variable game. In other words, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning the second special starting hole 232 during left hitting, but there is a possibility of winning the second special starting hole 232 during right hitting.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacca, and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 is equipped with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed freely. When the door member 234a is closed, balls cannot enter the winning opening. When the player wins the special variable game and the special display device displays a big winning pattern, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (e.g., opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 times, 3 times, or 10 times). When a ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15 balls) are discharged as prize balls into the upper tray 126.

In this embodiment, the variable winning port 234 and the general winning port 226b are integrally formed with the ball entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V-shutter VS and a V-passing switch VC. The V-passing switch VC opens upward, allowing game balls to pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects game balls passing through. The V-shutter VS is disposed above the V-passing switch VC and moves forward and backward by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by the drive circuit 334. When the V-shutter VS is in an advanced state (corresponding to a closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V-passing switch VC, and when the V-shutter VS is in a retreated state (corresponding to an open state), the game ball can pass through the V-passing switch VC. A gaming ball that enters the variable winning opening 234 and passes through a ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided to the front, then rolls to the V shutter VS and may pass through the V passing switch VC, or may not be able to pass through and be guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100. The V passing switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 (see FIG. 4), and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the V passing switch VC, it determines that a V winning has occurred.

In this embodiment, the V shutter VS remains closed (advanced) from the start of the jackpot game until a specific round (for example, the final round), and in the specific round the V shutter VS opens (moves backwards), making it possible to win a V prize. If a V prize can be won, the control state transitions to a special prize high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and if a V prize cannot be won, the control state remains in a special prize low probability state after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the transition to the special prize high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V pass switch VS.

In addition, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill and multiple play nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, an outlet 240 is provided to guide balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharge them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and shoots the balls through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 by the launch rod and launch hammer into the play area 124. Then, the balls that reach the top of the play area 124 flow downward while changing their direction of travel by the ball direction changing member 236 and the play nails, etc., and either win in the winning hole (general winning hole 226a, 226b, variable winning hole 234) or the starting hole (first special starting hole 230, second special starting hole 232), or reach the out hole 240 without winning in any winning hole or starting hole, or only passing through the normal starting hole 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104. The out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have won in various winning ports) are received by this discharged ball receiving port and are configured to be discharged outside the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage.

In addition, an upper performance device 2 is disposed at the top of the play area 124, a lower performance device 3 is disposed at the bottom, and side performance devices 4 are disposed on the left and right sides. In this embodiment, these performance devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 4. This figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generating circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit has two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Additionally, the random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generating circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a bottom tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, such as the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214, and a display control circuit 325 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, such as the normal pattern display device 210. A drive circuit 326 for controlling the display, a drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status display units 328 (for example, the normal reserve lamp 216, the special reserve lamp 218, the special reserve lamp 220, the high probability lamp, etc.), and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special reserve opening 232 as a normal electric role, a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric role, and a drive means for driving the V shutter VS are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generating circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generating circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern start hole 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. The random number generation circuit 318 receives this signal and latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special pattern start hole 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the first special pattern start hole 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special pattern start hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special pattern start hole 232 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special pattern start hole 232.

In addition, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. When the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also includes a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and number of times, and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. The ROM 406 may also be configured to be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game frame lamp 452, and controls the lighting by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. The game frame lamp 452 also includes the button lamp 138 and lever lamp 139 shown in FIG. 1.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the various (upper, lower, and side) performance devices 2-4, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs to the basic circuit 402 detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the performance devices 2-4, a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190, and a lever sensor 427 that detects the operation of the operation lever 137.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and number of times, and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 506 is connected to the basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. In this embodiment, a memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when the power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use a RAM whose stored information becomes volatile when the power is cut off.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and the like to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 106S that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. When the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open, these sensors detect this and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch hammer 148, and the ball feeder 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that indicates whether to allow or stop launch, and a control signal output by a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630, but power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device via another power supply path.

Next, using Figures 5 (a) to (d), we will explain the types of special and regular symbols that are displayed by the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100.

Special chart 1 variable play starts on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 start port 230, and special chart 2 variable play starts on the condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 start port 232. When special chart 1 variable play starts, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play) in which all seven segments are lit up and the central segment is lit up repeatedly. Also, when special chart 2 variable play starts, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play) in which all seven segments are lit up and the central segment is lit up repeatedly. Then, when the change time determined before the start of the change of special chart 1 has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 displays the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 in a stopped state, and when the change time determined before the start of the change of special chart 2 has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 displays the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2 in a stopped state. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the change display of the special chart. This change display of the special chart may be performed multiple times in succession.

Figure 5(a) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of special pattern 1. Three types of special patterns, "special pattern a" to "special pattern c", are shown in this Figure 5(a). In Figure 5(a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that will be turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments that will be turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot patterns ("Special pattern a" and "Special pattern b") are prepared as the stopping pattern form of the special pattern 1. "Special pattern a" is a 3 round (R) special jackpot pattern that is expected to acquire a special jackpot, and "Special pattern b" is a 3R normal jackpot pattern with no chance of acquiring a special jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 in this embodiment, acquiring a special jackpot (transition to a special pattern high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V-pass switch VS. When the special pattern a is displayed as stopped on the first special pattern display device 212, and the game enters the 3rd round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, the V-shutter VS opens (retracts), allowing the game ball to pass through the V-pass switch VS. If the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS (if a V-winning is obtained), the control state transitions to the special chart high probability state after the big win game ends, and the transitioned special chart high probability state is maintained for 120 times of special chart pattern variation display after the big win game ends. In this embodiment, if the V-shutter VS opens, there is enough time to maintain the open state, and the probability of the game ball passing through the V-pass switch VS is high, so the "special chart a" can be said to be a big win that is expected to win a probability change (the same applies to the "special chart A" and "special chart B" described later). On the other hand, if the special chart b is stopped and displayed on the first special chart display device 212, the V-shutter VS will not open even if the game enters the third round, which is the final round of the big win game, and the game ball will not pass through the V-pass switch VS (no V-winning is obtained), and the control state remains in the special chart low probability state after the big win game ends. In this way, a V win was required to transition to the special chart high probability state, but the transition to the normal chart high probability state begins on the condition that the jackpot game ends. In other words, if you hit a jackpot, you transition to the normal chart high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and the normal chart high probability state you transition to is maintained until the special chart pattern change display is performed 120 times in the case of special chart a, or 50 times in the case of special chart b, after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of losing pattern ("Special pattern c") is prepared as the stopping pattern mode of Special pattern 1.

Figure 5(b) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of special chart 2. Four types of special charts, "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart D", are shown in this Figure 5(b), of which two types of special charts are jackpot patterns ("Special Chart A" and "Special Chart B"). "Special Chart A" is a 10R sure-win jackpot pattern that is expected to result in a sure-win, and "Special Chart B" is a 2R sure-win jackpot pattern that is expected to result in a sure-win. In other words, if special chart A wins a V in the 10th round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state will transition to a special chart high probability state or a normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for the 120 times the special chart pattern change display has been performed since the jackpot game ended. If special chart B wins a V in the second round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state will transition from special chart high probability state to regular chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained until the special chart pattern change display is performed 120 times after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of losing patterns ("Special Pattern C" and "Special Pattern D") are prepared as the stopping pattern mode of Special Pattern 2. "Special Pattern C" is a general losing pattern like "Special Pattern c", but "Special Pattern D" is a special pattern called a time-saving pattern, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decision of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special chart variable play is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the jackpot pattern to be stopped is decided by drawing a software random number. In addition, in the special chart 2 variable play for a specific period, the decision of whether or not the "sudden time-saving" has been won is made by drawing a hardware random number, and if the "sudden time-saving" has been won, the "time-saving pattern" is stopped and displayed on the second special chart display device 214. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, after the end of the jackpot play, the game transitions to a normal chart high probability state. The normal chart high probability state is called a time-saving play state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving play state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of a non-time-saving play state, for example by shortening the time from the end of a jackpot in the special chart variable play to the start of the next jackpot. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to normal figures, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to special figures or a state related to normal figures and special figures. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, the state is a time-saving game state and a normal figure high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, it is easier to win the normal figure variable game (normal figure probability change) than in the normal figure low probability state. For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal figure low probability state (non-time-saving game state), while it increases to 99/100 in the normal figure high probability state (time-saving game state). Also, the time-saving game state has a shorter fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game than the non-time-saving game state (normal figure short fluctuation). For example, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game, which is 10 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the opening time of the wing member 232a of the special chart 2 starting hole 232 is likely to be longer in one opening than in the non-time-saving game state (extension of the electric chute opening period). For example, the electric chute opening period of 0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state is extended to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, the wing member 232a is likely to open more than in the non-time-saving game state (increase in the number of electric chute openings). For example, the wing member 232a that opens only once in the non-time-saving game state for one winning entry into the normal chart starting hole 228 opens twice in the time-saving game state (open for 2 seconds, close for 1 second, and open again for 2 seconds). The extension of the electric chute opening period and the increase in the number of electric chute openings increase the probability of the ball entering the special chart 2 starting hole 232. The time-saving flag is set to off during a jackpot game. Therefore, the non-time-saving game state is maintained during a jackpot game. This is because, particularly during jackpot play, if game balls are picked up by an electric chute with a small number of winning balls, and the number of game balls entering the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, the player may suffer a disadvantage. Note that in this embodiment, the term "non-time-saving play state" is used to exclude jackpot play.

In this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the following are performed: normal chance, normal short, electric chute open period extension, and electric chute open count increase. However, if at least one of these is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the time-saving game state may be set. In this case, the one that is executed among the normal chance, normal short, electric chute open period extension, and electric chute open count increase may be changed in each time-saving game state of the a time-saving, b time-saving, and c time-saving described later. For example, in the a time-saving, normal chance, normal short, electric chute open period extension, and electric chute open count increase are all performed, but in the b time-saving and c time-saving, one or two of the normal chance, normal short, electric chute open period extension, and electric chute open count increase may be executed. Alternatively, if either one of the electric chute open period extension or electric chute open count increase, which increases the probability of the ball entering the special chute 2 starting hole 232, is performed, the time-saving game state may be set. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special chart 2 starting hole 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special chart 2 starting hole 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter and an easy-to-win state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter. The entrance of this special chart 2 starting hole 232 is in an easy-to-win state for a longer period of time in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. As described above, in this embodiment, when the "special chart a", "special chart A" and "special chart B" are stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (normal chart high probability state) is maintained until the special chart is displayed 120 times after the end of the big win game, and the non-time-saving game state (normal chart low probability state) is displayed at the 121st time. In addition, when the "special symbol b" is displayed, the time-saving game state (normal symbol high probability state) is maintained until the special symbol is displayed 50 times after the end of the jackpot game, and the non-time-saving game state (normal symbol low probability state) is entered at the 51st time. In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern of all the special symbols is set to switch to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, but a jackpot pattern (non-time-saving jackpot pattern) that does not switch to the time-saving game state may be provided, and if a jackpot is won with a non-time-saving jackpot pattern, the time-saving game state may not be switched to after the jackpot game ends, and the non-time-saving game state may remain. In addition to the jackpot pattern, a small jackpot pattern may be prepared, and in the small jackpot game, the door member 234a of the variable winning hole 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 234a maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In addition, when the door member 234a is opened for a small win, for example, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter during the first opening, or if a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the door will not open a second time or thereafter. During a small win, the game transitions to a special game low probability/normal game low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, the control state returns to the state before the small win game started.

Figure 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 13 types of decorative patterns in this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 13". On the condition that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting hole 230 or the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, that is, the first starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting hole 230, or the second starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, a "decorative pattern variable display" is performed in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each of the pattern display areas of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. In other words, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays decorative patterns in a variable manner, separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, the stop pattern pattern, which is a combination of decorative patterns, is displayed in a static state.

When an ordinary jackpot (a 3R ordinary jackpot on "Special Chart B") is to be announced, the same numbered decorative pattern is positioned in the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and a combination of decorative patterns with decoration 13 positioned therein (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2") is displayed in a static manner in the center pattern display area 208b. On the other hand, when an extraordinary jackpot (a 3R extraordinary jackpot on "Special Chart A", a 10R extraordinary jackpot on "Special Chart A", or a 2R extraordinary jackpot on "Special Chart B") is to be announced, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed in a static manner in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Furthermore, when reporting a losing symbol such as "Special C" or "Special C," a combination of decorative symbols other than those described above (for example, scattered symbols) is displayed in a static manner in the symbol display areas 208a-208c. Furthermore, when reporting a sudden win in the time-saving feature, three "Decoration 11" symbols are displayed in a row, rather than a combination of "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 10."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a zone effect may be executed as one of the effects. The zone effect is a look-ahead preview effect in which the background displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to a background corresponding to the zone. There are multiple types of timing for starting the execution of the zone effect, and it may start when the decorative symbols start to change. If an empty zone effect starts when the decorative symbols start to change, three "decorations 12" are displayed in a row at the timing when the previous decorative symbol change display ends. Hereinafter, the "decorations 12" may be referred to as zone entry symbols. Note that the effect in which three zone entry symbols are displayed in a row may also be considered as a zone effect. In other words, in this case, the execution timing of the zone effect starts when three zone entry symbols are displayed in a row.

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" to the display of the stopped pattern mode of the decorative pattern may be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display. The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 5(d) shows an example of the stop pattern mode of the normal map. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes for the normal map: "Normal Map A" which is a winning pattern, and "Normal Map B" which is a losing pattern. Based on the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detecting that the ball has passed through the normal map start hole 228, the normal map display device 210 performs a "normal map variable display" (normal map variable play) in which all seven segments are lit and the central segment is lit repeatedly. Then, after the variable time has elapsed, one of the patterns "Normal Map A" which is a winning pattern and "Normal Map B" which is a losing pattern is stopped and displayed. In this Figure 5(d), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map change display" to the stop display of the regular map's stopping pattern state may be referred to as the regular map change display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Note that Fig. 6 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main process.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special random number value, a special round determination random number value, a special electric support determination random number value, and a special pattern determination random number. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. The RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special numbers, the special winning random number value, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special numbers may be referred to as the reserved number storage area of special numbers. The RAM 308 also has a start information storage area for special numbers that is divided into areas of the maximum number (four in this example) that can be reserved for the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), and a random number storage area for normal numbers. In the start information storage area for special numbers, as described below, multiple types of start information are stored in one set, one set per area in the order of winning (order of reservation).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, an interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial value are set to WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value to WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the low voltage signal is monitored to see if it is on, i.e., if the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is on (if the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect a power cutoff), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a numerical value that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below is set in the timer circuit 312, a clear signal is output from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400), and settings are made to allow writing to the RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before the power was cut off (power failure) is to be restored, and if the state before the power failure is not to be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute the initialization process.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure will be restored (step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 by a store employee or the like (step S113). In other words, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115), and if it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the role ratio/setting display 196 flashes with "1" indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor is showing "6", it returns to "1". In this embodiment, it is possible to select at least one of settings 1 to 6, which have different jackpot probabilities, and the setting is confirmed by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the role ratio/setting display 196, but it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by audio output, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, six settings are provided, from setting 1 to 6, but other than six settings are possible, or the settings may not be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was cut off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

In addition, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process in step S117.

In step S119, an initialization process is performed to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating a suspend, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (e.g., all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result is a specific value (e.g., 0) or not (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), an initialization process is performed to set the pachinko machine 100 to an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In this embodiment, even if initialization is performed, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained. Furthermore, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command described below, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S121, after the interrupt prohibition setting is performed, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and the stack pointer is reset (main setting). In addition, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure are read out and reset in each register, and then interrupt permission is set. After that, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the stack pointer and registers after resetting, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was lost. That is, the process is resumed from the next command after the command (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before the power failure and before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later). In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command indicates that the state has been restored to when the power was turned off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. The figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4, including various ball detection sensors, are input through the input port of I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, and are stored in a signal status storage area partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Taking the detection signals of the ball detection sensors as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times ago (about 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. In addition, the detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the current detection signal storage area described above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in each of the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and it is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which is repeatedly started at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is started several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, the above-mentioned step S205 checks the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. In other words, when the game ball starts to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time. In this embodiment, taking into consideration the erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after the absence of a detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before last, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before last, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the first special starting hole 230, and the second special starting hole 232, or passed through the general starting hole 228. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been won in these winning holes 234, 226 and these starting holes 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of a ball into the first special pattern start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first special pattern start port 230, that is, that a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and the subsequent processing associated with the winning into the first special pattern start port 230 is performed. However, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the winning into the first special pattern start port 230 is not performed and the processing branch is made to the subsequent processing. In addition, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning judgment clear pattern information (information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before last, there is no detection signal last time, and there is no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a winning has occurred once, it is not determined that a winning has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning judgment clear pattern information, and if it matches the winning judgment clear pattern information, it is determined whether it matches the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information from the next time onwards.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes and basic random number update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value performed in step S121 is updated, and then the random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value and the special random number value used by the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Also, if it is determined that the random number counter has gone around once as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and set in the memory area of the random number counter. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, which varies in the range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and set in the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round, an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a special number has completed its round is provided in RAM 308.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the random number counter for generating random numbers for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including a normal pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the normal pattern display device 210, a special pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214, and timers for timing a specified winning performance time, a specified opening time, a specified closing time, a specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a winning slot counter update process is performed. In this winning slot counter update process, when a win occurs in winning slots 234, 226 or starting slots 230, 232, the value of the prize ball count memory area provided for each winning slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

In addition, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. In the winning entry acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area in the start information storage section of RAM 308 according to the winning order (reserved order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of one byte, with strobe information in bit 7 (when on, indicates that data is being set), power-on information in bit 6 (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), the current processing type for encryption in bits 4-5 (0-3), and the payout request count after encryption processing in bits 0-3.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process is one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process in the middle of the normal map change display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a change display of the normal map (normal map change play).

In addition, in the normal pattern status update process at the timing when the normal pattern change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the normal pattern display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that the winning pattern is displayed, and if the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LED constituting the normal pattern display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that the losing pattern is displayed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal pattern status update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-mentioned turning on and off drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal pattern is stopped. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a confirmed display of either the winning pattern (normal pattern A shown in FIG. 5(d)) or the losing pattern (normal pattern B shown in FIG. 5(d)). Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of a timer for managing the normal symbol stop time provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Also, if the result of the normal map variable play is a win, the normal map win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal map win flag is on, in the normal map status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to normal map operation, and a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a of the second special map start port 232 to keep the blade member 232a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 2 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade open time changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a to keep the blade member 232a in a closed state for a specified closed period (e.g., 500 ms), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the timer for managing the blade closed time provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that starts when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the wing closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process at the end of the above-mentioned specified stop display period (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a lottery process related to the normal map is performed. In this lottery process, when the normal map variable play and the second special map start port 232 are not open/closed (the normal map state is not in operation), and the number of reserved normal map variable plays is one or more, a random number lottery based on the normal map winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area is used to determine whether the result of the normal map variable play is a win or a loss, and if it is a win, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If it is a loss, the win flag is set to OFF. Note that regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as a normal map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected from among multiple variable times based on the obtained normal map timer random number value, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. The number of reserved regular variable games is stored in a reserved regular number storage area in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved regular variable games minus 1 is stored in this reserved regular number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the special pattern pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the special pattern pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special patterns 1 and 2, pre-determines the stop pattern and the change time before the hit/miss determination process, and stores the pre-determination result (special pattern pre-reading result) in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2, but first, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, in the special chart 2 state update process during the special chart 2 variable display (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special chart display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off repeatedly. By performing this control, the second special chart display device 214 performs the variable display of special chart 2 (special chart 2 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a miss flag, a special chart probability change flag, and a normal chart probability change flag are prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop pattern in the special chart 2 related lottery process described later. In the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the special chart 2 change display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on, the special chart A shown in FIG. 5 (b) is displayed, when the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special chart B is displayed, when the miss flag is on, the special chart C is displayed, and when the normal chart probability change flag is on, the special chart D is displayed, and a setting is made in the setting area of the RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 2 is being stopped. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 displays one of the following symbols: a 10R sure-win symbol (special symbol A), a 2R sure-win symbol (special symbol B), a miss symbol (special symbol C), or a time-saving symbol (special symbol D).

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of special chart 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special chart 2 state update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 2 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for a specified winning presentation period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special drawing 2 state update process that starts when the specified winning performance period ends (when the value of the special drawing 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 to keep the door member 234a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected entering the variable winning opening 234), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 to keep the door member 234a in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Furthermore, in the special chart 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with probability change (10 rounds for special chart A, 2 rounds for special chart B), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in an open state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the V shutter VS for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the V shutter opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. Then, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in a closed state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the V shutter VS. Also, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special chart probability change flag is turned on. In addition, to wait for the period during which an image is displayed informing the player that the game ball has passed through the V-pass switch VC and has acquired a special chance (the V-winning performance period (e.g., 3 seconds)), information indicating the V-winning performance period is set in the memory area of the timer for managing the special chart 2 waiting time provided in RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V-winning performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC, the special chart probability change flag is not turned on.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (9 rounds or 1 round excluding the first time), and in the special chart 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the control ends, information indicating the effect waiting period is set in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set it to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 has ended.

In addition, if the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, the number of time-saving times (120 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned ON. In the case where the 2R jackpot flag is set to ON, the number of time-saving times (120 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned ON. In the case where the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of time-saving times (950 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned ON.

The time-saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine is in a state advantageous to the player, in order to shorten the time between the end of a jackpot in the special jackpot variation game and the start of the next jackpot. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the game is in a normal jackpot high probability state (normal jackpot probability change). In the normal jackpot high probability state, the probability of winning in the normal jackpot variation game is higher than in the normal jackpot low probability state. Also, in the normal jackpot high probability state, the variation time of the normal jackpot variation game is shorter than in the normal jackpot low probability state (normal jackpot short variation). Furthermore, in the normal jackpot high probability state, the opening time of the pair of wing members 232a of the special 2 starting hole 232 in one opening is more likely to be longer than in the normal jackpot low probability state (electric chute open extension). In addition, in the normal jackpot high probability state, the pair of wing members 232a are more likely to open more than in the normal jackpot low probability state. The state in which any of these normal jackpot probability change, normal jackpot short variation, and electric chute open extension is set is called the electric support state (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

As mentioned above, the time-saving flag is set to off during a jackpot (special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during a jackpot. This is to solve the problem that if the normal high probability state is in place during a jackpot, many game balls will enter the special game 2 start port 232 before a certain number of game balls enter the variable winning port 234 during the jackpot, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot and increasing the risk of gambling.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end performance setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the special chart 2 status update process, which starts when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to special chart 2 not in operation.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets special chart 2 not operating in the setting area of RAM 308. If special chart 2 is not operating, the special chart 2 status update process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 1.

For example, in the special chart 1 state update process during the special chart 1 variable display (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LED that constitutes the first special chart display device 212. By performing this control, the first special chart display device 212 performs special chart 1 variable display (special chart 1 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a miss flag are prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop pattern in the special chart 1 related lottery process described later. In the special chart 1 state update process that starts when the special chart 1 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on, the special chart a shown in FIG. 5 (a) is displayed, when the 3R jackpot flag B is on, the special chart b is displayed, and when the miss flag is on, the special chart c is displayed. The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special chart 1 is being stopped. By performing this control, the first special symbol display device 212 displays one of the following symbols: a 3R guaranteed jackpot symbol (special symbol a), a 3R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol b), or a losing symbol (special symbol c).

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of special chart 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 1 variable play is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result becomes 0 from 1, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and special pattern 1 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 1 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 1 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special chart 1 state update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 1 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for a specified winning presentation period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special drawing 1 state update process that starts when the specified winning performance period ends (when the value of the special drawing 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 to keep the door member 234a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected entering the variable winning opening 234), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 1 state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the door open time changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 to keep the door member 234a in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the timer for managing the door closed time provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening closure setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Furthermore, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to on, in the special chart 1 state update process in the final round (3rd round), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in an open state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the V shutter VS for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the V shutter opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. Then, in the special chart 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in a closed state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the V shutter VS. Also, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special chart probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, to wait for the period during which an image is displayed informing the player that the game ball has passed through the V-pass switch VC and has acquired a special chance (the V-winning performance period (e.g., 3 seconds)), information indicating the V-winning performance period is set in the memory area of the timer for managing the special game 1 waiting time provided in RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V-winning performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC, the special game probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

In addition, in the special chart 1 state update process, which starts when the door member opening/closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first time) and ends, information indicating the effect waiting period is set in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to set the device to wait for a predetermined end effect period (for example, three seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is ending. In addition, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set on, the time-saving count (120 times) is set in the time-saving count memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the jackpot game ends, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Even if the 3R jackpot flag B is set on, the time-saving count (50 times) is set in the time-saving count memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the jackpot game ends, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. In addition, in the special chart 1 state update process, the normal chart probability fluctuation flag is not set on.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end performance setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the special chart 1 status update process that starts when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to special chart 1 not in operation.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 1 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 1 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 1 stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 1 not operating in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special chart 1 status update process when the special chart 1 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S229.

After the special chart status update process in steps S225 and S227 is completed, the special chart-related lottery process is performed for each of special charts 1 and 2. Here too, the special chart-related lottery process for special chart 2 (special chart 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery process for special chart 1 (special chart 1 related lottery process) is performed (step S231). The special chart 2 related lottery process is executed using the first special chart 2 winning random number value and the special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value storage area, with the start conditions being that no variable play for special charts 1 and 2 is being performed, both the states of special charts 1 and 2 are inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable plays is 1 or more. The lottery process related to special chart 1 is executed using the first special chart 1 winning random number value and the special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that variable play of special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, the status of both special chart 1 and special chart 2 is inactive, and the number of reserved variable play of special chart 1 is 1 or more.

As for these special chart-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special chart 2-related lottery process before the special chart 1-related lottery process, so that even if the start conditions for the special chart 2 variable game and the start conditions for the special chart 1 variable game are met at the same time, the special chart 2 variable game will be variable first, so the special chart 1 variable game will not start variable. Also, if the number of reserved numbers for the special chart 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process and variable game for the reserved special chart 1 variable game will not be performed. Also, the notification of the result of the judgment of whether or not the special chart variable game is a win by the decorative pattern display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special chart 2 start port 232 is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special chart 1 start port 230. In this example, a highly advantageous special pattern variable game (in this example, special pattern 2 variable game) is prioritized over a less advantageous special pattern variable game (in this example, special pattern 1 variable game). This may make it easier to create differences in the advantageous degrees of the game states.

In the case of the special chart 2 related lottery processing of step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (oldest stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number storage area, and determines whether it is a big win or a miss (win/lose judgment) using the win/lose judgment table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 winning random number in the acquired special chart 2 start information. Also, even if the special chart 1 is judged to be a win or a miss, it is determined to be a big win or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 is displayed after the change, using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose judgment result. Next, the main control unit 300 uses various tables stored in the ROM 306 to determine the variable display time (timer number) of the special chart 2 based on, for example, the result of the winning/losing judgment, the stopped pattern, the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time of the winning/losing judgment, the acquired random number value for determining the special chart variable time, etc.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229) described above, the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special chart 2 priority variation was given as an example in which the highly advantageous special chart 2 variation game is started in preference to the less advantageous special chart 1 variation game, and the reserved special chart 2 is consumed in preference to the reserved special chart 1. However, the special chart 1 priority variation may be a special chart 1 priority variation in which the less advantageous special chart 1 variation game is started in preference to the more advantageous special chart 2 variation game, and the reserved special chart 1 is consumed in preference to the reserved special chart 2. Also, the start gate winning order variation may be a variation in which the special chart variation games related to the reserved special charts 1 and 2 are started in the order of the winning of the start gate, without giving priority to either the highly advantageous special chart 2 variation game or the less advantageous special chart 1 variation game. In the start gate winning order variation, the upper limit of the reserved number is eight regardless of the special chart 1 and the special chart 2, so that the upper limit of the reserved number can be increased compared to the priority variation in which the upper limit of the reserved number is four in each of the special charts 1 and 2.

In the above explanation, the lottery process or variable play for the reservation of one special chart is not performed depending on the state of the other special chart, but this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special chart state update process and special chart related lottery process may be performed independently for special chart 1 and special chart 2, respectively, to simultaneously change multiple special charts. In addition, when multiple special charts are changed simultaneously in this manner, multiple areas for displaying the lottery results of each special chart may be provided in the decorative pattern display device 208, or multiple decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the lottery results of each special chart, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of multiple special charts. In addition, when changes are being made regarding multiple special charts at the same time, the lottery result of the special chart that stopped changing first may affect the lottery result of the special chart that stops changing later.

In step S233, which is the next step after step S231, a command setting and sending process is performed. In this command setting and sending process, various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this example form, information that can identify the type of command, such as a basic command, a pattern change start command, a pattern change stop command, a winning performance start command, an end performance start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a look-ahead result information command, and a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a pattern change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, loss flags, and timer numbers selected in the special pattern related lottery process, and if the command type is a pattern change stop (rotation stop) command, it includes various jackpot flags and loss flag values, and if the command type is a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the number of jackpot rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a win in the special pattern 1 start port 230, whether or not there is a win in the special pattern 2 start port 232, whether or not there is a win in the variable win port 234, etc. In the case of a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, the look-ahead number stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop pattern stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned spin start setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., is set in the command data.In the above-mentioned spin stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, loss flags, etc., stored in RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning performance setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the performance control information stored in RAM 308 to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning performance period, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned end performance setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the performance control information stored in RAM 308 to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the performance waiting period, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned big prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the number of big win rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the process of sending the setting to close the big prize opening described above, information indicating the number of big prize rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in step S233, a general command special chart reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special chart reservation increase process, special chart identification information (information indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 are set in the command data.

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which is the next step after step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, the next step after step S235, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error. If a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the display data to be output to the normal display unit 210, the first special display unit 212, the second special display unit 214, the various status display unit 328, etc. via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330 by driving various solenoids 332 is set to the output port of the I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239, which is the next step after step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not. If the low voltage signal is on (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 6. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as return data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the HALT state is entered.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 8 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 8 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial settings of the input/output ports and the initialization process of the memory area in the RAM 408 are performed, etc.

In step S303, which is the next step after step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, which is the next step after step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which is the next step after step S307, a performance control process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, a process such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process for the performance data is performed.

In step S311, which is the next step after step S309, a button/lever control process is performed. In the button/lever control process, the operation of the operation means such as the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 according to the detection result.

In step S313, which is the next step after step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which is the next step after step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S317, which is the step following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 includes a command for each of the performance devices 2 to 4, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 8 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Figure 8 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 9 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 9 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial settings of the input/output ports and the initialization process of the memory area in the RAM (not shown) are performed, etc.

In step S403, which is the next step after step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, which is the next step after step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which is the next step after step S407, a performance control process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S407, a process is performed in which the performance data corresponding to this command (performance data from the decorative pattern display device 208) is read from a ROM (not shown), and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process is performed on the performance data.

In step S411, which is the next step after step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

Figure 9 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM.

Figure 9 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle in response to this timer interrupt. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which is the next step after step S441, other processing such as updating the random number value for presentation is performed.

Figure 9 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-controller main process. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which is the next step after step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the next step after step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the role ratio/setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to Figure 10. Here, Figure 10(A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the role ratio/setting display 196, and Figure 10(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198.

As described above, the reel ratio/setting display 196 is configured with a reel ratio monitor and a setting monitor, where the reel ratio monitor displays the continuous reel ratio (RY) and the reel ratio (YH), and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

The consecutive feature ratio here refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature when the feature is activated consecutively (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the variable winning opening 234 opening and winning during a jackpot game). It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. The feature ratio also refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the second special chart start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234 opening and winning).

In this embodiment, if the consecutive feature ratio is calculated and it is determined that the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit seven-segment LED that displays the consecutive feature ratio is made to flash, and then a security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may also be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. This may allow the type application test of the gaming machine to be carried out smoothly.

In addition, if the calculated ratio of the reels is judged to be greater than 70%, the two-digit seven-segment LED that displays the ratio of the reels is caused to flash, and then a security signal (YH) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the ratio of the reels exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In this embodiment, when the continuous feature ratio or feature ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, a specific 7-segment LED is made to blink, but for example, the light color may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 10(B), eight dip switches are provided on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch is read and the probability of the effects appearing can be changed. For example, it is possible to set the frequency with which setting suggestions are executed, the rate at which advance notices appear, the rate at which effects modes are entered, etc.

Next, we will explain the gameplay of the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1, although some of this will overlap with what has been explained so far.

Figure 11 (a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game status after a jackpot.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/320, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/315, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/90. When setting 3 is selected, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/310, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/305, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/87. When setting 5 is selected, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/300, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/85. When setting 6 is selected, the probability of winning with the special low probability is 1/295, and the probability of winning with the special high probability is 1/84. The higher the setting number, the easier it is to win a jackpot.

In addition, the probability of winning a regular draw when the regular draw probability is low is 1/100, while the probability of winning a regular draw when the regular draw probability is high is 99/100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11 (a), in Special Drawing 1, the breakdown between Special Drawing A and Special Drawing B is equal (50% each), and in Special Drawing 2, the breakdown between Special Drawing A and Special Drawing B is 7:3.

In addition, in special chart a of special chart 1, the V shutter VS opens only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. If the game ball passes through this V passing switch VC (when the special chart operating area is ON), a special chart is activated, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a special chart high probability normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for 120 times of the special chart pattern change display. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC (when the special chart operating area is OFF), the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for 120 times of the special chart pattern change display.

In special chart b of special chart 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for the period during which the special chart pattern change display is performed 50 times.

In special chart A of special chart 2, the V shutter VS opens only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V pass switch VC. In special chart B, the V shutter VS opens only in the 2nd round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V pass switch VC. Whether it is special chart A or special chart B, if the game ball passes through the V pass switch VC (when the special chart operation area is ON), the game state after the big win game ends will be a special chart high probability normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for 120 times of special chart pattern change display. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V pass switch VC (when the special chart operation area is OFF), the game state after the big win game ends will be a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for 120 times of special chart pattern change display.

After the special high probability/normal high probability state or the special low probability/normal high probability state has been maintained a certain number of times, it will transition to the normal state (special low probability/normal low probability state). The time reduction that starts after a jackpot is called time reduction A.

Figure 11 (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1.

In the normal state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state), it is recommended to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area in order to aim for the special chart 1 starting hole 230. In other words, in the special chart low probability normal chart low probability state, even if the ball enters the normal chart starting hole 228, it is almost impossible to win the normal chart variable game, so the player should not hit to the right, but should shoot the game ball toward the left side (hit to the left). Note that the normal state refers to a non-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special low probability normal high probability state or a special high probability normal high probability state, it is easier to win a normal variable game, so it is recommended to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the game area where the normal start hole 228 is located in order to aim for the normal start hole 228. That is, as shown in the breakdown in FIG. 11(a), the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability change (special a) is 50% in special 1, while the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability change is 100% in special 2. Also, the number of times the time-saving game state is maintained after a jackpot game may be 50 times in special 1, but is always 120 times in special 2. Therefore, since it is easier for a player to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in special 2 than in special 1, the ball should be aimed at the second special start hole 232 to win a jackpot in special 2. Therefore, the player should shoot the ball toward the right side area (hit to the right).

In addition, in the case of a jackpot game, the game ball is shot (hit to the right) toward the right area of the game area where the variable winning hole 234 is located in order to aim for the variable winning hole 234. Figure 11 (b) shows that after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state may be maintained for 120 times or for 50 times.

Also, in Figure 11 (b), if the special chart is not hit even once during the 950 times of special chart pattern change display in the special chart low probability state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state), i.e., if there are 950 consecutive special chart misses, the time-saving game state will be maintained during the 1100 times of special chart pattern change display. The period during which the time-saving game state is maintained as a result of a predetermined number of consecutive special chart misses is called play time, and this time reduction is called b-time reduction. The b-time reduction game state can only be entered once before the first hit after the power is turned on, and once a jackpot has been hit, it can only be entered once before the next jackpot is hit. Therefore, if there are 950 consecutive misses on the special chart in the b time-saving game state, there is no new transition to the b time-saving game state, and the b time-saving game state continues, and if there are 1100 consecutive misses on the special chart, there is a transition to the non-time-saving game state (normal state). Note that the count of the number of consecutive misses, which is the condition for transitioning to the b time-saving game state, also includes the number of consecutive misses in the a time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state described below.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 5(a) and (b), the time-saving symbol may be displayed only in the symbol change display of the special symbol 2. The time-saving game state to which the time-saving symbol is displayed and transitions is called the c-time-saving. This time-saving symbol may win the c-time-saving in the symbol change display of the special symbol 2, which is performed as a result of the special symbol 2 reservation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "remaining reservation of special symbol 2") remaining at the time when the time-saving game state (special symbol high probability normal symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability normal symbol high probability state) ends being consumed in the non-time-saving game state. When the c-time-saving is won, the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second special symbol display device 214 (see Fig. 3), and three "decoration 11" (decorative symbol of time-saving) shown in Fig. 5(c) are displayed in a line on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the time-saving game state (special symbol low probability normal symbol high probability state) is maintained while the symbol change display of the special symbol is performed 950 times. That is, it transitions to the c time-saving game state without going through a jackpot game. The probability of winning the sudden time-saving is 1/90. In addition to the special chart 2 remaining reserve at the end of the time-saving game state that started after the jackpot game ends, and the special chart 2 remaining reserve at the end of the b time-saving game state that started after 950 consecutive special chart misses, it is also possible to win the sudden time-saving again in the special chart 2 remaining reserve at the end of the time-saving game state that started after winning the sudden time-saving.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving pattern may be won even in the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and the b time-saving play state. In this case, the time-saving pattern is displayed still on the second special pattern display device 214 (see FIG. 3). However, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not display three "decorations 11" (decorative patterns for time-saving) shown in FIG. 5(c) in a row, but displays a random pattern that indicates a miss. In this embodiment, the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and the b time-saving play state are prioritized over the c time-saving play state, so even if the time-saving pattern is displayed still on the second special pattern display device 214, the time-saving pattern is invalidated and the game does not transition to the c time-saving play state.

Furthermore, even if a right shot is made in a non-time-saving game state, and a normal game with a probability of 1/100 is won, and the ball enters the second special game starting hole 232 (electric chute), it may also win the c time-saving game, and the game state will be switched to the c time-saving game state without being invalidated. In other words, not only the remaining special game 2 reserve, but also a new special game 2 reserve may be switched to the c time-saving game state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special game starting hole 232 (electric chute) in a non-time-saving game state. For example, it may be possible to prevent a game ball from winning the normal game even if the game ball enters the normal game starting hole 228, or the opening pattern of the wing member 232a may be an opening pattern that makes it extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special game starting hole 232 (electric chute) even if the game ball enters the normal game.

In addition, the condition for transitioning to the b time-saving play state may be satisfied by all misses in the c time-saving play state (950 consecutive misses on the special chart), resulting in a transition from the c time-saving play state to the b time-saving play state.

In this embodiment, the time-saving pattern is displayed stationarily on the second special pattern display device 214 even in the special pattern high probability, normal pattern high probability state, special pattern low probability, normal pattern high probability state, and b time-saving play state, but it may not be displayed stationarily. In other words, it may not be displayed stationarily except in the pattern change display of special pattern 2 in the non-time-saving play state.

Next, we will explain a specific example of game progress in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1 has multiple types of stages available. Figure 12 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step transition from the normal stage to the rear stage. In this example, the game is in a non-time-saving game state (low probability of special game and low probability of normal game), and left-handed play is recommended.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1) displays a background (a plain white background) that indicates a non-time-saving game state.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1) has a fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the pattern is changing (or the pattern is stopped) or not and for notifying the reserved number, and the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 is provided in the upper left, and the reserved number display area for special pattern 2 is provided in the lower left. In addition, the pattern change notification area (fourth pattern) for special pattern 1 is provided in the upper right, and the pattern change notification area (fourth pattern) for special pattern 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a pattern change notification area for normal patterns and a reserved number display area for normal patterns may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 is aligned with the reserved number indicated by the reserved lamp 218 for special pattern 1, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 2 is aligned with the reserved number indicated by the reserved lamp 220 for special pattern 2. In addition, in the pattern change notification area of the special chart 1, when the pattern of the special chart 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped with "○", and if it is a miss, it is stopped with "×". In addition, during the pattern change display of the special chart 1, the display of "-" may flash, and it may be possible to recognize that the pattern change display of the special chart 1 is in progress. The display in the pattern change display area of the special chart 2 is the same as the display in the pattern change display area of the special chart 1, and the display mode changes in response to the pattern change display and stop display of the special chart 2. Note that a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the pattern change display being executed may be made by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or flashing mode of the fourth pattern, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the reserved number display area. The fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 described above is the same as the example shown in FIG. 29. In addition, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol may be displayed by a display means other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (e.g., a sub-LCD display device or a lamp, etc.).

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(1) also displays the decorative patterns. That is, the change occurs at high speed in the downward direction. A mini pattern is also displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mini pattern starts to change in response to the start of the special pattern change display, and stops in response to the stop of the special pattern change display. In other words, the mini pattern changes in response to (synchronized with) the special pattern change display, and the execution status of the special pattern change display is notified (suggested) to the player depending on the change status of the mini pattern.

The decorative pattern display device 208 also has a variable icon display area 280 at the bottom center of the performance display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change. The variable icon shown in FIG. 12(1) is a round, patternless, green display mode. In the drawing, the green color of the icon is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right (same below). The variable icon indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the currently occurring pattern change display depending on the display mode. In other words, the variable icon functions as a normal notice depending on the display mode. The green display mode indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%.

In addition, in the non-time-saving play state, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1 to the right of the variable icon display area 280.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1, reserved icons representing reserved special chart 1 are displayed. The number of reserved special chart 1 is represented by the number of reserved icons of the special chart 1, in addition to the number of lit reserved chart 1 lamps 218 and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special chart 1. In other words, the reserved icons correspond to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the reserved icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second reserved icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the closer to the variable icon display area 280 the reserved icon (the reserved icon on the left) is the older the winning reserved icon.

In FIG. 12 (1), three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the reserved icon display area 281 ... Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the expected probability of a jackpot in the first place. In the following explanation, if the default display mode is used, this explanation may be omitted. Also, a red display mode indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%. Also, a green display mode, as explained in the display mode of the variable icon, indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%.

In FIG. 12 (2), a pseudo consecutive performance is started in the display of the decorative pattern. The pseudo consecutive performance is a display mode of the decorative pattern in which the start of the decorative pattern and the provisional stop display are performed multiple times in one display of the special pattern, and the display of the decorative pattern is made to look as if multiple win/loss judgment results were displayed, even though only one win/loss judgment (lottery) result is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (2), a pseudo consecutive pattern (decorative pattern written as "NEXT") suggesting a pseudo consecutive performance is provisionally displayed in the center pattern display area 208b, and "Decoration 6" is provisionally displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, and "Decoration 7" is provisionally displayed in the right pattern display area 208c. In the high-speed change in the display of the decorative pattern, it is not possible to confirm what kind of pattern the decorative pattern is, but in the provisional stop display, it is possible to confirm what kind of pattern the decorative pattern is. In the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is fluctuating and moving at an extremely slow speed. Meanwhile, the mini pattern in the upper left corner continues to change, and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner continues to flash a "-" to indicate that the pattern of special pattern 1 is changing.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (3), the display screen is blacked out and the decorative patterns are no longer visible. However, the mini pattern in the upper left corner and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. Even in FIG. 12 (3), the mini pattern continues to change, and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 continues to display a flashing "-", indicating that the pattern of special pattern 1 is changing.

Eventually, the blackout ends, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern begins. FIG. 12(4) shows the state just before the blackout ends and the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo consecutive performance begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(4), the characters "x2" are displayed, indicating that the blackout has ended and the second variation has begun. Also, when the blackout ends, in FIG. 12(2), "Decoration 6" is displayed in a temporary stop in the middle pattern display area 208b where the pseudo consecutive pattern was temporarily stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns temporarily displayed is different from the combination of the decorative patterns when the re-variation begins. Here, the type of decorative pattern itself in the middle pattern display area 208b is different. This difference makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the temporary stop display and the start of the re-variation display. Furthermore, if the combination of decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped was the same as the combination of decorative symbols when re-variation began, the player might mistakenly believe that the pseudo consecutive symbols were temporarily stopped again when the blackout ended. However, by making the combination of decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped different from the combination of decorative symbols when re-variation began, as in Figures 12 (2) to (4), such a mistake by the player can be prevented. In Figure 12 (5), which follows Figure 12 (4), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative symbols has begun.

In FIG. 12(6), the ornamental pattern is temporarily displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, and it can be confirmed that the ornamental pattern is "ornament 5". In FIG. 12(7), the ornamental pattern is temporarily displayed in the right pattern display area 208c, and it can be confirmed that the ornamental pattern is "ornament 1". In the following FIG. 12(8), the ornamental pattern is temporarily displayed in the center pattern display area 208b, and it can be confirmed that the ornamental pattern is "ornament 4". In FIG. 12(8), a combination of ornamental patterns that is not successful, such as "ornament 5-ornament 4-ornament 1", is temporarily displayed (wavering and fluctuating display). Eventually, as shown in FIG. 12(9), a final display is performed, and a combination of ornamental patterns that is not successful, such as "ornament 5-ornament 4-ornament 1", is displayed completely still. In other words, the ornamental patterns do not move during the final display. Of course, even in this final display, it is possible to confirm what kind of pattern the ornamental patterns are.

In addition, the variable icon h0 that was displayed during the temporary stop display disappears when the final display begins.

During the display of the confirmed decorative pattern, a wipe effect is performed to change the stage. In FIG. 12 (10), the wipe effect is started. In the wipe effect, the wipe display wp spreads from the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a wipe-in in which the wipe display wp covers the display screen and a wipe-out in which the wipe display wp disappears from the display screen are performed. The decorative pattern and the reserved icon are overlapped by the wipe display wp and become invisible, but the mini pattern in the upper left corner and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during the wipe effect. The wipe-in that started in FIG. 12 (10) is completed in FIG. 12 (11), and the decorative pattern and reserved icon are no longer visible on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (11). In the following FIG. 12 (12), a wipe-out is performed, and part of the decorative pattern and the reserved icon are becoming visible. When the wipe-in is complete, or when the wipe-out begins, a stage change occurs. In this example, the stage changes from the normal stage to the rear stage. The decorative symbols that become visible when the wipe-out begins are displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the changed stage. This display mode will be described later.

When the wipeout is complete, the wipe effect ends. Also, when the wipe effect ends, the display of the next special pattern begins. Figure 12 (13) is a diagram showing the state immediately after the display of the next special pattern begins. In this Figure 12 (13), the display of the pattern begins in the first special pattern display device 212, and the display of the decorative pattern begins in the decorative pattern display device 208. The display of the mini pattern and the blinking display of the fourth pattern also begin. In the display of the decorative pattern, a change display start operation is performed at the start of the change. The decorative pattern shown in Figure 12 (13) is performing this change display start operation, and is performing an operation of moving slightly in the opposite direction (upward) to the change direction. In the change start operation, the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where it can be confirmed. In the display of the decorative pattern, the change start operation is followed by a downward change display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, because a stage change has been made from the normal stage to the lord stage, the lord's character YM1 is displayed to the left of the variable icon display area 280 on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (13). This lord's character YM1 is displayed as an animation. Furthermore, a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative pattern that is displayed frozen. The combination of decorative patterns at the time when the variable display of the decorative patterns begins is "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1", with a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative pattern additionally displayed, and the start of the variable operation is performed with this combination of decorative patterns. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols provisionally displayed in the previous decorative symbol variable display ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" shown in FIG. 12(8)) and the combination of decorative symbols confirmed displayed ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" shown in FIG. 12(9)) will be different from the combination of decorative symbols when the next decorative symbol variable display starts (at the start time or immediately after the start time) ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" shown in FIG. 12(13) where a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative symbol is additionally displayed). Here, the decorative symbols are the same, but the presence or absence of a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative symbol is different, and the types of decorative symbols are the same but the display forms are different. By having different decorative symbols in this way, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the previous stopped display and the start of the current variable display. It also becomes easier to confirm that a stage change has occurred.

In FIG. 12 (13), the mini and fourth symbols are already changing at high speed, but when the change starts, it starts from the same display as the confirmed display of the mini and fourth symbols (display in FIG. 12 (9)). In other words, the display of the mini and fourth symbols in response to the confirmed display of the special symbols (display in FIG. 12 (9)) is the same as the display when the mini and fourth symbols start changing and the blinking display of the fourth symbol starts in response to the start of the changing display of the special symbols (display just before FIG. 12 (13)).

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (13), the shifting of the hold icon has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 12 (14) is the icon in the default display mode. In addition, the icon that was previously the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11, and the icon that was previously the third hold icon h12 has become the second hold icon h12.

The part that becomes visible due to the wipeout may be difficult to see due to an effect display such as light emission (see FIG. 14 (7)), and when the wipeout is complete, the effect display may be terminated and the display may become visible. Alternatively, the stage change may be performed when the wipeout is complete.

In Figure 12 (14), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (15), a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed. Here too, a character display YM2 that differs for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of each decorative pattern.

Figure 13 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 12.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (16), which is a continuation of FIG. 12 (15), a combination of decorative patterns that is a losing combination, such as "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 4," is displayed as confirmed. Here too, a different character display YM2 is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of each decorative pattern for each type of decorative pattern. Also, the animated lord character YM1 is depressed.

In FIG. 13 (17), the first special pattern display device 212 has started displaying changing patterns, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has also started displaying changing decorative patterns. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 13 (17) is performing the operation at the start of the changing display. In addition, the mini pattern has started to change and the fourth pattern has started to flash. In addition, the shift movement of the reserved icon has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first reserved icon h11 has become the changing icon h0. The changing icon h0 shown in FIG. 13 (17) is an icon with a red display mode.

The period from the start of the provisional stop display of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" to the end of the confirmed display (Figure 12 (8) to (12)) is longer than the period from the start of the provisional stop display of "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 4" to the end of the confirmed display (Figure 12 (15) to (16)).

In Figure 13 (18), the decorative pattern change display changes downward at high speed, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern.

In the next Figure 13 (19), a reach state has been achieved, and "Decoration 2" is provisionally displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. In addition, a princess character display YM2 is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of the provisionally displayed "Decoration 2".

In FIG. 13 (20), the game progresses to a Super (SP) Reach, and an animation of a confrontation between the lord and an enemy samurai is displayed across the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The animation display of the lord's character YM1, the variable icon display area 280, and the reserved icon display area 281 of special symbol 1 also disappear, and the decorative symbol that was previously displayed large in the center of the display screen is now displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right corner of the display screen. Note that the mini symbol in the top left corner and the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the top right corner are visible even during the Super Reach.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (21), an animation of a lord triumphing over an enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative patterns for a normal jackpot (a 3R normal jackpot of "Special Chart B"), such as "Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2," is temporarily displayed. Note that while the display YM2 of a character that differs for each type of decorative pattern is not additionally displayed in decoration 13, it may be additionally displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (22), the combination of decorative patterns for a normal jackpot, such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2," is displayed as a confirmed combination, and then three rounds of jackpot play begin (FIG. 13 (23)). When the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a special pattern low probability/normal pattern high probability state (time-saving game state).

In FIG. 13 (24), the jackpot game has ended and the game has transitioned to a special low probability/normal high probability state (time-saving game state). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (24) displays the background of a castle town, which indicates the time-saving game state.

In addition, in FIG. 13 (24), three balls win consecutively in the second special pattern start hole 232, and the pattern change display is started in the second special pattern display device 214, and the decorative pattern change display is also started in the decorative pattern display device 208. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 13 (17) is undergoing a change display start operation. The decorative pattern combination at the time when the decorative pattern change display is started is "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", and the change start operation is performed with this decorative pattern combination. As a result, the combination of the decorative patterns displayed as provisionally stopped ("Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2" shown in FIG. 13 (21)) and the combination of the decorative patterns displayed as confirmed ("Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2" shown in FIG. 13 (22)) are different from the combination of the decorative patterns when the next decorative pattern change display is started (at the start time or immediately after the start time) ("Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" shown in FIG. 13 (24)). Here, the type of decorative pattern in the middle pattern display area 208b itself is different. In particular, by not displaying decoration 13 in the combination of decorative patterns when the next decorative pattern variable display starts, the player is not given the misconception that they have won the jackpot again.

In addition, to the right of the variable icon display area 280 in which the variable icon h0 is displayed, the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2 is displayed, and two reserved icons h21 and h22 are displayed.

The lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "49 remaining" as a remaining number of times in the time-saving play state, indicating that the time-saving play state will continue for another 49 times. Furthermore, to the left of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, a first right-hit display RH1 is displayed to encourage a right hit. This first right-hit display RH1 continues to be displayed during the time-saving play state even after the display of the special symbol's symbol variation has ended, and continues to be displayed even when the screen switches to the demo screen.

In addition, FIG. 13 (24) shows a scene where the fluctuation has already started, but after the end of the big win game, the decorative pattern ("Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2"), mini pattern ("2-2-2"), and fourth pattern are displayed for a moment in a visible state before the next fluctuation starts. In other words, the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern in response to the confirmed display of the special pattern (display in FIG. 13 (22)) is the same as the display when the mini pattern fluctuation display and the fourth pattern flashing display start in response to the start of the special pattern fluctuation display (display immediately before FIG. 13 (24)).

In Figure 13 (25), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern.

The action at the start of the changing display may be a slight movement in the opposite direction to the changing direction, or it may be an action in which the decorative pattern sways or expands and contracts. In any case, it is an action that allows the decorative pattern to be confirmed.

Next, we will explain an example of a zone presentation. Figure 14 shows an example of the stages from entering the sea zone to the sky zone until a jackpot is reached.

In this example, the game is in a time-saving play state (high probability of special symbols and high probability of normal symbols), and right-hitting is recommended. In the time-saving play state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of a castle town, which indicates the time-saving play state, but in this example, a background according to the zone is displayed. Also, to the left of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, a first right-hit display RH1 is displayed, encouraging right-hitting. Furthermore, the bottom right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(1) displays an ocean background corresponding to the ocean zone. Also, in FIG. 14(1), the second special pattern display device 214 starts displaying changing patterns, and the decorative pattern display device 208 also starts displaying changing decorative patterns. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 14(1) is operating at the start of the changing display. Also, the mini pattern changes and the fourth pattern blinking display have started. Furthermore, the changing icon h0 is displayed in the changing icon display area 280, and two reserved icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special pattern 2. The second reserved icon h22 is an icon with a red display mode.

In Figure 14 (2), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (3), a provisional stop display is performed when three zone entry patterns of the decorative 12 are aligned. In addition, one ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, the number of reserved balls for the special pattern 2 has increased to three, and a three-eyed reserved icon h23 is additionally displayed.

In the next Figure 14 (4), the second special symbol display device 214 starts to display the finalized display of special symbol 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to display the finalized display of a combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12". Also, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a frozen "X" indicating a miss, and the mini symbol is displayed as a frozen "256".

When the display of the decorative pattern begins, sliding door images fs appear from the left and right of the display screen (Figure 14 (5)), and the entire display screen becomes the sliding door image fs with an animation of the sliding door closing (Figure 14 (6)). The background image, the combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12", and the reserved icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the sliding door image fs and cannot be seen, but the mini pattern and the display in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 are visible.

As shown in FIG. 14 (6), when the entire display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 becomes a sliding door image fs, a zone transition occurs and transitions to the sky zone. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (7), the sliding door begins to open, the back of the sliding door becomes visible, and the sky background corresponding to the sky zone is displayed. The sky zone is a pre-reading notice with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the sea zone. Note that the decorative pattern and background image may be made invisible by an effect display or the like until the sliding door is fully open. Note that the timing of the zone transition may be when the sliding door is fully open, or may be a timing corresponding to the start of the pattern change display in the second special pattern display device 214.

The sliding doors also begin to open, and behind them we begin to see a frozen display of a combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6," rather than a combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12."

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the next FIG. 14 (8), the sliding door is completely open and the sliding door image fs has disappeared. In this FIG. 14 (8), the pattern change display in the second special pattern display device 214 has started, and the decorative pattern change display in the decorative pattern display device 208 has also started. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 14 (8) is undergoing a change display start operation. The combination of decorative patterns at the time when the decorative pattern change display starts is also "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the change start operation is performed with this combination of decorative patterns. As a result, the combination of decorative patterns displayed as a temporary stop ("decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" shown in FIG. 14 (3)) and the combination of decorative patterns at the time when the fixed display starts ("decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" shown in FIG. 14 (4)) are different from the combination of decorative patterns when the next decorative pattern change display starts (at the start time or immediately after the start time) ("decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6" shown in FIG. 14 (8)). Here, the types of all the decorative symbols are different. In this way, by not displaying decoration 12 in the combination of decorative symbols when the variable display of the next decorative symbol starts, the player is not given the misconception that the zone entry symbol has stopped again. Also, by displaying the combination of decorative symbols when the variable display of the next decorative symbol starts being a combination of scattered decorative symbols that indicate a miss, the player is not given the misconception that he has won a jackpot. The combination of decorative symbols when the variable display of the next decorative symbol starts is the same as the combination of mini symbols that were stopped and displayed in FIG. 14 (4). However, they do not have to match, and it is sufficient that the display of the decorative symbols when the variable display of the next decorative symbol starts being a display that is clearly a miss at a glance (for example, a scattered display).

In FIG. 14(8), the mini and fourth symbols are already changing at high speed, but when the change starts, it starts from the same display as the confirmed display of the mini and fourth symbols (display in FIG. 14(4)). In other words, the display of the mini and fourth symbols in response to the confirmed display of the special symbols (display in FIG. 14(4)) is the same as the display when the mini and fourth symbols start changing and the blinking display of the fourth symbol starts in response to the start of the changing display of the special symbols (display immediately before FIG. 14(8)).

When the sliding doors begin to open and the other side of the doors becomes visible (the stage in Figure 14 (7)), the combination of decorative patterns remains displayed as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12", but may become "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" when the next decorative pattern starts to change display.

In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (8), the mini pattern has started to change and the fourth pattern has started to flash. Furthermore, the shift movement of the reserved icon has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first reserved icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 is displayed in green. Furthermore, the icon that was previously the second reserved icon h22 has become the first reserved icon h21. The first reserved icon h21 is displayed in red.

In FIG. 14 (9), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward, making it difficult to confirm the decorative pattern. Also, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (9) displays a dialogue preview display sf1. The dialogue preview is a normal preview that uses dialogue to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot in the currently ongoing pattern change display. In this case, if the dialogue preview contains the phrase "sun," the likelihood of a jackpot increases.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (10), a combination of decorative patterns that is a failure, such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9", is temporarily displayed. In addition, two balls have entered the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, so the number of reserved patterns for special pattern 2 has increased to four, and a third reserved icon h23 and a fourth reserved icon h24 are additionally displayed. In the following FIG. 14 (11), a combination of decorative patterns that is a failure, such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9", is displayed as a confirmed combination.

In FIG. 14 (12), the second special symbol display device 214 has started displaying changing patterns, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started displaying changing decorative patterns. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 14 (12) is performing the start of changing display operation. Also, the mini symbol has started changing and the fourth symbol has started flashing. Also, the shift movement of the reserved icon has been completed, and the icon that was previously the first reserved icon h11 has become the changing icon h0. The changing icon h0 shown in FIG. 14 (13) is an icon with a red display mode. Also, the zone presentation of the empty zone is continuing, and the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an empty background.

The period from the start of the provisional stop display of "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" to the end of the confirmed display (Figures 14(3) to 14(7)) is longer than the period from the start of the provisional stop display of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" to the end of the confirmed display (Figures 14(10) to 14(11)).

In FIG. 14 (13), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward. Here, too, a normal line announcement is being made. The line announcement display sf2 in FIG. 14 (13) contains the line "sun," which has a higher chance of a jackpot than the line announcement display sf1 in FIG. 14 (9).

In the next Figure 14 (14), a reach state has been established, and "Decoration 7" is displayed provisionally in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c.

In FIG. 14 (15), the game progresses to a super reach, and an animation of a confrontation between the lord and an enemy samurai is displayed across the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the background display, variable icon display area 280, and reserved icon display area 281 for special symbol 1 disappear, and the decorative symbol that was previously displayed large in the center of the display screen is now displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right corner of the display screen. Note that the mini symbol in the top left corner and the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the top right corner are visible even during the super reach.

Figure 15 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 14.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (16), which is a continuation of FIG. 14 (15), displays an animation of the lord defeating an enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative symbols for a sure jackpot, such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7," is temporarily displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (17), the combination of decorative patterns for the jackpot, "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", is displayed as a confirmed winning combination, and a 2R guaranteed jackpot (Special Pattern B) has been won. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of Special Pattern 2 is displayed as a "○", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a "777" combination.

In FIG. 15 (18), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the text "Congratulations on the jackpot." Also, since the variable winning hole 234 is located in the right area, the first right-hit display RH1 is displayed. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening performance), a second right-hit display RH2 encouraging the player to hit to the right is also displayed in addition to the first right-hit display RH1. This second right-hit display RH2 is a display mode in which the text "Hit" is displayed to the right between two right-facing arrows spaced apart vertically, and is a larger display than the first right-hit display RH1.

In FIG. 15 (19), the first round has begun, and the right-hit second display RH2 has disappeared and is no longer displayed, but the right-hit first display RH1 is still displayed. In the following FIG. 15 (20), the second round has begun. In the case of a 2R sure-win jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), making it possible to win a V prize. When the second round has begun, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the text "Aim for the V," encouraging the V pass switch VS to pass the game ball through.

In FIG. 15 (21), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a V-winning notification that indicates that a V-winning has been obtained. In other words, it is being notified that a transition to a high probability state will occur after the big win game ends.

In FIG. 15 (22), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the text "Jackpot Ended." In addition, the right-hit first display RH1 continues to be displayed during the jackpot game, and is also displayed during this end effect.

When the big win game ends, the state transitions to the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state. In FIG. 15 (23), the pattern change display is started in the second special pattern display device 214, and the decorative pattern change display is also started in the decorative pattern display device 208. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 15 (23) is undergoing a change display start operation. The decorative pattern combination at the time when the decorative pattern change display is started is the same decorative pattern combination as the decorative pattern combination of the previous big win, "decorative pattern 7-decorative pattern 7-decorative pattern 7" (see FIG. 15 (17)), and the change start operation is performed with this decorative pattern combination. In addition, the mini pattern change and the flashing display of the fourth pattern have also started. In addition, the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and two reserved icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special pattern 2.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (23) displays the background of a castle town, which indicates the time-saving game state. Also, in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "119 remaining" are displayed as an indication of the number of remaining plays in the time-saving game state.

In addition, FIG. 15 (23) shows a scene where the change has already started, but after the end of the big win game, the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"), mini pattern (here, "7-7-7") and fourth pattern are displayed for a moment in a state where they can be confirmed before the next change starts. In other words, the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern in response to the confirmation display of the special pattern (the display in FIG. 15 (17)) is the same as the display when the mini pattern change display and the flashing display of the fourth pattern start in response to the start of the special pattern change display (the display immediately before FIG. 15 (23)). In FIG. 15 (24), the decorative pattern change display changes downward at high speed.

In addition, as the combination of decorative symbols displayed when the jackpot game ends and the next decorative symbol variable display starts, a combination that indicates a miss, such as "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23'), may be displayed. In FIG. 15 (23'), the variable start operation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 5". In this way, the combination of decorative symbols displayed as a temporary stop before the jackpot game starts ("Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" shown in FIG. 15 (16)) and the combination of decorative symbols displayed as a fixed stop ("Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" shown in FIG. 15 (17)) will be different from the combination of decorative symbols when the next decorative symbol variable display starts (at the start time or immediately after the start time) ("Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23')). In the example shown in FIG. 15 (23'), the decorative patterns in the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c are different, which prevents the player from misunderstanding that they have won the jackpot again.

Even if the combination of decorative symbols provisionally displayed before the start of a jackpot game ("Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" shown in FIG. 15 (16)) or the combination of decorative symbols confirmed ("Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" shown in FIG. 15 (17)) is different from the combination of decorative symbols when the next decorative symbol variation display starts (at the start time or immediately after the start from the start time) ("Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23')), the mini symbols and fourth symbols will be displayed in the same way when the confirmed display before the start of a jackpot game is made and when the next decorative symbol variation display starts (at the start time or immediately after the start from the start time).

Next, we will explain a variation of the example game progression shown in Figures 14 and 15.

Figure 15 (3') shows the same state as Figure 14 (3), and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a temporary stop when three zone entry patterns of decoration 12 are lined up.

In the next Figure 15 (5'), while the pattern changing display on the second special pattern display device 214 continues, i.e., while the decorative pattern is still temporarily stopped, a sliding door image fs appears on the left and right of the display screen. Then, while the decorative pattern is still temporarily stopped, an animation of the sliding door closing is displayed.

When the sliding door is completely closed as shown in FIG. 15 (6'), the second special pattern display device 214 starts to display the confirmed special pattern 2, and in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 2 is frozen as an "X" indicating a miss, and the mini pattern is frozen as "256." The display of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the sliding door image fs and cannot be seen.

Figure 15 (7') shows the same state as Figure 14 (7), and on the decorative pattern display device 208, the sliding doors are beginning to open, and the frozen display of "Decoration 2 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 6" is beginning to become visible. Note that "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12" may also begin to become visible.

As explained above, the provisional stop display of "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" may end in a state where the display of the decorative pattern is no longer visible (difficult to see). In other words, the final display on the special pattern display device or the final display of the decorative pattern may start in a state where the decorative pattern is no longer visible (difficult to see). Then, when the display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, it may be displayed differently from the provisional stop display. Note that this is not limited to the provisional stop display of "Decoration 12", but other decorative patterns (for example, "Decoration 11" or "Decoration 13") may also end in a state where they are no longer visible (difficult to see).

Note that examples of effects that make decorative patterns invisible include blackout (Figure 12 (3)), wipe effects (Figures 12 (10) to (12)), animation of sliding door image fs (Figures 14 (5) to (7)), and effect displays, but effects that make decorative patterns invisible are not limited to these.

Figure 16 shows an example of a case where power is interrupted during the display of a fixed decorative pattern, but is immediately restored.

Figure 16 (9-1) is in the same state as Figure 12 (9), and a combination of missing decorative symbols such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed as a confirmed combination. A power outage occurs while this confirmation display is being made, but power is restored immediately. Figure 16 (9-2) shows that a power outage has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power restoration process (step S111) shown in Figure 6 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 16 (9-3) displays the text "Preparing to return". Eventually, the first special symbol display device 212 starts displaying a changing pattern, and as shown in Figure 16 (13'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts displaying a changing decorative symbol. The decorative symbol shown in Figure 16 (13') is undergoing a change display start operation. The combination of decorative patterns when power is restored in Figure 16 (13') is different from the combination of decorative patterns that was confirmed and displayed when power was lost ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1"), and is also different from the combination of decorative patterns that would be displayed when the next decorative pattern change would begin if there had been no power outage (the combination of decorative patterns shown in Figure 12 (13)). A decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" corresponds to the initial pattern combination, and is always displayed when power is restored. This initial pattern combination is displayed, and the display of the decorative pattern changes begins. Note that the mini pattern change and the flashing display of the fourth pattern have also begun.

The shifting of the reserved icons has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first reserved icon h11 has now become the variable icon h0, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 as well as the display modes of the reserved icons h11 and h12 are now in the default display mode. Also, no stage change has been made, and the lord's character YM1 and the display of the different characters YM2 for each type of decorative pattern are not displayed.

In addition, Figure 16 (13') shows a scene where the change has already started, but after the text display of "Preparing to restore" ends and before the next change starts, the decorative pattern (here, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3"), mini pattern (here, "1-2-3") and fourth pattern are displayed for a moment in a visible state. In other words, the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern when power is restored is different from the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern that were confirmed and displayed when the power was cut off (the display in Figure 16 (9-1)), and is also different from the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern when the display of the next decorative pattern change starts if there is no power cut (the display immediately before Figure 12 (13)).

Figure 16 (4-1) is in the same state as Figure 14 (4), and a combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" is displayed as a confirmed combination. Here, too, a power outage occurs while this confirmation display is being made, but power is restored immediately. Figure 16 (4-2) shows that a power outage has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power restoration process (step S111) shown in Figure 6 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 16 (4-3) displays the text display "Preparing for restoration". Eventually, the first special symbol display device 212 starts displaying a changing pattern, and as shown in Figure 16 (8'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts displaying a changing pattern. The decorative symbol shown in Figure 16 (8') is performing a variable display start operation. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of power restoration in this Figure 16 (8') is the initial pattern combination "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" described above. As a result, the combination of decorative patterns ("Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3") when power is restored and the display of the next decorative pattern begins is different from the combination of decorative patterns that was confirmed and displayed at the time of the power outage ("Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12"), and is also different from the combination of decorative patterns shown in Figure 14 (8) ("Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6") when the display of the next decorative pattern begins if there is no power outage. In addition, the mini pattern changes and the flashing display of the fourth pattern have also begun.

In FIG. 16 (8'), the variable icon h0 in the default display mode and the reserved icons h21 and h22 in the default display mode are displayed. Also, the zone presentation itself is not being performed, and the castle town background, which indicates the time-saving play state, is displayed.

In addition, Figure 16 (8') shows a scene where the change has already started, but after the text display of "Preparing to restore" ends and before the next change starts, the decorative pattern (here, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3"), mini pattern (here, "1-2-3") and fourth pattern are displayed for a moment in a visible state. In other words, the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern when power is restored is different from the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern that were confirmed and displayed when the power was cut off (the display in Figure 16 (4-1)), and is also different from the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern when the display of the next decorative pattern change starts if there is no power cut (the display immediately before Figure 14 (8)).

In this embodiment, the initial pattern combination is "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3", but the initial pattern combination is not limited to this combination and may be other combinations. However, combinations that are reminiscent of a jackpot are not preferable, and it is preferable to use combinations that cannot be displayed in the variable display.

According to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern change display that changes the decorative pattern,
The display means executes a decorative pattern confirmation display that displays the decorative pattern in a state where the decorative pattern can be confirmed [for example, a display when the display of the decorative pattern disguise display starts, a display during the operation at the start of the variable display, a provisional stop display of the decorative pattern disguise display, a stop display (confirmed display) that is displayed when the decorative pattern disguise display ends, and a display that combines the provisional stop display and the confirmed display],
The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started may differ from the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern change display is started (for example, Figures 12(2) and 12(4), 12(9) and 12(13), 13(22) and 13(24), 14(4) and 14(8), 15(17) and 15(23')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

According to this gaming machine, if the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started is a picture decorative pattern, when the next decorative pattern change display starts, the player will not be given the mistaken idea that he or she has won a jackpot due to the picture decorative pattern. Also, if the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started is a decorative pattern that represents a jackpot, when the next decorative pattern change display starts, the player will not be given the mistaken idea that he or she has won a jackpot again.

The display of a decorative pattern may be a display of a combination of decorative patterns. The decorative pattern may be a number, a symbol, or a picture.

The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern changing display has started may be a display indicating the result of the lottery.

The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started may be included in its entirety or in part in the decorative pattern change display, or it may not be included in the decorative pattern change display but may be included in the decorative pattern stop display that starts following the decorative pattern change display.

"The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern changing display has started is different from the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern changing display is started" does not mean that the type of decorative pattern [e.g., decoration 1 to decoration 13] is the same but the display mode [e.g., the presence or absence of character display YM2] is different, but that the type of decorative pattern is different." The type of decorative pattern referred to here may be a type that represents numbers, a type of symbol, or a type of picture.

The display in which the decorative pattern can be confirmed by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern is included in the decorative pattern confirmation display. However, if the display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (swaying display) disappears or becomes invisible, it is not included in the decorative pattern confirmation display.

Also,
"The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started may be the same as the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern change display is started [for example, FIG. 13 (16) and FIG. 17, FIG. 14 (11) and FIG. 12, FIG. 15 (17) and FIG. 15 (23)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

"When a power outage is restored while displaying the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern changing display, the display means may display a predetermined display (initial display) as the decorative pattern confirmation display [for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" as shown in Figure 16 (13') or Figure 16 (8')]. That is, the first display of the decorative pattern, which is the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started [for example, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in FIG. 12 (9) or "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" in FIG. 14 (4)] may be different from the second display of the decorative pattern, which is the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern change display is started [for example, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in FIG. 12 (13) or "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" in FIG. 14 (8)], and when a power outage is restored while displaying the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started, the display means may display a third display different from the first display and the second display [for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" in FIG. 16 (13') or "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" in FIG. 16 (8')] as the decorative pattern confirmation display.
"When the first decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern changing display is different from the second decorative pattern confirmation display when starting the next decorative pattern changing display, the display time of the first decorative pattern confirmation display may be longer than when the first decorative pattern confirmation display and the second decorative pattern confirmation display are the same. For example, the period from FIG. 12(8) to FIG. 12(12) may be longer than the period from FIG. 12(15) to FIG. 13(16), and the period from FIG. 14(3) to FIG. 14(7) may be longer than the period from FIG. 14(10) to FIG. 14(11)."
In addition, the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern variation display has started may be a display of a temporary stop of the decorative pattern (swaying display), a display of a permanent stop of the decorative pattern (confirmation display), or a display from the start of the display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern to the end of the display of the permanent stop. The display time of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern may be different. For example, it may be 0 seconds, or the display time may be 1 second or more and 10 seconds or less. On the other hand, the display time of the permanent stop of the decorative pattern may be constant. However, the display of the permanent stop of the decorative pattern may be short in the case of a specific first display (for example, a display that notifies a small win) or long in the case of a specific second display (for example, a display that notifies a big win or a display in which a performance such as a stage transition or a zone change is performed).

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying a different pattern change that changes and displays a different pattern from the decorative pattern [for example, a fourth pattern (a pattern change notification area in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284), a mini pattern],
The display means executes a different symbol confirmation display that displays a different symbol in a state in which the different symbol can be confirmed (for example, the display immediately before FIG. 12 (9) to FIG. 12 (12) or FIG. 12 (13));
The display of the other pattern confirmation after the start of the other pattern change display [for example, the fourth pattern or mini pattern in FIG. 12 (9) to FIG. 12 (12)] is the same as the display of the other pattern confirmation when the next other pattern change display is started [for example, the fourth pattern or mini pattern just before FIG. 12 (13)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

"The first display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started may be a display that is not displayed in the separate pattern confirmation display after the separate pattern change display has started [for example, decoration 11 to decoration 13 or a pseudo consecutive pattern (a decorative pattern marked "NEXT")]."
The display of the different symbols (different symbol variation display, different symbol confirmation display) may be a display of a combination of different symbols, or a display of one different symbol. The different symbols may be numbers or symbols.

The display of the different symbols (different symbol variation display, different symbol confirmation display) may be a display displayed on a device other than the display means. For example, it may be a second display device (liquid crystal display device or lamp) dedicated to different symbols, or it may be a secondary display device when the display means is the primary display device.

Next, we will explain the pre-event prediction that is executed after the end of the miss reach performance.

Figure 17 shows an example of an event-forward forecast in stages. In this example, the game is in a non-time-saving game state (low probability of special and low probability of normal), and left-handed play is recommended.

In FIG. 17(1), the first special pattern display device 212 is displaying a changing pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 is also displaying a changing decorative pattern. Also, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(1), the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed in the changing icon display area 280, and three reserved icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1. These three reserved icons h11 to h13 are also in the default display mode.

In addition, in the display of the decorative pattern change shown in FIG. 17(1), the pending icon change notice described below and the zone presentation described using FIG. 14 to FIG. 15 may be executed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 17 (2), a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed as a provisional stop, and in the following Figure 17 (3), a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed as a confirmed combination.

The decorative pattern display shown in Figures 17 (1) to (2) is a normal display, and there may be a shortened display in which the decorative pattern display time is shorter than the normal display (for example, 5 seconds), and the period of the temporary stop display of a losing decorative pattern combination is shorter in the shortened display than in the normal display. Furthermore, the shortened display also includes an ultra-shortened display in which the period of the temporary stop display is 0 seconds. In addition, in the shortened display, no action is performed at the start of the decorative pattern display.

In FIG. 17 (4), the pattern change display in the first special pattern display device 212 has started, and the decorative pattern change display has also started. In addition, the shift movement of the reserved icon has also been completed, and the icon that was the first reserved icon h11 until now has become the change icon h0. In addition, the icon that was the second reserved icon h12 until now has become the first reserved icon h11. The display mode of this new first reserved icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to a green display mode during the shift movement, and a reserved icon change notice has started. This reserved icon change notice is a type of pre-reading notice that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot in the pattern change display that starts when the reserved represented by the reserved icon whose display mode has changed is consumed. The expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the display mode, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher in the green display mode than in the default display mode. The timing at which the reserved icon change notice starts to be executed can be when the reserved number is increased or when the shift movement is performed, but the reserved icon change notice does not start during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or when the decorative pattern is fixed. If there is an increase in reserved items during these periods, a notice of the change in the reserved item icon will be displayed when you shift.

In FIG. 17 (5), a ball is entered into the special chart 1 starting hole 230, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 increases to 3, and a three-eyed reserved icon h13 is additionally displayed. When the reserved balls increase here, a reserved icon change notice is also started, and the display mode of the increased third reserved icon h13 is a green display mode. In addition, a button notice, which is a type of normal notice, is also started. In the button notice, an image related to the performance button 136 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Here, an image is displayed that encourages the user to press the performance button 136 within the effective operation period. More specifically, a button image 136a that imitates the performance button 136, a meter display 136b that indicates the remaining period of the above-mentioned effective operation period, and a character display 136c that says "press" that encourages the user to press the button are displayed. In this example, the performance button 136 is pressed within the effective operation period. When the performance button 136 is pressed, the upper performance device 2, which is in an initial position above the decorative pattern display device 208, descends in front of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the button preview, the likelihood of a big win varies depending on how far the upper performance device 2 descends; the further the upper performance device 2 descends, the higher the likelihood of a big win. In FIG. 17(6), the upper performance device 2 descends slightly while the decorative patterns are fluctuating at high speed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c. In the following FIG. 17(7), the upper performance device 2 rises to its initial position, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the missing decorative pattern combination "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" in a provisionally stopped state. Then, in FIG. 17(8), "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed as a confirmed combination.

In FIG. 17 (9), the first special symbol display device 212 has started displaying changing patterns, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started displaying changing decorative symbols. The decorative symbols shown in FIG. 17 (9) are operating at the start of the changing display. Also, the mini symbol has started changing, and the fourth symbol has started flashing. Furthermore, the shift movement of the reserved icon has also been completed, and the first reserved icon h11, which was in a green display mode, has become the changing icon h0, which is also in a green display mode, and now the normal preview is being performed.

In Figure 17 (10), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward.

In FIG. 17 (11), the reach effect has started, and "Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has started.

In FIG. 17(12), the normal reach does not progress to a super reach, and "Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 17(13), which follows FIG. 17(12), a pre-event prediction is made while the temporary stop display of a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" continues. The period of the temporary stop display of the losing combination of decorative symbols when a reach is achieved (FIG. 17(12) to (13)) is longer than the period of the temporary stop display of the losing combination of decorative symbols when a reach is not achieved (FIG. 17(2)). Also, the pre-event prediction in FIG. 17(13) is an animation display js in which a character on a motorcycle appears and chants "revenge." In this example, the event pre-reading notice is a notice of an event that will occur in one of the one or more symbol change displays that are currently pending, and may be a notice of a confirmed display of a jackpot symbol, i.e., a jackpot, or a notice of a reach pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the current reach pattern. Here, since the normal reach was the only one, it is predicted that the symbol change display that will start when one of the two holds is consumed will develop into a super reach or special super reach. Note that the event pre-reading notice may also notify the expectation of a jackpot in addition to the event. For example, the expectation of a jackpot may be notified depending on the type of animation display js. Also, instead of a notice of an event, only the expectation of a jackpot may be notified. Also, even if the event pre-reading notice is executed, it may not develop into a super reach or special super reach (so-called false notice).

In addition, the second hold icon h12 continues to notify you of changes to the hold icon.

In Figure 17 (14), a combination of missing decorative patterns, such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1," is displayed.

In FIG. 17 (15), the first special pattern display device 212 has started displaying changing patterns, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has also started displaying changing decorative patterns. The decorative patterns shown in FIG. 17 (15) are operating at the start of the changing display. Also, the mini pattern has started changing, and the fourth pattern has started flashing. Furthermore, the shift movement of the reserved icon has also been completed, and the first reserved icon h11, which was in the default display mode, has become the changing icon h0, which is also in the default display mode.

Figure 18 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 17.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 18 (16), which is a continuation of Figure 17 (15), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward.

In FIG. 18 (17), two balls are placed in the special chart 1 starting hole 230, the number of reserved balls in special chart 1 increases to three, and the second reserved icon h12 and the third reserved icon h13 are additionally displayed. In addition, the reach performance starts, and "Decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 18 (18), as predicted by the event pre-reading, it develops into a super (SP) reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai on the entire display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (19) displays an animation showing the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach, and a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. In FIG. 18 (20), which follows FIG. 18 (19), an event pre-reading notice is made while the provisional stop display of a combination of missing decorative symbols such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" continues. The period of provisional stop display of a combination of missing decorative symbols when the combination has progressed to a super reach (FIG. 18 (19) to (20)) is longer than the period of provisional stop display of a combination of missing decorative symbols when the reach is not established (FIG. 17 (2)), and is longer than the period of provisional stop display of a combination of missing decorative symbols when the reach is established but the combination does not progress to a super reach (FIG. 17 (12) to (13)). The event pre-reading notice in FIG. 18 (20) is also the same animation display js as the event pre-reading notice in FIG. 17 (13). The Super Reach End Event Prediction in Figure 18 (20) is a pattern change display that begins when one of the three reserved positions is consumed, and predicts that it will develop into a Special Super Reach, which has a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach.

In Figure 18 (21), a combination of missing decorative patterns, such as "Decoration 4 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 4," is displayed.

In addition, the display of decorative patterns shown in Figures 17 (15) to 18 (20) may also include a pending icon change notice or the zone presentation described using Figures 14 to 15.

In FIG. 18 (22), the first special symbol display device 212 starts displaying a changing pattern, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts displaying a changing pattern. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 18 (22) is performing a change display start operation. In addition, the mini symbol changes and the fourth symbol blinks. Furthermore, the shift movement of the reserved icon is also completed, and the first reserved icon h11, which was in a green display mode, has become the changing icon h0, which is also in a green display mode. In addition, the icon that was the second reserved icon h12 until now has become the first reserved icon h11. The display mode of this new icon that has become the first reserved icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to a red display mode during the shift movement, and a reserved icon change notice, which is a pre-reading notice, has started. A pre-reading notice by a reserved icon in a red display mode has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a pre-reading notice by a reserved icon in a green display mode.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (23), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward.

In FIG. 18 (24), the reach effect starts, and "Decoration 3" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. That is, a normal reach has started. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (24) where the reach state is established, the display sf3 of the dialogue notice, which is a type of normal notice, is also displayed. In the following FIG. 18 (25), it develops into a super reach, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (26), a red flash display fl1 indicating the expectation of a big hit is displayed, and as per the event pre-reading notice in FIG. 18 (20), it develops into a special super (SPSP) reach. However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (27), a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" appears in the red flash display fl1, and in the following FIG. 18 (28), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" continues to be displayed as a temporary stop. After that, in FIG. 18 (29), a wipe effect is started as a revival effect, and in FIG. 18 (30), where the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decorative pattern is hidden by the wipe display wp.

Figure 19 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 18.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (31), which is a continuation of FIG. 18 (30), a wipeout has begun, and parts of the decorative patterns are becoming visible. In the following FIG. 19 (32), the wipe effect has ended, and the missing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" is still displayed as a temporary stop, and the revival effect has ended in failure. Also in FIG. 19 (32), an animation display js is displayed, and an event pre-reading forecast is being executed. Here, it is assumed that this is executed for the next reserved ball to be consumed, and the variable display where the event pre-reading forecast was executed predicts a big win as a special super reach has been executed.

It may also start in Figure 18 (28) before the wipe effect begins.

In Figure 19 (33), a combination of ornamental patterns that is a losing combination, such as "ornamental 3-ornamental 6-ornamental 3," is displayed.

The period of the provisional display of the combination of missing decorative symbols when it has progressed to a Special Super Reach (Fig. 18 (28) to Fig. 19 (32)) is longer than the period of the provisional display of the combination of missing decorative symbols when a Reach is not achieved (Fig. 17 (2)), and is longer than the period of the provisional display of the combination of missing decorative symbols when a Reach is achieved but does not progress to a Super Reach (Fig. 17 (12) to Fig. 17 (13)). Furthermore, the period of the provisional display of the combination of missing decorative symbols when it has progressed to a Special Super Reach (Fig. 18 (28) to Fig. 19 (32)) may be longer than the period of the provisional display of the combination of missing decorative symbols when it has progressed to a Super Reach but not to a Special Super Reach (Fig. 18 (19) to Fig. 18 (20)).

In FIG. 19 (34), the first special symbol display device 212 has started displaying a changing pattern, and the decorative symbol display has also started to change. In addition, the shift movement of the reserved icon has also been completed, and the first reserved icon h11, which was displayed in red, has become the changing icon h0, which is also displayed in red, and the normal preview has started.

In FIG. 19 (35), a button notice, which is a type of normal notice, is also started, and the button image 136a, the meter display 136b, and the character display 136c saying "press" are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The effect button 136 is pressed during the operation valid period, and the upper effect device 2 descends from the initial position to the front of the decorative pattern display device 208. In FIG. 19 (36), the upper effect device 2 descends more than in FIG. 17 (6) in a state where the decorative patterns are fluctuating at high speed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c, and the expectation of a big win is high. Eventually, in FIG. 19 (37), a reach effect is started, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach is started. In the next Fig. 19 (38), it develops into a super reach, and in the decoration pattern display device 208, an animation of a battle between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Furthermore, in the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in Fig. 19 (39), a rainbow-colored flash display fl2 indicating the expectation of a big win is displayed, and it develops into a special super (SPSP) reach. The rainbow color is a color that indicates a higher expectation of a big win than red, and is a color that indicates a confirmed big win. In the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in Fig. 19 (40), a combination of decoration patterns that is a miss, such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" that is temporarily stopped, appears from the rainbow-colored flash display fl2, but in the next Fig. 19 (41), a wipe effect is started as a revival effect. In Fig. 19 (42) where the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decoration pattern is completely hidden for a moment by the wipe display wp. When the wipe-in is complete, the wipe-out begins, and part of the decorative pattern becomes visible. In FIG. 19 (43), the wipe effect ends, and the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 13-Decoration 7" for a normal jackpot (a 3R normal jackpot of "Special Chart B") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the revival effect is successful. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (44), the decorative pattern combination for that normal jackpot is displayed as a confirmed combination.

The revival effect may be an effect that always occurs when the special super reach ends, or an effect that may or may not occur. Also, the part that becomes visible due to a wipeout may have its display content difficult to see due to an effect display ef (see FIG. 14 (7)), such as light emission, and when the wipeout is complete, the effect display also ends, making the display content visible. Alternatively, high-speed re-fluxing occurs during the wipe effect, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern from the part that becomes visible due to the wipeout, and when the wipe effect ends, the re-flux also ends and a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may be performed. Furthermore, a wipe effect may not be performed, and high-speed re-fluxing may be performed as a revival effect.

In the game progression examples shown in Figures 17 to 19 above, the animation display js of the event pre-reading forecast, which has the same presentation mode, is executed for each miss reach with a different reach pattern (reach type), and the next change is the target change of the pre-reading forecast. However, the animation display js of the event pre-reading forecast is not only performed each time with a continuous decorative pattern change display, but may also be performed one-off. In this case, the change two steps ahead may be the target change of the pre-reading forecast, the change three steps ahead may be the target change of the pre-reading forecast, or the change four steps ahead may be the target change of the pre-reading forecast. Note that if there are two or more pending changes, the player cannot tell which change is the target change of the pre-reading forecast.

Furthermore, the relationship between the execution reach pattern of the event pre-reading forecast and the events (suggested content) that are the subject of the event pre-reading forecast is summarized in Figure 19 (a).

If an event pre-reading prediction is executed after a normal reach is missed, the event pre-reading prediction will be a prediction that a super (SP) reach or special super (SPSP) reach will occur.

If a Super (SP) reach is missed and an Event Prediction Notice is executed, the Event Prediction Notice will be a notice that a Special Super (SPSP) reach will occur.

If the Special Super (SPSP) reach develops but fails and an Event Prediction Forecast is executed, the Event Prediction Forecast will be a performance that predicts a guaranteed big win.

In addition, if a normal reach is missed, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed.

In addition, if the pattern of the reach performance in the special chart low probability state (non-probability variable play state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the pattern of the reach performance in the special chart high probability state is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed, or conversely, if the pattern of the reach performance in the special chart high probability state is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the pattern of the reach performance in the special chart low probability state (non-probability variable play state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed.

In addition, if the reach performance pattern in the normal low probability state (non-time-saving play state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the reach performance pattern in the normal high probability state is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed, or conversely, if the reach performance pattern in the normal high probability state is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the reach performance pattern in the normal low probability state (non-time-saving play state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed.

In addition, if the pattern of the reach performance in the advantageous state (special chart high probability state normal chart high probability state, special chart high-low probability state normal chart low probability state, special chart low probability state normal chart high probability state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the pattern of the reach performance in the normal state (special chart low probability state normal chart low probability state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed, or conversely, if the pattern of the reach performance in the normal state (special chart low probability state normal chart low probability state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the pattern of the reach performance in the advantageous state (special chart high probability state normal chart high probability state, special chart high-low probability state normal chart low probability state, special chart low probability state normal chart high probability state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed.

The event-reading effect may be an indication of the likelihood of a jackpot (see FIG. 20) rather than an indication of a reach. Furthermore, instead of the event-reading effect, an effect may be executed that suggests the setting value that will be changed in the setting change process of step S117 in FIG. 6.

Furthermore, even if a reach miss occurs, the event pre-reading forecast is not necessarily executed, and may not be executed. For example, even if a normal reach miss occurs and the next change develops into a super reach, the event pre-reading forecast may not be executed. Alternatively, in the change display of decorative symbols in a predetermined state (for example, the change display of decorative symbols in the b time-saving play state (during play time), or the change display of the final decorative symbol while the time-saving play state or the probability change play state is maintained), the event pre-reading forecast may not be executed even if a reach miss occurs.

In addition, if a normal reach miss occurs and an event pre-reading forecast is executed, the event pre-reading forecast may be executed repeatedly until a fluctuation that is the subject of the event pre-reading forecast occurs. In other words, the same event pre-reading forecast may be executed for every fluctuation (every tentative stop display period).

In addition, the event prediction was a specific display of an animated JS in which a character on a motorcycle appears and chants "revenge," but it could also be a specific sound or light.

Next, we will explain a variation of the example game progression shown in Figures 17 to 19.

Figure 20 shows a step-by-step diagram of a modified version of event look-ahead prediction.

Figure 20 (19') is in the same state as Figure 18 (19), and without progressing to a special super reach, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation showing the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai, and a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In the next Figure 20 (20'), an event mixed prediction has started instead of an event pre-reading prediction. In this event mixed prediction, a single image ec of a character that catches the player's attention is displayed on the entire display screen, and if the character is speaking, it is highly likely that a revival performance will be performed or that there is a jackpot in the reserved lot. In other words, a prediction that a revival performance will be performed corresponds to a normal event prediction, and a prediction that there is a jackpot in the reserved lot corresponds to an event pre-reading prediction. In the single picture ec displayed in FIG. 20 (20'), the words "Not yet" are spoken, and in FIG. 20 (21'), a wipe effect is started as a revival effect, and in FIG. 20 (22'), where the wipe-in is completed, the single picture ec is hidden by the wipe display wp. Next, a wipe-out is performed, and in FIG. 20 (23'), the wipe effect ends. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (23'), a combination of decorative patterns of a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "Special Chart B") such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 13-Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed, and the revival effect is successful. And in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (24'), the combination of decorative patterns of the normal jackpot is displayed as a definitive display.

Figure 20 (19'') is in the same state as Figure 18 (19), and without progressing to a special super reach, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation showing the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai, and a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In the following Figure 20 (20''), an event pre-reading forecast has started. This event pre-reading forecast is not a pre-reading forecast for any of the reserved items, but a pre-reading forecast that determines the fluctuation to be predicted. In other words, if the character makes a pose with the thumb up, it is a pre-reading forecast that there is a possibility of a jackpot in the next fluctuation, and if the character speaks a line, it is a pre-reading forecast that the next fluctuation will definitely be a jackpot. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 20 (20'') displays a display cp of the character making a pose with the thumb up.

In Figure 20 (21''), a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "Decoration 4 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 4" is displayed.

In FIG. 20 (22''), the next change that was predicted by the event pre-reading prediction begins, and first the display of the pattern change begins on the first special pattern display device 212, followed by the display of the decorative pattern change in FIG. 20 (23''). In this next change, a reach state is established in FIG. 20 (24''), which develops into a super reach in FIG. 20 (25''), and the decorative pattern combination for a normal jackpot, such as "decoration 4-decoration 13-decoration 4", is displayed as a confirmed combination in FIG. 20 (26'').

According to the above description,
" A pre-reading performance means for executing a plurality of types of pre-reading performances [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A notice performance means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208) for executing a notice performance (e.g., a button notice, a dialogue notice) in the currently performed pattern change display;
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of pre-reading effects is a first pre-reading effect [e.g., a hold icon change notice, a zone effect],
One of the plurality of types of pre-reading effects is a second pre-reading effect [for example, an event pre-reading notice],
The look-ahead performance means may execute the first look-ahead performance in parallel with the preview performance [for example, in FIG. 14 (9), the display sf1 of the look-ahead preview and the dialogue preview by the first hold icon h11, and in FIG. 14 (13), the display sf2 of the look-ahead preview and the dialogue preview by the empty zone],
The look-ahead performance means is such that there is no case where the second look-ahead performance is executed in parallel with the advance notice performance [for example, in Fig. 17 (13), Fig. 18 (20), Fig. 18 (28) to Fig. 18 (32), the advance notice performance is not executed, and only the event look-ahead notice is executed].
He explained:

This gaming machine makes it possible to highlight the second pre-reading notice.

The preview performance is a so-called normal preview, but instead of this preview performance, a pre-reading performance other than the first pre-reading performance and the second pre-reading performance may be performed.

In addition, the preview performance, the first look-ahead performance, and the second look-ahead performance were displayed, but they are not limited to displays and may be sounds, lights, or the movement of movable objects, etc.

Also,
"The look-ahead performance means does not start the execution of the first look-ahead performance [e.g., a notice of a change in a reserved icon] during a first period [e.g., a period from when a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern starts to when a fixed display of a decorative pattern starts] [e.g., if there is an increase in reserved numbers during the first period, the look-ahead performance is not started, but is started at the time of a shift movement],
The look-ahead performance means may start the execution of the second look-ahead performance during the first period [for example, FIG. 17 (13), FIG. 18 (20), FIG. 19 (32)].
He also explained:

The first period may have a different length.

Also,
"A display means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of executing a decorative pattern variable display that varies the display of the decorative pattern,
The decorative pattern change display may include a suggestion period that indicates the result of the winning or losing judgment [for example, a period during which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (FIG. 18 (28) and FIG. 19 (32)].
The first period refers to a period including the suggestion period (for example, the period from FIG. 18 (28) to FIG. 19 (32), including the period during which the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is not visible (FIG. 18 (29) to FIG. 19 (31))).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Here, the display means is capable of executing a static display of the decorative pattern following the display of the varying decorative pattern, and the first period may be a period that does not include the period during which the static display of the decorative pattern is being performed (for example, the period during which the final display of the decorative pattern in FIG. 19 (33) is being performed). Note that the static display of the decorative pattern can also be said to suggest the result of the win/loss determination, but the static display of the decorative pattern can also be said to notify the result of the win/loss determination.

The first period may also be a period including a period during which the display of the temporary stop (shaking display) of the decorative pattern is displayed. More specifically, the first period may be a period from when the display of the temporary stop (shaking display) of the decorative pattern starts, when the temporary stop display becomes invisible once, until when the temporary stop display becomes visible again and the permanent stop display (confirmed display) is displayed. Alternatively, the first period may be a period from when the display of the temporary stop (shaking display) of the decorative pattern starts, when the temporary stop display becomes invisible once, and until when the permanent stop display (confirmed display) is displayed without the temporary stop display becoming visible again. In other words, the first period may be a period from when the display of the temporary stop (shaking display) of the decorative pattern starts, until when the permanent stop display (confirmed display) is displayed.

Also,
"The decorative pattern change display has multiple types of change display patterns [for example, change patterns including reach patterns],
The second pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests what will happen in the decorative pattern variation display that will start later [for example, what kind of reach pattern will be executed or whether a jackpot will be won],
The second pre-reading effect is an effect in which the content suggested varies depending on the pattern [for example, FIG. 19(a)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

"One type of pattern among the multiple types of patterns is a first pattern [for example, a variation pattern in which a reach is not established], and one type of pattern among the multiple types of patterns is a second pattern [for example, a variation pattern of a normal reach], and the second pattern has a longer suggested period than the first pattern [for example, longer in Figures 17 (12) to (13) than in Figure 17 (2)], the look-ahead performance means does not execute the second look-ahead performance in the first pattern [for example, Figure 17 (2)], the look-ahead performance means may execute the second look-ahead performance in the second pattern [for example, Figure 18 (20)], and the look-ahead performance means, In both the first and second patterns, the first look-ahead effect [e.g., a pending icon change notice] may be executed [e.g., a pending icon change notice may be executed in FIG. 17(1), and a pending icon change notice is executed by the second pending icon h12 in FIG. 17(12) to FIG. 17(13)]. Furthermore, the second pattern may be a reach effect (a variable display effect in which two identical decorative patterns can be confirmed while a third decorative pattern cannot be confirmed), and the first pattern may be a non-reach effect (a variable display effect in which two different decorative patterns can be confirmed while a third decorative pattern cannot be confirmed).

"One of the multiple types of patterns may be a first reach presentation pattern, one of the multiple types of variable display patterns may be a second reach presentation pattern, the look-ahead presentation means may not execute the second look-ahead presentation in the first reach presentation pattern, and the look-ahead presentation means may execute the second look-ahead presentation in the second reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the second reach presentation pattern may be a reach presentation pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first reach presentation pattern. For example, the second reach presentation pattern may be a super reach or special super reach pattern, and the first reach presentation pattern may be a normal reach pattern. Also, the second reach presentation pattern may be a reach presentation pattern in a special chart high probability state (probability change game state), and the first reach presentation pattern may be a reach presentation pattern in a special chart low probability state (non-probability change game state). Alternatively, the second reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in a special low probability state, and the first reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in a special high probability state. Also, the second reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in a normal high probability state (time-saving game state), and the first reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in a normal low probability state (non-time-saving game state). Alternatively, the second reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in a normal low probability state, and the first reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in a normal high probability state. Furthermore, the second reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in an advantageous state (special chart high probability state ordinary chart high probability state, special chart high/low probability state ordinary chart low probability state, special chart low probability state ordinary chart high probability state), and the first reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in a normal state (special chart low probability state ordinary chart low probability state). Or, conversely, the second reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in the normal state, and the first reach performance pattern may be a reach performance pattern in the advantageous state.

"The look-ahead performance means may be capable of executing the second look-ahead performance in which the suggested content [for example, the event that is the subject of the situation look-ahead notice] differs depending on the type of pattern, but the performance format is the same [for example, an animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and chants "revenge"]." In other words, the suggested content of the second look-ahead performance may differ depending on the type of pattern, but the performance format may be the same.

"The look-ahead performance means may, when a reach performance is performed and the result of the hit/miss judgment during the suggestion period is suggested to be a miss, execute a look-ahead performance suggesting that a reach performance of a higher rank than the reach performance (for example, a reach performance having a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance, or a reach performance having a longer performance time than the reach performance) will be executed as the second look-ahead performance, and, when the highest rank reach performance is performed and the result of the hit/miss judgment during the suggestion period is suggested to be a miss, execute a look-ahead performance suggesting that a decorative pattern variation display resulting in a jackpot within the reserve will be executed as the second look-ahead performance."
"The look-ahead performance means may execute the second look-ahead performance when a reach performance is performed and it is suggested that the result of the hit/miss judgment during the suggestion period is a miss, but in a pattern change display in a predetermined state (for example, a pattern change display during a play time, or the final pattern change display during which a time-limited game state or a probability-change game state is maintained), even if a reach performance is performed and it is suggested that the result of the hit/miss judgment during the suggestion period is a miss, the second look-ahead performance may not be executed."
Next, the role vibration performance will be described. The role vibration performance is a normal notice with two types of performances, role vibration performance A and role vibration performance B. In both vibration performances, a common role (upper performance device 2) vibrates.

Figure 21 (a) is a diagram showing a table related to the reel vibration performance A. The reel vibration performance A may be performed during the execution of a Super (SP) reach or during the execution of a Special Super (SPSP) reach. As shown in this table, when the reel vibration performance A is performed during the execution of a Super (SP) reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 40%, and when it is performed during the execution of a Special Super (SPSP) reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 55%. In this way, the reel vibration performance A is a normal notice performance in which the expected probability of a jackpot differs depending on the execution timing. In addition, before the performance (vibration) starts, the reel vibration performance A displays an image related to the vibrating reel (upper performance device 2) on the decorative pattern display device 208.

Figure 21 (b) is a diagram showing a table relating to reel vibration performance B. Reel vibration performance B may be performed during the varying display of decorative symbols that will result in a Super (SP) reach, or during the varying display of decorative symbols that will result in a Special Super (SPSP) reach. In the above-mentioned reel vibration performance A, only one execution timing is provided for each varying display of decorative symbols, whereas in reel vibration performance B, multiple execution timings are provided for each varying display of decorative symbols. The expected probability of a jackpot differs for each of these execution timings. That is, in the display of the decorative pattern in which the Super (SP) reach is performed, if the role vibration performance B is performed at the start of the decorative pattern's change, the expectation of the big win is 70%, if it is performed during the reach where the reach state is first established (before the Super reach development), the expectation of the big win is 35%, if it is performed during the Super reach (after the Super reach development and before the decorative pattern's temporary stop display), the expectation of the big win is 45%, and if it is performed during the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern combination representing a miss (during the execution of the revival performance), the expectation of the big win is 100%. Note that since the expectation of the big win is 100%, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern combination representing a miss means the execution of the revival performance that will eventually result in a big win. Also, in the display of the decorative pattern in which the Special Super (SPSP) reach is performed, the super reach is after the super reach development and before the special super reach development, and the execution timing of the special super reach is added. This "special super reach" refers to the period after the special super reach has developed and before the temporary stop of the decorative pattern is displayed. If the special super reach vibration effect B is performed during the special super reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 55%. Also, in the special super reach vibration effect B, the vibration period of the vibrating special element (upper performance device 2) is the same even if the execution timing is different.

In the table shown in FIG. 21, "in reach" may refer to when a reach is established or when the reach is changing. Also, "in SP reach" may refer to when a super reach is developing or when the super reach is changing. Furthermore, "in SPSP reach" may refer to when a special super reach is developing or when the special super reach is changing.

In addition, reel vibration performance B may be executed at a timing when reel vibration performance A is not executed. In other words, when the decorative symbols start to change, during the reach state when the reach state is first established, and while the combination of decorative symbols indicating a miss is temporarily stopped (during the execution of the revival performance), these are the execution timings of reel vibration performance B, when reel vibration performance A is not executed.

Furthermore, while the vibration method (vibration mode) of the reel vibration performance A and the reel vibration performance B is the same, they may be different. For example, the reel vibration performance A may repeat short vibrations, while the reel vibration performance B may end with one long vibration.

In addition, the reel vibration performance A and the reel vibration performance B may be a performance in which the lower performance device 3 vibrates instead of the upper performance device 2. Alternatively, the reel vibration performance A may be a performance in which the upper performance device 2 vibrates, and the reel vibration performance B may be a performance in which the lower performance device 3 vibrates. In addition, the performance devices that vibrate in the reel vibration performance A and the reel vibration performance B may be provided on the front frame door 106.

The expected probability of a jackpot shown in FIG. 21 may vary depending on the game state (e.g., a sure-win game state, a time-limited game state, a non-sure-win game state, a non-time-limited game state, or a combination of these), or it may be the same regardless of the game state.

Figure 22 is a diagram showing the stages when the reel vibration effect A is performed and when it is not performed. In the example shown in Figure 22, the reel is in a non-time-saving game state (low probability of special game and low probability of normal game), and left-handed play is recommended.

In this Figure 22, the upper performance device 2 is shown above the decorative pattern display device 208. This upper performance device 2 is a device that descends from an initial position in response to a button preview (see Figure 17 (7) and Figure 19 (36)), but it also performs a vibration performance in the initial position.

Figure 22 (1) shows a scene where "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" is displayed frozen, indicating a loss.

In FIG. 22(2), the display of the decorative pattern has begun to change. The shifting of the pending icon has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first pending icon h11 has become the changing icon h0. The changing icon h0 shown in FIG. 22(2) is an icon that is displayed in red.

In FIG. 22(3), the reach effect starts, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 22(4), the reach develops into a super (SP) reach, and an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen of the decoration pattern display device 208. The decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(5) displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, and a vibration effect related image 2hg related to the upper performance device 2 is displayed at the top of the display screen. This vibration effect related image 2hg is a tutorial-like image that draws attention to the upper performance device 2 and includes an arrow display 2hg1 and a text display such as "If it vibrates, it's a big chance". The vibration effect related image 2hg is also an image that draws the player's attention to the upper performance device 2, and is also an image that attracts the player's interest in the upper performance device 2.

Before the vibration performance related image 2hg is displayed, a suggestive effect may be executed to suggest that the vibration performance related image 2hg may be displayed. This suggestive effect may be a display effect, a sound effect, or a light-emitting effect. For example, in the case of a display effect, a semi-transparent upward arrow display may appear, gradually materialize, and finally become the arrow display 2hg1. It may also disappear without being materialized. In this case, the vibration performance related image 2hg is not displayed, and the role vibration performance A is not executed. Also, even if the arrow display 2hg1 is displayed (the above suggestive effect is executed), attention may be drawn to the upper performance device 2, and text such as "If it vibrates, it's a big chance" may not be displayed, and the vibration performance related image 2hg may not be displayed after all.

In FIG. 22(6), which is a continuation of FIG. 22(5), after the vibration effect related image 2hg disappears, the upper performance device 2 in the initial position starts vibrating. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords, and also displays the performance display "Big Chance" which makes you expect a big win. The upper performance device 2 continues to vibrate until the super reach performance ends (until the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped). The role vibration performance A performed by the upper performance device 2 here is a normal notice with a 40% expectation of a big win. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(7) displays the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and the combination of decorative patterns for a big win, such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", is temporarily stopped in the center of the display screen, and a 2R special big win (special pattern B) has been won. The upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 22(7) continued to vibrate until just before this, but at the timing of FIG. 22(7), it has stopped vibrating and is in a stationary state. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (8) displays the combination of decorative patterns for the 2R special jackpot.

The vibration of the upper performance device 2 may end before the "Big Chance" performance display that anticipates a big win is displayed.

In addition, even if the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed, there may be cases where the reel vibration effect A is not executed. Furthermore, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher when the reel vibration effect A is executed after the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed than when the reel vibration effect A is not executed.

The vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed when the display of the decorative pattern changes starts (Figure 22 (2)), and the execution timing of the reel vibration effect A during the Super Reach may be when the Super Reach develops (timing of Figure 22 (4)) or after the Super Reach develops (timing of Figure 22 (6)). In other words, the reel vibration effect A may start to be executed at different times during the Super Reach or the Special Super Reach.

On the other hand, in FIG. 22(6'), which is a continuation of FIG. 22(5), after the vibration effect related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 in the initial position does not start vibrating, and the reel vibration effect A is not executed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(6') displays the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(7') displays the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai, and a missing decorative pattern combination such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(8') displays the missing decorative pattern combination as a confirmed display.

Figure 23 shows another example, continuing from Figure 22 (3), in stages.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(4), which is a continuation from FIG. 22(3), the game has progressed to a Super (SP) Reach. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following FIG. 23(5''), the lord and the enemy samurai are shown facing each other, but the vibration effect related image 2hg shown in FIG. 22(5) is not displayed.

In FIG. 23 (6''), the upper performance device 2 in the initial position is vibrating. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with each other. In this example, the vibration period of the upper performance device 2 is short, and the upper performance device 2 stops before the super reach performance ends. The role vibration performance performed by the upper performance device 2 here corresponds to role vibration performance B, and the expectation of a big win is slightly higher than the role vibration performance A performed in FIG. 22, even though it is during the same super reach. However, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6'') does not display the performance display ``big chance'' shown in FIG. 22 (6). The role vibration performance B does not display the vibration performance related image 2hg before execution, the vibration period is shorter than that of the role vibration performance A, and the performance display ``big chance'' is not displayed, so it can be said to be a normal notice that can be understood by players who are familiar with the role vibration performance B and are familiar with this pachinko machine 100. On the other hand, the device vibration effect A can be said to be a normal notice that can be understood even by players who are not familiar with this pachinko machine 100.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (7'') shows the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative patterns for a jackpot, "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", is temporarily displayed, indicating that a 2R special jackpot (Special Pattern B) has been won. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8) shows the decorative pattern combination for the 2R special jackpot as a confirmed display.

Figure 24 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example in which the reel vibration effect B is performed. In this example, the game is in a non-time-saving game state (low probability of special game and low probability of normal game), and left-handed play is recommended.

Figure 24 (1) is a scene where "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" is displayed as a stop, indicating a miss, just like Figure 22 (1). In Figure 24 (2), the display of the decorative pattern changes has begun, just like Figure 22 (2). The display of the decorative pattern changes here, and is a display that develops into a super reach as shown in Figures 22 (1) to (4). When the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, the upper performance device 2 vibrates, and the role vibration performance B is executed. The role vibration performance B here is a normal notice with a 70% chance of a big win. In the role vibration performance B, the expectation of a big win is higher when the display of the decorative pattern starts to change than during a reach or a super reach. When the display of the decorative pattern changes is revealed, it is not clear whether a reach will be achieved in the first place, but a player who is familiar with this pachinko machine 100 will pay attention to the display of the decorative pattern changes with great anticipation from the start of the change when the upper performance device 2 vibrates when the display of the change is revealed. In Figure 24 (3), this progresses to a Super Reach performance, and in Figure 24 (4), the combination of decorative symbols for a guaranteed jackpot, such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7", is displayed as a confirmed combination.

Figure 24 (3-1) is a continuation of Figure 22 (2), where the reach effect has started, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has started. During this reach, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and reel vibration effect B is being executed. Reel vibration effect B here is a normal notice with an expected probability of a jackpot of 35%. In Figure 24 (3-2), it has progressed to a super reach effect, but in the same figure (4'), a combination of missing decorative symbols such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed as a confirmed combination.

Figure 24 (6-1) is a state continuing from Figure 23 (5''). The super reach effect has ended, and the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 24 (6-1) shows the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai, and a combination of decoration patterns for a miss, such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the role vibration effect B is being executed. The role vibration effect B here is a normal notice with a 100% expectation of a jackpot, and in the following Figure 24 (6-2), a wipe effect, which is a revival effect, has started. After the wipe-in shown in Figure 24 (6-3) is completed, a wipe-out is performed, the wipe effect, which is a revival effect, ends, and the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 24 (4'') displays a combination of decoration patterns for a normal jackpot, such as "decoration 7-decoration 13-decoration 7".

As explained above, both the reel vibration performance A and the reel vibration performance B are performance actions that suggest the expectation of a jackpot, but the upper performance device 2 may be capable of executing a vibration action different from the vibration performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot. The vibration action that is unrelated to the expectation of a jackpot may have a weaker vibration strength than the vibration action of the reel vibration performance A, or may be weaker than the vibration action of the reel vibration performance B. Alternatively, the vibration action that is unrelated to the expectation of a jackpot may have a shorter vibration time than the vibration action of the reel vibration performance A, or may be shorter than the vibration action of the reel vibration performance B. Furthermore, the vibration action that is unrelated to the expectation of a jackpot may be an announcement action that is executed when the reserved number is accumulated to a predetermined number. For example, the upper performance device 2 may execute a vibration action when the reserved number reaches 3, one step before the reserved number is full. This vibration action suggests a stop shot.

Next, we will explain the button vibration effect in which the effect button 136 vibrates. Like the reel vibration effect, the button vibration effect is also a normal preview effect. Also, like the reel vibration effect B, the button vibration effect does not display an image related to the effect button 136. In this respect, it differs from the button preview in which the button image 136a etc. shown in Figure 17 (6) and Figure 19 (35) are displayed.

Figure 25 shows a table related to the button vibration effect. The button vibration effect may be executed by a variable display of decorative symbols that combines a reach effect and a pseudo consecutive effect. Even in the case of a normal reach, it is executed at the first temporary stop due to the pseudo consecutive effect (see Figure 12 (2)), and the expected probability of a jackpot at this execution timing is 13%.

Also, like the role vibration effect B, the button vibration effect may be performed during the display of the decorative pattern that causes a Super (SP) reach, or during the display of the decorative pattern that causes a Special Super (SPSP) reach. The button vibration effect is also a normal notice with a different probability of winning depending on the execution timing. In other words, in the display of the decorative pattern that causes a Super (SP) reach, if the button vibration effect is performed at the start of the decorative pattern's change, the probability of winning is 50%, if it is performed at the first provisional stop display due to the pseudo consecutive performance, the probability of winning is 13%, if it is performed at the second provisional stop display due to the pseudo consecutive performance, the probability of winning is 15%, if it is performed at the third provisional stop display due to the pseudo consecutive performance, the probability of winning is 30%, and if it is performed during the development of the Super Reach, the probability of winning is 36%. Furthermore, if it is performed during the temporary stop display of a decorative pattern combination that indicates a miss (during the revival effect), the probability of a jackpot is 100%. As with the role vibration effect B, the probability of a jackpot is 100%, meaning that the revival effect that will ultimately result in a jackpot is in progress. Also, in the decorative pattern variation display that results in a Special Super (SPSP) reach, the execution timing when the Special Super reach develops is added. If the button vibration effect is performed during this Special Super reach development, the probability of a jackpot is 48%.

Figure 26 is a diagram showing an example of a button vibration effect in stages. In this example, the game is in a non-time-saving game state (low probability of special symbols and low probability of normal symbols) and left-handed play is recommended. Also, in Figure 26, the effect button 136 is shown at the bottom left of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effects in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Fig. 26(1) to (9) are the same as those in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Fig. 12(1) to (9). That is, in Fig. 26(1), the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special pattern 1 is started. In Fig. 26(2), the pseudo consecutive performance is started, and the pseudo consecutive pattern (decorative pattern marked "NEXT") suggesting the pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center pattern display area 208b, and "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right pattern display area 208c, respectively, and the first temporary stop display is performed. In Fig. 26(2), the appearance of the performance button 136 vibrating at the time of this first temporary stop display is shown, and the button vibration performance is performed. The expected probability of a big hit of the button vibration performance at this execution timing is 13%. In Figure 26 (3), the display screen goes black, and in the following Figure 26 (4), the state immediately before the second change (re-change) in the pseudo consecutive performance begins is shown. In Figure 26 (5), the second change (re-change) of the decorative pattern has begun.

When the effect button 136 that has been vibrated by the button vibration effect is pressed within a specified period of time, a response display (for example, the text "It's hot") may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 26(6), the decorative pattern "Decoration 5" is displayed temporarily in the left pattern display area 208a, and in FIG. 26(7), the decorative pattern "Decoration 1" is displayed temporarily in the right pattern display area 208c. In the following FIG. 26(8), the decorative pattern "Decoration 4" is displayed temporarily in the center pattern display area 208b, and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed temporarily (wavering and fluctuating), and in FIG. 26(9), the losing decorative pattern combination is displayed as confirmed.

The effects of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figures 26(A) to 26(E) are the same as those of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figures 13(18) to 13(22). That is, in Figure 26(A), the variable display of the decorative pattern of special pattern 1 starts under the rear stage, and in Figure 26(B), the reach state is established, and "Decoration 2" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. In Figure 26(C), it has progressed to a super reach. In Figure 26(C), the state in which the effect button 136 is vibrating during the super reach development is shown, and a button vibration effect is being performed. The expected probability of a big hit with the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 36%.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 26 (E) displays an animation of a lord triumphing over an enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative patterns for a normal jackpot, such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2," is temporarily displayed, and in the same figure (E), the combination of decorative patterns for a normal jackpot is displayed as a confirmed combination.

The button vibration effect described above does not display an image related to the effect button 136, the vibration period is shorter than that of the reel vibration effect A, and no effect display corresponding to the button vibration effect is displayed, so it can be said to be a normal notice that players who are familiar with this pachinko machine 100 and who are already familiar with button vibration effects can understand.

The button vibration effect may be an effect in which the decision button 1930 vibrates instead of the effect button 136.

The effect button 136 may also perform the same vibration action as the vibration action described in the explanation of the upper effect device 2, which is unrelated to the expected probability of a jackpot.

According to the above description,
"A first vibration means (e.g., upper performance device 2) capable of executing a first vibration operation (e.g., a role vibration performance A) and
A display means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208);
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means starts displaying a first image related to the first vibration means [e.g., a vibration performance related image 2hg] before the execution of the first vibration action is started.
He explained:

This gaming machine makes it less likely that a player will miss the first vibration motion. Furthermore, the player may play the game in anticipation of the first vibration motion, which may increase the player's interest in the game.

The first vibration action may be a performance action or a notification action.

The first image may be an image that draws attention to the first vibration means or an image that draws interest to the first vibration means.

The display means may also start displaying the first image before the execution of the first vibration action starts and after the reach effect starts [for example, FIG. 22 (5)].

In addition, before starting to display the first image, it may be possible to execute an effect (for example, a display effect, a sound effect, or a light emission effect) that suggests that the first image may be displayed. Note that even if this effect is executed, there may be cases where the first image is not displayed.

Also,
"The display means terminates the display of the first image before the execution of the first vibration motion is started [for example, FIG. 22 (5)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first vibration means is capable of executing a second vibration operation [for example, a reel vibration performance B],
The display means does not display the first image before the execution of the second vibration motion is started (for example, FIG. 23 (6″)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The second vibration action may be an action that starts vibrating at a different timing than the first vibration action (for example, when the variation starts as shown in FIG. 21(b), during a reach, or when a losing symbol is temporarily stopped), or may be an action that vibrates in a different way than the first vibration action.

Also,
"The first vibration operation continues to vibrate for a longer period of time than the second vibration operation [for example, the vibration continues until the super reach performance ends (until the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"A second vibration means different from the first vibration means [for example, the performance button 136 or the decision button 1930] is provided,
the second vibration means is capable of executing a third vibration action (e.g., a button vibration effect);
The display means does not display an image related to the second vibration means before the execution of the third vibration operation is started (for example, no image is displayed in either FIG. 26(1) or FIG. 26(A)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

"The first vibration means may not execute the first vibration action even when the first image is displayed on the display means." Also, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher when the first vibration action is executed after the first image is displayed than when the first vibration action is not executed.

"The first vibration means may start executing the first vibration action at a first timing [for example, the timing at which the Super Reach develops in FIG. 22(4)] after the first image is displayed on the display means [for example, when the decorative pattern changing display in FIG. 22(2) begins], or may start executing the first vibration action at a second timing that is later than the first timing [for example, the timing after the Super Reach develops (the timing in FIG. 22(6)]." In other words, the first vibration means may start executing the first vibration action at different timings after the first image is displayed on the display means.

"The first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] may be disposed on a door element [e.g., front frame door 106] and may be capable of vibrating whether the door element is in a closed or open state." The first vibration means may also be disposed on a door element and continue the first vibration action that started when the door element was in a closed state even when the door element is in an open state. Alternatively, the first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] may be disposed on a member other than the door element [e.g., main body 104] and may be capable of vibrating whether the door element is in a closed or open state. The first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] may also be disposed on a member other than the door element [e.g., main body 104] and continue the first vibration action that started when the door element was in a closed state even when the door element is in an open state. The second vibration means [e.g., the performance button 136 or the decision button 1930] may be arranged on the door member [e.g., the ball storage tray door 108] and may be capable of vibrating whether the door member is in a closed or open state. The second vibration means [e.g., the performance button 136 or the decision button 1930] may be arranged on the door member [e.g., the ball storage tray door 108] and may continue the first vibration operation that started when the door member is in a closed state even when the door member is in an open state. Alternatively, the second vibration means [e.g., the lower performance device 3] may be arranged on a member [e.g., the main body 104] other than the door member [e.g., the ball storage tray door 108] and may be capable of vibrating whether the door member is in a closed or open state. In addition, the second vibration means [e.g., lower performance device 3] may be disposed on a separate member [e.g., main body 104] from the door member [e.g., door 108 with ball storage tray], and the first vibration action that starts when the door member is closed may be continued even when the door member is open.

"The display means [e.g., decorative pattern display device 208] may start displaying a third image [e.g., a text display of "It's hot"] after finishing displaying the first image [e.g., vibration effect related image 2hg]." The third image may be a response display in response to the operation of the first vibration means [e.g., effect button 136].

"The first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] is capable of executing a fourth vibration action, and the first vibration action [e.g., reel vibration performance A] is a performance action that suggests the expectation of a jackpot [e.g., the expectation of a jackpot shown in FIG. 21(a)], and the second vibration action [e.g., reel vibration performance B] is also a performance action that suggests the expectation of a jackpot [e.g., the expectation of a jackpot shown in FIG. 21(b)], and the fourth vibration action may not be a performance action that suggests the expectation of a jackpot." Also, the fourth vibration action may have a vibration strength that is weaker than the first vibration action, or may be weaker than the second vibration action. Alternatively, the fourth vibration action may have a vibration time that is shorter than the first vibration action, or may be shorter than the second vibration action. Furthermore, the fourth vibration action may be a notification action that is executed when the reserved number is accumulated to a predetermined number.

Next, we will explain the background effects, which are normal preview effects similar to the button vibration effects. Here, we will explain the execution (start) timing of the background effects and the expected probability of a jackpot.

Figure 27 (a) is a diagram showing a table related to background effects. Background effects may also be executed (started) during the display of decorative patterns that combine reach effects and pseudo consecutive effects. Background effects are not executed during the display of decorative patterns that perform normal reach, but may be executed (started) during the display of decorative patterns that perform super (SP) reach and during the display of decorative patterns that perform special super (SPSP) reach. That is, in the display of decorative patterns that perform super (SP) reach, if the background effect is executed at the start of the decorative pattern change, the expectation of a big win is 20%, if it is executed at the time of the second temporary stop display due to pseudo consecutive effect, the expectation of a big win is 25%, and if it is executed during a super reach, the expectation of a big win is 35%. In addition, in the display of decorative patterns that perform special super (SPSP) reach, the execution timing during the special super reach is added. If the background animation occurs during this special super reach, the chance of a big win is 40%.

Next, the mini character presentation will be explained. There are mini character presentations in which mini character A appears and mini character B appears. There may also be presentations in which different types of mini characters appear. The mini character presentation is also a normal preview presentation, but the expectation of a jackpot remains the same even if the mini character that appears changes. However, the expectation of a jackpot may also change if the mini character that appears changes. Also, the execution timing is the same even if the mini character changes, but the execution timing may also change if the mini character changes. Furthermore, the mini character displayed may change depending on the presentation mode, or the mini character displayed may change as a result of an internal lottery regardless of the presentation mode.

Figure 27 (b) shows a table related to mini character effects. This table is common to both mini character A and mini character B.

As with the role vibration effect, the mini character effect may be performed during the execution of a Super (SP) reach or during the execution of a Special Super (SPSP) reach. As shown in the table in FIG. 27(b), in the mini character effect, multiple execution timings are prepared for one decorative pattern change display. However, regardless of the execution timing, the expectation of a big win is the same. In other words, in the decorative pattern change display in which a Super (SP) reach is performed, the expectation of a big win is 55% even if the mini character effect is performed before the first reach state is established, during the Super reach (after the development into the Super reach and before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped), or during the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. In addition, in the decorative pattern change display in which a Special Super (SPSP) reach is performed, during the Super reach means after the development into the Super reach and before the development into the Special Super reach, and an execution timing of during the Special Super reach is added. This "special super reach" refers to the period after the special super reach has developed and before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. Even if the mini character performance is performed during this special super reach, the probability of a big win is 55%.

Figure 28 is a diagram showing an example of mini-character presentation in stages. In the example shown in Figure 28, the game is in a non-time-saving game state (low probability of special chart, low probability of normal chart) and left-handed play is recommended.

Figure 28 (1) shows a scene where "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" is displayed frozen, indicating a miss. In the following Figure 28 (2), the display of varying decorative patterns begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (2), a mini character related image (mcg) related to the mini character performance is displayed at the top of the display screen. This mini character related image (mcg) contains a warning that a mini character performance may begin and a tutorial-like text display such as "It'll be exciting when they appear."

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (3), the mini-character related image mcg has disappeared, and in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c, the decorative patterns are changing rapidly, and part of the mini-character Amcr is beginning to be seen above the left edge of the display screen. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (4), the entire mini-character Amcr is displayed. This mini-character Amcr is a rocket character, and is flying toward the right side.

In FIG. 28 (5), the reach effect has started, and "Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has started. The mini character Amcr continues to fly, but is lowering in altitude.

In FIG. 28 (6), the normal reach has progressed to a super reach. Even on the screen that has progressed to a super reach, the mini character Amcr is still displayed, and continues to fly. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following FIG. 28 (7) displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly, but this time at an increased altitude.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(8) displays the scene after the Lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords, with the mini character Amcr still displayed. The mini character Amcr that appeared before the reach was achieved in FIG. 28(3) continues to be displayed until the super reach performance ends, that is, until the display of the temporary stop display begins. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(9) displays the Lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and the combination of decorative patterns for a normal jackpot, such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1," is displayed temporarily in the center of the display screen, and the mini character Amcr has disappeared, but was displayed until just before this. In FIG. 28(10), the combination of decorative patterns for that normal jackpot is displayed as confirmed.

The mini character Amcr disappeared at the same time as the end of the super reach performance (when the temporary stop display began to appear), but it may also disappear before the super reach performance ends (before the temporary stop display is displayed). Also, after appearing, the mini character Amcr may become invisible for a moment and then reappear.

Figure 28 (3') is another example continuing from Figure 2 (2). In Figure 2 (2), the mini character related image mcg is displayed, but unlike the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 2 (3), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 2 (3') does not show part of the mini character Amcr. In Figure 28 (5'), the reach performance starts, and the mini character Amcr does not appear before the reach is established. In Figure 28 (7'), the super reach performance is performed, but the mini character Amcr does not appear, and in the end, the super reach performance ends without the mini character appearing, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (9') displays the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai, and the combination of decorative patterns that is a failure, such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1", is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. In Figure 28 (10'), the combination of decorative patterns that is a failure is displayed as a confirmed one.

Figure 29 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the role vibration effect B and the mini character effect. In this figure, the upper effect device 2 is shown above the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 29 (7-1), after the development into the super reach performance, the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, and also displays the mini character related image mcg. The mini character related image mcg may be displayed when the display of the decorative pattern change starts, as shown in FIG. 28 (2). The decoration pattern display device 208 shown in the following FIG. 29 (7-2) also displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, but the mini character related image mcg disappears, and a part of the mini character Amcr begins to be seen above the left edge of the display screen. Also, the upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2) is vibrating, and the role vibration performance B is being performed. In this way, during the super reach, the mini character performance and the role vibration performance B may be executed in parallel. In this way, the two types of normal notices overlap, making it possible to perform a hot performance. However, the execution of the mini character performance and the role vibration performance B are not started at the same time. In other words, the start timing of the execution of the mini character performance is not synchronized with the start timing of the execution of the role vibration performance B. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (8''), the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with each other is displayed, with the rocket mini character Amcr flying to the right. Note that the upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (8'') has stopped vibrating and is in a stationary state. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9''), the mini character Amcr has disappeared, and a missing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed temporarily in the center of the display screen, and although not shown, a missing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed as a confirmed combination, just like in FIG. 28 (10').

Figure 29 (7-1') is in the same state as Figure 29 (7-1), and after the development into the super reach performance, the mini character related image mcg is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following Figure 29 (7-2'), the mini character related image mcg disappears, and a part of the mini character Bmcu begins to be seen above the left edge of the display screen. On the other hand, the upper performance device 2 shown in Figure 29 (7-2') does not vibrate and remains stationary in the initial position. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (8'''), the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords is displayed, and the mini character Bmcu is flying to the right. The mini character Bmcu is a UFO character. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (9-1), the mini character Bmcu disappears, and a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In this example, the mini character Bmcu appears, but the same applies when the mini character Amcr appears. Also, the upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (9-1) is vibrating, and the role vibration performance B is being performed.

In the following Figure 29 (9-2), the provisional stop display has ended and the wipe effect, which is a revival effect, has begun. Note that the upper effect device 2 shown in Figure 29 (9-2) has stopped vibrating and is in a stationary state. In the following Figure 29 (9-3), the wipe-in has been completed. When the wipe-in is complete, the wipe-out begins and part of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and in Figure 29 (9-4), the wipe effect ends and the combination of decorative patterns for a normal jackpot, such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1", is provisionally stopped and the revival effect has been successful. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (10''), the combination of decorative patterns for a normal jackpot is displayed as confirmed.

As explained above, unlike during a Super Reach, when a losing symbol is temporarily stopped, the mini character effect and the device vibration effect B are not executed in parallel. This is because if the device vibration effect is executed during a losing symbol is temporarily stopped, it means that a big win has been confirmed, so the game can be exciting enough without having to perform two types of normal notices.

In addition, the execution period length (vibration period length) of the reel vibration effect B is the same even if the start timing is different, whereas the execution period length (display period length) of the mini character effect differs if the start timing is different. In other words, if the mini character effect starts before a reach is reached, the execution period is from Figure 28 (3) to just before (9) in the same figure, and if it starts during a super reach, the execution period is from Figure 29 (7-2) to just before (9'') in the same figure, and the lengths of both execution periods are different.

According to the above description,
"A display means capable of executing a decorative pattern variable display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208];
A performance means capable of executing a plurality of types of performances (e.g., an upper performance device 2, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, a role vibration effect B] that indicates the expectation of a jackpot,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect that indicates the expectation of a big win [for example, a mini character effect or other decorative pattern display device 208],
The performance means is capable of executing the first performance at one start timing among a plurality of start timings in one decorative pattern variable display [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 21(b)],
The performance means is capable of executing the second performance at one start timing among a plurality of start timings in one decorative pattern variable display [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27(b)],
The first performance is a performance in which the suggested jackpot expectation rate differs depending on which start timing is executed [for example, the jackpot expectation rate shown in FIG. 21(b)],
The second performance is a performance in which the suggested jackpot expectation rate does not change regardless of the start timing of the performance [for example, the jackpot expectation rate shown in FIG. 27(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, two types of presentation can potentially increase the excitement of the game.

Also,
"When the performance means executes the first performance [e.g., the role vibration performance B] at a first start timing [e.g., a certain timing during a super reach], the second performance [e.g., the mini character A performance] can be executed in parallel with the first performance [e.g., FIG. 29 (7-2)],
The presentation means is characterized in that, when the first presentation is executed at a second start timing [for example, at a certain timing during a losing symbol temporary stop], the second presentation cannot be executed in parallel with the first presentation [for example, the mini character presentation disappears when the losing symbol temporary stop] [for example, FIG. 29 (9-1) when the mini character Amcr appears instead of the mini character Bmcu].
He also explained:

Also,
"The presentation means is capable of executing the first presentation [for example, the role vibration presentation B] both in the decorative pattern change display resulting in a jackpot [for example, FIG. 24 (2)] and in the decorative pattern change display resulting in a miss [for example, FIG. 29 (7-2)],
The presentation means is capable of executing the second presentation [e.g., the mini character A presentation], as well as the decorative pattern variation display resulting in a big win [e.g., immediately before FIG. 28 (3) to FIG. 28 (9)] and the decorative pattern variation display resulting in a loss [e.g., immediately before FIG. 29 (7-2) to FIG. 29 (9 ″)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

"The first effect is an effect whose execution period length does not change even if the start timing is different, and the second effect may be an effect whose execution period length also changes if the start timing is different [for example, if it is started before the establishment of a reach, it is from FIG. 28 (3) to just before FIG. 28 (9), and if it is started during a SP reach, it is from FIG. 29 (7-2) to just before FIG. 29 (9'')]."
"One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect [for example, a mini-character B effect] that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot, and the effect means executes the third effect at one start timing selected from multiple start timings in one decorative pattern change display [for example, multiple execution timings shown in Figure 27 (b)], and the third effect is an effect that suggests the same likelihood of a jackpot even if the start timing of execution is different [for example, the likelihood of a jackpot shown in Figure 27 (b)], and the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the third effect may be the same as the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the second effect." Alternatively, the second effect may be an effect having multiple presentation forms [for example, a presentation form in which mini-character Amcr appears and a presentation form in which mini-character Bmcu appears].

"The presentation means can execute the first presentation both in a decorative pattern change display that results in a big win [e.g., FIG. 24(2)] and in a decorative pattern change display that results in a loss [e.g., FIG. 29(7-2)], but may not be able to execute the first presentation at a specific timing in a decorative pattern change display that results in a loss [e.g., the timing during the execution of a revival presentation that ultimately results in a loss] [e.g., the multiple execution timings shown in FIG. 27(b)]."
"The production means may not start the execution of the first performance and the execution of the second performance simultaneously." In other words, the start timing of the execution of the first performance and the start timing of the execution of the second performance may be different.

"The presentation means may include a first presentation means [e.g., upper presentation device 2] and a second presentation means [e.g., decorative pattern display device 208]." In this case, the first presentation means may be capable of executing the first presentation, and the second presentation means may be capable of executing the second presentation. Alternatively, the presentation means may include a plurality of types of presentation means, and the first presentation and the second presentation may be capable of being executed by different presentation means, or some of the plurality of types of presentation means [e.g., game board lamp 442 or game table frame lamp 452] may be capable of executing at least a portion of the first presentation and the second presentation in common [e.g., illuminate when the first presentation starts, and also illuminate when the second presentation starts].

"The first effect [e.g., device vibration effect B] may suggest a higher expectation of a jackpot when executed in the second gaming state [e.g., a probability variable gaming state, a time-limited gaming state, or a probability variable and time-limited gaming state] than when executed in the first gaming state [e.g., a non-probability variable gaming state, a non-time-limited gaming state, or a normal gaming state (non-probability variable and non-time-limited gaming state)]." "The second effect [e.g., a mini-character effect] may also suggest a higher expectation of a jackpot when executed in the second gaming state than when executed in the first gaming state." Or, the first effect may suggest the same expectation of a jackpot whether executed in the second gaming state or the first gaming state. The second effect may also suggest the same expectation of a jackpot whether executed in the second gaming state or the first gaming state. The second game state may be a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Note that although the term "game state" is used here, in the case where a presentation mode based on the game state is included, the game state may be read as a presentation mode.

The presentation means may execute the first presentation at one start timing selected from among multiple start timings in the reach fluctuation display [for example, when a reach is established, when a super reach develops, after a super reach develops, when a special super reach develops, and after a special super reach develops], and the presentation means may also execute the second presentation at one start timing selected from multiple start timings in the reach fluctuation display [for example, when a reach is established, when a super reach develops, after a super reach develops, when a special super reach develops, and after a special super reach develops].

In the game progression examples described above, there are cases where button previews (Fig. 17 (5), Fig. 19 (35)) using the effect button 136 and button vibration effects (Fig. 26) are performed. Here, we will again explain the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137, which may be operated during the game progression.

The button sensor 426 shown in FIG. 4 outputs a detection signal indicating that the operation surface (top surface) of the performance button 136, the up button 1910, the down button 1920, and the decision button 1930 arranged on the operation key unit 190 has been operated (pressed) to a predetermined pressing position. The maximum operation stroke of the various buttons 136, 1910 to 1930 may be up to the predetermined pressing position (detection position), or may be operable beyond the predetermined pressing position. In other words, the position of the operation end point may be the predetermined pressing position, or may be a position beyond the predetermined pressing position. Hereinafter, the operation amount (stroke amount) from the start point position, which is the initial position, to the end point position, which is the operation end point, is simply referred to as the operation amount.

Figure 30(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the operation amount of the effect button 136, and also shows the operation surface 1361 of the effect button 136.

In FIG. 30(a), the performance button 136 at the initial position, which is the starting point, is shown by a solid line, and a downward arrow indicates the operation direction. The performance button 136 at the end point is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The effect button 136 may be one in which the amount of operation may change. In other words, the effect button 136 may be one in which the amount of operation is large and one in which the amount of operation is small.

Figure 30(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the operation amount of the upper button 1910 arranged on the operation key unit 190, and also shows the operation surface 1911 of the upper button 1910.

In FIG. 30(b), the upper button 1910 at the initial position, which is the starting point, is indicated by a solid line, and a downward arrow indicates the operation direction. The upper button 1910 at the end point is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Note that the operation amount of the lower button 1920 arranged on the operation key unit 190 is the same as that of the upper button 1910.

The amount of operation of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 30(a) is greater than the amount of operation of the up button 1910 shown in FIG. 30(b). In addition, the amount of operation of the decision button 1930 (not shown here) arranged on the operation key unit 190 is less than the amount of operation of the effect button 136, but greater than the amount of operation of the up button 1910 and the down button 1920. However, the amount of operation of the decision button 1930 and the amount of operation of the effect button 136 may be the same.

When the operating lever 137 is operated (depressed) to a predetermined position, the lever sensor 427 shown in FIG. 4 outputs a detection signal indicating that the operating lever 137 has been operated. The maximum operating stroke of the operating lever 137 may be up to the predetermined operating position (detection position), or it may be possible to operate the operating lever 137 beyond the predetermined operating position. In other words, the position of the operation end point may be the predetermined operating position, or it may be a position beyond the predetermined operating position. Regarding the operating lever 137, the amount of operation (stroke amount) from the start point position, which is the initial position, to the end point position, which is the operation end point, is simply referred to as the operating amount.

Figure 30(c) is a diagram showing the amount of operation of the operating lever 137, and the central axis 1371 of the operating lever 137 is also shown by a dotted line.

In Figure 30(c), the operating lever 137 in the starting position, which is the initial position, is shown by a solid line. The operating lever 137 in the starting position is in a vertical position and can be tilted in any direction through 360 degrees. In Figure 30(c), the tilting of the operating lever 137 in a certain direction is shown by an arc-shaped arrow. The operating lever 137 in the end position is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The amount of operation of the operating lever 137 shown in FIG. 30(c) is greater than the amount of operation of the up button 1910 shown in FIG. 30(b), greater than the amount of operation of the decision button 1930 (not shown), and greater than the amount of operation of the performance button 136 shown in FIG. 30(a).

The above comparisons were made with respect to the amount of operation up to the end position, but the same results can be obtained even if the amount of operation is from the start position to the above-mentioned specified pressed position (detection position) for the various buttons 136 and 1910 to 1930, and from the start position to the above-mentioned specified operation position (detection position) for the operating lever 137. In other words, the amount of operation up to the detection position by the sensors 426 and 427 is also the greatest for the operating lever 137, and the least for the up button 1910 and down button 1920.

Next, the operation effects using operation means such as the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 will be explained. Note that this operation effect also includes the button preview executed in FIG. 17 (5) and FIG. 19 (35). Also, the operation effect is an effect in which related images (each button-related image, each lever-related image) related to the operation means (the effect button 136, the operation lever 137, etc.) described below are displayed. In other words, it can be said to be the period during which the operation of the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation lever 137 is valid.

Figure 31 is a diagram showing a table summarizing button-related images related to the effect button 136. The button-related images related to the effect button 136 referred to here are images displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in the operation effect, and are images that encourage the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective operation period. More specifically, the images include a button image that imitates the effect button 136, a meter display that shows the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 136, and a character display that shows the operation type of the effect button 136.

At the top of the table shown in FIG. 31, a normal button-related image is shown. The normal button-related image includes a normal-sized button image 136aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN saying "press". The normal size here refers to the standard display size. In addition, in the explanations of FIG. 30 to FIG. 46, the white color is represented by no hatching and no pattern. The button image 136aN of the normal button-related image is an image that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is emitting white light at the initial position (starting point position). In addition, the blue meter display 136bN displays a blue bar portion on a white background, and this blue bar portion decreases. In the explanations of FIG. 30 to FIG. 46, the blue color is represented by hatching that faces diagonally downward to the left. In this table, a state in which the blue bar portion has decreased slightly is shown. In addition, the black text display 136cN "press" is a black text display that encourages the performance button 136 to be pressed once.

Below the normal button-related image is a red button-related image. The red button-related image includes a normal-sized red button image 136aR, a normal-sized red meter display 136bR, and a normal-sized red "PRESS" character display 136cR. The red button-related image has the same display size as the normal button-related image, but is a different color. In the explanations of Figures 30 to 46, cross-hatching is used to represent the color red.

In the table shown in FIG. 31, the magnification of the display size relative to the normal size is shown to the right of the button-related image. In addition, the magnification of the valid operation period length is shown to the right of the display size magnification. The magnification of the valid operation period length is the magnification relative to the length of the valid operation period represented by the normal-sized blue meter display 136bN in the normal button-related image. In the red button-related image, the display size magnification is 1x, and the magnification of the valid operation period is also 1x.

The red button image 136aR is an image that mimics the state in which the button lamp 138 is illuminated in red at the initial position. In addition, the red meter display 136bR displays a red bar on a white background, and this red bar decreases. In this table, the state in which the red bar has decreased slightly is shown. Furthermore, the "Press" in the red character display 136cR is a red character display that encourages the player to press the performance button 136 once.

A large button-related image is shown below the red button-related image. The large button-related image includes a large button image 136aB twice the normal size, a large blue meter display 136bB twice the normal size, and a large black character display 136cB that says "press" and is larger than the normal size. The large button image 136aB is an image in which the button lamp 138 is displayed large in the initial position and illuminated in white. The large blue meter display 136bB is displayed at twice the normal size, but the length of the effective operation period is one time. When the player sees the large blue meter display 136bB, he or she is likely to think that the effective operation period is extended more than the blue meter display 136bN, but in this embodiment, the effective operation period is not extended and is the same period length as the blue meter display 136bN. The large black character display 136cB is not as large as the double display size of the black character display 136cN, but it may be double the display size. In addition, instead of the large blue meter display 136bB that is twice the normal size, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN may be displayed, and instead of the large black text display 136cB that says "press" larger than the normal size, a normal-sized black text display 136cN that says "press" may be displayed.

Small button-related images are shown below the large button-related images. The small button-related images include a small button image 136aS that is 0.8 times the normal size, a small blue meter display 136bS that is 0.8 times the normal size, and a small black character display 136cS that says "press" that is 0.8 times the normal size. The small button image 136aS is a small image of the button lamp 138 in its initial position, emitting white light. The small blue meter display 136bS is displayed at a size 0.8 times the normal size, but the length of the effective operation period is 1 time. When players look at the small blue meter display 136bS, they tend to think that the effective operation period is shorter than that of the blue meter display 136bN, but in this embodiment, the effective operation period is not shortened and is the same length as the blue meter display 136bN. This small button-related image is a rare image that appears least frequently among the button-related images shown in the table of FIG. 31.

A rapid-hit button-related image is shown below the small button-related image. The rapid-hit button-related image includes a normal-sized button image 136aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a black character display 136cC that reads "repeated" in the same character size as the normal size. In this rapid-hit button-related image, only the character display indicating the operation type differs from the normal button-related image. In addition, the effective operation period is displayed using a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and the length of the effective operation period appears to be the same as that of the normal button-related image. However, unlike when a normal button-related image is displayed, which requires only one operation, when a rapid-hit button-related image is displayed, the operation time is longer because repeated operation is required. For this reason, when a rapid-hit button-related image is displayed, the effective operation period is extended, and is 1.6 times longer than when a normal button-related image is displayed.

Below the rapid-hit button-related image, a long press button-related image is shown. The long press button-related image includes a normal-sized button image 136aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and black text display 136cL saying "long press" in the same text size as the normal size. As with the rapid-hit button-related image, this long press button-related image differs from the normal button-related image only in the text display indicating the operation type. In addition, the effective operation period is displayed using a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and the length of the effective operation period appears to be the same as that of the normal button-related image. However, because the operation time is lengthened by the long press operation, the effective operation period is extended even when the long press button-related image is displayed, and is 1.6 times longer than when the normal button-related image is displayed.

Note that the images related to the rapid-hit button and the images related to the long-press button may display button images different from the normal-sized button image 136aN. For example, an animation of the effect button 136 being repeatedly pressed may be displayed, or an image imitating the effect button 136 at the end position may be displayed. The length of the effective operation period may also be different between the images related to the rapid-hit button and the images related to the long-press button. For example, the images related to the rapid-hit button may be longer (1.8 times as long as an example).

In addition, although a button-related image for the performance button 136 is shown here, button-related images for the various buttons 1910-1930 constituting the operation key unit 190 may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Alternatively, even when a button-related image for the performance button 136 is displayed, the operation of the various buttons 1910-1930 constituting the operation key unit 190 may be accepted instead of the performance button 136.

Figure 32 is a diagram showing a table summarizing lever-related images related to the operating lever 137. The lever-related images related to the operating lever 137 referred to here are images displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in the operation performance, and are images that encourage the operating lever 137 to be operated within the effective operation period. More specifically, they include a lever image that imitates the operating lever 137, a meter display that shows the remaining effective operation period of the operating lever 137, and a text display such as "lever on."

At the top of the table shown in FIG. 32, a normal lever-related image is shown. The normal lever-related image includes a normal-sized lever image 137aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 137bN, and a normal-sized black text display 137cN that reads "lever on." The normal size here refers to the standard display size. The lever image 137aN in the normal lever-related image is an image that imitates the state in which the lever lamp 139 is lit in white at the initial position (starting point position). The normal-sized blue meter display 137bN is a white background with a blue bar portion hatched diagonally downward to the left, and this blue bar portion decreases. This table shows a state in which the blue bar portion has decreased slightly. The length of the effective operation period represented by this normal-sized blue meter display 137bN is the same as the length of the effective operation period represented by the normal-sized blue meter display 136bN in the normal button-related image. Furthermore, the black text display 137cN "lever on" is a black text display that encourages the user to operate the operating lever 137.

A red lever-related image is shown below the normal lever-related image. The red lever-related image includes a normal-sized red lever image 137aR, a normal-sized red meter display 137bR, and a normal-sized red text display saying "LEVER ON" 137cR. The red lever-related image is the same display size as the normal lever-related image, but is a different color.

In the table shown in FIG. 32, the magnification of the display size relative to the normal size is shown to the right of the lever-related image. In addition, the magnification of the valid operation period length is shown to the right of the display size magnification. The magnification of the valid operation period length is the magnification relative to the length of the valid operation period represented by the normal-sized blue meter display 137bN in the normal lever-related image. In the red lever-related image, the display size magnification is 1x, and the magnification of the valid operation period is also 1x.

The red lever image 137aR is an image that mimics the state in which the lever lamp 139 is illuminated in red at the initial position. Additionally, the red meter display 137bR displays a red bar on a white background, and this red bar decreases. This table shows a state in which the red bar has decreased slightly. Additionally, the red text display 137cR, "LEVER ON," is a red text display that encourages the user to operate the operating lever 137.

The large lever-related image is shown below the red lever-related image. The large lever-related image includes a large lever image 137aB twice the normal size, a large blue meter display 137bB twice the normal size, and a large black character display 137cB saying "lever on" twice the normal size. The large lever image 137aB is an image in which the lever lamp 139 is displayed large in the initial position and illuminated in white. The large blue meter display 137bB is displayed at twice the normal size, but the length of the effective operation period is one time. When a player sees the large blue meter display 137bB, they tend to think that the effective operation period is extended more than the blue meter display 137bN, but in this embodiment, the effective operation period is not extended and is the same period length as the blue meter display 137bN. The large black character display 137cB is twice the display size of the black character display 137cN, but is not limited to twice the size, and may be larger than the black character display 137cN. In addition, instead of the large blue meter display 137bB that is twice the normal size, a normal-sized blue meter display 137bN may be displayed, and instead of the large black text display 137cB that is twice the normal size and says "LEVER ON", a normal-sized black text display 137cN that says "LEVER ON" may be displayed.

As explained above, the length of the effective operation period is the same for lever-related images regardless of the type of image. The length of the effective operation period for the operating lever 137 is longer than the length of the effective operation period represented by the normal-sized blue meter display 136bN in normal button-related images. This is because the operating lever 137 requires more operation than the performance button 136, and therefore takes longer to complete the operation. However, the length of the effective operation period for both may be the same.

In addition, the button-related image types include images that encourage rapid tapping (rapid tap button related images) and long press operations (long press button related images), but the lever-related images do not include images that encourage rapid tapping (for example, rapid tap lever related images) or long press operations (for example, long press lever related images). In this way, by not providing rapid tapping or long press operations using an operating means that requires a large amount of operation (here, operating lever 137), it is possible to avoid giving the impression that the operating means that requires a large amount of operation is cumbersome. Furthermore, by reducing the frequency of use and increasing rarity, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation (excitement) when using it.

Note that in the tables of Figures 31 and 32, the description "1x" may be 1.1x or 0.9x. In other words, there may be some difference, or a difference may be intentionally provided.

The effective operation period of the effect button 136 in the operation presentation is the period from when the normal button related image starts to be displayed until the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN disappears, using the normal button related image as an example. The same applies to red button related images, large button related images, and rapid-fire button related images. The effective operation period of the operation lever 137 in the operation presentation is the period from when the normal lever related image starts to be displayed until the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 137bN disappears, using the normal lever related image as an example. The same applies to red lever related images and large lever related images. The effective operation period may be a period that begins before the normal button related image or the normal lever related image starts to be displayed.

Next, we will explain the general flow of the operation presentation using operation means such as the presentation button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137. The operation presentation is a presentation that takes place between the introduction presentation, which will be described later, and the response presentation that is executed as a result of operating the operation means. The response presentation is a presentation that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means (presentation button 136, operation lever 137, etc.) being operated in the operation presentation (the valid period in the operation presentation having ended without the operation of the operation means), and examples of the response presentation include development presentations, reach decision presentations, cut-in presentations, and win/lose presentations.

In addition, the introduction performance and the operation performance may be combined into one operation performance, the response performance and the operation performance may be combined into one operation performance, or the introduction performance, the response performance and the operation performance may be combined into one operation performance.

Figure 33 (a) shows the relationship between the image type of the operation effect, the type of development effect, and the expected probability of a jackpot.

The development effect indicates whether or not a normal reach will develop into a super reach, and is performed at the end of the normal reach period. The expected probability of a jackpot indicates the reliability of a jackpot with the currently changing pattern display.

If the normal reach does not progress to a super reach, the progress will fail, and the normal reach will result in a miss. In this case, the control presentation may show an image related to the rapid-hit button, an image related to the long press button, or an image related to the normal button.

There are several types of SP (Super) Reach available, but here we will focus on the development into SP Reach 1 and SP Reach 2. SP Reach 2 has a longer reach period than SP Reach 1, and is a reach performance with a higher chance of winning.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), when a rapid-fire button-related image is displayed and develops into SP Reach 1, the expected probability of a jackpot is 20%, when a long press button-related image is displayed and develops into SP Reach 1, the expected probability of a jackpot is 30%, and when a normal button-related image is displayed and develops into SP Reach 1, the expected probability of a jackpot is 40%. Also, when a normal lever-related image is displayed, the development is always successful, and when it develops into SP Reach 1, the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%. Note that even when a normal lever-related image is displayed, there may be cases where the development fails.

Also, as shown in FIG. 33(a), when a rapid-fire button-related image is displayed and develops into SP Reach 2, the expected probability of a jackpot is 30%, when a long press button-related image is displayed and develops into SP Reach 2, the expected probability of a jackpot is 40%, and when a normal button-related image is displayed and develops into SP Reach 2, the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%. Also, when a normal lever-related image is displayed and develops into SP Reach 2, the expected probability of a jackpot is 60%.

Based on Figure 33(a), the image types for the operation effects are listed in order of the likelihood of winning, as follows: normal lever-related images, normal button-related images, long press button-related images, and rapid-fire button-related images.

The table shown in FIG. 33(a) does not include a big button related image. The development effect itself is not an effect that directly suggests the likelihood of a jackpot, and the big button related image is not displayed when the response effect is not an effect that directly suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. Note that the table shown in FIG. 33(a) does not include a red button related image, but the red button related image may be displayed even when the response effect is not an effect that directly suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. On the other hand, if the development is successful, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indirectly determined by the type of SP reach, so the normal lever related image may be displayed.

Figure 33 (b) shows a decision table for the introduction effect that starts during a normal reach. During a normal reach, the introduction effect starts and the operation effect is executed, and if the operation means is operated within the valid operation period and the development is successful, the development effect is performed. If the development fails, a performance is performed to notify the development failure, the normal reach effect ends, and the winning decorative pattern combination is frozen and displayed. Even if the operation means is not operated within the valid operation period, when the operation effect ends, a development effect or a notification of development failure is performed.

This introductory performance decision table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 and is used in the performance control process (step S309) shown in Figure 8.

The introduction performance is a performance that is executed before the operation performance starts, and is a performance that suggests the start of the operation performance. Before the operation performance in which the button-related image is displayed, introduction performance pattern 1 or introduction performance pattern 2 is executed, and before the operation performance in which the lever-related image is displayed, introduction performance pattern 3 or introduction performance pattern 4 is executed. Introduction performance pattern 2 is a performance pattern with a longer performance time than introduction performance pattern 1, and introduction performance pattern 4 is a performance pattern with a longer performance time than introduction performance pattern 3. Introduction performance pattern 3 will be described later using Figures 35 (b1) to (b4). The longer the performance time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, introduction performance pattern 2 is longer than introduction performance pattern 3. Furthermore, introduction performance pattern 3 is longer than introduction performance pattern 1 and introduction performance pattern 3, and introduction performance pattern 4 is longer than introduction performance pattern 2 and introduction performance pattern 4. Alternatively, the duration of the introductory performance may be determined by lottery; in this case, between introductory performance pattern 1 and introductory performance pattern 3, introductory performance pattern 3 is more likely to be longer, and between introductory performance pattern 2 and introductory performance pattern 4, introductory performance pattern 4 is more likely to be longer.

The flow of effects, such as introduction effect → operation effect → development effect → no SP reach or SP reach effect, is determined in the effect control process (step S309) shown in Figure 8 before the decorative pattern starts to change.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), when a rapid-fire button-related image is displayed but the development fails, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 95%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 5%. When a long-press button-related image is displayed but the development fails, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 10%. When a normal button-related image is displayed but the development fails, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 85%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 15%. On the other hand, when a rapid-fire button-related image is displayed and the development succeeds, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 40%. When a long-press button-related image is displayed and the development succeeds, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 55%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 45%. When a normal button-related image is displayed and the development succeeds, introduction presentation pattern 1 and introduction presentation pattern 2 are each selected with a probability of 50%. Furthermore, when a normal lever-related image is displayed, as described above, the development is always successful, with a 30% probability of introduction presentation pattern 3 being selected, and the remaining 70% probability of introduction presentation pattern 4 being selected.

As described above, the flow of effects, such as introduction effect → operation effect → development effect → no SP reach or SP reach effect, is determined in the effect control process (step S309) shown in Figure 8 before the decorative pattern starts to change, but if SP reach 1 is executed as the SP reach effect, a cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach 1 effect. The cut-in effect is a preview effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot will be hit with the currently ongoing pattern change display, and is always performed at the end of SP reach 1. In other words, the SP reach in which the cut-in effect is performed last is the SP reach 1. However, even with SP reach 1, there may be cases where a cut-in effect is not performed.

Figure 34 (a) shows the relationship between the image type of the operation presentation and the expected probability of winning.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the expectation of a big win when a normal button-related image is displayed during the performance of SP Reach 1 is 10%. In addition, the expectation of a big win when a red button-related image is displayed during the performance of SP Reach 1 is 15%, and the expectation of a big win when a large button-related image is displayed is 18%. Therefore, the expectation of a big win of a large button-related image (large button image 136aB) is 1.8 times that of a normal button-related image (normal button image 136aN). Since the display size of the large button-related image (large button image 136aB) is twice that of the normal button-related image (normal button image 136aN), the expectation of a big win is not as large as the display size, but by displaying it at twice the display size, it can be made to feel that the expectation is higher than the actual expectation. In addition, the expectation of a big win when a small button-related image, which is a rare image that appears least frequently among the button-related images, is displayed during the performance of SP Reach 1 is 100%. In other words, if a small button-related image is displayed, a jackpot is confirmed. Also, during the SP Reach 1 performance, if a normal lever-related image is displayed, the expected probability of a jackpot is 20%, if a red lever-related image is displayed, the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%, and if a large lever-related image is displayed, the expected probability of a jackpot is 80%.

Based on Figure 34 (a), the image types for the operation effects are listed in order of the likelihood of winning, as follows: small button related image, large lever related image, red lever related image, normal lever related image, large button related image, red button related image, and normal button related image.

Figure 34(b) shows the relationship between the cut-in effect that occurs during SP Reach 1 and the expectation of a jackpot.

In the cut-in effect, one type of cut-in image is displayed from among multiple types of cut-in images. As shown in FIG. 34(b), the expected probability of a jackpot when a green cut-in image is displayed is 20%, the expected probability of a jackpot when a red cut-in image is displayed is 50%, and the expected probability of a jackpot when a gold cut-in image is displayed is 80%.

Figure 35(a) shows a gold cut-in image.

The cut-in image is an image that is displayed by operating the operating means within the valid operation period in the operation performance, and in Figure 35(a) the performance button 136 is operated within the valid operation period. Then, a cut-in image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the performance display of SP Reach 1 is being performed. In the explanations of Figures 30 to 46, vertical striped hatching is used to represent the color gold. A gold cut-in image CTG with gold edges is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 35(a).

The cut-in image will be displayed when the operation performance ends, even if the operation means is not operated within the effective operation period after the operation performance starts.

The likelihood of winning a jackpot for each cut-in image is separate from the likelihood of winning a jackpot for each image type of the operation presentation described using FIG. 34(a), and if the likelihood of winning a jackpot for the cut-in image that is displayed later is higher than the likelihood of winning a jackpot for the image type of the operation presentation that is displayed earlier, interest in the game is likely to increase.

In addition, instead of the cut-in effect, a dialogue preview effect may be executed. In this case, instead of a cut-in image, a dialogue preview image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the dialogue preview effect, the expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the dialogue. The dialogue preview image is an image that is displayed by operating the operation means within the effective operation period in the operation effect, but if the operation means is not operated within the effective operation period after the operation effect starts, the dialogue preview image may not be displayed even if the operation effect ends.

A cut-in effect is also executed if the operating lever 137 is operated within the valid operation period. Alternatively, a line preview effect is also executed if the operating lever 137 is operated within the valid operation period.

Figure 34 (c) shows a decision table for the introduction effect that starts during SP Reach 1. During SP Reach 1, the introduction effect starts, the operation effect is executed, and the operation means is operated within the effective operation period to perform a cut-in effect.

The introduction performance decision table shown in FIG. 34(c) is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 and is used in the performance control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8.

The introductory performance during SP Reach 1 is the same as that during a normal reach, and a relatively short introductory performance pattern 1 or a relatively long introductory performance pattern 2 is executed before the operation performance in which a button-related image is displayed, and a relatively short introductory performance pattern 3 or a relatively long introductory performance pattern 4 is executed before the operation performance in which a lever-related image is displayed. The performance time of each introductory performance pattern is as explained in Figure 33 (b). Note that the introductory performance during SP Reach 1 and the introductory performance during a normal reach may be different.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), when a normal button-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 95%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 5%. When a red button-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 10%. When a large button-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 85%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 15%. When a small button-related image that guarantees a big win is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 40%. Therefore, at the introduction presentation stage, it is not known whether a small button-related image will be displayed or not. When a normal lever-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 55%, and introduction presentation pattern 4 is selected with a probability of 45%.

Figures 35(b1) to (b4), shown on the right side of Figure 35(a), are diagrams illustrating introduction performance pattern 3.

In Figure 35 (b1), the reach performance of SP Reach 1 has begun. In the reach performance display of SP Reach 1, an animation showing a large image of the face of the main character, the lord, is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the changing display of the decorative patterns is displayed in a reduced size in the lower right. As with the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (1), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 35 (b1) also has a fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner, and a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner.

In Figure 35 (b2), the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 3 has begun. In introduction performance pattern 3, the wipe display WP spreads from the lower left and upper right corners of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a wipe-in is performed, just like a wipe performance. In Figure 35 (b3), the wipe-in is completed, the entire display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is covered by the wipe display WP, and the reach performance display of SP Reach 1 is no longer visible. Note that the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner and the mini pattern in the upper left corner are visible.

When the wipe-in is complete, the wipe-out begins, and in Figure 35 (b4) the wipe-out is complete, and the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 3 has ended. In this Figure 35 (b4), a normal lever-related image is displayed in the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, a normal-sized lever image 137aN that imitates the state in which the lever lamp 139 is emitting white light at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 137bN, and a normal-sized black text display 137cN saying "lever on" are displayed. Note that the lever image 137aN and black text display 137cN overlap part of the reach performance display of SP reach 1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 34(c), when a red lever-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 3 and introduction presentation pattern 4 are each selected with a 50% probability. When a large lever-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 3 is selected with a 30% probability, and introduction presentation pattern 4 is selected with the remaining 70% probability.

The above explains the effects during SP reach 1, but if SP reach 2 is executed as the SP reach effect, a win/loss effect will be performed at the end of the SP reach 2 effect. Like the cut-in effect described above, the win/loss effect is a preview effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot will be reached with the currently ongoing pattern change display, and is always performed at the end of SP reach 2. In other words, the SP reach in which the win/loss effect is performed last is the SP reach 2. However, there may be cases where a win/loss effect is not performed even in the case of SP reach 2.

Figure 36 (a) shows the relationship between the image type of the operation presentation and the expected probability of winning.

The relationship between the image type of the operation presentation shown in FIG. 36(a) and the expectation of the jackpot is the same as the relationship between the image type of the operation presentation shown in FIG. 34(a) and the expectation of the jackpot. That is, the expectation of the jackpot is 10% when the normal button related image is displayed during the presentation of SP Reach 2, 15% when the red button related image is displayed, and 18% when the large button related image is displayed. Therefore, even during SP Reach 2, the expectation of the jackpot of the large button related image (large button image 136aB) is 1.8 times that of the normal button related image (normal button image 136aN), and by displaying it at twice the display size, it is possible to make the expectation seem higher than the actual expectation. Also, it is 100% when the small button related image is displayed, 20% when the normal lever related image is displayed, 50% when the red lever related image is displayed, and 80% when the large lever related image is displayed. Therefore, the image types for the operation effects are listed in order of the likelihood of winning, as follows: small button related image, large lever related image, red lever related image, normal lever related image, large button related image, red button related image, and normal button related image.

Figure 36 (b) shows a decision table for the introduction effect that starts during SP Reach 2. During SP Reach 2, the introduction effect starts, the operation effect is executed, and the operation means is operated within the effective operation period to perform the winning/losing effect. Note that the winning/losing effect is also an effect that is executed when the operation effect ends, even if the operation means is not operated within the effective operation period after the operation effect starts.

The introduction performance decision table shown in FIG. 36(b) is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 and is used in the performance control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8.

The introductory effects that take place during SP Reach 2 are the same as those that take place during normal Reach and SP Reach 1, and a relatively short introductory effect pattern 1 or a relatively long introductory effect pattern 2 is executed before the operation effect in which a button-related image is displayed, and a relatively short introductory effect pattern 3 or a relatively long introductory effect pattern 4 is executed before the operation effect in which a lever-related image is displayed. The performance time for each introductory effect pattern is as described in Figure 33 (b). Note that the introductory effects that take place during SP Reach 2 may be different from those that take place during normal Reach and SP Reach 1.

As shown in FIG. 36(b), when a normal button-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 95%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 5%. When a red button-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 10%. When a large button-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 85%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 15%. When a small button-related image that guarantees a big win is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and introduction presentation pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 40%. When a normal lever-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 55%, and introduction presentation pattern 4 is selected with a probability of 45%. When a red lever-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 3 and introduction presentation pattern 4 are each selected with a probability of 50%. When a large lever-related image is displayed, introduction presentation pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 30%, and introduction presentation pattern 4 is selected with a probability of 70%. The selection rates described above are the same as those described using FIG. 34(c), but may be different.

Next, we will explain specific examples of the introductory effects, operation effects, and response effects that are executed from the start of the display of the decorative pattern changes until the final display is made.

Figure 37 is a timing chart showing four specific examples (A) to (D). In each timing chart shown in Figure 37, time passes at the same speed from left to right. The timing of (a1) shown in Figure 37(A), the timing of (b1) shown in Figure 37(B), the timing of (c1) shown in Figure 37(C), and the timing of (d1) shown in Figure 37(D) all match, and the timings at which normal reaches start ((a2), (b2), (c2), (d2)) also match, and the timings at which super reaches start ((a6), (b6), (c6), (d6)) also match.

Figure 37 (A) shows an example in which during a normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 starts, an operation effect in which a normal button-related image is displayed is executed, and then a development effect is performed, leading to development into SP reach 1. During SP reach 1, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 starts, an operation effect in which a normal button-related image is displayed is executed, and then a cut-in effect in which a green cut-in image is displayed is performed, and the losing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a confirmed combination.

Figure 38 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in Figure 37(A) in stages. The diagram shown in (a1) in this Figure 38 is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the symbol (a1) written on the timing chart of Figure 37(A), and the diagrams shown from (a2) onwards are also diagrams showing the state at the timing of the symbol written on the timing chart of Figure 37(A).

Figure 38 (a1) is the same state as the state shown in Figure 12 (1). That is, it is a state in which the time-saving game state (special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state) is in which the pattern change display of special pattern 1 is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 38 (a1), the decorative pattern change display is being performed. The decorative pattern change display here is a normal change. In addition, a change icon display area 280 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a change icon h0 in a green display mode is displayed. In the explanation of Figures 30 to 46, hatching facing diagonally downward to the right is used to represent green. The change icon h0 in a green display mode is a notice suggesting that the expected probability of a jackpot is 25% with the pattern change display currently being performed. To the right of the change icon display area 280, a reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 is provided, and two reserved icons h11 and h12 are displayed. Both of the two reserved icons h11 and h12 are displayed in white (default display mode). Furthermore, a fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 38(a2), a reach state is established from normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(a2), "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern continues to change and be displayed only in the center pattern display area 208b.

In FIG. 38 (a2-1), the decorative pattern is still being displayed in a variable manner only in the middle pattern display area 208b. In other words, the introduction performance has not yet started.

In Figure 38 (a3), the introduction performance begins. The introduction performance here is introduction performance pattern 1. As shown in Figure 38 (a3), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is blacked out, and the decorative patterns are no longer visible. However, the mini pattern in the upper left corner and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is being performed (the period t1 shown in Figure 37 (A)), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 remains blacked out.

In FIG. 38(a4), the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 ends, and the operation performance begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(a4), the decorative pattern becomes visible, and the decorative pattern continues to be displayed in the middle pattern display area 208b only. In addition, a normal button-related image is displayed in the lower left of the display screen. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit up in white at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN saying "press" are displayed. At the timing of FIG. 38(a4), the operation performance has just begun, and the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN is in a state before it starts to decrease, but it will start to decrease soon.

The performance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. Depending on the operation of this performance button 136, the success or failure of the development is displayed. That is, if the development is successful, the development performance is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, a notice of the failure of the development is given. In addition, in the case of a failure of the development, the display of the change of the decorative pattern may be continued in the middle pattern display area 208b until the end of the pattern change period without a notice of the failure of the development. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(A), the development performance is shown to start when the entire period t2 of the operation valid period has elapsed, but this is to show the length of the entire period t2, and in reality, the development performance is started in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t2 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 37(A) can be seen as an example in which the performance button 136 is operated just before the entire period t2 has elapsed, but since the development performance is a performance that is executed when the operation performance ends even if the performance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, it can also be seen as an example in which the performance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period.

Figure 38 (a5) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the development performance has started. The word "SP Reach" is displayed below the decorative pattern that continues to change in the middle pattern display area 208b. When a player sees the display screen of this development performance, they know that it will develop into an SP Reach, which increases their interest in the game.

In FIG. 38(a6), the development performance ends and the SP Reach 1 period begins. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP Reach 1. With the development to SP Reach 1, the expected probability of a jackpot due to the normal button-related image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(a4) is 40%, as shown in FIG. 33(a). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(a6), an animation showing a large image of the face of the main character, the lord, is displayed as the reach performance display for SP Reach 1, and the changing display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right.

In Figure 38 (a6-1), the reach effect display for SP Reach 1 is still continuing. In other words, the introductory effect has not yet started.

In FIG. 38 (a7), the introduction performance starts. The introduction performance here is also of introduction performance pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 38 (a7), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is blacked out, and the SP Reach 1 reach performance display is no longer visible. However, the mini pattern in the upper left corner and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is being performed (the period t3 shown in FIG. 37 (A)), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 remains blacked out. Note that the introduction performance here is of introduction performance pattern 1, which is the same as the introduction performance during the normal reach period, but a different pattern of introduction performance may be performed with the same period length of t3. For example, an introduction performance in which a flashing display is displayed on the entire display screen over the period of t3 may be performed.

In FIG. 38(a8), the introduction performance of the introduction performance pattern 1 ends, and the operation performance starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(a8), the reach performance display of SP reach 1 becomes visible, and the display of the decorative pattern variation continues. In addition, the normal button-related image is displayed again in the lower left of the display screen. Here, too, a normal-sized button image 136aN that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit in white at the initial position, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black character display 136cN saying "press" are displayed. A part of the reach performance display of SP reach 1 is overlapped by the button image 136aN and the black character display 136cN. The expectation rate of a jackpot by the normal button-related image here is 10% as shown in FIG. 34(a). At the timing of Figure 38 (a8), the operation display has just started, and the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN has not yet started to decrease, but it will soon start decreasing.

The effect button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In response to the operation of this effect button 136, a cut-in effect is started. That is, a cut-in image predicting a big win is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(A), the cut-in effect is shown to start when the entire period t4 of the operation valid period has elapsed, but this is also for the purpose of showing the length of the entire period t4. In reality, the cut-in effect starts in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the entire period t4 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 37(A) can be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is operated just before the entire period t4 has elapsed, but since the cut-in effect is also an effect that is executed when the operation effect ends even if the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, it can also be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period.

Figure 38 (a9) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 when the cut-in effect starts. A green cut-in image CTM with green edges is displayed so as to overlap with the reach effect display of SP Reach 1. The expected probability of a jackpot for this green cut-in image CTM is 20%, as shown in Figure 34 (b).

In FIG. 38 (a10), the decorative pattern displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right starts to be displayed as a temporary stop in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c. That is, "Decoration 6" is displayed as a temporary stop in the middle pattern display area 208b, and a combination of missing decorative patterns such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed as a temporary stop (shaking and fluctuating display). An animation of a lord looking disappointed is also displayed. Note that at this stage, the mini pattern continues to be displayed as a fluctuating pattern, and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 continues to display a flashing "-" indicating that the pattern of special pattern 1 is being fluctuated.

After the provisional stop display of this combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is made, a confirmation display of the pattern change display of Special Chart 1 is made, and the decorative pattern display device 208 also makes a confirmation display of the combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" as shown in FIG. 38 (a11). When the confirmation display is made, the fourth pattern of Special Chart 1 is stopped and displayed as an "X" indicating a miss in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and "767" is also stopped and displayed as a mini pattern.

Figure 37 (B) shows an example in which during a normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 2 starts, an operation effect is executed in which a normal button-related image is displayed, and then a development effect is performed, leading to development into SP reach 1. During SP reach 1, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 2 starts, an operation effect is executed in which a large button-related image is displayed, and then a cut-in effect is performed in which a red cut-in image is displayed, and the losing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a confirmed combination.

Figure 39 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in Figure 37(B) in stages. The diagram shown in (b1) in this Figure 39 is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the symbol (b1) written on the timing chart of Figure 37(B), and the diagrams shown from (b2) onwards are similarly diagrams showing the state at the timing of the symbols written on the timing chart of Figure 37(B). The following explanation will include some overlapping explanations with the example shown in Figure 38.

39(b1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 12(1). That is, it is a non-time-saving game state (special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state) in which the pattern change display of special pattern 1 is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(b1), the decorative pattern change display is being performed. The decorative pattern change display here is a normal change. The change icon display area 280 displays the change icon h0 in a red display mode, and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 displays two reserved icons h11 and h12, both of which are in a white display mode (default display mode). The change icon h0 in a red display mode is a notice suggesting that the expected probability of a jackpot is 50% with the currently performed pattern change display. In addition, the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 39(b2), a reach state is established from normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(b2), "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern continues to change and be displayed only in the center pattern display area 208b.

In FIG. 39(b3), the introduction performance starts. The timing of (b3) shown in FIG. 37(B) is earlier than the timing of (a3) shown in FIG. 37(A), and it can be seen that the period length from the start of the normal reach to the start of the introduction performance is shorter in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37(B) (example shown in FIG. 39) than in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37(A) (example shown in FIG. 38). The introduction performance in the example shown in FIG. 39 is the performance of introduction performance pattern 2. In the introduction performance of this introduction performance pattern 2, first, as shown in FIG. 39(b3), semi-transparent images that seem to imitate the normal-sized performance button 136 but are not materialized appear at the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 39(b3-1), the image at the upper left moves directly downward, and the image at the upper right moves diagonally downward to the left. In FIG. 39(b3-2), the two images overlap at the bottom left, and in the following FIG. 39(b4), the operation performance starts, and the two overlapping images at the bottom left of the decorative pattern display device 208 materialize into a button image. That is, at the bottom left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(b4), a normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed, which imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit in white at the initial position (starting point position). In addition, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN and a normal-sized black character display 136cN saying "press" are also displayed, and normal button-related images are displayed. The introduction performance of the introduction performance pattern 2 is executed over the period from FIG. 39(b3) to FIG. 39(b4) (the period t5 shown in FIG. 37(B)), and it can be seen that the performance period of the introduction performance pattern 2 is longer than the performance period of the introduction performance pattern 1 (the period t1 shown in FIG. 37(A)).

At the timing of Figure 39 (b4), the operation display has just started, and the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN has not yet started to decrease, but will soon start decreasing.

The performance button 136 is pressed once within the operation valid period. In response to the operation of this performance button 136, if the development is successful, the development performance is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, a notification of the failure of the development is made. In the case of unsuccessful development, the display of the decorative pattern change may be continued in the middle pattern display area 208b until the pattern change period ends without a notification of the unsuccessful development. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(B), the development performance is shown to start when the entire period t6 of the operation valid period has elapsed, but this is to show the length of the entire period t6, and in reality, the development performance is started in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t6 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 37(B) can be seen as an example in which the performance button 136 is operated just before the entire period t6 has elapsed, but as described above, the development performance is a performance that is executed when the operation performance ends even if the performance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, so it can also be seen as an example in which the performance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period.

Figure 39 (b5) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the development performance has started. The word "SP Reach" is displayed below the decorative pattern that continues to change in the middle pattern display area 208b. When a player sees the display screen of this development performance, they know that it will develop into an SP Reach, which increases their interest in the game.

In FIG. 39(b6), the development performance ends and the SP Reach 1 period begins. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP Reach 1. With the development to SP Reach 1, the expected probability of a jackpot due to the normal button-related image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(b4) is 40%, as shown in FIG. 33(a). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(b6), an animation showing a large image of the face of the main character, the lord, is displayed as the SP Reach 1 reach performance display, and the changing display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right.

In FIG. 39 (b7), the introduction performance starts. The timing of (b7) shown in FIG. 37 (B) is earlier than the timing of (a7) shown in FIG. 37 (A), and it can be seen that the period length from the start of SP Reach 1 to the start of the introduction performance is shorter in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (B) (example shown in FIG. 39) than in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (A) (example shown in FIG. 38). The introduction performance in the example shown in FIG. 39 is the performance of introduction performance pattern 2. In the introduction performance of this introduction performance pattern 2, first, as shown in FIG. 39 (b7), a semi-transparent image that seems to imitate a performance button of a size larger than normal size but is not materialized appears in the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 39 (b7-1), both the upper left image and the upper right image move toward the center. In FIG. 39(b7-2), the two images overlap near the center and materialize, and an animation is displayed in which the images are enlarged to a larger size. In the next FIG. 39(b8), the large button image 136aB is displayed, and the operation performance starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(b8), a large button image 136aB is displayed, which is an enlarged version of the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit in white at the initial position (starting point position). In addition, a large blue meter display 136bB and a large black character display 136cB that reads "push" are also displayed, and a large button-related image is displayed. Most of the reach performance display of SP reach 1 is overlapped by the large button image 136aB. In addition, a part of the reach performance display of SP reach 1 is also overlapped by the large black character display 136cN. The expectation of a big win by the large button-related image here is 18%, as shown in FIG. 34(a). The introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 2 is executed over the period from Figure 39 (b7) to Figure 39 (b8) (period t7 shown in Figure 37 (B)), and it can be seen that the performance period of introduction performance pattern 2 is longer than the performance period of introduction performance pattern 1 (period t3 shown in Figure 37 (A)). At the timing of Figure 39 (b8), the operation performance has just started, and the blue bar portion of the large blue meter display 136bB has not yet started to decrease, but will soon start to decrease.

The effect button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In response to the operation of this effect button 136, a cut-in effect is started. That is, a cut-in image predicting a big win is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(B), the cut-in effect is shown to start when the entire period t8 of the operation valid period has elapsed, but this is also for the purpose of showing the length of the entire period t8. In reality, the cut-in effect starts in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the entire period t8 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 37(B) can be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is operated just before the entire period t8 has elapsed, but as described above, the cut-in effect is an effect that is executed when the operation effect ends even if the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, so it can also be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period.

Here, the total duration t8 of the effective operation period in the operation presentation in which the large button image 136aB is displayed is the same as the total duration t4 of the effective operation period in the operation presentation in which the button image 136aN is displayed. In order to maintain fairness or to avoid causing the player to feel uncomfortable, the length of the effective operation period is kept the same, but the presentation time of the introductory presentation in which the large button image 136aB, which has a relatively large display size, is lengthened, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the large button image 136aB to be displayed.

Figure 39 (b9) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 when the cut-in effect starts. A red cut-in image CTR with a red border is displayed so as to overlap with the reach effect display of SP reach 1. The expected probability of a jackpot for this red cut-in image CTR is 50%, as shown in Figure 34 (b).

At timing (b10) in Figure 37 (B), although not shown, just like the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 38 (a10), the decorative patterns displayed in reduced size at the bottom right begin to be displayed as temporarily stopped in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c, respectively, and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is displayed as temporarily stopped (wavering and fluctuating display).

Then, at the timing (b11) in Figure 37 (B), although not shown in the figure, a confirmation display of a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is performed in the same manner as the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 38 (a11).

When a large button-related image including large button image 136aB is displayed, the effect button 136 may or may always vibrate while the operation effect is being performed and/or after the effect button 136 is operated. On the other hand, when a button-related image including normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed, the effect button 136 does not vibrate while the operation effect is being performed and/or after the effect button 136 is operated. Alternatively, the effect button 136 may vibrate, but the rate at which the effect button 136 vibrates is lower than when a large button-related image is displayed.

In Figure 37 (C), during a normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 2 starts, an operation effect is executed in which a rapid-fire button-related image is displayed, and then an evolution effect is performed, leading to the development to SP reach 2. When the SP reach 2 effect starts, first a reach selection effect is performed, then the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 starts, an operation effect is executed in which a normal button-related image is displayed, then a win/lose effect is performed, and the losing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a confirmed winner. In other words, this is an example of the development to SP reach 2.

Figure 40 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in Figure 37(C) in stages. The diagram shown in (c1) in this Figure 40 is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the code (c1) written on the timing chart of Figure 37(C), and the diagrams shown from (c2) onwards are similarly diagrams showing the state at the timing of the code written on the timing chart of Figure 37(C). The following explanation will include explanations that overlap with the examples shown in Figures 38 and 39.

Figure 40 (c1) is the same state as that shown in Figure 12 (1). That is, it is a state in which the time-saving game state (special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state) is not in effect, and the pattern change display of special pattern 1 is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 40 (c1), the decorative pattern change display is being performed. The decorative pattern change display here is the normal change. The change icon display area 280 displays the change icon h0 in a red display mode, and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 displays two reserved icons h11 and h12, both of which are in a white display mode (default display mode). In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner, and a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 40(c2), a reach state is established from normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(c2), "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern continues to change and be displayed only in the center pattern display area 208b.

In FIG. 40(c3), the introduction performance according to the introduction performance pattern 2 is started, and semi-transparent images that seem to imitate the normal-sized performance button 136 but are not materialized appear at the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(c3). Eventually, as shown in FIG. 40(c3-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 40(c3-2), the two images overlap at the lower left, and in the following FIG. 40(c4), the operation performance is started, and the two overlapping images at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 become materialized button images. That is, at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(c4), a normal-sized button image 136aN that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit in white at the initial position (starting point position) is displayed. Also displayed are a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN and a black text display 136cC saying "Continuous hit" in the same text size as the normal size, and an image related to the rapid-hit button is displayed. The introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 2 is executed over the period from FIG. 40(c3) to FIG. 40(c4) (the period t9 shown in FIG. 37(C)), and is the same duration as the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 2 described using FIG. 39(b3) to FIG. 39(b4).

At the timing of Figure 40 (c4), the operation display has just started, and the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN has not yet started to decrease, but will soon start decreasing.

During the operation valid period, the performance button 136 is repeatedly pressed. In response to the repeated pressing of the performance button 136, if the development is successful, the development performance is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, a notification of the unsuccessful development is made. In the case of unsuccessful development, the display of the decorative pattern change may be continued in the middle pattern display area 208b until the pattern change period ends without a notification of the unsuccessful development. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(C), the development performance is shown to start when the entire period t10 of the operation valid period has elapsed. In the case of a repeated pressing operation, unlike a one-time pressing operation, the repeated pressing operation is basically performed until the entire period t10 of the operation valid period has elapsed. In exceptional cases, the development performance may be started in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t10 to elapse. It can be seen that the length of the entire period t10 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37(C) is longer than the length of the entire period t2 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37(A) and the length of the entire period t6 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37(B). However, the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 40(c4) is the same size (length) as the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 38(a4) and the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 39(b4). As described above, a repeated tap operation takes more time than a single press operation, so the effective operation period is 1.6 times longer than the effective operation period requiring a single press operation.

Figure 40 (c5) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the development effect has started. The word "SP Reach" is displayed below the decorative pattern that continues to change in the middle pattern display area 208b, and the word "It's a Duel" is displayed above that. A player familiar with this gaming machine can tell by looking at this development effect that the game will develop not into SP Reach 1, but into SP Reach 2, which has a higher chance of winning, and this greatly increases the player's interest in the game. Note that even if the game develops into SP Reach 2, the word "It's a Duel" may not be displayed, and the same development effect as that of SP Reach 1 may be executed.

In Figure 40 (c6), the development effect ends and the SP Reach 2 period begins. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP Reach 2. As a result of the development to SP Reach 2, the expected probability of a jackpot due to the rapid-fire button related image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 40 (c4) is 30%, as shown in Figure 33 (a). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 40 (c6), the opening effect of the SP Reach 2 reach effect display is being performed, and the changing display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right.

In FIG. 40 (c7), the reach selection effect starts. This reach selection effect allows the player to select the stage of the duel effect by operation, and the expectation of a jackpot does not differ depending on the stage. In other words, the reach selection effect does not suggest the expectation of a jackpot. The reach selection effect is composed of an introduction effect and an operation effect, and the introduction effect is performed first. The introduction effect in the reach selection effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c7). The presentation period of this introduction effect is the period t11 shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37 (C), which is shorter than the period t9 of introduction effect pattern 2 and even shorter than the period t1 of introduction effect pattern 1. The presentation period of the introduction effect is kept short so as not to lengthen the presentation period of the introduction effect and raise the player's expectations.

When this short introduction performance ends, the operation performance starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (c8), the operation performance has started. In the operation performance of the reach selection performance, a normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed, which imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit in white at the initial position (starting point position). A normal-sized blue meter display 136bN is also displayed. In addition, the character display indicating the operation type is a tutorial-like display, and a character display 136cT such as "Select by button operation" is displayed in the same character size as the normal size. In this way, in the operation performance of the reach selection performance, a normal button-related image (button image 136aN) is displayed, and a large button-related image (large button image 136aB) is not displayed. The large button-related image is not displayed when the response performance is not a performance that suggests the expectation of a big hit. Since the display size of the large button-related image is large, the player is likely to have high expectations for a big hit, so the large button-related image is not displayed in order to avoid misunderstandings. The red button-related image may not be displayed when the response effect is not an effect that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot, or conversely, the red button-related image may be displayed. The lever-related image is also not displayed when the response effect is not an effect that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. In an operation effect in which the lever-related image is displayed, operation of the operation lever 137, which requires a large amount of operation, is required. In return for performing many operations, a response effect that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot is performed, and response effects that do not suggest the likelihood of a jackpot are not performed, thereby reducing the sense of bothersomeness of the operation.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 40 (c8) displays small background images of the castle town stage, ocean stage, sliding door stage and wilderness stage at the 12 o'clock, 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, respectively, and the background image displayed at the 12 o'clock position is displayed in the selection window CW. In the operation presentation of the reach selection presentation, the background image moves clockwise each time the presentation button 136 is operated once, and the stage of the background image displayed in the selection window CW is set at the time the operation valid period has elapsed. In the timing chart of Figure 37 (C), the entire operation valid period in the reach selection presentation is shown as t12. This total period t12 is longer (for example, 1.2 times longer) than the effective operation period (t2, t6) when the normal button related image is displayed before the development performance, and the effective operation period (t4, t8) when the normal button related image or the large button related image is displayed before the cut-in performance, but is shorter than the effective operation period (t10) when the rapid-fire button related image is displayed, allowing the player to make a selection at a certain degree of leisure. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the performance button 136 is not operated in time. Note that even before the total period t12 of the effective operation period has elapsed, if the performance button 136 is double-clicked, the stage may be set to the background image displayed in the selection window CW at that time.

In FIG. 40 (c9), the entire period t12 of the valid operation period has elapsed, and the background image of the selected stage is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, the wilderness stage has been selected.

In the next Fig. 40 (c6-1), a duel scene has begun in the wilderness stage, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of the protagonist, a lord, and his enemy, a ronin, poised at some distance from one another. Next, in Fig. 40 (c6-2), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays this scene enlarged, and the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7" that was displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner is now displayed in the center.

Figure 41 shows a continuation of Figure 40.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (c6-3), which is a continuation of FIG. 40 (c6-2), displays an animation in which the distance between the main character, the lord, and the villain, the ronin, is closing.

Eventually, at timing (c10) shown in the timing chart of Figure 37 (C), the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 begins. As shown in Figure 41 (c10), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 goes black, and the duel performance animation cannot be seen. However, the mini pattern in the upper left corner and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is being performed (the period t13 shown in Figure 37 (C)), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 remains blacked out.

In FIG. 41 (c11), the introduction performance of the introduction performance pattern 1 ends, and the operation performance begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (c11), the animation of the duel performance becomes visible, and the lord, the protagonist, and the ronin, the enemy, are still standing at a close distance from each other. In addition, a normal button-related image is displayed at the top of the display screen. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit in white at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black character display 136cN saying "press" are displayed. The expectation rate of a big win by the normal button-related image here is 10% as shown in FIG. 36 (a). At the timing of FIG. 41 (c11), the operation performance has just started, and the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN is in a state before it starts to decrease, but it will start to decrease soon.

The performance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In response to the operation of this performance button 136, the winning/losing performance starts. That is, an animation of the winning/losing performance that predicts a big win is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(C), the winning/losing performance is shown to start when the entire period t14 of the operation valid period has elapsed, but this is also for the purpose of showing the length of the entire period t14. In reality, the winning/losing performance starts in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t14 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 37(C) can be seen as an example in which the performance button 136 is operated just before the entire period t14 has elapsed, but as described above, the winning/losing performance is also a performance that is executed when the operation performance ends even if the performance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, so it can also be seen as an example in which the performance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period.

Figure 41 (c12) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the winning/losing performance starts. When the winning/losing performance starts, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the ronin, fight with each other, and at the end of the winning/losing performance, an animation of one of them falling is displayed. If the main character, the lord, falls, he loses, and a notice of a loss is displayed, and if the enemy, the ronin, falls, a notice of a big win is displayed. The notice of a loss may be a notice of a confirmed loss (the expected probability of a big win is 0%) or a notice of a high probability of a loss (the expected probability of a big win is 5%). The notice of a big win may also be a notice of a confirmed big win (the expected probability of a big win is 100%) or a notice of a high probability of a big win (the expected probability of a big win is 95%). In addition, in the case of a notice of a high probability of a loss or a high probability of a big win, the decorative pattern may be changed again after the winning/losing performance ends, and the result may be reversed. In this example, an animation of the main character, the lord, falling down (an animation that warns of a loss) is displayed.

In FIG. 41 (c13), the winning/losing performance has ended, and the temporary stop display (shaking and changing display) of the decorative pattern combination has begun. That is, while an animation of the main character, the lord, falling is displayed, "Decoration 6" is temporarily displayed in the middle pattern display area 208b, and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed. Note that at this stage, the mini pattern continues to change, and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 continues to display a flashing "-" to indicate that the pattern of special pattern 1 is changing.

After the provisional stop display of the combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is made, the confirmation display of the pattern change display of Special Chart 1 is made, and the decorative pattern display device 208 also makes a confirmation display of the combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" as shown in FIG. 41 (c14). When the confirmation display is made, the fourth pattern of Special Chart 1 is stopped and displayed as an "X" indicating a miss in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and "767" is also stopped and displayed as a mini pattern.

In Figure 37 (D), during a normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 starts, an operation effect is executed in which a rapid-fire button-related image is displayed, and then an evolution effect is performed, leading to the development to SP reach 2. When the SP reach 2 effect starts, first a reach selection effect is performed, then the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 4 starts, an operation effect is executed in which a normal lever-related image is displayed, then a win/lose effect is performed, and the combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot is displayed as a confirmed result. In other words, in this example, the development to SP reach 2 leads to a jackpot.

Figure 42 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in Figure 37(D) in stages. The diagram shown in (d1) in this Figure 42 is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the symbol (d1) shown in the timing chart of Figure 37(D), and the diagrams shown from (d2) onwards are similarly diagrams showing the state at the timing of the symbols shown in the timing chart of Figure 37(D). The following explanation will include explanations that overlap with the examples shown in Figures 38 to 41.

Figure 42 (d1) is the same state as that shown in Figure 12 (1). That is, it is a non-time-saving game state (special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state) in which the pattern change display of special pattern 1 is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 42 (d1), the decorative pattern change display is being performed. The decorative pattern change display here is normal change. The change icon display area 280 displays the change icon h0 in a red display mode, and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 displays two reserved icons h11 and h12, both of which are in a white display mode (default display mode). In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner, and a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 42 (d2), a reach state is established from normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d2), "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern continues to change and be displayed only in the center pattern display area 208b.

In FIG. 42 (d2-1), the decorative pattern is still being displayed in a variable manner only in the middle pattern display area 208b. In other words, the introduction performance has not yet started.

In FIG. 42 (d3), the introduction performance begins. The introduction performance here is that of introduction performance pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 42 (d3), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is blacked out, and the decorative patterns are no longer visible. However, the mini pattern in the upper left corner and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is being performed (the period t15 shown in FIG. 37 (D)), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 remains blacked out.

In Figure 42 (d4), the introductory performance of introductory performance pattern 1 ends and the operation performance begins.
In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Fig. 42 (d4), the decorative pattern is visible, and the display of the decorative pattern continues only in the middle pattern display area 208b. In addition, a continuous-hit button-related image is displayed in the lower left of the display screen. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is emitting white light at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a black character display 136cC that reads "continuous hit" in the same character size as the normal size are also displayed.

At the timing of Figure 42 (d4), the operation display has just started, and the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN has not yet started to decrease, but will soon start decreasing.

During the operation valid period, the performance button 136 is repeatedly pressed. In response to the repeated pressing of the performance button 136, if the development is successful, the development performance is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, a notification of the unsuccessful development is made. In the case of unsuccessful development, the display of the decorative pattern change may be continued in the middle pattern display area 208b until the pattern change period ends without a notification of the unsuccessful development. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(D), the development performance is shown to start when the entire period t16 of the operation valid period has elapsed. In the case of a repeated pressing operation, unlike a one-time pressing operation, the repeated pressing operation is basically performed until the entire period t16 of the operation valid period has elapsed. In exceptional cases, the development performance may be started in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t16 to elapse. The length of the entire period t15 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37(D) is longer than the length of the entire period t2 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37(A) and the length of the entire period t6 of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 37(B), and is 1.6 times longer. However, the normal-sized blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 42 (d4) is the same size (length) as the normal-sized blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 38 (a4) and the normal-sized blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 39 (b4).

Figure 42 (d5) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the development performance has started. The word "SP Reach" is displayed below the decorative pattern that continues to change in the middle pattern display area 208b, and the word "It's a Duel" is also displayed above that. Note that, in order to prevent the type of SP Reach from being identified in the development performance, even when it develops into SP Reach 2, the word "It's a Duel" may not be displayed, and the same development performance as that of SP Reach 1 may be executed.

In FIG. 42 (d6), the development effect ends and the SP Reach 2 period begins. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP Reach 2. As a result of the development to SP Reach 2, the expected probability of a jackpot due to the rapid-fire button related image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d4) is 30%, as shown in FIG. 33 (a). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d6), the opening effect of the SP Reach 2 reach effect display is being performed, and the changing display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right.

In Figure 42 (d7), the reach selection performance begins. The reach selection performance here is the same as the reach selection performance described using Figures 40 (c7) to (c9), and first, an introduction performance is performed. The introduction performance in the reach selection performance is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 42 (d7). The performance period of this introduction performance is the period t17 shown in the timing chart of Figure 37 (D), which is shorter than the period t9 of introduction performance pattern 2 and even shorter than the period t1 of introduction performance pattern 1.

When this short introduction performance ends, the operation performance starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d8), the operation performance starts, and a normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed, which imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit in white at the initial position (starting point position). In addition, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN and a character display 136cT such as "Select by button operation" in the same character size as the normal size are also displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 also displays a selection window CW in which the background image of the selected stage is displayed. In the timing chart of FIG. 37 (D), the total period of the operation effective period in the reach selection performance is shown as t18. This total period t18 is also longer (for example, 1.2 times longer) than the operation effective period (t2, t6) when the normal button related image before the development performance is displayed and the operation effective period (t4, t8) when the normal button related image or the large button related image before the cut-in performance is displayed, but is shorter than the operation effective period (t10) when the rapid-fire button related image is displayed. In addition, even before the entire period t18 of the valid operation period has elapsed, if the performance button 136 is double-clicked, the stage may be set to the background image displayed in the selection window CW at that time.

In FIG. 42 (d9), the entire period t18 of the valid operation period has elapsed, and the background image of the selected stage is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, the castle town stage has been selected.

In the next Fig. 42 (d6-1), a duel performance has begun on the castle town stage, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of the protagonist, the lord, and the enemy ronin posing for each other at a distance, some distance away. Next, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Fig. 42 (d6-2), this scene is displayed enlarged, and the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7", which was displayed in a reduced size in the lower right, is displayed in the center, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the same figure (d6-3), an animation of the protagonist, the lord, and the enemy ronin closing the distance is displayed.

Figure 43 shows a continuation of Figure 42.

Eventually, at the timing (d10) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37(D), the introduction performance according to the introduction performance pattern 4 starts. The timing (d10) shown in FIG. 37(D) is earlier than the timing (c10) shown in FIG. 37(C), and it can be seen that the period length from the start of the SP Reach 2 to the start of the introduction performance is shorter in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37(D) (example shown in FIG. 43) than in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 37(C) (example shown in FIG. 41). The introduction performance in the example shown in FIG. 43 is the performance of the introduction performance pattern 4. In the introduction performance of this introduction performance pattern 4, first, as shown in FIG. 43(d10), a semi-transparent image that seems to imitate a normal-sized operating lever 137 but is not materialized appears in the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 43(d10-1), the image in the upper left moves directly downward, and the image in the upper right moves diagonally downward to the left. In FIG. 43 (d10-2), the two images overlap at the bottom left, and in the following FIG. 43 (d10-3), the two overlapping images are covered by the effect image ef and become temporarily invisible. Note that this effect image ef also covers part of the main character, the lord, and even the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7" on the left side, and these covered displays also become temporarily invisible.

In FIG. 43 (d11), the operation presentation starts, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect image ef disappears, and the two overlapping images become a substantial lever image. That is, in the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (d11), a normal-sized lever image 137aN is displayed, which imitates the state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position). In addition, a normal-sized blue meter display 137bN and a normal-sized black character display 137cN of "lever on" are also displayed, and normal lever-related images are displayed. The normal-sized lever image 137aN and the black character display 137cN of "lever on" cover part of the decorative pattern of "decoration 7" on the left side, and the normal-sized blue meter display 137bN covers part of the main character, the lord. The expectation rate of a big win by the normal lever-related image here is 20% as shown in FIG. 36 (a). The introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 4 is executed over the period from Figure 43 (d10) to Figure 43 (d11) (period t19 shown in Figure 37 (D)), and it can be seen that the performance period of introduction performance pattern 4 is longer than the performance period of introduction performance pattern 2 (period t7 shown in Figure 37 (B)).

At the timing of Figure 43 (d11), the operation display has just started, and the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 137bN has not yet started to decrease, but it will soon start decreasing.

The operating lever 137 is operated within the effective operation period. The winning/losing performance starts in response to the operation of the operating lever 137. That is, an animation of the winning/losing performance that predicts a big win is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 37(D), the winning/losing performance is shown to start when the entire period t20 of the effective operation period has elapsed, but this is also for the purpose of showing the length of the entire period t20. In reality, the winning/losing performance starts in response to the operation of the operating lever 137 without waiting for the entire period t20 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 37(D) can be seen as an example in which the operating lever 137 is operated just before the entire period t20 has elapsed, but as described above, the winning/losing performance is also a performance that is executed when the operation performance ends even if the operating lever 137 is not operated within the effective operation period, so it can also be seen as an example in which the operating lever 137 is not operated within the effective operation period.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 41 where a normal button-related image is displayed, if the operation lever 137 is operated instead of the effect button 136 during the valid operation period, the winning/losing effect will not be started in response to the operation of the operation lever 137, but in the example shown in FIG. 43 where a normal lever-related image is displayed, even if the effect button 136 is pressed once during the valid operation period instead of the operation lever 137, the winning/losing effect will be started in response to the operation of the effect button 136. Even if some players find the operation of the operation lever 137 cumbersome because it requires more operations than the effect button 136, they can substitute the operation of the operation lever 137 for the operation of the effect button 136, eliminating the cumbersomeness of the operation.

Figure 43 (d12) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the winning/losing performance starts. When the winning/losing performance starts, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a scene in which the main character, a lord, and the villain, a ronin, fight with each other by sword, and at the end of the winning/losing performance, an animation of one of them falling is displayed. In this example, an animation of the villain, a ronin, falling (animation predicting a big win) is displayed.

In FIG. 43 (d13), the winning/losing performance has ended, and the temporary stop display (shaking and changing display) of the decorative symbol combination has begun. That is, while an animation of the villain Ronin being defeated is displayed, "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the decorative symbol combination of the big win, "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", is temporarily displayed. Note that at this stage, the mini symbol continues to change, and the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 continues to display a flashing "-" to indicate that the special symbol 1 is changing.

After the provisional stop display of this combination of "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7", a confirmation display of the pattern change display of Special Chart 1 is made, and the decorative pattern display device 208 also displays a confirmation display of the combination of "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7" as shown in FIG. 43 (d14). When the confirmation display is made, the fourth pattern of Special Chart 1 is displayed as a "○" indicating a jackpot in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and "777" is also displayed as a stop display in the mini pattern.

As described above, the length of the valid period is the same for normal button-related images (normal lever-related images) and large button-related images (large lever-related images), but the size (length) of the meter display is different, so the speed at which the display area of the meter display decreases (or increases) is different. In other words, the speed at which the display area of the meter display of a large button-related image (large lever-related image) decreases is faster than that of a normal button-related image (normal lever-related image). Note that the size (length) of the meter display may be the same for normal button-related images (normal lever-related images) and large button-related images (large lever-related images).

In addition, the size (length) of the meter display is the same for normal button related images and rapid-hit button related images, but the lengths of the valid periods are different, so the speed at which the display area of the meter display decreases (or increases) is different. In other words, the speed at which the display area of the meter display of the rapid-hit button related images decreases is slower than that of the meter display of the normal button related images.

In this embodiment, the development performance is performed during the normal reach period, but the development performance may also be performed during the SP reach 1 period or the SP reach 2 period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, introduction performance pattern 1 is a performance in which the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 goes black, but it may also be a performance using a semi-transparent image that appears to imitate the performance button 136 but is not materialized, as in introduction performance pattern 2. Even in this case, it is preferable to make the performance period longer for introduction performance pattern 2 than for introduction performance pattern 1.

In addition, in the introduction performance pattern 3 of this embodiment, the wipe display wp spreads from the lower left corner and upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and performs a wipe-in and wipe-out like a wipe performance, but it may also be a performance using a semi-transparent image that appears to imitate the operating lever 137 but is not materialized, as in introduction performance pattern 4. Even in this case, it is preferable to make the performance period longer for introduction performance pattern 4 than for introduction performance pattern 3.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation performance is executed in the special chart low probability normal chart low probability state, but the operation performance is not limited to the special chart low probability normal chart low probability state, and may be executed in other states as well. For example, it may be executed in the special chart high probability normal chart high probability state, and in this case, the lever-related image may be more easily displayed in the special chart high probability normal chart high probability state than in the special chart low probability normal chart low probability state. Also, it may be displayed in the special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and the lever-related image may be more easily displayed in the special chart low probability normal chart high probability state than in the special chart low probability normal chart low probability state, and the lever-related image may be more easily displayed in the special chart high probability normal chart high probability state than in the special chart low probability normal chart high probability state.

Next, a modified example of Figure 37(A) will be explained. In this modified example, during a normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 is started, an operation effect is executed in which a normal button-related image is displayed, and then a development effect is performed, leading to development into SP reach 1. During SP reach 1, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 2 is started, an operation effect is executed in which a small button-related image, which if displayed, confirms a jackpot, is displayed, and then a cut-in effect is performed in which a gold cut-in image is displayed, and the combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot is confirmed and displayed. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the example of Figure 37(A), and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

Figure 44 shows a step-by-step diagram of a modified example of Figure 37 (A).

The diagram shown in figure (a'2) in Figure 44 shows the state corresponding to the timing of the symbol (a2) in the timing chart of Figure 37(A), and the same is true for the figures shown after (a'3). In other words, ignoring the presence or absence of ', the symbols in the timing chart of Figure 37(A) correspond to the diagram numbers in Figure 44.

In FIG. 44(a'2), a reach state is established from normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(a'2), "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern fluctuation display continues only in the center pattern display area 208b. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 in this modified example is displayed in red, indicating that the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%.

In FIG. 44 (a'2-1), the decorative pattern continues to change and is only displayed in the middle pattern display area 208b.

In FIG. 44 (a'3), the introduction performance starts. The introduction performance here is introduction performance pattern 1, and the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 goes black.

In FIG. 44 (a'4), the introductory performance of introductory performance pattern 1 ends, and the operation performance begins. While still in the normal reach state, a normal button-related image is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit up in white at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN saying "Press" are displayed.

When the effect button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period, the development effect starts in FIG. 44 (a'5), and the text "SP Reach" is displayed.

In Figure 44 (a'6), the development performance ends and the normal reach develops into SP reach 1.

In FIG. 44(a'7), the introduction performance according to the introduction performance pattern 2 starts, and semi-transparent images that seem to imitate the normal-sized performance button 136 but are not materialized appear in the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 44(a'7-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 44(a'7-2), the two images overlap and materialize in the lower left, and an animation of them shrinking to a smaller size is displayed, and in the following FIG. (b8), they are displayed as a large button image 136aB, and the operation performance starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(a'8), a small button image 136aS is displayed, which is a reduced size of the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit up in white at the initial position (starting point position). Also displayed are a small blue meter display 136bS and a small black "Press" display 136cS, along with a small button-related image indicating a guaranteed big win. The length of the valid operation period here is the same as the length of the period t4 shown in FIG. 37(A). Since the small button image 136aS may be difficult to notice due to its small size, if the valid operation period is shortened to match the size of the image, the player may not notice it in time and may not be able to operate it in time. By not shortening the valid operation period, this can be avoided.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period, and in response to the operation of this effect button 136, a cut-in effect is started in FIG. 44 (a'9). A gold cut-in image CTG with a gold edge is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (a'9) so as to overlap with the reach effect display of SP reach 1. The expected probability of a jackpot with this gold cut-in image CTG is 80%, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), but the display of the small button image 136aS means that a jackpot has been confirmed.

In FIG. 44 (a'10), the decorative symbols that were displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right start to be temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the center symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a combination of decorative symbols for a jackpot, such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7," is temporarily stopped (displayed with a fluctuating swing). Also, an animation of a lord with his hands thrust out in front of him making a peace sign is displayed.

Then, in FIG. 44 (a'11), the winning combination of decorative symbols, such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7", is displayed.

Next, a modified example of FIG. 37(B) will be explained. In the modified example of FIG. 37(B), during a normal reach, the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 2 is started, an operation performance in which a red button-related image is displayed is executed, and then a development performance is performed, leading to development into SP reach 1. During the execution of this introduction performance, a lower tray full error is detected, and a ball removal error notification display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. During SP reach 1, the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 2 is started, an operation performance in which a large button-related image is displayed is executed, and then a cut-in performance in which a red cut-in image is displayed is executed. Up to this point, the ball removal error notification display remains displayed. Below, the differences from the example of FIG. 37(B) will be mainly explained, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

Figure 45 shows a step-by-step diagram of a modified example of Figure 37 (B).

The diagram shown in figure (b'1) in Figure 45 shows the state corresponding to the timing of the symbol (b1) in the timing chart of Figure 37(B), and the same is true for the figures shown after (b'2). In other words, ignoring the presence or absence of ', the symbols in the timing chart of Figure 37(B) correspond to the diagram numbers in Figure 45.

In FIG. 45(b'1), the decorative pattern is displayed in a changing manner. The decorative pattern is displayed in a normal changing manner here.

In FIG. 45(b'2), a reach state is established from normal fluctuation, and the normal reach period begins. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(b'2), "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern continues to change and be displayed only in the center pattern display area 208b.

In FIG. 45 (b'3), the introduction performance of the introduction performance pattern 2 starts, and a semi-transparent image that seems to imitate the normal-sized performance button 136 but is not materialized appears in the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, as shown in FIG. 45 (b'3-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, it is detected that the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. 1 is full of game balls, and an error display BER such as "Please remove the balls", which is a ball removal error notification display, is displayed on the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c on the decorative pattern display device 208. This error display BER is displayed overlapping the right image moving diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 45 (b'3-2), the two images overlap at the lower left, and in the following FIG. 45 (b4'), the introduction performance of the introduction performance pattern 2 ends, and the operation performance starts. In the normal reach state, a red button related image is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen. The red button related image displayed in this modified example is slightly different from the red button related image described with reference to FIG. 31. That is, the same as above, a red button image 136aR that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit in red at the initial position is displayed, but instead of the red meter display 136bR that displays a red bar portion, a blue meter display 136bN that displays a blue bar portion that is displayed when the normal button related image is displayed is displayed. Blue is a highly visible color, and even when the red button image 136aR is displayed, high visibility is maintained by displaying the blue meter display 136bN, making it easier for the player to know the operation valid period. However, when the button image is displayed in a color that indicates a considerably high expectation of a jackpot (for example, rainbow color that indicates a 100% expectation of a jackpot), the meter display may also be displayed in that color (for example, rainbow color). Also, instead of the red text display 136cR, which displays "press" in red text, the black text display 136cN, which also displays "press" in black text when a normal button-related image is displayed, is also displayed. Even when the operation performance starts, the ball ejection lever 132 shown in FIG. 1 is not operated and the error display BER remains displayed. The error display BER does not overlap the red button-related image. Note that a normal button-related image may be displayed instead of the red button-related image, and the error display BER does not overlap the normal button-related image either.

When the effect button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period, the development effect starts in Figure 45 (b'5), and the text display "SP Reach" is displayed. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the ball ejection lever 132 is not operated, and the ball removal error notification display remains displayed. Note that if it develops into SP Reach 2, the text display "It's a Duel" (see Figure 42 (d5)) is overlapped by the error display BER.

In Figure 45 (b'6), the development performance ends and the normal reach progresses to SP reach 1. As a result of the development to SP reach 1, the expected probability of a jackpot based on the red button related image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 45 (b'4) is, for example, 45%, although this is not shown in Figure 33 (a). The ball discharge lever 132 has not yet been operated, and the animation of a large lord's face, which is the reach performance display for SP reach 1, is overlapped by the error display BER.

In FIG. 45(b'7), the introduction performance according to the introduction performance pattern 2 starts, and semi-transparent images that resemble larger-than-normal-size performance buttons but are not materialized appear in the upper left and upper right corners of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 45(b'7-1), both the upper left and upper right images move toward the center. Then, in FIG. 45(b'7-2), the two images overlap and materialize near the center, and an animation of the image expanding to an even larger size is displayed, and in the following FIG. 45(b'8), the image is displayed as a large button image 136aB, and the operation performance starts. The ball discharge lever 132 is not operated during the introduction performance according to the introduction performance pattern 2, the error display BER remains displayed, and the semi-transparent image that is not materialized and the animation of the image expanding to a larger size are overlapped by the error display BER.

When the operation performance starts, as shown in FIG. 45(b'8), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a large button image 136aB that is an enlarged version of the state in which the button lamp 138 is emitting white light at the initial position (starting point position). This large button image 136aB is also overlapped by the error display BER. In addition, a large blue meter display 136bB and a large black text display 136cB saying "PRESS" are also displayed.

The effect button 136 is pressed once during the valid operation period, and in response to the operation of this effect button 136, a red cut-in image CTR with a red edge is displayed in FIG. 45 (b'9). Up to this point, the ball ejection lever 132 has still not been operated, and the red cut-in image CTR is also overlapped by the error display BER.

Figure 46 shows what happens when the front frame door 106 is opened while an operation performance is being performed.

Figure 46 (a) shows the same situation as the timing of (a4) in the timing chart of Figure 37 (A), where the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the operation presentation in a normal reach state, and displays a normal button-related image. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that imitates the state in which the button lamp 138 is lit up in white at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN saying "press" are displayed. The sound "press" is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

On the left side of FIG. 46(a), the effect button 136 is displayed when an operation effect is being executed, and the button lamp 138 is illuminated in white.

In FIG. 46(b), while an operation performance is being performed, the front frame door 106, which is attached to the front of the main body 104 so as to be able to be opened and closed, is opened. In other words, the front frame door 106 is opened during the valid operation period and before the performance button 136 is operated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the operation. However, when it is detected that the front frame door 106 has been opened, the button lamp 138 is restricted from emitting light, and the button lamp 138 is turned off. Even when the button lamp 138 is turned off, there is no change in the button image 136aN displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the button lamp 138 continues to be displayed while simulating a state in which it is emitting white light. In addition, the sound "press" is no longer output from the speaker 120, but the normal-sized black text display 136cN of "press" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 continues to be displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an error display DER to notify that a front frame door opening error has occurred.

Even if the performance button 136 is operated while the front frame door 106 is open, response performances such as development performances will be executed.

In addition to the audio output from the speaker 120, the operation presentation also includes lights such as the game board lamp 442 shown in FIG. 4 that light up or flash. When a front frame door open error is detected, these lights are not restricted from lighting up and continue to light up or flash. However, these lights may also be restricted from lighting up and turned off.

In addition, if a front door frame opening error occurs, the button lamp 138 is turned off. However, instead of turning off the button lamp 138, it may be possible to have it emit light in a manner that indicates that a front door frame opening error has occurred (in a manner different from the manner in which it emits light in the operation presentation) instead of emitting light in the operation presentation (here, white light).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 45 (b'-3-1), when a lower tray full error is detected, there is no restriction on the illumination of the button lamp 138, no restriction on the sound output of the speaker 120, and no restriction on the illumination of the game board lamp 442, etc., and when the effect button 136 is operated, a response effect such as a cut-in effect is executed.

Above, several examples of operation effects performed by operating the effect button 136 or the operation lever 137 have been described, but when a predetermined number (e.g., three) of reserved special charts are accumulated, the effect button 136 may vibrate. Also, when a predetermined number (e.g., three) of reserved special charts are accumulated, the effect button 136 may not vibrate, but the decision button 1930, or the up button 1910 or down button 1920 may vibrate.

Next, a slot machine (reel game machine) as a gaming machine applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 47. Here, Figure 47 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention, as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 47 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of patterns arranged on their outer periphery (not shown in Figure 47) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotated by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in an appropriate number, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each of the reels 1010-1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010-1012 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through a symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 1010-1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010-1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display means. Also, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back of each of the reels 1010-1012, a reel backlight (not shown) is arranged to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 1010-1012, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010-1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the winning lines 1014 that are valid. The winning lines that are valid are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid. When two medals are bet, three lines are valid, which are the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line. When three medals are bet, five lines are valid, which are the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line. Note that the number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the five lines of the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the lower right winning line, and the upper right winning line may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the valid winning lines may be called valid lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamps 1029 light up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 1021 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (inserted) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the term "inserting" includes both. The number of medals stored in the slot machine 1000 is an indicator for displaying the number of medals stored electronically. The game information indicator 126 is an indicator for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The number of medals paid out is an indicator for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, the number of medals stored in the slot machine 1025, the game information indicator 1026, and the number of medals paid out are configured as seven-segment (SEG) indicators.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 1035 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037-1039 as an example of an operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each of the reels 1010-1012. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 1037-1039 will be referred to as a stop operation, with the first stop operation being the first stop operation, the next stop operation being the second stop operation, and the last stop operation being the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation being the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation being the third stop reel. Note that light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037-1039, and when the stop buttons 1037-1039 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is an outlet for paying out medals.

To the right of the medal insertion button 1032, there is provided a chance button 1100 as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 allows operations related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, and operations related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. The chance button 1100 also has a built-in button lamp. This chance button 1100 is an operating means equivalent to the performance button 136 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and is similarly capable of taking multiple states (e.g., a light-emitting state), and may be capable of changing states during the valid period for which the chance button 1100 is operational.

The information display button unit 1050 is composed of multiple buttons, such as an up button, a down button, a left button, a right button, an OK button, and a cancel button, and functions, for example, as an operation button for calling up a user menu (e.g., a menu for setting the player's personal playing history information) or as an operation button for adjusting the speaker volume and the light intensity of various lamps. The information display button unit 1050 is an operation means equivalent to the operation key unit 190 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1.

Furthermore, a performance lever 1046 is provided to the right of the information display button unit 1050. The performance lever 1046 can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057, and has a lever lamp disposed inside. This performance lever 1046 is an operating means equivalent to the operating lever 137 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1.

A title panel 1062 is provided below the stop button unit 1036 to display the model name and to attach various certificate stamps, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp that lights up the title panel 1062. A medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal receiving tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker installed inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and the sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the performance device 1060. This performance device 1060 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right shutters 1063a and left shutters 1063b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown, performance image display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 1000.

It is not necessary to use a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to display various performance images and various game information, it may be, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can see it in its entirety. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. It is also possible to provide decorations (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen look irregular. The display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

Furthermore, while the present invention has been described with reference to pachinko machines and slot machines as examples of gaming machines, the present invention is not limited to these and may also be applied to arrange ball gaming machines, Jankyu gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, the predetermined conditions for selecting a song include winning the nth consecutive bonus, winning a bonus by lining up specific symbols (e.g., red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by lining up symbols on a specific winning line (e.g., the horizontal winning line in the middle row), winning the AT for the 10th consecutive win, winning an additional bonus for a specified number of sets or a specified number of games, winning the AT that lines up a specified hand, etc.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state in the pachinko machine 100, in the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 47, becomes a bonus gaming state, an ART state, an AT state, etc. In addition, the time-saving gaming state becomes an ART state or an AT state, etc., when the jackpot gaming state is set to a bonus gaming state, and becomes an AT state or an RT state, etc., when the jackpot gaming state is set to an ART state.

In the above description,
"A first operating means (e.g., a performance button 136) and
A display means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208);
A gaming machine equipped with
the display means is a means capable of displaying a first operation image (for example, a button image imitating a normal-sized button such as a button image 136aN or a red button image 136aR, or a normal-sized character image for encouraging an operation or indicating a type of operation such as a black character display 136cN saying "press" or a red character display 136cR, or a combination of a button image and a character image) in an operation performance using the first operation means,
the display means is a means capable of displaying a second operation image (for example, a large-sized image of a large button image 136aB or a large black character display 136cB, or a combination of the large button image 136aB and the large black character display 136cB) in an operation presentation using the first operation means,
the second operation image is an image having a display size at a first magnification factor [e.g., twice the size shown in the table of FIG. 31 ] that is larger than the display size of the first operation image,
the length of the second operating validity period is a second multiple of the length of the first operating validity period;
the second operation valid period is a period during which an operation of the first operation means is valid in an operation presentation in which the second operation image is displayed,
the first operation valid period is a period during which an operation of the first operation means is valid in an operation presentation in which the first operation image is displayed,
The second magnification is smaller than the first magnification [for example, 1x shown in the table of FIG. 31 ].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, when a second operation image of a larger size than normal is displayed, if the operation valid period is lengthened at the same magnification as the image magnification, the player will feel uncomfortable, so by making the length of the operation valid period shorter than the image magnification, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. It is also possible to prevent redundant effects for players who do not perform operations.

The second operation image may be an enlarged image of the first operation image, or may be an image prepared separately from the first operation image.

Furthermore, the operation effect in which the first operation image is displayed and the operation effect in which the second operation image is displayed may be the same effect (a common effect), or may be different effects (the former being the first operation effect and the latter being the second operation effect).

The length of the second effective operation period may be the same as the length of the first effective operation period. In other words, the value of the second multiplier may be 1.0.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a third operation image [for example, a normal-sized character image that prompts an operation or indicates an operation type, such as a black-lettered display 136cC of "repeated hits" or a black-lettered display 136cL of "long press"] in an operation presentation using the first operation means,
the third operation image is an image having a display size that is the second magnification factor [for example, 1x] of the display size of the first operation image,
a third effective operation period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid in the operation performance in which the third operation image is displayed is a third magnification length that is longer than a length of the second effective operation period;
The third magnification is a magnification greater than the second magnification [for example, 1.6 times as shown in the table of FIG. 31 ].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The third magnification may be smaller than the first magnification.

Also,
"The display means displays an image relating to the first operation valid period [for example, a blue meter display 136bN, a red meter display 136bR] together with the first operation image,
the display means displays an image relating to the second operation valid period (e.g., a large meter display 136bB) together with the second operation image,
The display means displays an image relating to the third operation valid period (e.g., a blue meter display 136bN) together with the third operation image.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"A second operating means (e.g., an operating lever 137, an up button 1910, a down button 1920, or a decision button 1930) is provided,
The second operating means is an operating means different from the first operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first operating means has a first operating amount (for example, see the arrow shown in FIG. 30(a)) from a reference position, which is a non-operation position, to an end position, which is a position of an operation end point,
The second operating means (e.g., the operating lever 137) has a second operating amount (e.g., see the arrow shown in FIG. 30( c) ),
The second operation amount is greater than the first operation amount,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The display size of the second operation image [for example, a large button image 136aB or a large black character display 136cB, or a large-sized image of a combination of the large button image 136aB and the large black character display 136cB] is n times (n>1) [for example, twice as large as shown in the table of FIG. 31] the display size of the first operation image [for example, a button image 136aN or a black character display 136cN saying "press", or a combination of a button image and a character image]. The first operation image suggests the expectation of a special game (for example, a big win) that is advantageous to the player, and the second operation image also suggests the expectation. The expectation suggested by the second operation image is m times (n>m>1) the expectation suggested by the first operation image [for example, 1.8 times in the table of FIG. 34(a) and the table of FIG. 36(a)]. For example, n=2 and m=1.8. By increasing the display size of the operation image, the expectation level can be made to feel higher than it actually is.

In addition, when the first operation means [e.g., the effect button 136] is operated while the second operation image [e.g., a large-sized image of a large button image 136aB or a large black character display 136cB, or a combination of a large button image 136aB and a large black character display 136cB] is displayed, a suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation [e.g., a cut-in effect, a win/lose effect] may be executed, but an effect not suggesting the degree of expectation [e.g., a development effect, a reach selection effect] may not be executed. On the other hand, when the first operation means is operated while the first operation image [e.g., a button image 136aN or a black character display 136cN saying "press", or a combination of a button image and a character image] is displayed, the suggestive effect may be executed, or an effect not suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed. In addition, in an operation presentation in which the first operation image is displayed and a presentation that does not suggest the expectation level is executed, or in an operation presentation in which the first operation image is displayed and a presentation that does not suggest the expectation level is executed, the length of the first operation effective period [for example, t12 shown in FIG. 37(C) or t18 shown in FIG. 37(D)] is made longer than the length of the second operation effective period [for example, t8 shown in FIG. 37(B)]. Note that the introduction presentation performed before the start of this operation presentation [for example, the introduction presentation performed during the period t11 shown in FIG. 37(C) or the introduction presentation performed during the period t17 shown in FIG. 37(D)] is shorter or more likely to be shorter than the second introduction presentation performed before the start of the operation presentation in which the second operation image is displayed [for example, the introduction presentation performed during the period t7 shown in FIG. 37(B)]. When the first operation means is operated in an operation presentation in which the second operation image, which has a relatively large display size, is displayed, the suggestion presentation may be executed in conjunction with the large display size, increasing the player's expectations of gaining an advantage. However, by not displaying any display that does not suggest the degree of expectation, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that there is a high expectation of gaining an advantage, while the length of the first operation effective period is long, making it possible to prevent the player from operating the first operation means in time.

The second introduction performance [for example, the introduction performance performed during the period t7 shown in FIG. 37(B)] is longer than the first introduction performance [for example, the introduction performance performed during the period t3 shown in FIG. 37(A)] performed before the start of the operation performance in which the first operation image [for example, a button image imitating a normal-sized button such as the button image 136aN or the red button image 136aR, or a normal-sized text image that encourages an operation or indicates an operation type such as the black text display 136cN or the red text display 136cR that says "Press", or a combination of a button image and a text image] is displayed, or is likely to be longer, but the length of the second operation effective period [for example, t8 shown in FIG. 37(B)] and the length of the first operation effective period [for example, t4 shown in FIG. 37(B)] are the same. In order to maintain fairness (to avoid discomfort), the length of the operation effective period is made the same, and the introduction performance (the second introduction performance) of the operation performance in which the second operation image, which has a relatively large display size, is made longer, thereby improving the expectation that the second operation image will be displayed.

The first operation image may be displayed in a first color [e.g., white] (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") or in a second color [e.g., red] (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"). In either the first or second case, the color of the period image [e.g., the image of the bar portion of the meter display] relating to the first operation valid period is the same [e.g., FIG. 45(b'4)]. This same color is a highly visible color, and by displaying the period image relating to the first operation valid period in the same color in either the first or second case, high visibility is maintained, making it easier for the player to understand the operation valid period. However, if the first operation image is displayed in a third color [e.g., rainbow], the color of the period image changes [e.g., changes to the third color (rainbow)].

The display means is a means capable of displaying a fourth operation image [for example, a reduced image of a button image, or a reduced image of an operation prompting image, or a reduced image of a combination of a button image and an operation prompting image] in an operation presentation using the first operation means, and the fourth operation image is an image having a display size of a fourth magnification (for example, 0.8 times) of the display size of the first operation image. The value of the fourth magnification is a value less than 1, and the fourth operation image may be a reduced image of the first operation image. In this case, the size of the display size is fourth operation image < first operation image < second operation image, and the magnitude of the expectation is first operation image < second operation image < fourth operation image. On the other hand, the length of the fourth operation effective period during which the operation of the first operation means is effective in the operation presentation using the first operation means is the same as the length of the first operation effective period and the length of the second operation effective period [for example, FIG. 44 (a'8)]. The fourth operation image may be difficult to notice, so if the operation valid period is shortened to match the size of the image, the operation may not be completed in time. By not shortening the operation valid period, this can be prevented.

The first period image [e.g., blue meter display 136bN] related to the first valid operation period and the second period image [e.g., large meter display 136bB] related to the second valid operation period also have different display sizes. Both the first period image and the second period image are images [e.g., images of the bar portion of the meter display] that show the remaining time of the valid operation period or the elapsed time of the valid operation period, and the rate of change, such as the rate at which the remaining time decreases or the rate at which the elapsed time increases, differs between the first period image and the second period image, which have different display sizes. For example, the rate at which the display area of the meter image decreases or increases differs. When the length of the first valid operation period and the length of the second valid operation period are the same, and the second period image has a larger display size than the first period image, the rate of change of the second period image is faster than that of the first period image. However, the first period image and the second period image may have the same display size and the same rate of change.

In addition, the error display [for example, an error display BER such as "Remove the ball"] is displayed in the upper layer and does not overlap the first operation image [for example, a button image 136aN or a black text display 136cN saying "Press", or a combination of a button image and a text image] [for example, FIG. 45(b'4)], but overlaps the second operation image [for example, a large button image 136aB or a large black text display 136cB, or a large-sized image that is a combination of a large button image 136aB and a large black text display 136cB] [for example, FIG. 45(b'8)].

In addition, when a certain error [e.g., a door open error] is detected, some of the operation effects are restricted [e.g., the light emission of the first operation means is restricted, sound output is restricted, etc.], but the operation of the first operation means remains valid. In addition, when a different error [e.g., a bottom tray full error] is detected, the operation effects are not restricted, and the operation of the first operation means remains valid [e.g., the example shown in FIG. 45].

In addition, the first operating means vibrates more frequently when the second operating image is displayed than when the first operating image is displayed.

In the above description,
"A first operating means (e.g., a performance button 136) and
A second operating means (e.g., an operating lever 137);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation means has a first operation amount (e.g., an arrow shown in FIG. 30A ) from a start point position, which is an initial position before the operation, to an end point position, which is a position of an end point of the operation,
The second operation means has a second operation amount (for example, an arrow shown in FIG. 30( c) ),
The second operation amount is greater than the first operation amount.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

By providing operation means with different amounts of operation, it is possible to provide variety to the operation presentation using the operation means, which may increase the interest of the game.

The above-mentioned operation amount refers to the maximum operation amount for each operating means.

Also,
"The game machine is provided with a presentation means including at least a display means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208) (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a game board lamp 442, a button lamp 138, a lever lamp 139, an upper presentation device 2, a lower presentation device 3, a side presentation device 4, etc.)
the display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting image (e.g., a button image 136 aN, a blue meter display 136 bN, a black character display 136 cN, or a normal button-related image) that prompts the user to operate the first operation means,
the display means is capable of displaying a second operation prompting image (e.g., a lever image 137 aN, a blue meter display 137 bN, a black character display 137 cN, or a normal lever-related image) that prompts the user to operate the second operating means,
The presentation means may, when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting image is being displayed, execute a suggestion presentation (e.g., a cut-in presentation, a winning/losing presentation, a dialogue preview presentation) suggesting an expectation level (e.g., an expectation level of a winning jackpot) of a special game (e.g., a winning jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and
The presentation means may execute a suggestion presentation (for example, a cut-in presentation, a winning/losing presentation, or a dialogue preview presentation) suggesting the degree of expectation when the second operation means is operated while the second operation prompting image is being displayed,
The first operation prompting image also suggests the expectation level (for example, 10% shown in the table of FIG. 34(a) or 10% shown in the table of FIG. 36(a)),
The second operation prompting image also suggests the expectation level (for example, 20% shown in the table of FIG. 34(a) or 20% shown in the table of FIG. 36(a)),
the degree of expectation suggested by the second operation prompting image is higher than the degree of expectation suggested by the first operation prompting image;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

By increasing the amount of operation of the second operating means for which the expectation is high, the higher the expectation, the more satisfying the operation will be, which may increase the interest in the game.

Note that the expectation level suggested by the first operation prompting image [for example, 10% shown in the table of FIG. 34(a), 10% shown in the table of FIG. 36(a)] is different from the expectation level suggested by the suggestive effect executed by operating the first operation means while the first operation prompting image is displayed [for example, the jackpot expectation level shown in the table of FIG. 34(b), a jackpot guaranteed (100%) or a miss guaranteed (0%) in the hit/lose effect]. In other words, the expectation level suggested by the suggestive effect may be higher or lower than the expectation level suggested by the first operation prompting image. Note that the expectation levels of both may be the same.

In addition, the expectation level suggested by the second operation prompting image [for example, 20% shown in the table of FIG. 34(a), 20% shown in the table of FIG. 36(a)] is different from the expectation level suggested by the suggestive effect executed by operating the first operation means while the second operation prompting image is displayed [for example, the jackpot expectation level shown in the table of FIG. 34(b), a jackpot guaranteed (100%) or a miss guaranteed (0%) in the hit/lose effect]. In other words, the expectation level suggested by the suggestive effect may be higher or lower than the expectation level suggested by the second operation prompting image. Note that the expectation levels of both may be the same.

In addition, the suggestive effect executed by operating the first operating means and the suggestive effect executed by operating the second operating means may be the same effect (a common effect) [for example, a cut-in notice], or may be different effects (the former being the first suggestive effect [for example, a cut-in notice], and the latter being the second suggestive effect [for example, a win/lose effect]).

The first operation prompting image is an image displayed in an operation presentation using the first operation means. The second operation prompting image is an image displayed in an operation presentation using the second operation means.

Also,
"The presentation means may execute the suggestion presentation [for example, a winning or losing presentation] when the first operation means [for example, the presentation button 136] is operated while the second operation prompting image [for example, the lever image 137aN, the blue meter display 137bN, the black character display 137cN, or a normal lever-related image] is being displayed,
The performance means is such that even if the second operation means (e.g., the operation lever 137) is operated during the display of the first operation prompting image (e.g., the button image 136aN, the blue meter display 136bN, the black character display 136cN, or the normal button-related image), the suggestion performance (e.g., the winning/losing performance) is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In other words, the operation of the first operation means while the second operation prompting image is displayed is valid, but the operation of the second operation means while the first operation prompting image is displayed is invalid.

For players who are looking for a means of operation that provides a sense of satisfaction, the second operating means can provide an operation that requires a moderate amount of operation, and by making it possible to use the first operating means, which requires a small amount of operation, in place of the second operating means, which requires a large amount of operation, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by players who find operations that require a large amount of operation cumbersome.

The second operating means may be perceived by the player as being more cumbersome to operate than the first operating means because the amount of operation required is greater, but the operation of the second operating means can be substituted for the operation of the first operating means.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the first operation prompting image in a first form [for example, the form of a normal button-related image],
the display means is capable of displaying the first operation prompting image in a second form (for example, a form of a large button related image);
the first operation prompting image of the second aspect is an image having a display size that is a first magnification factor [e.g., 2x] of the display size of the first operation prompting image of the first aspect,
the length of an effective operation period during which an operation of the first operation means is valid when the first operation prompting image of the second aspect is displayed [for example, the length of a period t8 in FIG. 37(B)] is a second magnification [for example, 1x] of the length of an effective operation period during which an operation of the first operation means is valid when the first operation prompting image of the first aspect is displayed [for example, the length of periods t2 and t4 in FIG. 37(A) or the length of period t6 in FIG. 37(B)],
The second magnification is smaller than the first magnification.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The effective operation period may be a period starting before the first operation prompt image is displayed, whether in the second aspect or the first aspect, or may be a period during which the first operation prompt image is displayed, or may be a period including a period after the first operation prompt image is displayed. In other words, it is sufficient to include at least the period during which the first operation prompt image is displayed. Furthermore, the length of the effective operation period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid in the performance in which the first operation prompt image is displayed in the second aspect may be a second multiple of the length of the effective operation period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid in the performance in which the first operation prompt image is displayed in the first aspect. If the value of the second multiple is 1.0, the lengths of both effective operation periods will be the same.

Also,
"A third operating means (e.g., an up button 1910 or a down button 1920) is provided,
The third operation means has a third operation amount (for example, an arrow shown in FIG. 30(b) ),
The third operation amount is smaller than the first operation amount.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, the second introduction performance [for example, the lever introduction performance executed in the period t19 in FIG. 37(D)] performed before the start of the operation performance in which the second operation prompt image is displayed is longer than the first introduction performance [for example, the button introduction performance executed in the period t13 in FIG. 37(C)] performed before the start of the operation performance in which the first operation prompt image is displayed. However, the length of the first operation effective period in which the operation of the first operation means is effective in the operation performance in which the first operation prompt image is displayed [for example, the length of the period t14 in FIG. 37(C)] is the same as the length of the second operation effective period in which the operation of the second operation means is effective in the operation performance in which the second operation prompt image is displayed [for example, the length of the period t20 in FIG. 37(D)]. In order to maintain fairness (to avoid discomfort), by making the length of the operation effective period the same and lengthening the introduction performance of the operation means with a large amount of operation, preparations can be made to operate the operation means with a large amount of operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation from being delayed.

In addition, the display mode [e.g., color or size] of the image [e.g., blue meter display 136bN] related to the first valid operation period is the same as the display mode [e.g., color or size] of the image [e.g., blue meter display 137bN] related to the second valid operation period.

The machine also includes a launch operation means [e.g., ball launch handle 134 shown in FIG. 1] that is operated when launching a game ball, and the second operation means [e.g., operation lever 137] is provided on the launch operation means side of the first operation means [e.g., performance button 136]. The second operation means is provided on the launch operation means side because it would interfere with the opening of a door [e.g., front frame door 106].

In addition, when the second operation means [e.g., the operation lever 137] is operated while the second operation prompting image [e.g., the lever image 137aN, the blue meter display 137bN or the black character display 137cN, or the normal lever-related image] is displayed, the suggestive effect [e.g., the cut-in effect, the win/lose effect] may be executed, but the effect that does not suggest the expectation degree [e.g., the reach selection effect] may not be executed. On the other hand, when the first operation means [e.g., the effect button 136] is operated while the first operation prompting image [e.g., the button image 136aN, the blue meter display 136bN or the black character display 136cN, or the normal button-related image] is displayed, the suggestive effect may be executed, or the effect that does not suggest the expectation degree may be executed. When the second operation means, which requires a relatively large amount of operation, is operated, the suggestive effect may be executed in return for performing many operations, but by preventing the effect that does not suggest the expectation degree from being executed, it is possible to reduce the feeling that the operation is bothersome.

In addition, no operation effect is performed that causes the second operating means to be operated continuously. Since it is troublesome to continuously operate an operating means that requires a relatively large amount of operation, it is preferable not to provide an operation effect that causes the second operating means to be operated continuously.

In addition, when a predetermined number of reserved items (e.g., three) are accumulated, the first operating means [e.g., the performance button 136] may vibrate. Alternatively, when a predetermined number of reserved items (e.g., three) are accumulated, the first operating means may not vibrate, but the third operating means [e.g., the decision button 1930, the up button 1910, or the down button 1920] may vibrate.

In addition, the first operating means [e.g., the effect button 136] is more likely to vibrate when the second operation prompting image [e.g., the lever image 137aN, the blue meter display 137bN or the black character display 137cN, or a normal lever-related image] is displayed than when the first operation prompting image [e.g., the button image 136aN, the blue meter display 136bN or the black character display 136cN, or a normal button-related image] is displayed.

The first operating means [e.g., performance button 136] may be one in which the amount of operation may change. In other words, the first operating means may be one in which the amount of operation is large and one in which the amount of operation is small.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention.

Furthermore, even if a constituent element is included only in the description of an embodiment, a variation, or various examples as described above, that constituent element may be applied to other embodiments, variations, or various examples. In other words, unless there is a factor preventing such application, even if a constituent element is included only in the description of an embodiment, a variation, or various examples as described above, it will still be valid as a single cohesive technical idea even if it is applied to other embodiments, variations, or various examples.

Below, using Figures 48 to 80, a detailed explanation will be given of a gaming machine (for example, a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100) to which the present invention can be applied. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 48 to 80 will, in principle, be used only in the explanation using Figures 48 to 80, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 48 to 80 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 48 to 80.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 48. Note that this figure is a perspective view of the exterior of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine where the player can win a profit when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a door member that is equipped with a locking function and serves as the base body of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 on the inside. The staff of the store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided to detect when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door member that is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely and has a frame shape, with an opening 116 on the inside. The front frame door 106 can also be opened and closed by the staff of the game arcade, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 form a partitioned space in which the play area 124 is provided. In this embodiment, a light source that is an LED is also called a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. In addition, a ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The ball storage tray door 108 comprises an upper tray 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and having a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. The pachinko machine 100 includes a ball launch handle 134 that launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the player's operation, a chance button lamp 138 that is built into the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to light up, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade, a return operation button 142 that issues an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the status of the card unit. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48 is also provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is full of game balls. It also includes an operation key unit 190.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104 and includes a launch rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launch rod 146. This launching device 110 launches the game ball toward the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is being continuously operated by the player, and corresponds to an example of a launching means.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front, and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. After the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104, the play area 124 can be observed through the opening 116. Note that the specific configuration of the play area 124 is omitted in Figure 48, and its specific configuration is shown in Figure 50.

Figure 49 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 48.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member and is equipped with a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown). The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a specified position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and by driving the payout motor to rotate it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of a gaming ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 52) when a gaming ball passes through, and outputs either a high or low signal when a gaming ball does not pass through. The payout sensor is configured so that gaming balls that pass through it pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined awarding condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 awards (pays out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to the awarding condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing for the overall game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing for the presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing for the presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, an error release switch that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and releases errors by operation of a game store clerk, and a second sub-board case 167 that contains the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and releases errors by operation of a game store clerk. A payout board case 172 houses a payout board 170 equipped with a switch 168, a launch board case 176 houses a launch board 174 constituting a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 52) that performs control processing related to the launch of game balls, a power supply board case 184 houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 52) that supplies power to various electric game machines and is equipped with a power switch 178 that is operated by a game store clerk to turn the power on and off, and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on to output a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which the machine can be set to one of a number of settings with different at least jackpot probabilities. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the machine may be configured so that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The role ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 60(A), the role ratio/setting display 196 is a modularized 7-segment LED board with two digits arranged above and below, and a 7-segment LED board with one digit on the right side. The role ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the role ratio (YH) and the continuous role ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. In this embodiment, no settings are provided, but multiple settings may be provided and the probability of a jackpot may be changed depending on the settings. The role ratio/setting display 196 is, for example, composed of a single-color red LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors, red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a part of the role ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visible to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the rear surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 50 (a) is a simplified front view of the game board 200. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand may be called the left and the right hand may be called the right. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes called the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be called the top and the lower side may be called the bottom. Although not shown in Figure 50, in the depth direction (sometimes called the front-to-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the near side may be called the front or front, and the far side may be called the back or rear.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, a structure can be used in which the left side 200a of the game board 200 as seen from the front is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front (the hinge part 112 side), and the game board 200 is rotated around this as the rotation center while the right side 200b as seen from the front of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to set it in place. Such a structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the main body 201. If a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game so that the game cannot continue) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor, such as a magnetic sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 is defined in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

The area of the game board 200 other than the game area 124 may be called a non-game area. The game area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished from each other by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the launch strength of the game ball is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 may be called a flow-down area because the game ball flows down during play, and the non-game area may be called a non-flow-down area because the game ball does not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire game area 124 may be called a flow-down area, but an area through which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may be called a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the play area 124, and as shown in FIG. 50(b), a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol reserved lamp 216, a first special symbol reserved lamp 218, a second special symbol reserved lamp 220, a high probability lamp RK, an electric support lamp RD, a right hit lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are disposed on the main control lamp board 254. Note that, hereinafter, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative patterns and various displays used for performance, and in this embodiment is configured with a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a performance display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display different decorative patterns, and the performance display area 208d displays an image used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are configured to display various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying general maps, and in this embodiment is configured with two LEDs. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are configured with two LEDs.

The regular symbol reserved lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved regular symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular symbol variable games. The first special symbol reserved lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. The second special symbol reserved lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., one) of special symbol variable games.

The high probability lamp RK is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or that it will become a high probability state. The electric support lamp RD is a lamp that indicates that the normal pattern variable display time is shortened and that the electric support state is in which the wing member 232a of the electric tulip described below is likely to open for a long time. The right hit indicator lamp RM is a lamp that indicates that the jackpot game state, the probability state, and the electric support state are in a state where the player can obtain the benefits by hitting to the right. The round indicator lamp RR is a lamp that indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when a jackpot occurs.

Around the periphery of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are arranged predetermined ball entrances, such as general winning holes 226a, 226b, a general symbol start hole 228, and a first special symbol start hole 230, and a variable winning device 2340 is provided in the lower right corner of the play area 124.

One or more general winning openings 226a, 226b are provided at appropriate locations in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening located on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as the general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening located in the variable winning device 2340 is referred to as the general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning openings 226a, 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning ball is entered into the general winning openings 226a, 226b, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (for example, four balls) are discharged as prize balls into the upper tray 126. The balls discharged into the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations allow prize balls to be paid out to the player based on the winning. In this embodiment, when multiple general winning openings are provided, the balls may be detected by separate ball detection sensors, or the ball passages that guide the game balls that have entered each of the multiple general winning openings may be merged and detected by a single common ball detection sensor. Also, when multiple general winning openings are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages that guide the game balls that have entered may be merged and detected by a single common ball detection sensor, or each may be detected by a separate ball detection sensor. Note that the balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal map start port 228 is a device called a gate or through chucker that determines whether the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the play area 124, and in this embodiment, one is provided on the right side of the play board 200. Unlike balls that enter the normal prize ports 226a and 226b, balls that pass through the normal map start port 228 are not discharged to the play island side, but if a ball enters, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one ball) are paid out and the entered game ball may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the play island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable game using the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, the first special chart start hole 230 is disposed in the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special chart start hole 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (for example, four balls) as prize balls into the upper tray 126, and a special chart variable game is started by the first special chart display device 212. The ball that entered the first special chart start hole 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special chart start hole 230, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first special chart start hole 230 when hitting from the right. In this embodiment, the specification is such that the variable display of special chart 2 is started in priority to special chart 1 (a pachinko machine with such a specification may be called a "special chart 2 priority variable machine"). This first special pattern starting hole 230 is one of the starting areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting area whose size does not change.

The second special chart start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chute), and is arranged below the first special chart start port 230. It has a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, a ball cannot enter the normal chart variable game. When the normal chart display device 210 wins and displays the winning pattern, the wing member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special chart start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (for example, one ball) into the upper tray 126 as a prize ball, and the special chart variable game by the second special chart display device 214 is started. The ball that entered the second special chart start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal starting hole 228 (due to the game pins not shown), it is difficult for a game ball to enter the normal starting hole 228 when hitting from the left. Therefore, as a rule, it is not possible to win the normal variable game during left hitting, and therefore the blade member 232a does not open or close as a rule. On the other hand, when hitting from the right, it is possible to expect a game ball to enter the normal starting hole 228, and therefore the blade member 232a may open or close when the game is won in the normal variable game. In other words, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning the second special starting hole 232 during left hitting, but there is a possibility of winning the second special starting hole 232 during right hitting.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the variable winning device 2340. Here, FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the internal structure of the variable winning port 2340, with FIG. 51(a) showing the V shutter 2352a in a closed state, and FIG. 51(b) showing the V shutter 2352a in an open state. Note that in FIG. 51, the decorative member 2340b is shown in a see-through manner to easily explain the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340.

The variable winning device 2340 is, for example, flat and includes a mounting base 2340a for mounting to the front of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b that is attached to the front of the mounting base 2340a at a predetermined distance.

A square-shaped opening is opened in the mounting base 2340a at approximately the center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is attached to cover this opening. The lower end edge of the first door member 2341a is supported by the mounting base 2340a, and it can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) attached to the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In this embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The balls that enter the first variable winning opening 234a are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

As shown in FIG. 51, decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, a top surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e, which is erected rearward from the rear surface of board surface 2340f. Decorative member 2340b has a first rolling area SP1 and a second rolling area SP2 in which game balls can roll, formed by the wall surface, and the open area behind it is closed by the front surface of mounting base 2340a.

The first rolling area SP1 is open at the top, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be movable in the depth direction relative to the mounting base 2340a to cover the open portion. The shutter member 2351a is slightly inclined downward toward the front and inclined from right to left, and is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 52). That is, in this embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state in which it advances forward relative to the mounting base 2340a (closed state), the first rolling area SP1 is blocked, and the entry of the game ball into the first rolling area SP1 is prevented, and when it is in a state in which it retreats backward (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened, and the entry of the game ball into the first rolling area SP1 is permitted. In this embodiment, the ribs 2340i protrude rearward at approximately equal intervals on the back side of the decorative member 2340b so as to face the shutter member 2351a, and are configured to collide with the game balls rolling on the closed shutter member 2351a to decelerate the game balls and lengthen the time the game balls stay on the shutter member 2351a. Since this embodiment is configured in this way, it may be possible to simultaneously enter multiple game balls that are mainly staying on the shutter member 2351a into the second variable winning hole 235a by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short period of time (for example, 0.06 seconds). In this embodiment, the shutter member 2351a is on the back side of the decorative member 2340b, so that the shutter member 2351a is difficult for the player to see.

A winning count switch SW1 that detects the passage of a game ball is disposed at a position connecting the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2. When a game ball that has entered the first rolling area SP1 rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through this winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of a game ball through the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning of the second variable winning opening 235a and performs processing to pay out a number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) based on the winning. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be won by winning the first variable winning opening 234a is the same as the number of prize balls that can be won by winning the second variable winning opening 235a, but the number of prize balls that can be won when a game ball wins the first variable winning opening 234a may be different from the number of prize balls that can be won when a game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235a.

The game ball that has passed through the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. The second rolling area SP2 is configured to guide the received game ball to one of the paths and discharge it downwards by arranging the V passage 2340g and the general passage 2340h in the left-right direction below. The V passage 2340g is provided with a V-pass switch SW2, and the game ball guided to the V passage 2340g is configured to pass through this V-pass switch SW2. In this way, it can be said that the V passage 2340g is an area provided at a position where at least the game ball that has entered the second variable winning port 235a can enter. The V-pass switch SW2 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V-pass switch SW2, it can be determined that the game ball has passed through the V passage 2340g. In addition, a plate-shaped V shutter 2352a is provided so as to cover the upper part of the V passage 2340g and can move back and forth in the depth direction relative to the mounting base 2340a. The V shutter 2352a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the driving circuit 334. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(a), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state in which it advances forward relative to the mounting base 2340a (closed state), the game ball is prevented from entering the V passage 2340g, and the game ball that has entered the second rolling area SP2 rolls on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a and is guided to the general passage 2340h. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51(b), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of being retracted backward from the mounting base 2340a (open state), the game ball is permitted to enter the V passage 2340g, and the game ball that entered the second rolling area SP2 is guided to the V passage 2340g. In addition, a discharged ball detection switch SW3 is arranged in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through this discharged ball detection switch SW3. The discharged ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured to input a detection signal to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the discharged ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In this embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, by monitoring the in/out of the game balls to the second variable winning opening 235a by the number of game balls passing through the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passes through the V-passing switch SW2 and the discharged ball detection switch SW3, it may be possible to monitor the illegal passing of game balls to the V passage 2340g. Specifically, the number of game balls detected by the winning count switch SW1 of the second variable winning opening 235a is counted as the number accepted by the second variable winning opening 235a (IN number) and stored in RAM 308. On the other hand, the total number of game balls detected by each of the V-passing switch SW2 and the discharged ball detection switch SW3 is counted as the number discharged from the second variable winning opening 235a (OUT number) and stored in RAM 308. Then, for example, in the above-mentioned special power remaining ball detection process, a process is executed to check whether the IN number and OUT number match, and if the IN number > OUT number, it is determined that there is an excess winning state, and if the IN number < OUT number, it is determined that there is an excess discharge state, and a winning error determination can be made. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using balls with strings or game balls that are larger than the regulations (so-called large balls).

In addition, in this embodiment, due to the above-mentioned configuration, only the game ball that enters the second variable winning opening 235a can enter the V passage 2340g, and the game ball that enters the first variable winning opening 234a cannot enter the V passage 2340g.

In this embodiment, for example, if a game ball passes through the V-pass switch SW2 during a small win game in which a small win occurs and the second variable winning port 235a opens, a big win occurs and the game transitions to a big win game.

In this embodiment, by configuring as described above, it may be possible to monitor for fraudulent winning by, for example, monitoring the in/out of the game ball to the second variable winning port 235a by the number of game balls passing through the winning count switch SW1 and the number of balls passing through the V-pass detection switch SW2 and the discharged ball detection switch SW3. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using balls with strings or game balls that are larger than the regulations (so-called large balls).

In addition, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill and multiple play nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, an outlet 240 is provided to guide balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharge them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and shoots the balls through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launch rod and launch hammer into the play area 124. Then, the balls that reach the upper part of the play area 124 flow downward while changing their direction of travel by the ball direction changing member 236 and the play nails, etc., and enter the winning hole (general winning hole 226a, 226b, first variable winning hole 234a, second variable winning hole 235a) or the starting hole (first special starting hole 230, second special starting hole 232), or reach the out hole 240 without entering any winning hole or starting hole, or only passing through the normal starting hole 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space portion 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104. The out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have won in various winning ports) are received by this discharged ball receiving port and are discharged outside the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, but only game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

In addition, performance device 2 is disposed at the top of play area 124, performance device 3 is disposed at the bottom, and performance device 4 is disposed on the left and right sides. Performance device 5, which will be described later, is disposed behind each performance device 4. In this embodiment, these are supported by main body 104.

In addition, in this embodiment, both the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a are in a closed state and prevent game balls from entering, but they may be capable of winning, as long as the game balls are at least more difficult to enter than in the open state.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 52. Note that FIG. 52 shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generating circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit has two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Additionally, the random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generating circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, for example, the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, for example, the normal pattern display device 210, and various status display units 3 28 (for example, the normal reserve lamp 216, the special reserve lamp 218, the special reserve lamp 220, the high probability lamp RK, the electric support lamp RD, the right hit lamp RM, the round display lamp RR, etc.), and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a drive means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special start port 232 as a normal electric role, and a drive means for driving the door member 2341a of the first variable winning port 234a and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a as a special electric role. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern start hole 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. The random number generation circuit 318 receives this signal and latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special pattern start hole 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special pattern 1. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special pattern start hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special pattern start hole 232 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special pattern 2.

In addition, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. When the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also includes a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and number of times, and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. The ROM 406 may also be configured to be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game frame lamp 452, and controls the lighting between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450 via serial communication.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the performance devices 2-5, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the performance devices 2-5, etc., and a button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190, to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and number of times, and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 506 is connected to the basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. In this embodiment, a memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when the power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use a RAM whose stored information becomes volatile when the power is cut off.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and the like to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. When the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open, these sensors detect this and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch hammer 148, and the ball feeder 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that indicates whether to allow or stop launch, and a control signal output by a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630, but power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device via another power supply path.

Next, the types of special and regular symbols displayed by the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained using Fig. 53 (a) to (d). Here, Fig. 53 (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol for special symbol 1, Fig. 53 (b) shows an example of a stop display symbol for special symbol 2, Fig. 53 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and Fig. 53 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol for a regular symbol.

Special chart 1 variable play starts on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 start port 230, and special chart 2 variable play starts on the condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 start port 232. When special chart 1 variable play starts, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play) by flashing some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lamp from the left in the lower row). Also, when special chart 2 variable play starts, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play) by flashing some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lamp from the left in the lower row). Then, when the change time determined before the start of the change of special chart 1 has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 displays the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 in a stopped state, and when the change time determined before the start of the change of special chart 2 has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 displays the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2 in a stopped state. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the change display of the special chart. This change display of the special chart may be performed multiple times in succession.

Figure 53(a) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of special pattern 1. Six types of special patterns, "Special Pattern A" to "Special Pattern F", are shown in this Figure 53(a). In Figure 53(a), the white parts in the figure indicate lamps that are turned off, and the black parts indicate lamps that are turned on.

In this embodiment, five types of jackpot patterns ("Special pattern A" to "Special pattern E") are prepared as the stopping pattern mode of the special pattern. "Special pattern A" is a three-round (R) jackpot pattern, and when "Special pattern A" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234a is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "a time-saving state") until the special pattern variable display is executed eight times. In other words, the game transitions to an electric support state with eight time-saving times. Also, "Special pattern B" is a three-round (R) jackpot pattern, and when "Special pattern B" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234a is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a time-saving state until the special pattern variable display is executed four times. In addition, "Special chart C" is a three-round (R) jackpot pattern, and when "Special chart C" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234a is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a time-saving state until the variable display of the special chart is executed twice. In addition, "Special chart D" is a three-round (R) jackpot pattern, and when "Special chart D" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234a is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a time-saving state until the variable display of the special chart is executed once. In addition, "Special chart E" is a three-round (R) jackpot pattern, and when "Special chart E" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234a is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the game does not transition to a time-saving state, but becomes a normal game state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state). In this embodiment, five types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that one type may be prepared, or multiple types of jackpot symbols other than five may be prepared. Small jackpot symbols and sudden time-saving symbols may also be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decision of whether or not a jackpot occurs in the special chart variable play is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the jackpot pattern is decided by drawing a software random number. In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot play, the game may transition to a time-saving state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of a non-electric support state, for example by shortening the time from the end of a jackpot in the special chart variable play to the start of the next jackpot. The time-saving state will be described in detail later, but the time-saving state is called a normal chart high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes called "normal chart probability change"), and the state that is not in the time-saving state is called a normal chart low probability state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is only a state related to normal charts, and the "time-saving state" is a state related to special charts or a state related to normal charts and special charts. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to ON, the state is the electric support state and the state is the high probability state of the normal map. In the high probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the normal map variable game (normal map probability change) than in the low probability state of the normal map. For example, the winning probability of the normal map variable game is 0/100 (i.e., it will always be a miss) in the low probability state of the normal map (non-electric support state), whereas in the high probability state of the normal map (electric support state), it rises to 100/100 (i.e., it will always be a hit). Also, in the electric support state, the variable time of the normal map variable game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (normal map variable short). For example, the variable time of the normal map variable game, which is 10 seconds in the non-electric support state, is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. In addition, in the electric support state, the opening time of the blade member 232a of the special chart 2 starting hole 232 is likely to be longer in one opening than in the non-electric support state (extended electric chute opening period). For example, the electric chute opening period of 0.2 seconds in the non-electric support state is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the electric support state, the blade member 232a is likely to open more than in the non-electric support state (increased number of electric chute openings). For example, the blade member 232a that opens only once in the non-electric support state for one winning entry into the normal chart starting hole 228 opens twice in the electric support state (open for 2 seconds, close for 1 second, and open again for 2 seconds). The extension of the electric chute opening period and the increase in the number of electric chute openings increase the probability of the ball entering the special chart 2 starting hole 232. In addition, the time-saving flag is set to off during a jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during a jackpot game. In addition, in this embodiment, in the electric support state (time-saving state), all of the normal chart probability change, normal chart short change, electric chute opening period extension, and electric chute opening count increase are performed, but if at least one of these is performed, the player's advantage becomes high, and the electric support state (time-saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the electric chute opening period extension or the electric chute opening count increase, which increases the probability of the ball entering the special chart 2 starting hole 232, is performed, the electric support state (time-saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special chart 2 starting hole 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special chart 2 starting hole 232 changes between a difficult-to-enter state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter and an easy-to-enter state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter. In the electric support state, the entrance of this special chart 2 starting hole 232 is in an easy-to-enter state for a longer period of time than in the non-electric support state. In this embodiment, when "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart D" are displayed, the electric support state (time-saving state a) is maintained after the end of the jackpot game that is played after that until the number of special chart variable games corresponding to the jackpot pattern is played, and then it transitions to a non-electric support state (normal chart low probability state). On the other hand, if a jackpot without electric support (for example, "Special Chart E") is won, the state does not transition to an electric support state after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart D" are displayed, the control state becomes a special chart low probability, normal chart high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and when "Special Chart E" is displayed, the control state becomes a special chart low probability, normal chart low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stopping pattern is prepared as a losing pattern. "Special pattern F" is the losing pattern.

Figure 53(b) shows an example of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2. Six types of special charts, "special chart a" to "special chart f", are shown in this Figure 53(b), one of which is a jackpot pattern ("special chart a"). "Special chart a" is a 9R jackpot pattern, and when "special chart a" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234a opens, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a time-saving state a until the variable display of the special chart is executed eight times, and then the game transitions to a non-electric support state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the big win pattern, three types of stop patterns ("special pattern b" to "special pattern d") are prepared as small win patterns. When the small win pattern stops and a small win occurs, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a opens for 0.5 seconds 12 times after the pattern stops. In other words, when a small win occurs with "special pattern b", many game balls are more likely to enter the second variable winning port 235a, and many balls can be won. The opening time and number of openings of the shutter member 2351a can be set appropriately. Furthermore, when a small win occurs, the V shutter 2352a opens, allowing the game ball to enter the V passage 2340g. Then, when the game ball that entered the second variable winning port 235a passes through the V passage switch SW2 provided in the V passage 2340g, a big win occurs and the big win game starts. In this embodiment, the small win game is counted as the first round, so when the big win game starts, it will start from the second round. After the transition to the big win game, the round game in which the first variable winning port 234a is opened is played until the final round. After that, when the big win game ends, the control state becomes the time-saving state a until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 8 times. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of rounds differs depending on the type of small win symbol, and if the "special symbol b" is displayed as a small win and a big win occurs during the small win game related to the small win, the round game is played until the 9th round, if the "special symbol c" is displayed as a small win and a big win occurs during the small win game related to the small win, the round game is played until the 6th round, if the "special symbol d" is displayed as a small win and a big win occurs during the small win game related to the small win, the round game is played until the 3rd round.

In addition, in this embodiment, one type of stopping pattern is prepared as a sudden time-saving pattern that transitions to an electric support state without transitioning to a jackpot. "Special pattern e" is a sudden time-saving pattern. In this embodiment, when "Special pattern e" is displayed and transitions to an electric support state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "c time-saving state"), the electric support state is maintained while 200 special pattern variable play is performed, and on the 201st play, transitions to a non-electric support state (normal pattern low probability state) are performed. Note that in this embodiment, when "Special pattern e" is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the game state before the pattern stopped is maintained, but when "Special pattern e" is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the c time-saving state may be started. In addition, multiple types of sudden time-saving patterns may be prepared, and the number of times the pattern change display that maintains the electric support state may differ depending on the pattern. For example, some of the multiple types of sudden time-saving patterns may be displayed more times (e.g., 600 times) than the number of times the pattern change display that maintains the play time (555 times).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stopping pattern is prepared as a losing pattern. "Special pattern f" is the losing pattern.

Figure 53 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10", in this embodiment. On the condition that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting hole 230 or the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, that is, the first starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting hole 230, or the second starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, a "variable display of decorative patterns" may be performed in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each of the pattern display areas of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. In other words, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays decorative patterns in a variable manner, separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, the stop pattern state, which is a combination of decorative patterns, is displayed as a stop. In this embodiment, in a non-electric support state (low probability of special pattern, low probability of normal pattern, or high probability of special pattern, low probability of normal pattern), where the special pattern 1 is mainly displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed in accordance with the display of the special pattern 1, and in an electric support state (low probability of special pattern, high probability of normal pattern, or high probability of special pattern, high probability of normal pattern), where the special pattern 2 is mainly displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed in accordance with the display of the special pattern 2. On the other hand, in a non-electric support state, even if the special pattern 2 is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed, and the pattern display is only performed in the fourth pattern and the second special pattern display device 214, and in an electric support state, even if the special pattern 1 is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed, and the pattern display is only performed in the fourth pattern and the first special pattern display device 212.

When the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 notifies a big win or a small win, a combination of decorative symbols with three decorative symbols of the same even numbers lined up (for example, "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" or "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4") is displayed statically in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 notifies that "Special symbol A", "Special symbol a", or "Special symbol b" is displayed statically, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed statically in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 notifies that "Special symbol e", which will suddenly transition to time reduction (c time reduction), is displayed statically, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is displayed statically in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when reporting either the "Special Pattern F" or "Special Pattern f" losing pattern, a combination of decorative patterns other than those described so far (for example, scattered patterns) is displayed statically in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c.

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" to the display of the stopped pattern mode of the decorative pattern may be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display (sometimes referred to as the "decorative pattern variable display"). The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 53(d) shows an example of the stop pattern mode of the normal map. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes for the normal map: "Normal Map A", which is a winning pattern, and "Normal Map B", which is a losing pattern. Based on the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detecting that the ball has passed through the normal map start hole 228, the normal map display device 210 performs a "normal map fluctuation display" (normal map fluctuation game) by alternately lighting two LEDs arranged vertically. Then, after the fluctuation time has passed, one of the patterns "Normal Map A", which is a winning pattern, and "Normal Map B", which is a losing pattern, is stopped and displayed. In this Figure 53(d), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special chart display has been executed 555 times after the end of a jackpot or after the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the machine transitions to an electric support state until the special chart display has been executed 200 times. In the following explanation, this electric support state may be referred to as "Yu-time" or "b time-saving state."

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map changing display" to the stop display of the regular map's stopping pattern state may be referred to as the regular map changing display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 52 will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Note that Fig. 54 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 stores a special random number value, a special round determination random number value, a special electric support determination random number value, and a special pattern determination random number value. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. The RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special numbers, the winning random number value of the special numbers, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the reserved number of special numbers may be referred to as the reserved number storage area of the special numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage area for special numbers that is divided into areas for the maximum number (in this example, four each for special numbers 1 and 2) that can be reserved for the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), and also has a random number storage area for normal numbers. In the start information storage area for special numbers, as described below, multiple types of start information are stored in one set, and these start information is stored in one set per area in the order of winning (order of reservation).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 54 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, an interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial value are set to WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value to WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the low voltage signal is monitored to see if it is on, i.e., if the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is on (if the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect a power cutoff), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a numerical value that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below is set in the timer circuit 312, a clear signal is output from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400), and settings are made to allow writing to the RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before the power was cut off (power failure) is to be restored, and if the state before the power failure is not to be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute the initialization process.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure will be restored (step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 49 by a store employee or the like (step S113). In other words, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115), and if it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the role ratio/setting display 196 flashes with "1" indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor is showing "6", it returns to "1". In this embodiment, it is possible to select at least one of settings 1 to 6, which have different jackpot probabilities, and the setting is confirmed by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the role ratio/setting display 196, but it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by audio output, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, six settings are provided, from setting 1 to 6, but other settings are also possible, or the settings may not be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was cut off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

In addition, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process in step S117.

In step S119, an initialization process is performed to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating a suspend, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (e.g., all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result is a specific value (e.g., 0) or not (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), an initialization process is performed to set the pachinko machine 100 to an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In this embodiment, even if initialization is performed, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, like the power recovery command described later. Also, in this embodiment, when the initialization process is performed, a part of the storage area of the RAM 308 may be maintained in the state before the power failure without being initialized, and for example, the number of starts between big wins (TS) and flags related to the execution of the play time (b time-shortening state) described later may not be cleared even if the settings are changed (including replaying the same settings). Also, even if the RAM is not cleared, it may be configured so that only predetermined data such as the number of starts between big wins (TS) and flags related to the execution of the play time (b time-shortening state) can be cleared. In this case, this predetermined data may be cleared arbitrarily, or may be cleared forcibly.

In step S121, after the interrupt prohibition setting is performed, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and the stack pointer is reset (main setting). In addition, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure are read out and reset in each register, and then interrupt permission is set. After that, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the stack pointer and registers after resetting, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was lost. That is, the process is resumed from the next command after the command (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before the power failure and before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later). In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 49. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command indicates that the state has been restored to when the power was turned off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 55. Note that Fig. 55 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 52, including various ball detection sensors, are input through the input port of I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, and are stored in a signal status storage area partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Taking the detection signals of the ball detection sensors as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times ago (about 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. In addition, the detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the current detection signal storage area described above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in each of the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and it is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which is repeatedly started at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is started several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, the above-mentioned step S205 checks the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. In other words, when the game ball starts to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal from the previous time, and there is a detection signal from the current time. In this embodiment, taking into consideration erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a win has occurred. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal before last, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal before last, and there is a detection signal this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning hole 226a, 226b, the first variable winning hole 234a, the second variable winning hole 235a, the first special starting hole 230, and the second special starting hole 232, or passed through the general starting hole 228 or the jackpot generation gate 252. That is, it is determined that there has been a win in these winning holes 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b or these starting holes 230, 232, 228, 252. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first special symbol starting hole sensor that detects the entry of a ball into the first special symbol starting hole 230 matches the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, it is determined that there has been a win in the first special symbol starting hole 230, that is, that a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning in the first special symbol starting hole 230 is performed, but when the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning in the first special symbol starting hole 230 is not performed and the processing is branched to the subsequent processing. In addition, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning judgment clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before last, there is no detection signal last time, and there is no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a win has occurred, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning judgment clear pattern information. If it matches the winning judgment clear pattern information, from the next time onwards, it will be determined whether it matches the winning judgment pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes and basic random number update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value performed in step S121 is updated, and then the random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value and the special random number value used by the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Also, if it is determined that the random number counter has gone around once as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and set in the memory area of the random number counter. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, which varies in the range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and set in the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round, an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a special number has completed its round is provided in RAM 308.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the random number counter for generating random numbers for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including a normal pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the normal pattern display device 210, a special pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214, and timers for timing a specified winning performance time, a specified opening time, a specified closing time, a specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a winning slot counter update process is performed. In this winning slot counter update process, when a win occurs in winning slots 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b or starting slots 230, 232, the value of the prize ball count memory area provided for each winning slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

In addition, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. In the winning entry acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area according to the winning order (reserved order) of the start information storage section provided in RAM 308.

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 52 are composed of one byte, with strobe information in bit 7 (when on, indicates that data is being set), power-on information in bit 6 (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), the current processing type for encryption in bits 4 and 5 (0 to 3), and the payout request count after encryption processing in bits 0 to 3.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process is one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process in the middle of the normal map change display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), on/off drive control is performed to alternately blink the two LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a change display of the normal map (normal map change play).

In addition, in the normal pattern status update process at the timing when the normal pattern change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the two LEDs constituting the normal pattern display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the winning pattern is displayed, and if the winning flag is off, the two LEDs constituting the normal pattern display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the losing pattern is displayed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal pattern status update process. Here, the above-mentioned turning on and off drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal pattern is being stopped. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a confirmed display of either the winning pattern (normal pattern A shown in FIG. 53(d)) or the losing pattern (normal pattern B shown in FIG. 53(d)). Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of a timer for managing the normal symbol stop time provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Also, if the result of the normal map variable play is a win, the normal map win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal map win flag is on, in the normal map status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to normal map operation, and a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a of the second special map start port 232 to keep the blade member 232a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 2 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade open time changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a to keep the blade member 232a in a closed state for a specified closed period (e.g., 500 ms), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the timer for managing the blade closed time provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that starts when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the wing closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process at the end of the above-mentioned specified stop display period (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a lottery process related to the normal map is performed. In this lottery process, when the normal map variable play and the second special map start port 232 are not open/closed (the normal map state is not in operation), and the number of reserved normal map variable plays is one or more, a random number lottery based on the normal map winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area is used to determine whether the result of the normal map variable play is a win or a loss, and if it is a win, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If it is a loss, the win flag is set to OFF. Note that regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as a normal map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected from among multiple variable times based on the obtained normal map timer random number value, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. The number of reserved regular variable games is stored in a reserved regular number storage area in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved regular variable games minus 1 is stored in this reserved regular number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the special pattern pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the special pattern pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special patterns 1 and 2, pre-determines the stop pattern and the change time before the hit/miss determination process, and stores the pre-determination result (special pattern pre-reading result) in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2, but first, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, in the special chart 2 state update process during the special chart 2 variable display (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), a lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed to repeatedly light and extinguish a specific LED among the eight LEDs that make up the special chart 2 display device 214. By performing this control, the special chart 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special chart 2 (special chart 2 variable play). In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), a specific transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process is terminated. In addition, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times storage section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 9R big win flag, a 3R big win flag, a 9R small win flag, a 6R small win flag, a 3R small win flag, a c time-saving transition flag, a miss flag, and a regular pattern probability change flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping pattern in the special pattern 2 related lottery process described later. In the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the special chart 2 variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 9R big win flag is on, when the normal chart probability variation flag is on, the special chart a shown in FIG. 53(b) is displayed, when the 9R small win flag is on, when the normal chart probability variation flag is on, the special chart b shown in FIG. 53(b) is displayed, when the 6R small win flag is on, when the normal chart probability variation flag is on, the special chart c shown in FIG. 53(b) is displayed, when the 3R small win flag is on, when the normal chart probability variation flag is on, the special chart d shown in FIG. 53(b) is displayed, when the c time-saving transition flag is on, when the normal chart probability variation flag is also on, the special chart e shown in FIG. 53(b) is displayed, and when the miss flag is on, the special chart f is displayed. The LEDs that constitute the special chart 2 display device 214 are controlled to be turned on and off, and a setting is made in the setting area of the RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 2 is being stopped and displayed. By performing this control, the special chart 2 display device 214 displays one of the following patterns: 9R big win pattern (special chart a), 9R small win pattern (special chart b), 6R small win pattern (special chart c), 3R small win pattern (special chart d), sudden time-saving pattern (special chart e), and miss pattern (special chart f). In this embodiment, the special chart 2 priority variable machine is used as an example, but it may be applied to a simultaneous variable machine in which special chart 1 and special chart 2 are displayed at the same time. In this case, the pachinko machine 100 may display the variable display of special chart 1 during the variable display of special chart 2, but when the big win pattern or small win pattern is displayed at the timing when the special chart 2 variable display time has elapsed, regardless of the lottery result of special chart 1, the lottery result is discarded in special chart 1 at the timing of the big win pattern display of special chart 2, and the miss pattern is displayed at the time of the big win pattern display of special chart 2. In addition, if the special chart 1 change display is being performed while the special chart 2 change display is in progress, if the small win pattern is displayed stationary at the timing when the special chart 2 change display time has elapsed, the special chart 1 change display may be made to continue even if the special chart 2 small win pattern is displayed.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stopped display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stopped period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed special chart 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 is 0 and the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 2 variable play is a small win, the small win flag is turned on. When the small win flag is on, in the special chart 2 state update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 2 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning performance period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for a specified winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that a big win will begin by the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the predetermined winning performance period ends (when the value of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a) of the first variable winning port 234a for a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected in the first variable winning port 234a or the second variable winning port 235a), to keep the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in an open state, and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning port opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a) for the specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) to keep the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in a closed state, and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example embodiment, 9 rounds, 6 rounds, or 3 rounds), and in the special pattern 2 state update process that starts at the timing of the end of the control, information indicating the effect waiting period is set in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to set it to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 has ended. In this embodiment, if the special pattern probability change flag is set on and the normal pattern probability change flag is set on, the probability change flag and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 are turned on at the same time as the jackpot game ends, and if the special pattern probability change flag is set off and the normal pattern probability change flag is set on, the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is set to the time-saving number of times (e.g., 8 times), and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on.

The time-saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine is in a state advantageous to the player, in order to shorten the time between the end of a jackpot in the special jackpot variation game and the start of the next jackpot. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the game is in a high probability state (normal probability change). In the high probability state, the probability of winning in the normal jackpot variation game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, in the high probability state, the variation time of the normal jackpot variation game is shorter than in the low probability state (normal probability short). Furthermore, in the high probability state, the opening time of the pair of wing members 232a of the special 2 starting hole 232 is likely to be longer in one opening (electric chute opening extension) than in the low probability state. In addition, in the high probability state, the pair of wing members 232a is likely to open more than in the low probability state. The state in which any of these normal probability change, normal probability short, and electric chute opening extension is set is called the electric support state (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

As described above, the time-saving flag is set to off during a jackpot game (special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during a jackpot game. This is to solve the problem that if the normal high probability state is in place during a jackpot game, many game balls will enter the special 2 start port 232 before a certain number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234a (second variable winning port 235a) during the jackpot game, and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot (number of balls dispensed) will increase, increasing the risk of gambling. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls for entering the special 2 start port 232 is "1", so the number of balls dispensed during the jackpot game does not increase substantially, and the time-saving flag may be left on even during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end performance setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the special chart 2 status update process, which starts when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to special chart 2 not in operation.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 2 variable play is a sudden time-saving, the c time-saving transition flag is turned on. When this c time-saving transition flag is on, the special chart 2 non-operating state is set in the setting area of RAM 308 in the special chart 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). At this time, the number of time-saving times (e.g., 200 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets special chart 2 not operating in the setting area of RAM 308. If special chart 2 is not operating, the special chart 2 status update process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 1.

For example, in the special chart 1 state update process during the special chart 1 variable display (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), a lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed to repeatedly light and extinguish a specific LED among the eight LEDs that make up the special chart 1 display device 212. By performing this control, the special chart 1 display device 212 performs a variable display of the special chart 1 (special chart 1 variable play). In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), a specific transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process is terminated. In addition, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times storage section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times.

In addition, flags such as a 3R jackpot flag, a miss flag, and a normal probability fluctuation flag are prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop pattern in the special pattern 1 related lottery process described later. In the special pattern 1 state update process that starts when the special pattern 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag is on and the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special patterns A to D are displayed, when the 3R jackpot flag is on and the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, the special pattern E is displayed, and when the miss flag is on, the special pattern F is displayed, so that the LEDs that constitute the special pattern 1 display device 212 are controlled to be turned on and off, and a setting is made in the setting area of the RAM 308 to indicate that the special pattern 1 is being stopped. By performing this control, the special chart 1 display device 212 will display one of the following confirmed patterns: a 3R electric support jackpot pattern (special chart A to special chart D), a 3R jackpot pattern (special chart E), or a losing pattern (special chart F).

In the above explanation, a special chart 2 priority variation in which a highly advantageous special chart 2 variation game is started in priority over a less advantageous special chart 1 variation game, and reserved special chart 2 is consumed in priority over reserved special chart 1, is given as an example, but a special chart 1 priority variation in which a less advantageous special chart 1 variation game is started in priority over a more advantageous special chart 2 variation game, and reserved special chart 1 is consumed in priority over reserved special chart 2. Also, a start gate winning order variation in which special chart variation games related to reserved special charts 1 and 2 are started in the order of winning at the start gate, without giving priority to either a highly advantageous special chart 2 variation game or a less advantageous special chart 1 variation game, may be used.

In the above explanation, the lottery process or variable play for the reservation of one special chart is not performed depending on the state of the other special chart, but this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special chart state update process and special chart-related lottery process may be performed independently for special chart 1 and special chart 2, respectively, to simultaneously vary multiple special charts (simultaneous variation machine). In addition, when multiple special charts are simultaneously varied in this manner, multiple areas for displaying the lottery results of each special chart may be provided in the decorative pattern display device 208, or multiple decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the lottery results of each special chart, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of multiple special charts. In addition, it may be a simultaneous variation machine in which special chart 1 variable play and special chart 2 variable play are performed simultaneously. In a pachinko machine that is a simultaneous variation machine, the variation display of special chart 2 may be performed while the variation display of special chart 1 is being performed, but if the jackpot pattern is displayed when the variation display time of special chart 1 has elapsed, regardless of the lottery result of special chart 2, the lottery result is discarded in special chart 2 at the timing of the jackpot pattern display of special chart 1 and the losing pattern is displayed. Also, if a losing pattern is displayed when the variation display time of special chart 1 has elapsed, regardless of the lottery result of special chart 2, the lottery result may be discarded in special chart 2 at the timing of the losing pattern display of special chart 1 and the losing pattern may be displayed. Also, when the variation display of special chart 2 is being performed during the variation display of special chart 1, the lottery result of special chart 1 may be discarded in the above-mentioned manner at the timing when the variation display time of special chart 2 has elapsed and the losing pattern may be displayed.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of special chart 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 1 variable play is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 is 0 and the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the number of times the special chart change display (sometimes called special prize start (TS)) occurs from the time the jackpot ends and the special chart low probability state is entered until the jackpot is reached is counted, and when that number reaches a predetermined number (555 times), the time-saving flag is turned on, the time-saving count is set to the predetermined number (200 times), and the state transitions to the time-saving state (sometimes called b time-saving state or "Yu-time").

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), a predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and special pattern 1 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 1 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 1 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special chart 1 state update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 1 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for a specified winning presentation period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special drawing 1 state update process that starts when the predetermined winning performance period ends (when the value of the special drawing 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) of the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) for a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected in the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a)), to keep the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in an open state, and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 1 state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) of the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a for a specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) to keep the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in a closed state, and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 3 rounds), and in the special pattern 1 state update process that starts at the end of the process, information indicating the effect waiting period is set in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to set the device to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 has ended. In this embodiment, if the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the time-saving count memory section provided in RAM 308 is set to the time-saving count (e.g., 8 times, 4 times, 2 times, or 1 time), and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end performance setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the special chart 1 status update process that starts when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to special chart 1 not in operation.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 1 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 1 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 1 stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 1 not operating in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special chart 1 status update process when the special chart 1 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S229.

After the special chart status update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special chart-related lottery process is performed for each of the special charts 1 and 2. Here, too, the special chart-related lottery process for the special chart 2 (special chart 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery process for the special chart 1 (special chart 1 related lottery process) is performed (step S231). The special chart 2 related lottery process is performed using the first special chart 2 winning random number value and the special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value storage area, with the start conditions being that the special chart 2 variable play is not being performed, the special chart 2 state is inactive, neither the special chart 1 nor the special chart 2 is in the jackpot play, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable plays is 1 or more. The special chart 1 related lottery process is executed using the first special chart 1 winning random number value and special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that neither special chart 1 nor special chart 2 variable play is being performed, the status of special chart 1 and special chart 2 are inactive, neither special chart 1 nor special chart 2 jackpot play is in progress, the number of special chart 2 variable plays is not on hold, and the number of reserved special chart 1 variable plays is 1 or more.

The result of the decorative pattern display device 208's win/loss judgment for the special pattern variable play is notified by the first sub-control unit 400, and in this embodiment, in the time-saving state, notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the special pattern 2 start port 232 is given priority over notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the special pattern 1 start port 230, and in the normal play state, notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the special pattern 1 start port 230 is given priority over notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the special pattern 2 start port 232.

In the case of the special chart 2 related lottery processing of step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (oldest stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number storage area, and determines whether it is a big win, a small win, a sudden time reduction, or a miss (win/lose judgment) using the win/lose judgment table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose judgment result. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 is displayed by stopping after the variable display using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose judgment result. Next, the main control unit 300 uses various tables stored in the ROM 306 to determine the variable display time (timer number) of the special chart 2 based on, for example, the result of the winning/losing judgment, the stopped pattern, the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time of the winning/losing judgment, the acquired random number value for determining the special chart variable time, etc.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229) described above, the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special chart status update process and special chart related lottery process are configured to be performed with priority for special chart 2 over special chart 1, but this is not limited to this, and multiple special charts may be changed simultaneously by performing the process independently for special chart 1 and special chart 2.

In step S233, which is the next step after step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (in this example form, basic commands, winning hole winning command, ball out command, launch position command, special chart fluctuation start command, special chart fluctuation stop command, special chart win start command, special chart win end command, big winning hole opening command, big win round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, pre-read result information command, setting command, or other information that can identify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special chart fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, c time-saving transition flags, miss flags, timer numbers selected in the special chart-related lottery process, and the like, and further includes, in this embodiment, stop pattern information that can identify the stop pattern when the special chart fluctuation start command is set. In the case of a special chart fluctuation stop command, the command data includes various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, c time-saving transition flags, and miss flag values, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds, etc. In the case of a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a prize has been won at the special chart 1 start port 230, whether or not a prize has been won at the special chart 2 start port 232, whether or not a prize has been won at the first variable prize port 234a, and whether or not a prize has been won at the second variable prize port 235a. In the case of a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special chart 1 and special chart 2, the look-ahead number stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stopping patterns stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, the command data includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned spin start setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, c time-saving transition flags, and miss flags stored in RAM 308, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable plays or special chart 2 variable plays, etc., is set in the command data.In the above-mentioned spin stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, c time-saving transition flags, and miss flags stored in RAM 308, etc., is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning performance setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the performance control information stored in RAM 308 to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning performance period, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned end performance setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the performance control information stored in RAM 308 to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the performance waiting period, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned big prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the process of sending the setting to close the big prize opening described above, information indicating the number of big prize rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in step S233, a general command special chart reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special chart reservation increase process, special chart identification information (information indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 are set in the command data.

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which is the next step after step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, the next step after step S235, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error. When a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the display data to be output to the normal display unit 210, the special display unit 1 display unit 212, the special display unit 2 display unit 214, the various status display units 328, etc., is set to the output port of the I/O 310 by driving various solenoids 332 to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239, which is the next step after step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not. If the low voltage signal is on (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 54. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as return data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the HALT state is entered.

Next, the judgment table used in the normal drawing-related lottery process (step S223), the special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229), and the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. Here, FIG. 56(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal drawing hit/miss judgment table, FIG. 56(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing 1 hit/miss judgment table, FIG. 56(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing 2 hit/miss judgment table, FIG. 56(d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing 1 determination allocation table, FIG. 56(e) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing 2 determination allocation table, FIG. 56(f) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing 1 variation pattern table, and FIG. 56(g) is a diagram explaining an example of the transition of the variation pattern table of the special drawing 1.

The table for determining whether a normal drawing is a hit or a miss shown in FIG. 56(a) is a table for determining whether a normal drawing is a hit or a miss for a normal drawing used when determining whether a normal drawing is a hit or a miss. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 56(a), when this table for determining whether a normal drawing is a hit or a miss is used, in the low probability state of the normal drawing, there is no hit value, i.e., the hit probability is 0%, and in the high probability state of the normal drawing, the possible range of the random number is 0 to 99, and the hit value is 0 to 99. In other words, the hit probability is 100/100 (i.e., 100%). In the low probability state of the normal drawing (when the time-saving function is not activated), there may be a certain probability (for example, 1%) of a hit, and in the high probability state of the normal drawing (when the time-saving function is activated), there may be a certain probability (for example, 1%) of a miss.

The table for determining whether or not the special chart 1 has been won, shown in FIG. 56(b), is a table that is referenced when determining whether or not the special chart 1 has been won, and as a result of determining whether or not the special chart 1 has been won in the jackpot lottery, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (approximately 1/199.8). This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In addition, although this embodiment is not configured to have multiple settings, multiple settings may be provided and configured so that the jackpot probability differs for each setting.

The table for determining whether or not the special chart 2 has been won, shown in FIG. 56(c), is a table that is referenced when determining whether or not the special chart 2 has been won. As a result of determining whether or not the special chart 2 has been won, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (approximately 1/199.8), a small jackpot is selected with a probability of 13945/65536 (approximately 1/4.7), and a sudden time reduction is selected with a probability of 18969/65536 (approximately 1/3.455). This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

Figure 56 (d) shows an example of a distribution table for determining special pattern 1, and the stopping pattern is determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of special pattern 1 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This distribution table for determining special patterns specifies a random number range that corresponds to the stopping pattern state of the special pattern (see Figure 53 (a)) for each hit/miss judgment result.

First, if the result of the special chart 1 hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, one of "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart E" is selected. As described above, "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart E" are all 3R jackpots that open the first variable winning port 234a, and "Special Chart A" is given 8 times of time-saving after the end of the jackpot game, "Special Chart B" is given 4 times of time-saving, "Special Chart C" is given 2 times of time-saving, "Special Chart D" is given 1 time-saving, and "Special Chart E" is not given time-saving. The selection rate for each is 3/100 for "Special Chart A", 15/100 for "Special Chart B", 15/100 for "Special Chart C", 15/100 for "Special Chart D", and 50/100 for "Special Chart E".

Figure 56 (e) shows an example of a distribution table for determining special pattern 2, and the stopping pattern is determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of special pattern 2 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This distribution table for determining special pattern specifies a random number range that corresponds to the stopping pattern state of the special pattern (see Figure 53 (b)) for each hit/miss judgment result.

If the result of the special chart 2 hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, "special chart a" is selected. As described above, "special chart a" is a 9R jackpot in which the first variable winning port 234a opens, and eight time-saving rounds are awarded after the jackpot game ends. Also, if the result of the special chart 2 hit/miss judgment is a small hit, one of "special chart b" to "special chart d" is selected. As described above, all of "Special Chart b" to "Special Chart d" are small wins in which the second variable winning port 235a opens, and when a game ball enters the second variable winning port 235a during a small win game and passes through the V-pass switch SW2, the game transitions to a big win game that starts from the second round. "Special Chart b" is a 9R small win in which the first variable winning port 234a opens until the 9th round in the event of a big win, "Special Chart c" is a 6R small win in which the first variable winning port 234a opens until the 6th round in the event of a big win, and "Special Chart d" is a 3R small win in which the first variable winning port 234a opens until the 3rd round in the event of a big win. The selection rates for each are 15/100 for "Special Chart b", 30/100 for "Special Chart c", and 55/100 for "Special Chart d".

In this way, in this embodiment, a jackpot on special chart 2 is more likely to transition to a jackpot game with more balls than a jackpot on special chart 1, and since a jackpot on special chart 2 is more advantageous, it may be possible to increase the sense of anticipation for a jackpot during Yu-time or a sudden time-saving period, for example. Also, in this embodiment, a jackpot on special chart 2 is more likely to result in a jackpot with more time-saving periods than a jackpot on special chart 1.

Figure 56 (f) shows an example of a special chart 1 miss fluctuation pattern table, which has four fluctuation pattern tables, and one of the fluctuation pattern tables is used depending on the state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In addition, although not shown, there is also a special chart 1 big win fluctuation pattern table, a special chart 2 miss fluctuation pattern table, and a special chart 2 big win fluctuation pattern table, and all of these tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

As shown in FIG. 56(f), the special chart 1 deviation fluctuation pattern table is configured to include a normal time fluctuation pattern table (No. 0), a time-saving time fluctuation pattern table (No. 1), a time-saving time/time-saving time fluctuation pattern table (No. 2), and a crisp time fluctuation pattern table (No. 3). Note that it may be configured to include other fluctuation pattern tables.

The normal time change pattern table is a normal table that is mainly selected in the normal game state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state), the a time-saving time change pattern table is an a time-saving table that is selected after the transition to the time-saving state (a time-saving state) to which the transition is made after the end of a jackpot game and before the number of times the pattern change is displayed on the special chart 1 reaches 10 times, the b time-saving/c time-saving time change pattern table is a bc time-saving table that is selected when a miss pattern change on the special chart 1 is executed in the time-saving state (b time-saving state/c time-saving state) to which the transition is made after the play time (b time-saving state) and sudden time-saving (c time-saving state), and the crisp time change pattern table is a crisp time table that is selected in the normal game state and the number of times the pattern change is displayed on the special chart 1 after the end of a jackpot game is between 201st and 540th. The Sakusaku Time table in this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, has the same performance content as the normal table, but the allocation rate is different, and it is less likely that a reach with a miss will be selected than when the normal table is selected, so the time it takes for the pattern change display to be consumed is more likely to be shorter than when the normal table is selected, and there is a higher expectation of a jackpot when a reach occurs.

As shown in FIG. 56(g), for example, after the end of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot (jackpot on "Special Chart E") where the first jackpot does not transition to the time-saving state, the pattern change display of Special Chart 1 is executed after the end of the jackpot game, and therefore, the normal table is selected from the 1st to 200th spins, the crisp time table is selected from the 201st to 540th spins, and the normal table is selected again from the 541st to 555th spins. After that, when the game transitions to play time, the bc time-saving table is selected. Also, when the jackpot game for the jackpot with time-saving is completed, the a time-saving table is selected from the 1st to 10th spins of Special Chart 1, the normal table is selected from the 11th to 200th spins, the crisp time table is selected from the 201st to 540th spins, and the normal table is selected again from the 541st to 555th spins. In addition, after the c time-saving state is entered and 200 pattern change displays are performed without a jackpot, and the c time-saving state ends, the bc time-saving table is selected from the 1st to 200th spins of special chart 1, and the normal table is selected from the 201st to 555th spins. Note that these tables are selected according to the number of times the pattern change display of special chart 1 is performed, and the number of times the pattern change display of special chart 2 is performed is not taken into consideration, but the number of times the pattern change display of special chart 2 is performed may also be included.

Next, the variation pattern selection table used in the special chart 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. Here, FIG. 57(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the deviation variation pattern selection table during normal times, FIG. 57(a-1) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal time reach and miss variation pattern selection table, FIG. 57(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the deviation variation pattern selection table during time reduction a, FIG. 57(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the deviation variation pattern selection table during time reduction b/c, FIG. 57(d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the deviation variation pattern selection table during crisp time, and FIG. 57(d-1) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the reach and miss variation pattern selection table during crisp time.

The deviation variation pattern selection table in normal times shown in Fig. 57(a) is a table that may be used when the result of the hit/miss judgment of special chart 1 in normal game mode is a miss. Specifically, when the result of the hit/miss judgment of special chart 1 is a miss and the deviation variation pattern selection table is used in normal times, the no-reach miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 90/100, and the reach miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 10/100. Also, when a reach and miss variation pattern is selected, the normal reach and miss variation pattern selection table shown in the figure (a-1) is referenced, and the normal reach and miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 50/100, the SP1 miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 20/100, the SP2 miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 20/100, the normal rescue reach and miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 5/100, the SP1 rescue miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 3/100, and the SP2 rescue miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 2/100. Note that the variation pattern including the rescue miss is a variation pattern including the middle symbol starting to vary again after the reach and miss, and stopping again with a miss combination. Thus, in this embodiment, there are 10% of cases where a miss occurs, and the game can be enjoyed.

The deviation variation pattern selection table for the time-saving a shown in FIG. 57(b) is a table that may be used when the result of the hit/miss judgment for special chart 1 in the time-saving a state is a miss. Specifically, there is a 100/100 probability that a miss without a reach is selected, and a reach performance is not executed. Note that the table may be configured to execute a reach performance.

The b time reduction/c time reduction deviation variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 57(c) is a table that may be used when the result of the hit/miss judgment of special chart 1 is a miss in the b time reduction state (Yu-time) or the c time reduction state (sudden time reduction). Specifically, there is a 95/100 probability that a miss without a reach is selected, and a 5/100 probability that a miss with a reach is selected. Note that the reach performance to be executed may be only a normal reach, or may include an SP reach. Also, a configuration in which a miss without a reach is selected with a 100/100 probability may be used.

The Sakusaku Time deviation variation pattern selection table shown in Figure 57 (d) and the Sakusaku Time reach and miss variation pattern table shown in the same figure (d-1) are tables that may be used when the normal game state is in effect and the number of times the pattern variation display of special chart 1 after the end of a jackpot is between 201st and 540th. The variation time and presentation content of each variation pattern are the same as those of the normal time deviation variation pattern selection table and normal time reach and miss variation pattern table described above, but the allocation rate of each variation pattern is different. Specifically, as shown in Figure 57 (d), there is a 99/100 probability that a miss without a reach is selected, and a 1/100 probability that a miss with a reach is selected. Also, when a reach-enabled variation pattern is selected, the reach-enabled miss variation pattern selection table during crisp time shown in the figure (d-1) is referenced, and the normal reach-enabled miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 90/100, the SP1 miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 5/100, the SP2 miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 2/100, the normal rescue miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 1/100, the SP1 rescue miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 1/100, and the SP2 rescue miss variation pattern is selected with a probability of 1/100. Thus, in this embodiment, in crisp time, a reach is applied only in 1% of cases where a miss occurs, and even when a reach occurs, 90% of cases are normal reaches, so that the speed of the game is faster than in normal game states other than crisp time, and the stress of the player may be reduced. Also, since a super reach is unlikely to be executed in the case of a miss, the expectation for a big win when a super reach occurs may be increased.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 58 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 58 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the initial settings of the input/output ports and the initialization processing of the memory area in the RAM 408 are performed, etc.

In step S303, which is the next step after step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, which is the next step after step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which is the next step after step S307, a performance control process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, a process such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process is performed on the performance data.

In step S311, which is the next step after step S309, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and depending on the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190.

In step S313, which is the next step after step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which is the next step after step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S317, which is the step following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 includes a command for performance devices 2 to 5, this command is output to drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 58 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Figure 58 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 59 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 59 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the initial settings of the input/output ports and the initialization processing of the memory area in the RAM (not shown) are performed.

In step S403, which is the next step after step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, which is the next step after step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which is the next step after step S407, a performance control process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S407, a process is performed in which the performance data corresponding to this command (performance data from the decorative pattern display device 208) is read from a ROM (not shown), and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process is performed on the performance data.

In step S411, which is the next step after step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

Figure 59 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM.

Figure 59 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle in response to this timer interrupt. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which is the next step after step S441, other processing such as updating the random number value for presentation is performed.

Figure 59 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-controller main process. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518), etc., in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which is the next step after step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the next step after step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the role ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to Figure 60. Here, Figure 60(A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the role ratio/setting display 196, and Figure 60(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198.

As described above, the feature ratio/setting display 196 is configured with a feature ratio monitor and a setting monitor, where the feature ratio monitor displays the continuous feature ratio (RY) and feature ratio (YH), and the setting monitor displays the current setting value. Note that the model of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a model that does not have settings, so the current setting value is displayed as "-" to indicate that it is not a model with settings.

Here, the consecutive feature ratio refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are acquired due to the operation of the feature when the feature is operated continuously (i.e., the number of game balls acquired due to the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a opening and winning during a jackpot game). It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired due to winning in the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls. In addition, the feature ratio refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are acquired due to the operation of the feature (i.e., the number of game balls acquired due to the opening of the first special chart start opening 232, the first variable winning opening 234a, and the second variable winning opening 235a opening and winning). It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning through the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special chart start opening 230, the second special chart start opening 232, and the general winning openings 226a, 226b to the number of out balls.

In this embodiment, if the consecutive feature ratio is calculated and it is determined that the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit seven-segment LED that displays the consecutive feature ratio is made to flash, and then a security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may also be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. This may allow the type application test of the gaming machine to be carried out smoothly.

In addition, if the calculated ratio of the reels is judged to be greater than 70%, the two-digit seven-segment LED that displays the ratio of the reels is caused to flash, and then a security signal (YH) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the ratio of the reels exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In this embodiment, when the continuous feature ratio or feature ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, a specific 7-segment LED is made to blink, but for example, the light color may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 60(B), eight dip switches are provided on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch is read and the probability of the effect occurring can be changed. For example, it is possible to set the frequency with which setting suggestions are executed, the occurrence rate of advance notices, the rate of entry into the effect mode, etc.

Next, an example of the effects of the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 61 to 63. Here, Figure 61 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment, Figure 62 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a continuation of the effect shown in Figure 61, and Figure 63 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a continuation of the effect shown in Figure 62.

In FIG. 61, the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown. Note that the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 reserve lamp 218, the special pattern 2 reserve lamp 220, and the normal pattern reserve lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 61(a) displays a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" in a static display. Note that the background here is not displayed, but a default background image, which will be described later, is displayed. In the following explanation, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Also, a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and the variable display and static display are performed according to the decorative pattern displayed large in the center of the display screen.

The decorative pattern display device 208 has a fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the pattern is changing (or the pattern is stopped) or not and for notifying the reserved number, and a reserved number display area for special pattern 1 is provided in the upper left of the display area, and a reserved number display area for special pattern 2 is provided in the lower left. In addition, a pattern change notification area for special pattern 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a pattern change notification area for special pattern 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a pattern change notification area for regular patterns and a reserved number display area for regular patterns may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 is aligned with the reserved number indicated by the reserved lamp 218 for special pattern 1, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 2 is aligned with the reserved number indicated by the reserved lamp 220 for special pattern 2. In addition, in the pattern change notification area of the special chart 1, while the pattern of the special chart 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, if it is a big win, it is displayed as "○", if it is a small win, it is displayed as "△", if it is a sudden time reduction, it is displayed as "☆", and if it is a miss, it is displayed as "×". Also, while the pattern change of the special chart 1 is being displayed, the "-" display may flash, and it may be possible to recognize that the pattern change of the special chart 1 is being displayed. The display in the pattern change display area of the special chart 2 is the same as the display in the pattern change display area of the special chart 1, and the display mode changes in response to the pattern change display and stop display of the special chart 2. Note that by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or flashing mode of the fourth pattern, or by changing the display mode of the number displayed in the reserved number display area, a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the pattern change display being executed may be made.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a variable icon display area 280 at the bottom center of the performance display area 208d.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 61 is the normal game state (special pattern low probability, normal pattern low probability state). In this normal game state, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1 to the left of the variable icon display area 280. Note that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 in the normal game state, the reserved icon display area for special pattern 2 is omitted from display, but a reserved icon display area for special pattern 2 may be provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1, reserved icons representing reserved special chart 1 are displayed. The reserved number of special chart 1 is represented by the number of reserved icons of special chart 1, in addition to the number of lit reserved chart 1 lamps 218 and the number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 1, and the reserved number of special chart 2 is represented by the number of lit reserved chart 2 lamps 220 and the number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 2. It may also be represented by the number of reserved icons of special chart 2. In other words, the reserved icons correspond to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the reserved icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second reserved icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the reserved icons on the right side are the ones that have won the prizes the oldest.

In FIG. 61(a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and both of these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In other words, the default hold icon for special chart 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 61(a), hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines to make it easier to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281.

On the other hand, no reserve icons are displayed in the reserve icon display area of Special Chart 2. This is because, as mentioned above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 61 is a non-electric support state (non-time-saving state), making it difficult for the electric chute to open and making it difficult to win the Special Chart 2 starting hole 232.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times the pattern change display has occurred since the end of the jackpot game (sometimes referred to as the "stuck count" in the following explanation) is displayed in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and the number of times the pattern change display has occurred since the end of the jackpot game (number of starts between jackpots display) and the number of times the pattern change display is required before transitioning to Yu-time (b time-saving state) (number of starts remaining until Yu-time) are displayed in the bottom right corner of the display screen. Note that, although in this embodiment, both the number of starts between jackpots display and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time display are displayed, it is also possible to display only one of them.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reserved icon display area of the special chart 1 or special chart 2, whichever is more likely to result in a win, is displayed depending on the control state (game state). That is, when the control state is in the non-electric support state, the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1 is displayed in the performance display area 208d as shown in FIG. 61(a), and when the control state is in the electric support state, conversely, the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in special drawing 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in special drawing 2 may be the same or different.

In this embodiment, the display of the special pattern change starts in the following order: change starts on the special pattern display device → display of the fourth pattern change starts → animation of the pending icon starts or disappears → decorative pattern change starts, but this order may be reversed.

In FIG. 61(b), the symbol change display of special symbol 1 starts, the symbol change starts on the first special symbol display device 212, and the symbol change display of the fourth symbol and mini symbol is also performed, but no change has yet occurred to the reserved icon or decorative symbol. Also, at this time, the number of symbol change displays and the number of symbol change displays required to transition to Yu-time are updated, changing to "After jackpot = 135 times" and "420 times until Yu-time", respectively.

In Figure 61 (c), a moving animation of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of special chart 1 has begun. In this moving animation, the reserved icon (the reserved icon subject to this pattern change) that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h11 begins to move toward the changing icon display area 280, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the second reserved icon h12 begins to move toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 of special chart 1. At this stage, the display of the decorative pattern change has not begun.

In FIG. 61 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 61 (e), the reserved icon that was the first reserved icon h11 before the change started reaches the changing icon display area 280 and is displayed as the changing icon h0, and the reserved icon that was the second reserved icon h12 before the change started reaches the display position of the first reserved icon h11 and is displayed as the first reserved icon h11, but even at this stage the display of the decorative pattern change has not yet started. Note that when the pattern change starts in the first special pattern display device 212, the reserved icon that was the first reserved icon h11 may be seen as the changing icon h0, and the reserved icon that was the second reserved icon h12 may be seen as the first reserved icon h11.

Then, the decorative pattern begins to change as shown in Figure 61 (f).

When the decorative pattern display device 208 starts displaying the changing decorative pattern, an operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 to encourage the player to press the effect button 136 within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 61(g). In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 showing the remaining time of the valid period are displayed to the right of the main character image. Although the display of the changing decorative pattern is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special pattern is changing by the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, etc. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in Figure 61 (h), the valid period is decreasing, and in Figure 61 (i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in Figure 61 (j), a reach state entry notification image 2071 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. In the reach state entry notification image 2071, the words "It's your chance!!" are displayed to the right of the main character image.

In FIG. 61(k), the reach state entry notification image 2071 disappears, the display of the decorative pattern changes becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 61(l). Note that even if the reach state entry notification image 2071 is displayed, there are cases where the reach state is not entered, but it is possible to set it so that the reach state is always entered.

As explained above, the appearance of the operation prompt notification image 136P corresponds to a performance that triggers a notice regarding the currently ongoing pattern change display.

In FIG. 61(m), the background image is switched from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 are disappeared. The fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern that was previously performed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c respectively has moved to the lower right corner and been displayed in a reduced size, and in FIG. 61(n), it has developed into an SP (special) reach (swordsman reach). In this embodiment, this "swordsman reach" may be referred to as an "SP2 reach". The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 61(n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following FIG. 61(o) displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist lord and the enemy swordsman.

The reach state entry warning image 2071 may not only be a warning of entering a reach state, but may also be a warning of development into an SP reach.

Figure 62 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example of the performance shown in Figure 61.

In FIG. 62(p), which follows FIG. 61(o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 62(s). In FIG. 62(s), the lord, the protagonist, defeats the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 62(t), all are hidden except for the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Note that instead of being hidden, a different background image may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 62(u), the fluctuation of the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be hidden, or may be a different background image from the previous one. Also, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special symbol 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the mini symbol, the number of starts between big wins, and the number of starts remaining until the play time are displayed. Note that the variable display of the mini symbol continues for all symbols until the symbol is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(v), the decorative symbols start to change again along with the display of the words "Re-draw!!" and a re-draw effect is performed. This re-draw effect builds anticipation for the final display of the decorative symbol combinations for a jackpot, such as "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7," which are combinations of decorative symbols that are confirmed to result in a jackpot and a transition to a game state favorable to the player after the jackpot game ends (for example, a time-saving state with 8 time-saving turns).

After that, as shown in Figure 62 (w), the combination of decorative symbols does not change from the jackpot combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4", and the jackpot combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" is displayed again.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 62(x), the combination of decorative patterns for a jackpot, "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4", is displayed as a stop. Also, the fourth pattern (circular shape) of special pattern 1 shown in FIG. 62(x) is displayed as a stop with a "○", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a stop with the combination "444". In FIG. 62(x), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 62(y), the word "Jackpot" is displayed along with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the jackpot as a jackpot game start performance, and the word "Right Hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen to encourage right hitting.

On the other hand, as a result of the re-draw effect shown in FIG. 62(v), for example, as shown in FIG. 62(w') to (y'), the combination of decorative symbols changes from that before the re-draw, and a combination of decorative symbols is displayed indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed, which will grant a time-saving state of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" with eight time-saving turns. In this way, in this embodiment, by performing a re-draw effect, it may be possible to create a sense of anticipation for a more favorable jackpot.

In this embodiment, there is one type of re-draw performance, but there are multiple types, and the degree to which the combination of decorative symbols for a jackpot changes before and after the re-draw may vary depending on the type of re-draw performance executed. For example, the order of re-draw performance involving the operation of a role > re-draw performance with a frame-by-frame pattern change display > re-draw performance with high-speed change > re-draw performance with slow change may be used to increase the expectation of the combination of decorative symbols for a jackpot changing before and after the re-draw. Note that the order and types of expectation are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

Figure 63 (r'') shows another example of the presentation following Figure 62 (q). That is, in Figure 63 (r''), the animation of the duel scene that started in Figure 61 (o) continues, and this animation continues until Figure 63 (r''). In Figure 63 (r''), the lord, the protagonist, is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and as in Figure 62 (t), everything except the fourth pattern display area 284 becomes invisible for a moment, and eventually, in Figure 63 (s''), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4 - decoration 3 - decoration 4" begins to fluctuate. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the first reserved icon h11 of special pattern 1 are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (t''), the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 lights up indicating an "X", and the missing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" is displayed frozen. Next, during the period when special pattern 1 is being displayed, an animation of the variable icon h0 being erased is executed in the variable icon display area 280. Note that the animation of the variable icon h0 being erased may be executed before the fixed display of special pattern 1 is performed.

Figures 63(a1)-(a3) and (b1)-(b3) are diagrams showing in stages an example of the presentation in a jackpot game centered on the decorative symbol display device. Note that in Figures 63(a1)-(a3) and (b1)-(b3), only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 reserve lamp 218, the special symbol 2 reserve lamp 220, and the normal symbol reserve lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 63(a1), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed in the pattern change display of the special chart 1, and the state of transition to the first round is shown after the production that a 3R 8-time time reduction jackpot is confirmed. When the first round is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character of Teacher Machiko and the word "Super Lucky!" slightly to the left of the center of the display screen, congratulating the 3R 8-time time reduction jackpot. In addition, when the combination of decorative patterns at the time of the jackpot confirms the jackpot (for example, when the jackpot is a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4"), the word "Congratulations!" is displayed instead of the word "Super Lucky!" as shown in FIG. 63(b1), so as to create a sense of expectation as to what type of jackpot it is. As shown in FIG. 63(a1), the number of jackpots since the first jackpot (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "consecutive win count display") is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and "decoration 7", which is the jackpot decoration pattern when a jackpot occurs, is displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, the top center of the display screen displays "1R", which is the current round number, as the round number display, and the bottom right of the display screen displays the total number of prize balls won since the first jackpot, and this value is added (counted up) by the number of prize balls won each time a game ball enters a variable winning port (first variable winning port 234a, second variable winning port 235a) during a jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning a variable winning port is added, but the number of prize balls won by winning in other winning ports may also be added, and for example, the number of prize balls won by winning a specific general winning port that can be won by hitting to the right may be further added.

Figure 63 (a2) shows the end of the third round and the end of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the jackpot was achieved with a jackpot pattern combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", so the player can recognize that it is a jackpot with eight times of time reduction. Therefore, in the jackpot end performance, the words "8 more chances!" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the player is notified that the time reduction state will continue until the special chart has changed eight times. At the timing shown in Figure 63 (a2), the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game is displayed as "Winning pt 00300pt".

Figure 63 (a3) shows the state where the big win end performance has ended and the game state has transitioned to the electric support state (a time-saving state). Specifically, when the big win game ends and transitions to the electric support state, the words "Challenge Time 8 Time-saving Chances" are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify the user that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state.

On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 63(b1), the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed in the pattern change display of the special chart 1, and after the 3R jackpot is confirmed, the state of transition to the first round is shown. When the first round is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character of Teacher Machiko and the word "Congratulations!" slightly to the left of the center of the display screen, congratulating the player on the 3R jackpot, but since it is difficult to tell what type of jackpot it is, it is designed to give the player a sense of expectation. Then, as shown in FIG. 63(b1), the consecutive win count display is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the jackpot decorative pattern "decoration 4" when a jackpot is hit is displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, the top center of the display screen displays "1R", which is the current round number, as the round number display, and the bottom right of the display screen displays the total number of winning balls since the first jackpot.

Figure 63 (b2) shows the state where the third round has ended, the jackpot game has ended, and the jackpot end presentation is being performed. In this embodiment, the jackpot was a combination of jackpot patterns of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4", so it was difficult to tell what type of jackpot it was, but the words "Looking forward to next time!" are displayed to inform players that this jackpot is a normal jackpot that does not include time-saving features.

Figure 63 (b3) shows the state when the jackpot end performance has ended and the game state has transitioned to the normal game state. Specifically, the center of the display screen displays "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4," which is the combination of decorative patterns at the time of a jackpot, and above it, the words "Please hit with the left" are displayed to encourage the player to hit with the left, and a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1 also begin to be displayed, and the bottom right corner of the display screen displays the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until the play time. After that, the reserved icon corresponding to the first reserved icon of special chart 1 is consumed, and the pattern variable display of special chart 1 begins.

As shown in FIG. 63(b3'), when the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to normal game mode, the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until the play time are not displayed, and instead, as shown in FIG. 63(b4'), the display may start when the 11th fluctuation of special chart 1 begins.

Figures 64 and 65 are diagrams showing in stages an example of a performance in an electric support state (time-saving state a) centered on the decorative pattern display device. Note that in Figure 64, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 reserve lamp 218, the special pattern 2 reserve lamp 220, and the normal pattern reserve lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration.

64(a) shows the state where the first big win game involving a big win with four time reductions has ended, and the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner has stopped and displayed as "555", which is the combination of decorative symbols for the big win displayed at the time of the big win, and the state has transitioned to the electric support state. At this time, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, three symbol change displays of special symbol 1 are reserved, one symbol change display of special symbol 2 is reserved, and the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 displays a big win, and the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 displays a miss. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(a), the number of consecutive wins is displayed in the lower left corner, and the number of balls acquired since the first big win is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen (at the timing shown in FIG. 64(a), "acquired pt 00300pt" is displayed). In addition, in the electric support state, the pattern change display is performed mainly on the special chart 2, so the change icon display area 280, the reserved icon display area 280 of the special chart 1, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 2 are not displayed. The change icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 2 may be displayed. In addition, the words "Challenge Time 4 chances to reduce time" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the time-saving state (electric support state) is in effect until the pattern change display is performed four times.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(b) shows the start of the first symbol change display after transitioning to the electric support state (time-saving state a). As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special symbol 2 priority change machine, so the symbol change display of special symbol 2 is prioritized over special symbol 1. If there is no reserved special symbol 2, the reserved symbol change display of special symbol 1 is consumed and the symbol change display of special symbol 1 is started. Also, "Challenge time 4 times remaining" is displayed in the center of the display screen as an indication of the remaining number of symbol change displays in the electric support state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(c), the first symbol change display of special symbol 2 is shown to have ended after the big win game ends. In conjunction with this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is displayed as a missing decorative symbol combination of "514".

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(d) shows the end of the big win game and the start of the second pattern change display of special pattern 2. Also, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(d), the display indicating the remaining number of pattern change displays in the electric support state is updated to "Challenge time: 3 times remaining."

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(e), the state in which the third pattern change display of special pattern 2 has ended after the big win game has ended is shown, and "Challenge time 2 more times" is displayed in the center of the display screen. In conjunction with this, the mini pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is displayed as a combination of decorative patterns that are not matching, "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 7".

Then, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(f) shows that the big win game has ended and the fourth pattern change display of the special pattern 2 has begun. Also, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(f), the display indicating the remaining number of pattern change displays in the electric support state is updated to "Challenge time 1 more time".

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(g), the special chart 2 stops and displays the small win symbol, and in response, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen stops and displays "555". Then, in the center of the display screen, the words "Chance! Aim for the V!!" appear, encouraging the game ball to enter the second variable winning hole 235a. After that, the second variable winning hole 235a opens and the small win game begins.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(h), when the game ball that entered the second variable winning hole 235a passes through the V-pass switch SW2, as shown in FIG. 64(i), a big win occurs and the big win game starts. At this time, since the small win game is counted as the first round, when the big win game starts, it starts from the second round. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(i), the consecutive win count display displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is updated to "2nd time", and in the upper left corner of the display screen, the decorative pattern "5" that was displayed when a small win occurred is displayed. In addition, the character MCK of Teacher Machiko is displayed slightly to the left of the center of the display screen along with the word "Congratulations!" to congratulate the player on the big win, but since it is difficult to recognize which type of big win (9R, 6R, 3R) it is, the player is made to feel a sense of expectation.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 64(j) shows the sixth round being played. As this jackpot started in a small jackpot game in which a 6R small jackpot pattern with eight time reductions was displayed, the jackpot game ends when the sixth round ends. Therefore, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character MCK of Teacher Machiko along with the words "Up to 6R this time," informing the player that it is a 6R jackpot. In addition, the bottom right of the display screen shows "00850pts acquired," which indicates the number of balls acquired by winning the variable winning slot in the first jackpot game and the current jackpot game.

Figure 64 (k) shows the end of the sixth round and the end of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, because the jackpot occurred on special chart 2, eight time-saving rounds are granted after the jackpot game ends, and consecutive wins can be expected. Therefore, in the jackpot end performance, the words "Entering high-speed RUSH!" and "8 more chances!" are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify the player that the time-saving state will continue until the special chart has changed and displayed eight times.

Figure 64 (l) shows the state when the jackpot end performance has ended and the game state has transitioned to the electric support state (time-saving state a). Specifically, when the jackpot game related to the jackpot on special chart 2 ends and transitions to the electric support state, the words "High-speed RUSH 8 times time-saving big chance" are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify the transition to the time-saving state. After that, as shown in Figure 64 (m), the first pattern change display of special chart 2 begins after transitioning to the electric support state (time-saving state a). At this time, "High-speed RUSH 8 times left" is displayed in the center of the display screen to indicate the number of pattern change displays remaining in the electric support state.

Figure 65(a), which follows Figure 64(m), shows the eighth symbol change display of Special Chart 2 since the transition to the electric support state. Since the electric support state ends with this symbol change display, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "High Speed RUSH Last" in the center of the display screen to notify the player of this.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the result of the pattern change display of the special chart 2 is a miss, and in response to this, the mini pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also displayed with a combination of the missing decorative patterns of "417". In this embodiment, since only one pattern change display of the special chart 2 can be reserved, the electric support state ends, but the pattern change display of the special chart 2 can be executed only once. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(c), the electric support state transitions to the normal game state, but since the pattern change display of the special chart 2 can be executed only once, the words "One last time!" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, suggesting that a pattern change display that is likely to be advantageous to the player will be executed only once as an extra bonus. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 65(c), the decorative pattern is displayed and is displayed with a combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", and the consecutive win number display and the total number of balls acquired display are also continuously displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(d), the reserved special pattern 2 is consumed in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(e), the sudden time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the special pattern 2, and the sudden time-saving decorative pattern combination of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed in a stopped state. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(e), the words "Revival time has started!" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and it is notified that the time-saving state (c time-saving state) will continue until the special pattern variation display is executed 200 times. In this embodiment, when the time-saving state is changed to the c time-saving state, the electric support state is maintained until 200 pattern variation displays are performed, but it may be another number of times, and it may be possible to provide multiple types of sudden time-saving patterns and to make the number of pattern variation displays in which the electric support state is maintained different depending on the stopped pattern. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(f), the time-saving state (c time-saving state) for the sudden time-saving is changed, and the pattern variation display of the special pattern 2 is started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the words "Revival Time!" are displayed in the center of the display screen, the decorative symbols are erased, and the consecutive win count display and the total number of balls won display are maintained.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(e'), which follows FIG. 65(d), "Decoration 4" is displayed as a stopped symbol on the left and right symbols, respectively, indicating that a reach state has been reached. At this time, the words "Big Chance!" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, creating the impression that a big win may occur, adding to the excitement of the game. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(f'), "Decoration 4" is displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle symbol, and is shown to be fluctuating. In other words, this suggests to the player that a big win or small win will occur.

Then, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(g') displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4". Also, as shown in FIG. 65(g'), the special pattern 2 is displayed as a small win pattern, and in response, the mini pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is displayed as "444". Then, as shown in FIG. 65(h'), the words "Chance! Aim for V!!" are displayed in the center of the display screen, encouraging the game ball to enter the second variable winning opening 235a. After that, the second variable winning opening 235a opens and the small win game begins.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(i'), when the game ball that entered the second variable winning port 235a passes through the V-pass switch SW2, as shown in FIG. 65(j'), a big win occurs and the big win game starts, as shown in FIG. 65(j'). At this time, since the small win game is counted as the first round, when the big win game starts, it starts from the second round. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(j'), the consecutive win count display displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is updated to "3rd time", and the decorative pattern "4" that was displayed when a small win occurred is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, the word "Congratulations!" is displayed slightly to the left of the center of the display screen along with the character MCK of Teacher Machiko, congratulating the player on the big win.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the time-saving state ends, depending on the result of the pattern change display of Special Chart 2 that was reserved at the time the time-saving state ended, it may be possible to transition to a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player.

Next, the effects after power-on will be described with reference to Figs. 66 to 70. Here, Fig. 66 is a diagram showing an example of effects before and after a power cut in stages, Fig. 67 is a diagram showing another example of effects before and after a power cut in stages, Fig. 68 is a diagram showing another example of effects before and after a power cut in stages, Fig. 69 is a diagram showing another example of effects before and after a power cut in stages, and Fig. 70 is a diagram showing another example of effects before and after a power cut in stages. Note that Figs. 66 to 70 also only show the decorative pattern display device 208, and omit the illustration of the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 hold lamp 218, the special pattern 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal pattern hold lamp 216.

Figure 66 (a) is a continuation of the presentation shown in Figure 65 (d), and shows the state in which a losing result is displayed in the pattern change display of special chart 2 after transition to the normal game state. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 66 (a), the losing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4" is displayed frozen, and since the opportunity to execute the pattern change display in special chart 2 has ended, the word "Unfortunate..." is displayed to indicate this. In the state shown in Figure 66 (a), both special chart 1 and special chart 2 are displayed frozen, and in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, "X" is displayed in both the pattern change notification area of special chart 1 and the pattern change notification area of special chart 2 to indicate this.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 66(a) is the normal game state (low probability of special drawing, low probability of normal drawing), the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special drawing 1 are displayed to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

The reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 displays a reserved icon representing the reserved status of special chart 1. The number of reserved special charts 1 is represented by the number of reserved icons for special chart 1, in addition to the number of lit special chart 1 reserved lamps 218 and the reserved number display for special chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and the number of reserved special charts 1. The number of reserved special charts 2 is represented by the number of lit special chart 2 reserved lamps 220 and the reserved number display for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284.

In FIG. 66(a), three special chart 1 hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and all three special chart 1 hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the default display mode (circular, patternless, white display mode).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 66(a), the number of times the pattern changes (the number of times stuck) after the jackpot game ends is 9, but at the timing shown in FIG. 66(a), the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until the play time is not displayed.

In FIG. 66(b), the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special chart 1 are each displayed by moving animation, the reserved icon at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1, and the reserved icon at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 becomes the second reserved icon h12 of the special chart 1. After that, the display of the decorative pattern changes. Also, the number of times stuck increases by one, the display of the number of starts between jackpots shows "After jackpot = 10 times", and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time shows "545 times until the play time". In this embodiment, the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until the play time are not displayed until the a time-saving state and the remaining pattern change display of the special chart 2 are finished (at least until the a time-saving state is finished), so the number of times displayed when the remaining number of starts until the play time starts to be displayed after the jackpot game is finished is set to be less than the number of pattern change displays that will transition to the play time after the jackpot game is finished. Also, in this performance example, the number of starts between jackpots display notifies the number of pattern change displays after the jackpot game is finished, but in other words, the number of pattern change displays until the play time can be said to be at least suggested by the number of starts between jackpots display. Also, in this embodiment, the display of the number of pattern change displays until the a time-saving state is finished is displayed in the a time-saving state, so that the display is not displayed simultaneously with the number of starts between jackpots display and the number of remaining starts until the play time, but it may be displayed simultaneously.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 66(c), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed, and both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are shown to be in a standby state with no pending pattern change display. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 66(c), the display of the number of starts between jackpots shows "After jackpot = 163 times", and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time shows "392 times until Yu-time".

After that, for example, when the game center closes, the power supply to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off as shown in FIG. 66(d), and when the power supply is turned on the next day, the machine is usually restored to the backup state and returns to the state before the power supply was cut off. However, in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, when the pattern change display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 555 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the machine transitions to the play time. Therefore, if the number of times is available to customers immediately after the opening of the store, which is the state immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 100 that is likely to transition to the play time is likely to be targeted, and fairness may be impaired. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, when the machine is restored to the backup state as shown in FIG. 66(e), in order to make it difficult to guess the number of pattern change displays after the jackpot or the number of pattern change displays until the play time, the number of starts between the jackpot is displayed as "After the jackpot = ??? times" and the number of starts remaining until the play time is displayed as "Until the play time ??? times". Furthermore, in this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after powering on is a combination of missing decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" (sometimes called the "first thing in the morning"), so it can be difficult to tell, for example, whether a backup has been restored or the RAM has been cleared when the power is turned on, which can help maintain fairness.

Figure 66 (f) shows that the game ball has entered the first special chart start hole 230, and the pattern change display of special chart 1 has begun. Here too, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time both remain as "After jackpot = ??? times" and "??? times until Yu-time", so it is still difficult to determine the number of remaining pattern change displays until Yu-time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 66(g), the 100th pattern change display is being executed after power is turned on. Note that even here, both the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time remain as "After jackpot = ??? times" and "until Yu-time ??? times", and it is still difficult to recognize the number of remaining pattern change displays until Yu-time. After that, as shown in FIG. 66(h), when the 100th pattern change display after power is turned on is completed, the result of adding the number of pattern change displays after power is turned on to the number of pattern change displays after jackpot before power is turned off is displayed. That is, the number of times of the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen becomes clear, and are displayed as "After jackpot = 263 times" and "until Yu-time 292 times", respectively, making it possible to recognize the number of pattern change displays required until the transition to Yu-time. At the timing shown in FIG. 66(h), more than 200 spins have passed since the end of the jackpot and the game has transitioned to the Sakusaku Time described below, so the words "Sakusaku Time" are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and since the number of symbol changes until Yu-Time is 300 or less, the SaboHani character SBH is displayed to indicate this. In this example, the SaboHani character SBH is displayed when the number of symbol changes until Yu-Time has reached 300, which can be said to at least indicate the number of symbol changes until Yu-Time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66(e'), even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, in order to make it difficult to guess the number of pattern change displays after a jackpot or the number of pattern change displays until Yu-time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "After jackpot = ??? times" and the display of the number of remaining starts until Yu-time is displayed as "until Yu-time ??? times". Furthermore, in this embodiment, the combination of decorative patterns displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as the combination of decorative patterns that are the losing combination of the first number rolled in the morning, "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 4".

Figure 66 (f') shows how the game ball has entered the first special chart start hole 230, and the pattern change display of special chart 1 has begun. Here too, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time both remain as "After jackpot = ??? times" and "??? times until Yu-time", so it is still difficult to tell how many pattern change displays remain until Yu-time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 66(g'), the 100th pattern change display is being executed after power is turned on. Note that even here, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time remain as "After jackpot = ??? times" and "until Yu-time ??? times", and it is still difficult to recognize the number of remaining pattern change displays until Yu-time. After that, as shown in FIG. 66(h'), when the 100th pattern change display after power is turned on ends, the number of pattern change displays after jackpot counted from power on is displayed. That is, the number of times displayed for the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time, which are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, become clear, and are displayed as "After jackpot = 100 times" and "until Yu-time 455 times", respectively, and it may be possible to recognize that the RAM may have been cleared.

In this embodiment, an example of application to a so-called type 1/2 type pachinko machine 100 is shown, but it may also be applied to ST machines, etc. For example, when a time reduction is granted after the high probability state ends, the number of times the pattern changes will be displayed until the play time ends may not be suggested or notified until the time reduction state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the power is turned on, the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize until the pattern change display is executed 100 times. In other words, it can be said that the number of times is less than the number of pattern change displays from the end of the jackpot game to the start of Yu-time.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-Time are displayed as "???", but for example, after starting with "555", which is the number of pattern changes displayed from the end of the jackpot game until the transition to Yu-Time, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, 100 pattern changes or the execution of an SP reach), the exact number may be announced.

Figure 67 shows another example of the state before and after the power is turned off and on for the pachinko machine 100.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 67(a), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed as a mismatched decorative pattern, and both Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2 are shown to be in a standby state with no pending pattern change display. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67(a), the display of the number of starts between jackpots shows "After jackpot = 503 times", and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time shows "52 times until Yu-time".

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the power supply to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off, and then, as shown in FIG. 67(c), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows a state where the backup has been restored. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 67(c), when the backup has been restored, the display of the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "After jackpot = ??? times" and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "??? times until the play time". Furthermore, in this embodiment, the combination of decorative patterns displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as a combination of "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a losing combination of decorative patterns from the first number rolled in the morning.

Figure 67 (d) shows that the game ball has entered the first special chart start hole 230, and the pattern change display of special chart 1 has begun. Here too, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time both remain as "After jackpot = ??? times" and "??? times until Yu-time", so it is still difficult to determine the number of remaining pattern change displays until Yu-time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 67(e), the 52nd pattern change display is being executed after the power is turned on. That is, the 555th pattern change display is being executed, counting from the number of pattern change displays after the jackpot before the power is turned off. Note that even here, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until the play time are both "After jackpot = ??? times" and "Until the play time ??? times", so it is still difficult to recognize the number of remaining pattern change displays until the play time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67(f), when the 555th pattern change display ends after the jackpot game ends with the power turned off, as shown in FIG. 67(f), the words "Enter play time!" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the play time (b time-shortened state) will be entered before the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until the play time are clear. At this time, a right-hit display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, urging the player to hit right.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(g), the time-saving state continues until the pattern change display is executed 200 times, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the change icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special pattern 1 are erased, the decorative pattern is also erased, and the pattern change display is performed by the mini pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, when the game moves to the Yu-time, the display of the remaining number of starts until the Yu-time is also erased, and the words "Yu-time! 200 more times" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the number of pattern change displays that can be executed in the Yu-time is notified. In this embodiment, after the game moves to the Yu-time and the Yu-time ends, the game does not move to the Yu-time again unless a jackpot is hit. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 67(g), since there was no reserved special pattern 2, the pattern change display based on the reserved special pattern 1 is shown.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 67(h), the transition to Yu-Time and the end of the first pattern change display are shown. That is, as shown in the upper left corner of the display screen, "434" is displayed as a stopped number, indicating that a miss has occurred. After that, as shown in FIG. 67(i), the pattern change display of special pattern 2 is held in reserve, and the pattern change display of special pattern 2 is started in priority to the pattern change display of special pattern 1. Also, the display showing the remaining number of Yu-Times in the center of the display screen is updated to "Yu-Time! 199 more times", suggesting that Yu-Time will continue until the pattern change display is performed 199 more times.

In this way, in most cases, in the play-time, after the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving state is reached until eight pattern change displays are performed. Therefore, when the number of remaining pattern change displays until the play-time is low, the player may think that it would be better to enter the play-time. In other words, if a jackpot occurs before the transition to the play-time, the player hopes that the jackpot will be one that grants the a-time-saving state, and even if the game transitions to the play-time without a jackpot, entering the play-time will be a more advantageous jackpot for the player. In addition, the game may be configured to notify the player first of the possibility of transitioning to the play-time, and then notify the player of the exact number of times, not limited to when the power is turned on, and may be configured to notify the player of the exact number of times, for example, after the end of the jackpot game or the end of the a-time-saving state. In addition, the display of the remaining number of starts until the play-time may be configured to display the number of pattern change displays (for example, 555 times) required from the end of the jackpot game until the game transitions to the play-time at the start of the display, and then notify the player of the exact number of pattern change displays.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown of application to a pachinko machine 100 in which, when the number of times the pattern changes after the end of a jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 555 times), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached and the game transitions to Yu-Time. However, it may also be applied to a slot machine, and for example, it may be configured such that, after the end of BB or RB, when the number of starts reaches a predetermined number, it is determined that the ceiling has been reached and a bonus such as RT or ART is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game is configured to transition to Yu-Time when a predetermined number of pattern change displays are executed after the jackpot game ends, but the game may be configured to transition to a jackpot state when a predetermined number of pattern change displays are executed after the jackpot game ends, or to transition to a probability change state.

Figure 68 shows another example of the state before and after the power is turned off and on for the pachinko machine 100.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 68(a), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed, and both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are shown to be in a standby state with no pending pattern change display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68(a), the display of the number of starts between big wins shows "After big win = 164 times", and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time shows "391 times until Yu-time". After that, the presentation shown in FIG. 68(b) to FIG. 68(d) is the same as FIG. 67(b) to FIG. 67(d) except for the number of times of pattern change display after the big win game ends (the number of remaining times of pattern change display until Yu-time), so the explanation will be omitted.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 68(e) shows that the 52nd pattern change display has been performed since power was turned on. In other words, the 216th pattern change display has been performed, counting the number of pattern change displays after a jackpot before the power was turned off. Note that even here, the displays for the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time both remain "After jackpot = ??? times" and "??? times until Yu-time", so it is still difficult to tell how many pattern change displays remain until Yu-time.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 68(f), "Decoration 4" is displayed as a stopped symbol on the left and right patterns, respectively, indicating that the reach effect has begun. Note that the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time both remain as "After jackpot = ??? times" and "??? times until Yu-time."

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(g), the combination of the decoration symbols of the jackpot, "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4", is displayed as a stop with a swaying change. After that, for example, a re-change performance may be performed as shown in FIG. 62. In this performance example, as shown in FIG. 68(h), the re-change performance fails, and the combination of the decoration symbols, "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4", is maintained and displayed as a stop. Note that even at the timing shown in FIG. 68(h), the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time remain "After jackpot = ??? times" and "Until Yu-time ??? times". After that, the jackpot game starts without revealing the number of symbol change displays after the jackpot game ends (the number of symbol change displays remaining until Yu-time). Note that in this case, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time may be made clear.

Figure 69 shows another example of the state before and after the power is turned off and on for the pachinko machine 100. Note that the effects shown in Figures 69(a) to 69(e) are the same as those in Figures 68(a) to 68(e), so their explanation will be omitted.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 69(f), the combination of losing decorative patterns "Decoration 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed as stopped, and in response to this, the mini pattern is also displayed as stopped at "534."

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(g), the display of the pattern change of Special Chart 1 is shown to have started for the 53rd time since the power was turned on (217th time since the end of the jackpot game). Even at the timing shown in FIG. 69(g), the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until the play time is not clear.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69(h), if the power supply is cut off due to a lightning strike or the like and then the power is restored to a backup state, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69(i) will display a "Recovery in progress" display until the change time of the symbol change display in progress before the power failure has elapsed. After that, once the change time has elapsed, the decorative symbol and mini symbol will be displayed as the first number of the morning that shows a miss, as shown in FIG. 69(j). If this symbol change display is a jackpot, the combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot will be displayed and then the jackpot game will begin.

In this example, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are not clear until a predetermined number of pattern change displays (e.g., 100 times) have been executed after the power is turned on, and therefore the number of pattern change displays after the end of the jackpot game (the remaining number of pattern change displays until Yu-time) is not clear until 100 pattern change displays have been executed after the power is turned on. Therefore, as shown in Figures 69(k) to (m), after 100 pattern change displays have been executed after the power is turned on, that is, in the example shown in Figure 69, after 318 pattern change displays have been executed after the end of the jackpot game, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are clear, as shown in Figure 69(m). At the timing shown in Figure 69 (m), more than 200 spins have passed since the end of the jackpot, and the game has transitioned to Sakusaku Time, which will be described later, so the words "Sakusaku Time" are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the number of symbol changes up to Yu Time is less than 300, so the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to indicate this.

Figure 70 shows another example of the state before and after the power is turned off and on for the pachinko machine 100. Note that the effects shown in Figures 70(a) to 70(f) are the same as those in Figures 68(a) to 68(f), so their explanation will be omitted.

The effects shown in Figures 70(f) to (i) show the execution of SP Reach 2 (Swordmaster Reach), which is a miss, in the manner shown in Figures 61(l) to 62(q) and 63(r'').

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(j) displays the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" and the mini pattern is displayed as "434" in response to this. In this embodiment, if a specific performance (e.g., a swordsman reach) is performed before 100 pattern change displays are performed after the power is turned on, the display of the number of starts between big wins and the number of remaining starts until the play time may be displayed regardless of the number of pattern change displays. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 70(j), since the number of spins has exceeded 200 after the end of the big win and the transition has been made to the crispy time described below, the words "saccharine time" are displayed in the lower left part of the display screen, and since the number of pattern change displays until the play time is 300 or less, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed to indicate this. In this embodiment, when a specific effect is performed, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time is revealed with a certain probability (for example, a probability of 1/4), but it may be made to be always revealed. On the other hand, if a specific effect is performed but the lottery is not drawn, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time is not revealed, as shown in FIG. 70(j').

Figures 71 and 72 are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of the effects that occur after the transition to and end of Sakusaku Time. Note that in Figures 71 and 72, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 reserve lamp 218, the special pattern 2 reserve lamp 220, and the normal pattern reserve lamp 216 are omitted. Note that the effects shown in Figures 71(a) and 71(b) are the same as those shown in Figures 66(a) and 66(b), so a description will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(c), the 209th pattern change display (of which, special pattern 1 is the 199th pattern change display) has ended since the end of the jackpot game, and the combination of "decoration 4 - decoration 1 - decoration 7" is displayed as a mismatched decorative pattern. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(c), four pattern change displays for special pattern 1 are reserved, but the pattern change display for special pattern 2 is not reserved, and the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "After jackpot = 208 times", and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time is displayed as "347 times until Yu-time".

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 71 (d) shows the start of the 209th (200th of special pattern 1) pattern change display after the end of the jackpot game. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time are updated, with the display of the number of starts between jackpots showing "After jackpot = 209 times" and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time showing "346 times until Yu-time". Also, a moving animation of the reserved icons h11 to h14 of special pattern 1 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 has started. In this movement animation, the reserved icon at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 (the reserved icon subject to this pattern change) starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, while the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11, the reserved icon at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second reserved icon h12 of the special chart 1 and becomes the second reserved icon h12, and the reserved icon at the display position of the fourth reserved icon h14 moves toward the display position of the third reserved icon h13 of the special chart 1 and becomes the third reserved icon h13. After that, the display of the decorative pattern change begins.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(e), the 209th symbol change display has ended since the end of the big win game, and the display shows the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 5-decoration 4" which is a losing decoration pattern. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(e), three symbol change displays for special symbol 1 are reserved, but the symbol change display for special symbol 2 is not reserved.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(f) shows the state in which the 210th (201st of special pattern 1) pattern change display has started since the end of the jackpot game. At this time, the words "entering crispy time" are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify the transition to crispy time. In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, when the pattern change display of special pattern 1 is executed 200 times, the change pattern table used in the pattern change display of special pattern 1 executed from the next time onwards is switched from the normal time change pattern table to the crispy time change pattern table. Specifically, as described above, when the change time is determined using the crispy time change pattern table, a change pattern with a short change time is more likely to be determined than when the normal time change pattern table is used to determine the change time, which promotes the consumption of the pattern change display and may prevent the player from getting bored. After that, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the display of "Entering crispy time" is erased, and the words "Sakusaku time" are displayed at the top of the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1 to notify that crispy time is in progress. Also, the moving animation of the reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special chart 1 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1 is started. In this moving animation, the reserved icon (the reserved icon subject to this pattern change) that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second reserved icon h12 of the special chart 1 and becomes the second reserved icon h12. Then, the display of the decorative pattern change starts.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(h), the 210th pattern change display has ended since the end of the jackpot game, and the display shows the combination of losing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 7." Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(h), three pattern change displays for special pattern 1 are reserved, but the pattern change display for special pattern 2 is not reserved.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 71 (i) shows the start of the 211th (202nd of special pattern 1) pattern change display after the end of the jackpot game. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time are updated, with the display of the number of starts between jackpots showing "After jackpot = 211 times" and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time showing "344 times until Yu-time". Also, a moving animation of the reserved icons h11 to h13 of special pattern 1 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 has started. In this moving animation, the reserved icon (reserved icon subject to this pattern change) at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, while the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11, and the reserved icon at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second reserved icon h12 of the special chart 1 and becomes the second reserved icon h12. After that, the display of the decorative pattern change starts. The crisp time continues. The performance content when the crisp time fluctuation pattern table is used is the same as the performance content when the normal time fluctuation pattern table is used, so the details of the performance will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(j), the 254th pattern change display is shown after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it is shown that after that, 301 pattern change displays are performed without a jackpot, and then the game transitions to Yu-time. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "After jackpot = 254 times", and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time becomes "301 times until Yu-time". At the timing shown in FIG. 71(j), there are four reserved pattern change displays for special chart 1, and the first reserved icon h11 to the fourth reserved icon h14 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 also displays the variable icon h0.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(k), the 254th pattern change display since the end of the jackpot game has ended, and the display shows the combination of losing decorative patterns of "decoration 4 - decoration 7 - decoration 1". Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 71(k), four pattern change displays of special pattern 1 are reserved, but the pattern change display of special pattern 2 is not reserved. Also, the crisp time is still continuing.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(l) shows the start of the 255th pattern change display after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it shows that if 300 pattern change displays are executed without a jackpot, the game will move to Yu-time. At this time, the SaboHani character SBH appears in the lower right part of the display screen, suggesting that there are 300 remaining times until Yu-time. In other words, this SaboHani character SBH can be said to be a character that may appear in SakuSaku Time. In addition, a moving animation of the reserved icons h11 to h14 of Special Chart 1, which are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of Special Chart 1, has started. In this movement animation, the reserved icon that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 (the reserved icon that is the subject of this pattern change) starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, while the reserved icon that was at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11, the reserved icon that was at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second reserved icon h12 of the special chart 1 and becomes the second reserved icon h12, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the fourth reserved icon h14 moves toward the display position of the third reserved icon h13 of the special chart 1 and becomes the third reserved icon h13. After that, the display of the decorative pattern change begins.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(m), the 549th pattern change display (540th in special pattern 1) is shown after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it is shown that after that, six pattern change displays are performed without a jackpot, and then the game transitions to Yu-time. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots is "after jackpot = 549 times", and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time is "6 times until Yu-time". At the timing shown in FIG. 71(m), there are three reserved pattern change displays in special pattern 1, and the first reserved icon h11 to the third reserved icon h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area 280. In addition, the crispy time is also continuing.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(n) shows the end of the 549th pattern change display (540th of special pattern 1) since the end of the jackpot game. That is, when this pattern change display ends, the crisp time ends, and the table used is switched from the crisp time change pattern table to the normal time change pattern table. Therefore, the display of "Sakusaku Time" displayed in the lower left part of the display screen is erased. Note that the Sabohani character SBH continues to be displayed. That is, it can be said that the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed even when the table used is the normal time change pattern table. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 280 shown in FIG. 71(o), the moving animation of the reserved icons h11 to h13 of special pattern 1 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 is started. In the moving animation here, the reserved icon (reserved icon subject to this pattern change) that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as a variable icon h0, while the reserved icon that was at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 on the special chart 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second reserved icon h12 on the special chart 1 and becomes the second reserved icon h12. After that, the display of the change in the decorative pattern starts. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 550 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time becomes "5 times until the play time".

In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 72(p), which follows FIG. 71(o), the 555th pattern change display is being performed after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, the condition for transitioning to Yu-time is shown to have been met. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 555 times", and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time becomes "0 times until Yu-time". At the timing shown in FIG. 72(p), there are two reserved patterns for the pattern change display of special chart 1, and the first reserved icon h11 to the second reserved icon h12 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 also displays the variable icon h0. In addition, the Sabohani character SBH is also continuously displayed.

After that, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72(q), the 555th symbol change display after the end of the jackpot game ends, the Sabohani character SBH is erased, and the words "Entering Yu-Time!" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, informing the player that a transition to Yu-Time will result in a transition to a time-saving state in which Yu-Time (time-saving state b) will continue until 200 symbol change displays have been performed. In this embodiment, when a transition to Yu-Time occurs, the electric support state is maintained until 200 symbol change displays have been performed, but this may be another number of times. Also, a right-hit display is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, encouraging the player to hit to the right. This creates a state in which a jackpot is more likely to occur, which is advantageous for the player.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72(r), the state is shown in which the time-saving state for Yu-Time (time-saving state b) is entered and the display of the pattern variation of Special Chart 1 has begun. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the words "Yu-Time! 200 more" are displayed in the center of the display screen, the display of the decorative pattern and the number of remaining starts until Yu-Time is erased, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots is updated to "After jackpot = 556 times." This notifies the user that Yu-Time will continue for another 200 times.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72(s), the transition to Yu-Time and the end of the first symbol change display are shown. That is, as shown in the upper left corner of the display screen, the mini symbol is displayed stopped at "434", indicating a miss. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(t), the symbol change display of special symbol 2 is held in reserve, and the symbol change display of special symbol 2 is started in priority to the symbol change display of special symbol 1. Also, the display showing the remaining number of Yu-Times in the center of the display screen is updated to "Yu-Time! 199 more times", suggesting that Yu-Time will continue until the symbol change display is performed 199 more times.

In this embodiment, when the pattern change display of Special Chart 1 is executed 200 times after the end of the jackpot game, the change pattern table during quick time is selected, so for example, by looking at the behavior of the pattern change display after power is turned on, it may be possible to guess whether the backup has been restored or the RAM has been cleared.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the transition to Yu-Time, the pattern change display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 200 times) and the Yu-Time ends, the Sakusaku Time change pattern table is not selected, but it may be configured to be selectable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation pattern table is configured to be changeable in the normal game state, but the variation pattern table may be configured to be changeable in other game states, for example, the variation pattern table may be configured to be changed during a time-saving state or a special probability state. Also, the variation pattern table may be configured to be changed only when a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of consecutive wins) is met during a time-saving state or a special probability state.

Next, with reference to Figures 72(a) to (i), we will explain an example of the effects that occur when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on. Note that the effects shown in Figures 72(a) to (d) are similar to those shown in Figures 66(e') to (h'), so their explanation will be omitted.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72(e) shows the state in which the 101st pattern change display of the special pattern 1 has started since the power was turned on. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 101 times", and the number of remaining starts until the play time becomes "454 times until the play time". In addition, the movement animation of the reserved icons h11 to h12 of the special pattern 1 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special pattern 1 has started. In this movement animation, the reserved icon (the reserved icon targeted for this pattern change) that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 of the special pattern 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11. After that, the display of the decorative pattern change starts.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72(f) shows the 200th pattern change display since the power was turned on. The display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time is "After jackpot = 200 times" and "355 times until Yu-time".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 72(g), the 200th pattern change display since the power was turned on has ended, and the display shows the combination of mismatched decorative patterns of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4." Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 72(g), three pattern change displays for special pattern 1 are reserved, but the pattern change display for special pattern 2 is not reserved.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (h) shows the state in which the 201st pattern change display has started since the power was turned on. In this embodiment, after the big win game ends, the 201st pattern change display of the special pattern 1 starts, and the transition to quick time occurs. However, if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, or after the b time-saving state or the c time-saving state ends, the transition to quick time does not occur. In this performance example, since the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the transition to quick time does not occur, and the pattern change display using the normal time change pattern table continues. In addition, the moving animation of the reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special pattern 1 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special pattern 1 has started. In this movement animation, the reserved icon (reserved icon subject to this pattern change) that was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, while the reserved icon that was at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 on the special chart 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11, and the reserved icon that was at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second reserved icon h12 on the special chart 1 and becomes the second reserved icon h12. After that, the display of the decorative pattern change starts. Also, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated to "After jackpot = 201 times" and "354 times until the play time".

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72(i), the 255th pattern change display is being performed since the power was turned on. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are updated, with the display of the number of starts between jackpots showing "After jackpot = 255 times" and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time showing "300 times until Yu-time". In this example, the number of remaining pattern change displays until Yu-time has reached 300, so SaboHani's character SBH is displayed. In this way, it is shown that SaboHani's character SBH may be displayed even outside of SakuSaku Time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, an example of the presentation after the revival time (time-saving state c) has started and ended will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the presentation that occurs after the transition to and end of the revival time. Note that the presentation shown in FIG. 73(a) to FIG. 73(b) is similar to the presentation shown in FIG. 65(e) to FIG. 65(f), and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(c) shows the 199th symbol change display since the start of the revival time (c time-saving state), with "Revival Time!" displayed in the center of the display screen. After that, the symbol change display of the special symbol 2 ends at the timing shown in FIG. 73(d), and the mini symbol also responds by displaying "434".

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(e) shows the 200th pattern change display since the start of the revival time. In other words, the last pattern change display during which the revival time is maintained is being executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(f), the result of the pattern change display of the special pattern 2 is a miss, and in response to this, the mini pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also displayed as a combination of the decorative patterns of "417" that are misses, and the revival time ends. In this embodiment, only one pattern change display of the special pattern 2 can be reserved, but in the performance shown in FIG. 73(f), there is no reservation of the special pattern 2, so the "one time of crying" change performance shown in FIG. 65 is not executed. In addition, if there is a reservation of the special pattern 2, "one time of crying" will be executed. In addition, it is also possible to perform a normal pattern change performance by the special pattern 2 without performing the "one time of crying" performance. At the timing shown in FIG. 73(f), the decorative pattern is displayed in a combination of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" and the consecutive win count display and the total number of balls acquired display are erased at this timing, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1 are displayed, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1 displays three reserved icons h11 to h13. In addition, the number of starts between big wins and the number of remaining starts until the play time are displayed, and "after the big win = 209 times" and "until the play time 346 times" are displayed, respectively. In addition, the word "Please hit left" is displayed above the decorative pattern, encouraging the player to hit left. The consecutive win count display and the total number of balls acquired display may be continuously displayed. After that, the game state transitions from the revival time to the normal game state, and as shown in FIG. 73(g), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the reserved number of the special chart 1 is consumed and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, the animation of the movement of the reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special chart 1 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1 has started. In this movement animation, the reserved icon (reserved icon subject to this pattern change) at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, while the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11, and the reserved icon at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second reserved icon h12 of the special chart 1 and becomes the second reserved icon h12. After that, the display of the change of the decorative pattern starts. In addition, the display of the number of starts between the big wins and the number of remaining starts until the play time are updated to "After the big win = 210 times" and "345 times until the play time".

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(h), the 254th pattern change display (of which, the 45th pattern change display for special pattern 1) has ended since the end of the jackpot game, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 5-decoration 4" decorative patterns is displayed. Note that in this example, as described above, since it is a normal game state after transitioning to and ending in revival time (c time-saving state), it does not transition to quick time, but it may transition. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 73(h), three pattern change displays for special pattern 1 are reserved, but the pattern change display for special pattern 2 is not reserved, and the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "After jackpot = 254 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is displayed as "301 times until play time".

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 73 (i) shows the 255th pattern change display starting after the end of a jackpot. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are updated, with the display of the number of starts between jackpots showing "After jackpot = 255 times" and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time showing "300 times until Yu-time". In this example, the number of remaining pattern change displays until Yu-time has reached 300, so SaboHani's character SBH is displayed. In this way, it is shown that SaboHani's character SBH may be displayed even outside of SakuSaku Time.

After that, at the timing shown in Figure 73(j), the 409th pattern change display since the end of the jackpot (i.e. the 200th pattern change display of special chart 1 since the end of the jackpot) has ended, and the display shows the combination of "decoration 5 - decoration 3 - decoration 4" which is not a decoration. Also, at the timing shown in Figure 73(j), three pattern change displays of special chart 1 are reserved, but no pattern change display of special chart 2 is reserved.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (k) shows the 410th pattern change display after the end of the jackpot (i.e., the special pattern 1 has displayed 201 pattern changes after the end of the jackpot). In this embodiment, after the jackpot game ends, the 201st pattern change display of the special pattern 1 starts, and the game transitions to the quick time, but after the game transitions to the c time-saving state and ends, the game does not transition to the quick time. In this example, since the game transitions to the c time-saving state and ends, the game does not transition to the quick time, and the game continues to display the pattern changes using the normal time change pattern table. In addition, the moving animation of the reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special pattern 1 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special pattern 1 has started. In this moving animation, the reserved icon (reserved icon subject to this pattern change) at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as a variable icon h0, while the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first reserved icon h11 on the special chart 1 and becomes the first reserved icon h11, and the reserved icon at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second reserved icon h12 on the special chart 1 and becomes the second reserved icon h12. After that, the display of the decorative pattern change starts. In addition, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until the play time are updated to "After jackpot = 410 times" and "145 times until the play time". In addition, Sabohani's character SBH continues to be displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 74, we will explain an example of the presentation when the power is cut off and restored during quick time. Here, FIG. 74 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the presentation before and after the power is cut off.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(a), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed, and both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 are shown to be in a standby state with no pending pattern change display. At the timing shown in FIG. 74(a), the display of the number of starts between big wins shows "After big win = 325 times", and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time shows "230 times until Yu-time". In this example, after the end of the big win game, the number of times the pattern change display of Special Chart 1 has exceeded 200 times, so it has transitioned to Sakusaku Time, and the number of remaining pattern change displays until Yu-time is below 300 times, so the Sabohani character SBH is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the power supply to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off, and then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the device has been restored to the backup state. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 74(c), when the device has been restored to the backup state, the display of the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "After jackpot = ??? times", and the display of the number of remaining starts until the play time is displayed as "until the play time ??? times". In addition, the display of the characters "Sakusaku Time" and the character SBH of Sabohani are also erased, making it difficult to recognize the number of times the pattern change display will occur after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as a combination of "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a losing combination of decorative symbols from the first number rolled in the morning.

Figure 74 (d) shows that the game ball has entered the first special chart start hole 230, and the pattern change display of special chart 1 has begun. Here too, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time both remain as "After jackpot = ??? times" and "??? times until Yu-time", and the text "Sakusaku Time" and SaboHani's character SBH remain hidden, making it still difficult to tell how many pattern change displays remain until Yu-time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(e), the 100th pattern change display is shown to have been executed after power-on. That is, the 425th pattern change display is shown to have been executed, counting the number of pattern change displays after the jackpot before the power was cut off. Even here, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until the play time are both still "After jackpot = ??? times" and "Until the play time ??? times", and the display of the text "Sakusaku Time" and the Sabohani character SBH are still not displayed, so that it is still difficult to recognize the number of remaining pattern change displays until the play time. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(f), when the 100th pattern change display after power-on is finished, the result of adding the number of pattern change displays after the power was turned on to the number of pattern change displays after the jackpot before the power was cut off is displayed. That is, the number of times between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-Time, which are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, become clear, and are displayed as "After jackpot = 425 times" and "130 times until Yu-Time", respectively, making it possible to recognize the number of symbol change displays required to transition to Yu-Time. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 74(f), since more than 200 spins have been made since the end of the jackpot and transition has been made to the crispy time described below, the words "Sakusaku Time" are redisplayed in the lower left part of the display screen, and since the number of symbol change displays until Yu-Time is 300 or less, the SaboHani character SBH is redisplayed to indicate this. Note that when the power is interrupted and restored, it is also possible not to redisplay either the words "Sakusaku Time" or the SaboHani character SBH, or both.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern table being used is switched to the crisp time fluctuation pattern table, the words "Saccharum time entered" or "Saccharum time" are displayed, but it is also possible to not display these words. In this case, it is desirable to add words such as "Saccharum", "Saccharum time", or "Saccharum changing" to SaboHani's character SBH, which suggest that the fluctuation pattern table being used may have been switched to the crisp time fluctuation pattern table. In other words, in this case, the display of SaboHani's character SBH suggests that the fluctuation pattern table being used may be the crisp time fluctuation pattern table.

Next, the relationship between the notice and the performance of the decorative pattern change display will be explained with reference to Figure 75. Here, Figure 75 is a diagram showing, step by step, how an example of a notice performance in the decorative pattern change display is performed. Note that, again in Figure 75, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 reserve lamp 218, the special pattern 2 reserve lamp 220, and the normal pattern reserve lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(a) displays a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" frozen. In the state shown in FIG. 75(a), both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are frozen, and in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, an "X" is displayed in both the pattern changing notification area of special pattern 1 and the pattern changing notification area of special pattern 2 to indicate this.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 75(a) is a normal game state (low probability of special chart, low probability of normal chart), a reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

The reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 displays a reserved icon representing the reserved status of special chart 1. The number of reserved special chart 1s is represented by the number of reserved icons for special chart 1, in addition to the number of lit special chart 1 reserved lamps 218 and the display of the reserved number of special chart 1s in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and the number of reserved icons for special chart 1, and the number of reserved special chart 2s is represented by the number of lit special chart 2 reserved lamps 220 and the display of the reserved number of special chart 2s in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284.

In FIG. 75(a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and of these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in blue, i.e., in a pre-reading preview display mode. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 75(a), the number of times the pattern has changed since the end of the jackpot game is the 156th time, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time is displayed as "After jackpot = 156 times" and "399 times until Yu-time", respectively.

In FIG. 75(b), the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special chart 1 are displayed by moving animations, the reserved icon at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1. After that, the display of the decorative pattern changes. Note that the pattern display this time indicates that a jackpot has been won. Also, since the number of times the ball has been stuck has increased by one to 157 times, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until Yu-time have been updated to "After jackpot = 157 times" and "398 times until Yu-time", respectively.

In addition, in this performance example, a state in which a line preview is displayed is shown. A plurality of display modes of the line preview are prepared, and in the performance example shown in FIG. 75(b), a state in which a line preview is performed in which the lever pattern SLV, whose background pattern is the shape of a lever, is accompanied by the characters "SP1?" is shown. This preview performance including the lever pattern SLV is basically a preview with a lower reliability than other line previews, but if it subsequently develops into an SP1 reach performance, for example, it is a preview with a higher expectation of a jackpot than other line previews. Note that when a line preview in which the lever pattern SLV is displayed is performed, if an SP1 reach performance is performed, it may always result in a jackpot, or it may result in a miss. Also, when a line preview in which the lever pattern SLV is displayed is performed, if an SP1 reach performance is not performed, it may always result in a miss, or it may result in a jackpot. Also, as an example, if the SP1 reach effect develops after the lever pattern SLV is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when other notifications are executed, but this is not limited to the SP1 reach effect, and other reach effects are also acceptable, and if a specific notification is executed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when other notifications are executed, or if both a certain effect and another certain effect are executed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when other notifications are executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(c), when the dialogue preview is erased, an icon with the words "LEVER STOCK!" is displayed, suggesting to the player that the lever pattern SLV was displayed in the dialogue preview. Note that in this embodiment, the icon is displayed when the lever pattern SLV is displayed, but it is also possible to have the icon not be displayed, or to have an icon displayed in some cases and not in others. Also, when a dialogue preview with a display format other than the lever pattern SLV is displayed, a different icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(d), "Decoration 4" is displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, indicating a winning state.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 75 (e), the left and right decorative patterns are moved to the upper left and displayed, the middle pattern is enlarged and displayed on the right side of the center, and the SP1 reach (Chappy reach) is shown to have begun, with the Chappy character CHP displayed along with the line "Leave it to me." In other words, the performance corresponding to the lever pattern SLV displayed in the line preview is being executed, suggesting that there is a high expectation of a jackpot. Note that the display of the icon indicating that the lever pattern SLV has been displayed is maintained.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(f) shows the start of the expectation display effect. This expectation display effect is a strong expectation display effect, and is displayed in a star-shaped frame with the words "Super Hot!", suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high. In addition to the mode shown in FIG. 75(f), the expectation display effect may be executed in a weak expectation display effect shown in FIG. 75(f'), and specifically, is displayed in an oval frame with the words "Hot!". Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75(f"), there are also cases where the expectation display effect is not executed, and in this case, it is suggested to the player that the expectation of a big win is lower than in the strong expectation display effect or the weak expectation display effect. In the expectation display effect, the lever pattern SLV is configured not to be displayed, but the lever pattern SLV may be displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 75 (g), after "Decoration 4" is displayed as a stopped center pattern and the SP1 reach ends, a swinging and fluctuating display is performed with the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" as shown in Figure 75 (h), and then the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed as shown in Figure 75 (i).

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(j), the jackpot game start presentation starts in the manner shown in FIG. 62(y).

In addition, after the performance shown in FIG. 75(c) is performed, as shown in FIG. 75(d'''), "Decoration 7" may be displayed as a static display on the left symbol and "Decoration 4" may be displayed as a static display on the right symbol, and the reach state may not be reached. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(e'''), the icon indicating that the lever symbol SLV has been displayed is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(f'''), "Decoration 5" is displayed as a static display on the middle symbol, and after swaying and fluctuating with the combination of decorative symbols that are not winning, "Decoration 7-Decoration 5-Decoration 4", it is displayed as a static display.

In this example, the lever symbol SLV may or may not be displayed, but it may be set to always be displayed as a reach when the lever symbol SLV is displayed. Also, even if the lever symbol SLV is displayed and does not develop into an SP reach, it may transition to a rescue reach after the failed development, and this rescue reach may result in a jackpot. In this case, the expected probability of a jackpot in the rescue reach may be higher when the lever symbol SLV is not displayed than when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, or conversely, it may be lower.

Next, another aspect of the relationship between the advance notice and the performance of the decorative pattern change display will be described with reference to FIG. 76. Here, FIG. 76 is a diagram showing, in stages, how an example of an advance notice performance in the decorative pattern change display is performed. Note that, again in FIG. 76, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 reserve lamp 218, the special pattern 2 reserve lamp 220, and the normal pattern reserve lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 76(a) displays a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" frozen. In the state shown in FIG. 76(a), both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are frozen, and in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, an "X" is displayed in both the pattern changing notification area of special pattern 1 and the pattern changing notification area of special pattern 2 to indicate this.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 76(a) is the normal game state (low probability of special chart, low probability of normal chart), a reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

The reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 displays a reserved icon representing the reserved status of special chart 1. The number of reserved special chart 1s is represented by the number of reserved icons for special chart 1, in addition to the number of lit special chart 1 reserved lamps 218 and the display of the reserved number of special chart 1s in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and the number of reserved icons for special chart 1, and the number of reserved special chart 2s is represented by the number of lit special chart 2 reserved lamps 220 and the display of the reserved number of special chart 2s in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284.

In FIG. 76(a), two reserve icons h11 and h12 of Special Chart 1 are displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 of Special Chart 1, and of these two reserve icons h11 and h12 of Special Chart 1, the first reserve icon h11 is displayed in red, that is, in a display mode of a pre-reading notice. A pre-reading notice by a reserve icon in a red display mode has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a pre-reading notice by a reserve icon in a blue display mode. On the other hand, the second reserve icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 76(a), the number of times the pattern has changed since the end of the jackpot game is the 156th time, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time is displayed as "After jackpot = 156 times" and "399 times until Yu-time", respectively.

In FIG. 76(b), the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special chart 1 are each displayed moving with a moving animation, the reserved icon that was in the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon that was in the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1. After that, the display of the variable decoration pattern starts. Also, since the number of times the ball has been stuck has increased by one to 157 times, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time are updated to "After jackpot = 157 times" and "398 times until Yu-time", respectively.

In this example, the line preview is also shown. The line preview shown in FIG. 76(b) is displayed in a manner in which the lever pattern SLV is displayed similarly to that shown in FIG. 75(b). Another mode of the line preview is a large lever pattern BLV with the characters "SP1!!" displayed on the background pattern of a large lever, as shown in FIG. 76(b'). When the large lever pattern BLV is displayed, the SP1 reach is more likely to be executed than when the lever pattern SLV is displayed, and the expectation of a big win is higher than when the lever pattern SLV is displayed. In addition, in the line preview, as a mode other than the lever pattern SLV and the large lever pattern BLV, a normal mode line preview with the characters "Chance!!" added in a white oval frame as shown in FIG. 76(b''), or a high reliability mode line preview with the characters "Chance!!" added in a red oval frame as shown in FIG. 76(b'') may be displayed. Note that the dialogue previews shown in Figures 76(b") and 76(b"') do not increase the expectation of a jackpot when a specific presentation is executed, but function as normal jackpot previews, and have a higher probability of a jackpot than when the lever pattern SLV is displayed. However, the probability of a jackpot when the SP1 reach is executed after the lever pattern SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview is higher than when other previews are executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(c), when the dialogue preview is erased, an icon with the words "LEVER STOCK!" is displayed, suggesting to the player that the lever pattern SLV (large lever pattern BLV) was displayed in the dialogue preview. Also, the icon may be displayed in a different manner depending on whether the lever pattern SLV is displayed or the large lever pattern BLV is displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 76(d) shows a button-tap effect being performed as a mission preview. In the button-tap effect, the player taps the effect button 136 repeatedly to display the result.

When the button press button 136 is pressed repeatedly in the button press effect and the mission is successful, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 76(e) may display the lever pattern SLV or the large lever pattern BLV as shown in FIG. 76(e') as the mission is successful. In this example of the effect, if the large lever pattern BLV is displayed as the dialogue preview, the lever pattern SLV is not displayed and the large lever pattern BLV is displayed if the button press effect is successful. Even if the large lever pattern BLV is displayed as the dialogue preview, the lever pattern SLV may be displayed if the mission is successful. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 76(f) to FIG. 76(g) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 76(f) to FIG. 76(g) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 75(c) to FIG. 75(d) except for the difference in the display mode of the variable icon, so a description is omitted.

In this example, if the button press animation is successful, the lever symbol SLV (large lever symbol BLV) may be displayed, and other display modes may not be displayed, but the animation may be configured so that other display modes may be displayed.

In addition, in this example of the performance, the manner in which the dialogue preview is displayed is not limited to the above, and may be displayed in a different manner, for example, a manner indicating a high probability of a jackpot may be displayed in a gold frame, or in a blue frame. In such a case, the lever pattern SLV (large lever pattern BLV) whose background pattern is the shape of a lever may be a manner with a lower reliability than other manners, or other manners with a lower reliability than the lever pattern SLV (large lever pattern BLV) whose background pattern is the shape of a lever may be provided. For example, the reliability when the SP1 reach performance is not executed may be Lever pattern SLV < Large lever pattern BLV < White < Blue < Red < Gold, or White < Lever pattern SLV < Large lever pattern BLV < Blue < Red < Gold. Also, the reliability when the SP1 reach performance is executed may be white < blue < red < gold < lever design SLV < large lever design BLV, or white < blue < red < lever design SLV < gold < large lever design BLV, or white < blue < red < lever design SLV < large lever design BLV < gold.

In addition, the text displayed in the dialogue preview is not limited to the above, and may be displayed in other ways. For example, there may be text that functions as a regular jackpot preview, such as "Super Hot" or "Big Chance," text that increases the expectation of a jackpot when a specific effect, such as "SP2," is executed, or text that provides an explanation about the game effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a lever pattern SLV (large lever pattern BLV) with a background pattern in the shape of a lever is displayed, the text "SP1?" ("SP1!!") is added, but this is not limited to the example, and even with a lever pattern SLV (large lever pattern BLV), text that functions as a normal jackpot notice such as "Chance" or text that explains the game presentation may be added. Even if text other than "SP1?" ("SP1!!") is displayed, when a lever pattern SLV (large lever pattern BLV) with a background pattern in the shape of a lever is displayed, it suggests that there is a high expectation if it subsequently develops into SP Reach 1.

Next, another example of the relationship between the preview and the performance of the decorative pattern change display will be described with reference to Figure 77. Here, Figure 77 is a diagram showing, in stages, how an example of a preview performance in the decorative pattern change display is performed. Note that, again in Figure 77, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 reserve lamp 218, the special pattern 2 reserve lamp 220, and the normal pattern reserve lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(a) displays a frozen decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4." In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 77(a), both Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2 are frozen, and in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, an "X" is displayed in both the pattern changing notification area of Special Pattern 1 and the pattern changing notification area of Special Pattern 2 to indicate this.

Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77(a) is the normal game state (low probability of special chart, low probability of normal chart), a reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

The reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 displays a reserved icon representing the reserved status of special chart 1. The number of reserved special chart 1s is represented by the number of reserved icons for special chart 1, in addition to the number of lit special chart 1 reserved lamps 218 and the display of the reserved number of special chart 1s in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and the number of reserved icons for special chart 1, and the number of reserved special chart 2s is represented by the number of lit special chart 2 reserved lamps 220 and the display of the reserved number of special chart 2s in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284.

In FIG. 77(a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 77(a), the number of times the pattern has changed since the end of the jackpot game is the 156th time, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until Yu-time is displayed as "After jackpot = 156 times" and "399 times until Yu-time", respectively.

In FIG. 77(b), the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special chart 1 are displayed by moving animation, the reserved icon at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 of the special chart 1. After that, the display of the variable decoration pattern starts. Also, since the number of times of getting stuck has increased by one to 157 times, the display of the number of starts between the big win and the number of starts remaining until the play time are updated to "After the big win = 157 times" and "398 times until the play time", respectively. Also, in this example, a dialogue preview is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 77(b), a dialogue preview is displayed with the characters "SP1?" added to the lever pattern SLV.

After that, as shown in Figure 77 (c), when the dialogue preview is erased, an icon with the words "LEVER STOCK!" is displayed, indicating to the player that the lever pattern SLV has been displayed in the dialogue preview.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(d), "Decoration 4" is displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, indicating a winning state.

Then, the SP2 reach is executed, and finally, as shown in Figures 77(e) to (i), the combination of decorative symbols that are not matching, "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4", is displayed. Note that the performance of the SP2 reach shown in Figures 77(e) to (i) is executed in the manner shown in Figures 61(m) to 62(q) and Figures 63(r") to (t").

In this example, the lever symbol SLV was displayed in the dialogue preview, but because an effect other than SP1 reach was executed, it may be possible to say that an effect with a low expectation of a jackpot was executed.

In addition, in this presentation example, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when an SP1 reach is executed after the lever pattern SLV is displayed than when other predictions are executed, but this may also be applied to other predictions or pre-reading predictions. For example, after the reserved icon is displayed in the form of a blue pre-reading prediction, it is displayed as a variable icon without changing the display form, and then when a specific presentation (e.g., SP1 reach) is executed, the reliability of a jackpot is higher than the display form of other reserved icons, but in other cases, the reliability of a jackpot may be lower than that of a reserved icon in the form of a red pre-reading prediction. Furthermore, the specific presentation is not limited to a reach presentation, but may be a specific pre-pre-reading presentation, or the display of a specific message in a tutorial presentation.

In addition, specific preview displays such as the lever pattern SLV are not limited to those described above, and may be displayed in other previews or pre-reading previews.

The lever pattern SLV is not displayed after the reach performance starts, and other preview performances are configured to be displayed after the reach performance starts, but the lever pattern SLV may be displayed after the reach performance starts.

In the above description,
"A performance means capable of executing a plurality of performances [e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices [e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.];
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of previews is a first preview [for example, a dialogue preview as shown in FIG. 75(b)],
During the execution of the first notice, a first display [for example, the lever pattern SLV shown in FIG. 75(b)] may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case").
In the first case, when a predetermined condition is met [for example, when the SP1 reach effect shown in Figures 75(e) to 75(g) is executed, etc.], a pattern that will result in a game state that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be displayed than in the first case, when the predetermined condition is not met [for example, when the lever pattern SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview and the SP1 reach effect is executed, a jackpot pattern is more likely to be displayed than when a display other than the lever pattern SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview and the SP1 reach effect is executed, etc.].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

Conventional gaming machines have had room for improvement in their presentation methods, but this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with distinctive presentation methods.

In addition, with this gaming machine, when the first display is displayed, the player will pay attention to whether or not a certain effect will be executed, which may increase the player's interest in the game.

The presentation means may be capable of executing only multiple presentations, or may be capable of executing things other than multiple presentations. Also, the presentation means may be capable of always executing multiple presentations, or may be capable of not executing multiple presentations.

The warning means may be capable of only executing multiple types of warnings, or may be capable of executing things other than multiple types of warnings. The warning means may be capable of always executing multiple types of warnings, or may be capable of not executing multiple types of warnings.

In addition, there may be cases where only the first display is displayed while the first notice is being executed, or cases where a display other than the first display is displayed while the first notice is being executed. In addition, there may be cases where the first display is always displayed while the first notice is being executed, or cases where the first display is not displayed while the first notice is being executed.

Furthermore, the first display may be displayed only while the first notice is being executed, or the first display may be displayed even when the first notice is not being executed.

In addition, in the first case, when the predetermined condition is met, only symbols that will result in a game state that is more advantageous to the player may be more likely to be displayed than when the first case and the predetermined condition is not met, or in the first case, when the predetermined condition is met, symbols other than symbols that will result in a game state that is more advantageous to the player may be more likely to be displayed than when the first case and the predetermined condition is not met. In addition, in the first case, when the predetermined condition is met, symbols that will result in a game state that is more advantageous to the player may always be more likely to be displayed than when the first case and the predetermined condition is not met, or in the first case, when the predetermined condition is met, symbols that will result in a game state that is more advantageous to the player may not always be more likely to be displayed than when the first case and the predetermined condition is not met.

In addition, only in the first case where the predetermined condition is met, a pattern that creates a more advantageous gaming state for the player may be more likely to be displayed than in the first case where the predetermined condition is not met, or in cases other than the first case where the predetermined condition is met, a pattern that creates a more advantageous gaming state for the player may be more likely to be displayed than in the first case where the predetermined condition is not met.

Note that the preview mentioned here may include a preview look ahead.

In addition, "a certain suggestive display (e.g., a lever stock display as shown in FIG. 75(c)) is displayed to suggest that the first display has been displayed in relation to the first case being reached,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine may allow a player who misses the first display to recognize that the first display has been displayed.

Here, only a certain suggestive display suggesting that the first display has been displayed in connection with the first case occurring may be displayed, or a display other than a certain suggestive display suggesting that the first display has been displayed in connection with the first case occurring may be displayed. Also, a certain suggestive display suggesting that the first display has been displayed in connection with the first case occurring may always be displayed, or there may be cases where a certain suggestive display suggesting that the first display has been displayed in connection with the first case occurring is not displayed.

In addition, a suggestive display may be displayed that only suggests that the first display has been displayed in relation to the first case occurring, or a suggestive display may be displayed that suggests something other than the first display being displayed in relation to the first case occurring.

In addition, a suggestive display may be displayed that suggests that the first display has been displayed only in relation to the first case occurring, or a suggestive display may be displayed that suggests that the first display has been displayed in relation to something other than the first case occurring.

In addition, "if a certain performance starts after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display is erased after the certain performance starts (for example, as shown in Figures 75(c) to 75(f), if an SP1 reach starts after a lever stock display is displayed, the lever stock display is erased after the SP1 reach starts, etc.)"
In the case where the decorative pattern is stopped without starting the certain performance after the certain suggestive display is displayed, the decorative pattern is stopped after the certain suggestive display is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 75(c), (d'') to (e'''), the lever stock display is erased before the decorative pattern is stopped after the lever stock display is displayed without reaching a winning state),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Here, when a certain performance starts after a certain suggestion display is displayed, only the certain suggestion display may be erased after the performance starts, or when a certain performance starts after a certain suggestion display is displayed, displays other than the certain suggestion display may be erased after the performance starts. Also, when a certain performance starts after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may always be erased after the performance starts, or when a certain performance starts after a certain suggestion display is displayed, there may be cases where the certain suggestion display is not erased after the performance starts.

In addition, if a certain performance starts after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased only after the certain performance starts, or, if a certain performance starts after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased even if not after the certain performance starts.

In addition, when a certain performance starts after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after only the certain performance starts, or when a certain performance starts after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after a performance other than the certain performance starts.

In addition, if a certain suggestion display is displayed and then only a certain performance starts, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain performance starts, or if a certain suggestion display is displayed and then a performance other than a certain performance starts, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain performance starts.

In addition, if a certain performance starts only after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the suggestion display may be erased after the certain performance starts, or if a certain performance starts at a time other than after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the suggestion display may be erased after the certain performance starts.

In addition, if a certain performance starts after only a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain performance starts, or if a certain performance starts after a display other than the certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain performance starts.

In addition, if a decorative pattern is displayed without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, only the decorative pattern may be displayed after the suggestion display is erased, and if a decorative pattern is displayed without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, a pattern other than the decorative pattern may be displayed after the suggestion display is erased. In addition, if a decorative pattern is displayed without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may always be displayed after the suggestion display is erased, and if a decorative pattern is displayed without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, there may be cases where the decorative pattern is not displayed after the suggestion display is erased.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary only after the certain suggestion display is erased, and if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary other than after the certain suggestion display is erased.

In addition, if a decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestive display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after only the suggestive display is erased, or if a decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestive display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after all displays other than the suggestive display are erased.

In addition, if only the decorative pattern is displayed without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after the certain suggestion display is erased, and if a pattern other than the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after the certain suggestion display is erased.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after the certain suggestion display is erased, or if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a performance other than a certain performance after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after the certain suggestion display is erased.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance only after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after the certain suggestion display is erased, and if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance other than after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after the certain suggestion display is erased.

In addition, if a decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance after only a certain suggestive display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after the certain suggestive display is erased, or if a decorative pattern is displayed stationary without starting a certain performance after a display other than a certain suggestive display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stationary after the certain suggestive display is erased.

In addition, one type of notice among the multiple types of notices is a third notice [for example, the expectation notice shown in FIG. 75(f)],
The first notice and the third notice are separate notices,
In the first case, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the third prediction is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 75(b) to FIG. 75(f), when the lever pattern SLV is displayed in the dialogue prediction and then the SP1 reach is executed, the expectation prediction is executed, etc.),
In the first case, when the predetermined condition is not met and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the third prediction is not executed (for example, as shown in Figures 75(b) to (c) and (d'') to (e''), if the SP1 reach is not executed after the lever pattern SLV is displayed in the dialogue prediction, the expectation prediction is not executed, etc.).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when the first display is displayed and a certain performance is executed, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the third preview, which may increase the interest of the game.

Here, if a certain performance is executed after the first case occurs, only the third preview may be executed, or if a certain performance is executed after the first case occurs, a preview other than the third preview may be executed. Also, if a certain performance is executed after the first case occurs, the third preview may always be executed, or if a certain performance is executed after the first case occurs, the third preview may not be executed.

The third notice may be executed only if a certain performance is executed after the first case has occurred, or the third notice may be executed in any case other than when a certain performance is executed after the first case has occurred.

In addition, if only a certain effect is executed after the first case is reached, a third notice may be executed, and if an effect other than the certain effect is executed after the first case is reached, a third notice may be executed.

In addition, if a certain effect is executed only after the first case has occurred, the third notice may be executed, or if a certain effect is executed even if the first case has not occurred, the third notice may be executed.

In addition, if a certain performance is performed after the first case is reached, a third notice may be executed, and if a certain performance is performed after the case is reached other than the first case, a third notice may be executed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed without a certain performance being executed after the first case is reached, only the third notice may not be executed, and if the decorative pattern is displayed without a certain performance being executed after the first case is reached, notices other than the third notice may not be executed. In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed without a certain performance being executed after the first case is reached, the third notice may not necessarily be executed, and if the decorative pattern is displayed without a certain performance being executed after the first case is reached, the third notice may be executed.

In addition, the third notice may not be executed only when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without a certain performance being executed after the first case is reached, and the third notice may not be executed in any case other than when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without a certain performance being executed after the first case is reached.

In addition, if the first case occurs and only the decorative pattern is displayed without a certain effect being executed, the third notice may not be executed, and if the first case occurs and a pattern other than the decorative pattern is displayed without a certain effect being executed, the third notice may not be executed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without a certain effect being executed after the first case is reached, the third notice may not be executed, and if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary without any effect other than a certain effect being executed after the first case is reached, the third notice may not be executed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed without a certain effect being executed only after the first case is reached, the third notice may not be executed, and if the decorative pattern is displayed without a certain effect being executed other than after the first case is reached, the third notice may not be executed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is displayed statically without a certain performance being executed after the first case is reached, the third notice may not be executed, and if the decorative pattern is displayed statically without a certain performance being executed after the case is reached other than the first case, the third notice may not be executed.

In addition, in the first case, if the specified conditions are met, only the third notice may be executed, or in the first case, if the specified conditions are met, a notice other than the third notice may be executed. In the first case, if the specified conditions are met, the third notice may always be executed, or in the first case, if the specified conditions are met, the third notice may not be executed.

The third notice may be executed only when the specified condition is met in the first case, or the third notice may be executed in cases other than when the specified condition is met in the first case.

In addition, in the first case, when the specified conditions are not met and the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, only the third notice may not be executed, and in the first case, when the specified conditions are not met and the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, notices other than the third notice may not be executed. In addition, in the first case, when the specified conditions are not met and the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the third notice may not necessarily be executed, and in the first case, when the specified conditions are not met and the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the third notice may be executed in some cases.

In addition, the third notice may not be executed only when the first case occurs in which the specified condition is not met and the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, and the third notice may not be executed in cases other than the first case in which the specified condition is not met and the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state.

In addition, one of the multiple types of notices is a second notice [for example, the button-hitting effect shown in FIG. 76(d) to FIG. 76(e)],
The first notice and the second notice are separate notices,
The first display may be displayed during the execution of the second notice (for example, as shown in FIG. 76(d) to FIG. 76(e), when the button hit effect is successful, the lever pattern SLV is displayed, etc.),
In one symbol change display, there is a case where both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"). For example, as shown in FIG. 76(b) to FIG. 76(e), after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue notice, the button press performance is successful and the lever symbol SLV is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the first display may be displayed with multiple preview effects, which may draw attention to various timings and increase the interest of the game.

Here, there may be cases where only the first display is displayed while the second preview is being executed, or cases where a display other than the first display is displayed while the second preview is being executed. Also, there may be cases where the first display is always displayed while the second preview is being executed, or cases where the first display is not displayed while the second preview is being executed.

Furthermore, there may be cases where the first display is displayed only while the second notice is being executed, or there may be cases where the first display is displayed other than while the second notice is being executed.

In addition, in one pattern change display, there may be cases where only both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed, or there may be cases where other than both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed in one pattern change display. In addition, in one pattern change display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may always be executed, or there may be cases where both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are not executed in one pattern change display.

In addition, in one pattern change display, there may be cases where both a first preview in which the first display is displayed and a second preview in which only the first display is displayed are executed, or in one pattern change display, there may be cases where both a first preview in which the first display is displayed and a second preview in which a display other than the first display is displayed are executed.

In addition, in one pattern change display, there may be cases where both a first preview in which only the first display is displayed and a second preview in which the first display is displayed are executed, or in one pattern change display, there may be cases where both a first preview in which a display other than the first display is displayed and a second preview in which the first display is displayed are executed.

In addition, there may be cases where both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed only in one pattern change display, or there may be cases where both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed in a display other than one pattern change display.

In addition, the first display is a display that may be displayed in a first mode [for example, a lever pattern SLV in a normal mode as shown in FIG. 76(b)],
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a second manner [for example, a deca-lever pattern BLV shown in FIG. 76(b'), etc.],
The first aspect and the second aspect are at least partially different aspects,
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in the second preview (for example, as shown in FIG. 76(b') to FIG. 76(e'), after the big lever pattern BLV is displayed in the dialogue preview, the big lever pattern BLV is displayed if the button rapid-fire performance is successful, etc.),
In the second case, there is no case where the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second preview after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first preview [for example, as shown in FIG. 76(b') to FIG. 76(e'), after the big lever pattern BLV is displayed in the dialogue preview, if the button rapid-fire performance is successful, the big lever pattern BLV is displayed without the lever pattern SLV, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine can increase the variety of the first display, which can make the game more interesting.

Here, the first display may be one that is sometimes displayed only in the first aspect, or one that is sometimes displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect. Also, the first display may be one that is always displayed in the first aspect, or one that is sometimes not displayed in the first aspect.

The first display may be one that is sometimes displayed only in the second aspect, or one that is sometimes displayed in an aspect other than the second aspect. The first display may be one that is always displayed in the second aspect, or one that is sometimes not displayed in the second aspect.

The first and second aspects may be partially or entirely different.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, only the first display may be displayed in the second manner in the second preview, or in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, a display other than the first display may be displayed in the second manner in the second preview. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, the first display may always be displayed in the second manner in the second preview, or in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, the first display may not be displayed in the second manner in the second preview.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the second notice may also display the first display only in the second manner, or in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the second notice may also display the first display in a manner other than the second manner.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner only in the second notice, or in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in notices other than the second notice.

In the second case, the first display may be displayed in the second manner in the second preview only after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, or in the second case, the first display may be displayed in the second manner in the second preview other than after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview.

In the second case, after only the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in the second preview, or in the second case, after a display other than the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in the second preview.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in only the second aspect in the first notice, the first display may also be displayed in the second aspect in the second notice, or in the second case, after the first display is displayed in an aspect other than the second aspect in the first notice, the first display may also be displayed in the second aspect in the second notice.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner only in the first preview, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in the second preview, or in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in a preview other than the first preview, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in the second preview.

Also, in the second case only, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in the second notice, or in cases other than the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in the second notice.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, it is not necessary that only the first display is displayed in the first manner in the second preview, and in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, it is not necessary that a display other than the first display is displayed in the first manner in the second preview. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, the first display may always be displayed in the first manner in the second preview, and in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first preview, it is not necessary that the first display is displayed in the first manner in the second preview.

In addition, in the second case, it is not necessary for the first display to be displayed only in the first mode in the second notice after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, and it is not necessary for the second case to be displayed only in the first mode in the second notice after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice.

In addition, in the second case, it is not necessary for the first display to be displayed in the first manner only in the second notice after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, and it is not necessary for the second case to be displayed in the first manner only in notices other than the second notice after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice.

In addition, in the second case, it is not necessary for the first display to be displayed in the first mode in the second preview after only the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first preview, or in the second case, it is not necessary for the first display to be displayed in the first mode in the second preview after a display other than the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first preview, or in the second case, it is not necessary for the first display to be displayed in the first mode in the second preview after only the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first preview, or in the second case, it is not necessary for the first display to be displayed in the first mode in the second preview after the first display is displayed in a mode other than the second mode in the first preview.

In addition, in the second case, it is not necessary for the first display to be displayed in the first manner in the second notice only after the first display is displayed in the second manner, and in the second case, it is not necessary for the first display to be displayed in the first manner in the second notice after the first display is displayed in the second manner in a notice other than the first notice.

In addition, there are cases where a second display [for example, a red map pattern with the word "Chance!!" displayed in a red oval frame as shown in FIG. 76(b)'] is displayed during the execution of the first notice (hereinafter referred to as the "third case");
The first representation and the second representation are representations that are at least partially different from each other,
The case where the certain performance is executed after the first case is reached is more likely to result in a jackpot than the case where the certain performance is executed after the third case is reached (for example, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the lever pattern SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview and then the SP1 reach is executed than when the red map pattern is displayed in the dialogue preview and then the SP1 reach is executed, etc.).
The case where the certain performance is not executed after the third case is reached is more likely to result in a jackpot than the case where the certain performance is not executed after the first case is reached (for example, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the SP1 reach is not executed after the red map pattern is displayed in the dialogue preview than when the SP1 reach is not executed after the lever pattern SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview, etc.).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the expectation of a certain effect changes between the first and third cases, so you will pay attention to which case will occur, which may increase your interest in the game.

Here, there may be cases where only the second display is displayed while the first notice is being executed, or cases where a display other than the second display is displayed while the first notice is being executed. Also, there may be cases where the second display is always displayed while the first notice is being executed, or cases where the second display is not displayed while the first notice is being executed.

Furthermore, the second display may be displayed only while the first notice is being executed, or the second display may be displayed at any time other than while the first notice is being executed.

The first and second displays may be partially different or entirely different.

In addition, the certain performance is a certain super reach performance [for example, the SP1 reach shown in Figure 75 (e) to (g)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, the first display is a display that is not displayed after the reach performance has started [for example, the lever pattern SLV is not displayed after the reach has been achieved, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, "the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, in the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.) capable of transitioning to one of a plurality of gaming states,
The game control means is a means for determining a variation time of the symbol variation display by using one of a plurality of types of variation pattern tables,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state (e.g., a special game state with low probability, a normal game state with low probability, etc.),
One type of fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables is a first fluctuation pattern table [for example, a normal fluctuation pattern table, etc.],
One type of fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables is a second fluctuation pattern table [for example, a fluctuation pattern table during crisp time, etc.],
The first variation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first game state [for example, as shown in FIG. 56(g), the normal variation pattern table is used until the pattern variation display of the special chart 1 is executed 200 times after the end of the big win game, etc.],
The second variation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first game state (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(g), when the pattern variation display of the special chart 1 is executed 200 times after the end of the big win game, the variation pattern table during the crisp time is used in the pattern variation display of the special chart 1 from the 201st to the 540th times).
The game control means is a means for determining a variation time of the pattern variation display using the second variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts after a first condition is established while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first game state [for example, as shown in FIG. 56(g), when the pattern variation display of the special pattern 1 is executed 200 times after the end of the jackpot game while the normal time variation pattern table is being used in the special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state, the crisp time time variation pattern table is used in the pattern variation display that starts after that, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

Conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in their game control means, but this gaming machine provides a gaming machine with distinctive game control means.

In addition, with this gaming machine, the variation pattern table is changed when the first condition is met, which can add variety to the presentation and increase the excitement of the game.

Here, the game control means may be capable of transitioning to only one of the multiple game states, or may be capable of transitioning to a game state other than one of the multiple game states. Also, the game control means may be capable of always transitioning to one of the multiple game states, or may be capable of not transitioning to one of the multiple game states.

The game control means may determine only the change time of the pattern change display using one of the multiple types of change pattern tables, or may determine things other than the change time of the pattern change display using one of the multiple types of change pattern tables. The game control means may always determine the change time of the pattern change display using one of the multiple types of change pattern tables, or may not always determine the change time of the pattern change display using one of the multiple types of change pattern tables.

The game control means may determine the variation time of the pattern variation display using only one of the multiple types of variation pattern tables, or may determine the variation time of the pattern variation display using a variation pattern table other than one of the multiple types of variation pattern tables.

The first variation pattern table may be one that may be selected only in the first gaming state, or one that may be selected in gaming states other than the first gaming state. The first variation pattern table may be one that is always selected in the first gaming state, or one that may not be selected in the first gaming state.

The second variation pattern table may be one that may be selected only in the first gaming state, or one that may be selected in gaming states other than the first gaming state. The second variation pattern table may be one that is always selected in the first gaming state, or one that may not be selected in the first gaming state.

The game control means may be one that, when the first condition is established while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, uses the second variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter to determine only the variation time of the pattern variation display, or one that, when the first condition is established while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, uses the second variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter to determine a time other than the variation time of the pattern variation display. Also, the game control means may be one that, when the first condition is established while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, uses the second variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter to always determine the variation time of the pattern variation display, or one that, when the first condition is established while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, does not always determine the variation time of the pattern variation display using the second variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter.

The game control means may be such that, when a first condition is met while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, the variation time of the pattern variation display that starts thereafter is determined using only the second variation pattern table, or, when a first condition is met while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, the variation time of the pattern variation display that starts thereafter is determined using a variation pattern table other than the second variation pattern table.

The game control means may be such that, when a first condition is met while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table only in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter to determine the variation time of the pattern variation display, or, when a first condition is met while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, the game control means may be such that, when a first condition is met while using the first variation pattern table in the first game state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table in the pattern variation display other than the pattern variation display that starts thereafter to determine the variation time of the pattern variation display.

The game control means may be such that, when only the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first game state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table to determine the variation time of the pattern variation display that starts thereafter, or, when a condition other than the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first game state, the game control means may be such that, when a condition other than the first condition is satisfied while the first variation pattern table is being used in the first game state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table to determine the variation time of the pattern variation display that starts thereafter.

In addition, "the change time of the pattern change display is more likely to be shorter when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the first change pattern table [for example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the crisp time change pattern table is used, a change pattern with a short change time such as a no reach miss is more likely to be selected than when the normal time change pattern table is used, so the change time is more likely to be shorter, etc.].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine allows you to vary the pace of your play, which can increase the fun of the game.

Here, the change time of the pattern change display may be shorter when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the first change pattern table, or the time other than the change time of the pattern change display may be shorter when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the first change pattern table. Also, the change time of the pattern change display may always be shorter when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the first change pattern table, or there may be cases where the change time of the pattern change display is not shorter when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the first change pattern table.

In addition, the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter only when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the first change pattern table, or the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter in cases other than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the first change pattern table.

In addition, the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter when only the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the first change pattern table, and the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter when times other than the change time of the pattern changing display are determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the first change pattern table.

In addition, the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using only the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the first change pattern table, and the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using a change pattern table other than the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the first change pattern table.

In addition, the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the second change pattern table than when only the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the first change pattern table, and the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the second change pattern table than when times other than the change time of the pattern changing display are determined using the first change pattern table.

In addition, the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using only the first change pattern table, and the change time of the pattern changing display may be more likely to be shorter when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using the second change pattern table than when the change time of the pattern changing display is determined using a change pattern table other than the first change pattern table.

In addition, "during the period in which the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table, a certain display [for example, the SaboHani character SBH shown in FIG. 71(l)] may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 71(l), during SakuSaku Time when the SakuSaku Time variation pattern table is used, when the number of remaining symbol variation displays until the Yu Time reaches 300, the SaboHani character SBH is displayed],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine can notify players that their time efficiency has improved, which may increase their motivation to play.

Here, there may be cases where only a certain display is displayed during a period in which the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table, or there may be cases where a display other than the certain display is displayed during a period in which the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table. Also, there may be cases where a certain display is always displayed during a period in which the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table, or there may be cases where a certain display is not displayed during a period in which the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table.

In addition, a certain display may be displayed only during a period in which the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table, or a certain display may be displayed during a period other than the period in which the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table.

In addition, a certain display may be displayed during a period in which only the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table, or a certain display may be displayed during a period in which a time other than the change time of the pattern change display is determined using the second change pattern table.

In addition, there may be cases where a certain display is displayed during a period in which the change time of the pattern change display is determined using only the second change pattern table, or there may be cases where a certain display is displayed during a period in which the change time of the pattern change display is determined using a change pattern table other than the second change pattern table.

In addition, "the first condition is not satisfied in the first game state that is started when the power is turned on and initialization is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72(a) to FIG. 72(h), if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the game does not transition to the quick game time even if the pattern change display of the special pattern 1 is executed 200 times), etc.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Here, it is not necessary that only the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started when the power is initialized on, and it is not necessary that conditions other than the first condition are satisfied in the first game state that is started when the power is initialized on. Also, it is not necessary that the first condition is necessarily satisfied in the first game state that is started when the power is initialized on, and it is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started when the power is initialized on.

In addition, it is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied only in the first game state that is started when the device is initialized upon power-on, and it is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in any game state other than the first game state that is started when the device is initialized upon power-on.

In addition, there may be no cases where the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started only when the device is initialized when the power is turned on, and there may be no cases where the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started in cases other than when the device is initialized when the power is turned on.

In addition, there may be no cases where the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started when initialization is performed only when the power is turned on, and there may be no cases where the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started when initialization is performed at times other than when the power is turned on.

In addition, "a first pattern display means capable of displaying a first pattern change display [for example, a first special pattern display device 212, etc.];
A second pattern display means (e.g., a second special pattern display device 214, etc.) capable of displaying a second pattern change display;
Equipped with
In the first game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of a jackpot game, when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times [for example, 200 times, etc.], the first condition is established [for example, as shown in FIG. 71(f), when the pattern change display of special pattern 1 is executed 200 times after the end of a jackpot game, the change pattern table to be used is switched to the quick time change pattern table, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine may reduce the discomfort felt when a player does not win a jackpot for a long period of time.

In addition, this gaming machine may be able to increase motivation to play by improving the time efficiency required to reach a certain state.

Here, the first pattern display means may be capable of displaying only the first pattern change display, or may be capable of displaying pattern change displays other than the first pattern change display. Also, the first pattern display means may be capable of always displaying the first pattern change display, or may be capable of not displaying the first pattern change display in some cases.

The second pattern display means may be capable of displaying only the second pattern change display, or may be capable of displaying pattern change displays other than the second pattern change display. The second pattern display means may be capable of always displaying the second pattern change display, or may be capable of not displaying the second pattern change display in some cases.

Also, in the first game state to which a game is transitioned after a jackpot game ends, only the first condition may be met when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times, or in the first game state to which a game is transitioned after a jackpot game ends, conditions other than the first condition may be met when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times. Also, in the first game state to which a game is transitioned after a jackpot game ends, the first condition may always be met when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times, or in the first game state to which a game is transitioned after a jackpot game ends, the first condition may not be met when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times.

The first condition may be satisfied when only the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times in the first game state to which the game transitions after the end of a jackpot game, or when a pattern change display other than the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times in the first game state to which the game transitions after the end of a jackpot game.

The first condition may be satisfied only in the first game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of a jackpot game when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times, or the first condition may be satisfied in a game state other than the first game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of a jackpot game when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times.

In addition, the first condition may be satisfied when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times in a first game state to which a transition occurs only after a jackpot game has ended, or the first condition may be satisfied when the first pattern change display is executed a certain number of times in a first game state to which a transition occurs other than after a jackpot game has ended.

In addition, "the game machine is provided with a means for executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The content of the effect in the pattern change display executed using the first change pattern table and the content of the effect in the pattern change display executed using the second change pattern table are common (for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the change patterns that can be selected from either the normal time change pattern table or the crisp time change pattern table are common, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine can make it difficult for players to tell whether it has been initialized or not.

In addition, this gaming machine may prevent players from mistakenly thinking that they have moved to a mode with higher expectations.

The presentation means may be capable of executing only the multiple presentations, or may be capable of executing things other than the multiple presentations. Also, the presentation means may be capable of always executing the multiple presentations, or may be capable of not executing the multiple presentations.

Also, only the content of the presentation in the pattern change display executed using the first change pattern table and the content of the presentation in the pattern change display executed using the second change pattern table may be common, or the content of the presentation in the pattern change display executed using the first change pattern table and the content of the presentation in the pattern change display executed using the second change pattern table may be common. Also, the content of the presentation in the pattern change display executed using the first change pattern table and the content of the presentation in the pattern change display executed using the second change pattern table may always be common, or the content of the presentation in the pattern change display executed using the first change pattern table and the content of the presentation in the pattern change display executed using the second change pattern table may not be common.

In addition, the game control means is a means for determining the variation time of the pattern variation display using the first variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts after a second condition is established while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state [for example, when the pattern variation display of the special chart 1 is executed 540 times after the end of the jackpot game, etc.] [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), when the number of times of the pattern variation display of the special chart 1 reaches 540 times after the end of the jackpot game while using the crisp time variation pattern table in the special chart low probability state, the variation pattern is determined using the normal time variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts after that, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, by ensuring a certain amount of presentation time, it is possible to execute a presentation to transition to a certain state, which may increase the excitement of the game.

Here, the game control means may be one that, when the second condition is established while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state, uses the first variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter to determine only the variation time of the pattern variation display, or may be one that, when the second condition is established while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state, uses the first variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter to determine a time other than the variation time of the pattern variation display. Also, the game control means may be one that, when the second condition is established while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state, always determines the variation time of the pattern variation display using the first variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter, or may be one that, when the second condition is established while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state, does not necessarily determine the variation time of the pattern variation display using the first variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter.

The game control means may be such that, when the second condition is met while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state, the game control means determines the variation time of the pattern variation display that starts thereafter using only the first variation pattern table, or, when the second condition is met while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state, the game control means determines the variation time of the pattern variation display that starts thereafter using a variation pattern table other than the first variation pattern table.

The game control means may be such that, when the second condition is met while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table only for the pattern variation display that starts thereafter, or, when the second condition is met while using the second variation pattern table in the first game state, the game control means may be such that the game control means uses the first variation pattern table to determine the variation time of the pattern variation display also for pattern variation displays other than those that start thereafter.

The game control means may be such that, when only the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first game state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table to determine the variation time of the pattern variation display that starts thereafter, or, when a condition other than the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first game state, the game control means may be such that, when a condition other than the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first game state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table to determine the variation time of the pattern variation display that starts thereafter.

The game control means may determine the variation time of the pattern variation display using the first variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter when the second condition is met only while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first game state, or may determine the variation time of the pattern variation display using the first variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts thereafter when the second condition is met other than while the second variation pattern table is being used in the first game state.

In addition, one of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a special game state with a low probability and a normal game state with a high probability, etc.],
The first gaming state is a gaming state including a non-electric support state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state including an electric support state,
There are cases where the first gaming state transitions to the second gaming state without a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). For example, if 555 symbol variations are displayed after a jackpot game ends, the game transitions from the normal gaming state to Yu-Time (time-saving state b) without a jackpot.
In the first case, the first condition is not satisfied in the first gaming state that starts after the second gaming state ends (for example, the quick time does not start after the play time ends and the normal gaming state is entered, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after the end of the second gaming state, the number of fluctuations to a certain state is short, so it may be possible to prevent excessive improvement in time efficiency to a certain state.

Here, there may be cases where the game state transitions only from the first game state to the second game state without a jackpot, or there may be cases where the game state transitions from the first game state to a game state other than the second game state without a jackpot. Also, there may always be a transition from the first game state to the second game state without a jackpot, or there may be cases where the game state does not transition from the first game state to the second game state without a jackpot.

In the first case, there may be no cases where only the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started upon the end of the second game state, and in the first case, there may be no cases where conditions other than the first condition are satisfied in the first game state that is started upon the end of the second game state. In the first case, there may be no cases where the first condition is necessarily satisfied in the first game state that is started upon the end of the second game state, and in the first case, there may be no cases where the first condition is not satisfied in the first game state that is started upon the end of the second game state.

In the first case, it is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied only in the first game state that is started when the second game state is ended, and it is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in any game state other than the first game state that is started when the second game state is ended.

In addition, in the first case, there may be no cases where the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started upon the end of only the second game state, and in the first case, there may be no cases where the first condition is satisfied in the first game state that is started upon the end of a game state other than the second game state.

In addition, only in the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first game state that is started upon the end of the second game state, and in cases other than the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first game state that is started upon the end of the second game state.

In addition, "the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In the above description,
"A pattern display means capable of executing a variable display of a special pattern [for example, a first special pattern display device 212, a second special pattern display device 214, etc.];
A game control means capable of controlling a game state (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, etc.)
A presentation means capable of executing a plurality of presentations (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, a play time (b time-saving state)],
The second time-saving state is a time-saving state into which a player may enter when the number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "stuck number") in which a special symbol variable display result that does not result in a jackpot continues to be displayed without a jackpot after the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to a certain game state [for example, a special symbol low probability state, etc.] reaches a first number [for example, 555 times, etc.],
It is possible to execute a variable number of times presentation including a presentation in a form that at least suggests the number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "remaining number of times") of the variable display of the special pattern until the number of times of the stuck number becomes the first number (for example, a display of the remaining number of starts until the play time shown in FIG. 66(b), a display of the number of starts between big wins, etc.);
When the first condition (for example, when the execution of the pattern change display of the special pattern 2 (one crying pattern change display) executed after the transition to the a time-saving state and the normal game state shown in FIG. 65(a) to FIG. 65(b) is completed, the change number performance is started,
At least the remaining number of times suggested when the variation number performance is started is a number smaller than the first number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b), when the a time-saving state and one pattern variation display of the crying state end and the pattern variation display of the special pattern 1 starts, the display starts with a number (545 times) smaller than the number of pattern variation displays (555 times) required from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the play time, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

Conventional gaming machines have had room for improvement in their presentation methods, but this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with distinctive presentation methods.

Also, this gaming machine can sometimes make players feel like they're getting a good deal.

The pattern display means may be capable of only displaying the variations in the special patterns, or may be capable of performing other functions besides displaying the variations in the special patterns. Also, the pattern display means may be capable of always displaying the variations in the special patterns, or may be capable of not displaying the variations in the special patterns in some cases.

The game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling the state of the game state remains. The game control means may be capable of always controlling the game state, or may be capable of not controlling the game state in some cases.

The presentation means may be capable of executing only multiple presentations, or may be capable of executing things other than multiple presentations. The presentation means may be capable of always executing multiple presentations, or may be capable of not executing multiple presentations.

The game control means may be capable of starting only the second time-saving state, or may be capable of starting time-saving states other than the second time-saving state. The game control means may be capable of always starting the second time-saving state, or may be capable of not starting the second time-saving state in some cases.

The second time-saving state may be one in which a transition occurs when the number of times a ball gets stuck reaches only the first number, or one in which a transition occurs when the number of times a ball gets stuck reaches a number other than the first number. The second time-saving state may be one in which a transition occurs without fail when the number of times a ball gets stuck reaches the first number, or one in which a transition does not occur even when the number of times a ball gets stuck reaches the first number.

Also, it may be possible to execute only the variable number of times effect, which includes an effect that at least suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute an effect other than the variable number of times effect, which includes an effect that at least suggests the remaining number of times. Also, it may be possible to always execute the variable number of times effect, which includes an effect that at least suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible not to execute the variable number of times effect, which includes an effect that at least suggests the remaining number of times.

It may also be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes only an effect that at least suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes an effect other than an effect that at least suggests the remaining number of times.

It may also be possible to execute a variable number of times presentation that includes a presentation that only suggests the number of times remaining, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times presentation that includes a presentation that suggests at least something other than the number of times remaining, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times presentation that includes a presentation that always suggests the number of times remaining.

In addition, when the first condition is met, only the variable number of times presentation may be started, or a presentation other than the variable number of times presentation may be started when the first condition is met. In addition, when the first condition is met, the variable number of times presentation may always be started, or when the first condition is met, the variable number of times presentation may not be started.

The variable number of times effect may be started when only the first condition is met, or when a condition other than the first condition is met.

In addition, the remaining number of times suggested at least when the variable number of times presentation is started may be a number less than only the first number, or the remaining number of times suggested at least when the variable number of times presentation is started may be a number less than the numbers other than the first number.In addition, the remaining number of times suggested at least when the variable number of times presentation is started may always be a number less than the first number, or the remaining number of times suggested at least when the variable number of times presentation is started may be a number not less than the first number.

The remaining number of times indicated when the variable number of times presentation starts may be a number less than the first number of times, and the remaining number of times notified when the variable number of times presentation starts may be a number less than the first number of times.

In addition, the game control means is a means capable of starting a normal game state [for example, a special low probability normal low probability state, etc.],
The game control means is a means capable of starting a first time-saving state [for example, a time-saving state, etc.],
The normal gaming state is a gaming state including a non-time-saving state,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state to which the player may enter after a big win game ends,
The number of times the special symbol is stuck is counted every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed even in the first time-saving state,
When the first time-saving state ends and the game moves to the normal game state, the first condition is met and the variable number of times presentation starts (for example, as shown in Figs. 65 to 66, when the time-saving state a ends and the display of one crying pattern change ends, the display of the remaining number of starts until the play time starts, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine may allow players to concentrate on the time-saving mode.

The game control means may be capable of starting only the normal game state, or may be capable of starting a game state other than the normal game state. The game control means may be capable of always starting the normal game state, or may be capable of not starting the normal game state in some cases.

The game control means may be capable of starting only the first time-saving state, or may be capable of starting a game state other than the first time-saving state. The game control means may be capable of always starting the first time-saving state, or may be capable of not starting the first time-saving state in some cases.

The first time-saving state may be one that may be entered only after the end of a jackpot game, or one that may be entered at times other than the end of a jackpot game. The first time-saving state may be one that is always entered after the end of a jackpot game, or one that may not be entered after the end of a jackpot game.

In addition, in the first time-saving state, only the number of times that a player gets stuck may be counted each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or in the first time-saving state, a number of times other than the number of times that a player gets stuck may be counted each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed.In addition, in the first time-saving state, the number of times that a player gets stuck may be counted each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or in the first time-saving state, the number of times that a player gets stuck may not be counted each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed.

In addition, in the first time-saving state, the number of times a stumble occurs may be counted each time only the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and in the first time-saving state, the number of times a stumble occurs may be counted each time a display other than the variable display of the special symbol is executed.

In addition, the number of times a player is stuck may be counted each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed only in the first time-saving state, or the number of times a player is stuck may be counted each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed in a game state other than the first time-saving state.

Also, when the first time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, the first condition may be met and only the variable number of times presentation may start, or when the first time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, the first condition may be met and presentations other than the variable number of times presentation may start.Also, when the first time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, the first condition may be met and the variable number of times presentation may always start, or when the first time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, the first condition may be met and the variable number of times presentation may not start.

Also, when the first time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, only the first condition may be met and the variable number of times presentation may start, or when the first time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, a condition other than the first condition may be met and the variable number of times presentation may start.

Also, when the first time-saving state ends and there is a transition to only the normal game state, the first condition may be met and the variable number of times presentation may start, or when the first time-saving state ends and there is a transition to a game state other than the normal game state, the first condition may be met and the variable number of times presentation may start.

Also, when only the first time-saving state ends and a transition to a normal game state occurs, the first condition may be met and the variable number of times presentation may start, or when a game state other than the first time-saving state ends and a transition to a normal game state occurs, the first condition may be met and the variable number of times presentation may start.

In addition, "When the first condition is met, the variation number presentation is started, which includes information at least suggesting the number of times obtained by subtracting the number of times of the variation display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game from the first number as the remaining number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b) , when the a-time shortening state and one crying pattern variation display end and the pattern variation display of special pattern 1 starts, the number of times obtained by subtracting the number of a-time shortening state and one crying pattern variation display from the number of pattern variation displays required from the end of the jackpot game until the start of the Yu-time (555 times) minus the number of a-time shortening state and one crying pattern variation display (9 times) is displayed as the display of the remaining number of starts until the Yu-time, etc.],
The first condition is a condition including a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state when the state transitions to the first time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Here, when the first condition is met, only the variable number presentation including information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number may be started, or when the first condition is met, a presentation other than the variable number presentation including information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number may be started. Also, when the first condition is met, the variable number presentation including information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number may always be started, or when the first condition is met, the variable number presentation including information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number may not be started.

Also, when the first condition is met, a variable number presentation may be started that includes only information that at least suggests the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number, or when the first condition is met, a variable number presentation may be started that includes information other than at least suggests the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number.

Also, when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times, or when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times other than the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times.

In addition, when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from only the first number as the remaining number of times, or when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the number of times other than the first number as the remaining number of times.

Also, when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the remaining number of times is the first number minus the number of times only the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game, or when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the remaining number of times is the first number minus the number of times other than the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game.

Also, when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special pattern that was executed only after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times, or when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special pattern that was executed other than after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times.

In addition, when only the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times, and when a condition other than the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting at least the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times.

When the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information suggesting that the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times, or when the first condition is met, a variable number of times presentation may be started that includes information notifying that the number of times the variable display of the special pattern executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times.

The first condition may include only a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state when a transition occurs after a jackpot game is completed, or may include other things than a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state when a transition occurs after a jackpot game is completed. The first condition may always include a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state when a transition occurs after a jackpot game is completed, or may not include a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state when a transition occurs after a jackpot game is completed.

The first condition may include a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state only when there is a transition to the first time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game, or may include a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state in cases other than when there is a transition to the first time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game.

The first condition may include a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state when the first time-saving state is entered only after the end of a jackpot game, or may include a transition from the first time-saving state to the normal game state when the first time-saving state is entered other than after the end of a jackpot game.

In addition, the presentation means is a means capable of executing a time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation for notifying the number of times the special symbol will change until the first time-saving state ends (for example, displaying the remaining number of times the symbol change display will be displayed during Challenge Time as shown in Figs. 64(a) to 64(f), or displaying the remaining number of times the symbol change display will be displayed during High Speed RUSH as shown in Figs. 64(k) to 64(m)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine may allow the player to concentrate on the first time-saving state.

The presentation means may be capable of executing only the time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation that notifies the number of times the special pattern will change until the first time-saving state ends, or may be capable of executing presentations other than the time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation that notifies the number of times the special pattern will change until the first time-saving state ends. Also, the presentation means may be capable of always executing the time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation that notifies the number of times the special pattern will change until the first time-saving state ends, or may be capable of not executing the time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation that notifies the number of times the special pattern will change until the first time-saving state ends.

The presentation means may be capable of executing a time-saving count notification presentation that includes only a presentation that notifies the number of times the special pattern will change until the first time-saving state ends, or may be capable of executing a time-saving count notification presentation that includes a presentation other than a presentation that notifies the number of times the special pattern will change until the first time-saving state ends.

The presentation means may be capable of executing a time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation that notifies only the number of times the special pattern will change until the first time-saving state ends, or may be capable of executing a time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation that notifies a number of times other than the number of times the special pattern will change until the first time-saving state ends.

The presentation means may be capable of executing a time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation that notifies the number of times the special pattern will change until only the first time-saving state ends, or may be capable of executing a time-saving count notification presentation including a presentation that notifies the number of times the special pattern will change until a game state other than the first time-saving state ends.

In addition, "variable winning means into which the game ball can enter [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, etc.],
A specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning means can pass (for example, a V-pass switch SW2, etc.);
The variable winning means is a means capable of changing between a first state (e.g., a closed state) and a second state (e.g., an open state),
Between the first state and the second state, the game ball is easier to enter in the second state,
The variable winning means is a means for changing the state to the second state in relation to the result of the variable display of the special pattern being a small win [for example, a small win that occurs when "special pattern b" to "special pattern d" are stopped and displayed] [for example, when a small win pattern is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning port 235a is opened, etc.],
When the game ball passes through the specific area, a big win game can be started (for example, as shown in FIG. 64(g) to FIG. 64(i), when a game ball that enters the second variable winning port 235a during a small win game passes through the V-pass switch SW2, a big win game can be started, etc.)
When the special symbol variable display is executed a second number of times [e.g., 200 times, etc.] without a jackpot after the transition to the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state ends [e.g., when the symbol variable display is executed 200 times without a jackpot after the transition to the play time, the game then transitions to the normal game state, etc.],
The number of times (e.g., 8 times) of the variable display of the special symbol from the start of the first time-saving state to the end without a jackpot is less than the second number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the second time-saving state is designed to make it easier to hit the jackpot, so it may be possible to play with the aim of reaching the second time-saving state.

The variable winning means may be one that only game balls can enter, or one that allows things other than game balls to enter. Also, the variable winning means may be one that game balls always enter, or one that game balls may not enter.

The specific area may be one through which only game balls that have entered the variable winning means can pass, or one through which things other than game balls that have entered the variable winning means can pass. The specific area may be one through which game balls that have entered the variable winning means can always pass, or one through which game balls that have entered the variable winning means may not pass.

The variable winning means may be capable of changing its state only between the first state and the second state, or may be capable of changing its state to states other than the first state and the second state. The variable winning means may be capable of always changing its state between the first state and the second state, or may be capable of not changing its state between the first state and the second state.

The variable winning means may be one that changes state only to the second state in association with the result of the variable display of the special pattern being a small win, or may be one that changes state to a state other than the second state in association with the result of the variable display of the special pattern being a small win.The variable winning means may be one that always changes state to the second state in association with the result of the variable display of the special pattern being a small win, or may be one that does not always change state to the second state in association with the result of the variable display of the special pattern being a small win.

The variable winning means may change to the second state only when the result of the variable display of the special pattern is a small win, or may change to the second state when the result of the variable display of the special pattern is something other than a small win.

In addition, only a jackpot game may be able to start when the game ball passes through a specific area, or a game other than a jackpot game may be able to start when the game ball passes through a specific area.In addition, a jackpot game may always start when the game ball passes through a specific area, or there may be cases where a jackpot game does not start when the game ball passes through a specific area.

In addition, the jackpot game may be able to start only when the game ball passes through a specific area, or the jackpot game may be able to start in cases other than when the game ball passes through the specific area.

Also, when the special symbol variable display is executed the second number of times without a jackpot being hit after transitioning to the second time-saving state, only the second time-saving state may end, or when the special symbol variable display is executed the second number of times without a jackpot being hit after transitioning to the second time-saving state, a game state other than the second time-saving state may end.Also, when the special symbol variable display is executed the second number of times without a jackpot being hit after transitioning to the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state may always end, or when the special symbol variable display is executed the second number of times without a jackpot being hit after transitioning to the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state may not end in some cases.

The second time-saving state may also end when only the variable display of the special pattern is executed a second number of times without a jackpot being obtained after transitioning to the second time-saving state, or when a display other than the variable display of the special pattern is executed a second number of times without a jackpot being obtained after transitioning to the second time-saving state.

In addition, "the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, in the above description,
"A pattern display means capable of executing a variable display of a special pattern [for example, a first special pattern display device 212, a second special pattern display device 214, etc.];
A game control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of controlling a game state;
A presentation means capable of executing a plurality of presentations (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state [for example, a play time (b time-saving state)],
The second time-saving state is a time-saving state into which a player may enter when the number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "stuck number") in which a special symbol variable display result that does not result in a jackpot continues to be displayed without a jackpot after the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to a certain game state [for example, a special symbol low probability state, etc.] reaches a first number [for example, 555 times, etc.],
It is possible to execute a variation number effect including an effect of at least suggesting the number of times the special symbol will vary until the number of times the game is stuck becomes the first number (hereinafter referred to as the "remaining number of times") [for example, a display effect of the remaining number of starts until the play time shown in FIG. 66(b)],
The remaining number of times can be stored and maintained even if the power supply is cut off,
When the power supply is cut off and the backup is restored (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the game is started with the number of remaining times before the power supply was cut off.
When the power is turned off and then initialized and the power is restored (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the remaining number of times is set to the first number of times and the game is started.
The variable number of times effect is started in the same manner in the first case and the second case (for example, as shown in FIG. 66(e) and FIG. 66(e'), the display effect of the remaining number of starts until the play time is started in the same manner whether the backup is restored or the RAM is cleared).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

Conventional gaming machines have had room for improvement in their presentation methods, but this gaming machine can provide a gaming machine with distinctive presentation methods.

In addition, with this gaming machine, the behavior is the same in the first and second cases, so it may be possible to have the player play while hoping that the first case will occur (few remaining plays).

The pattern display means may be capable of only displaying the special pattern variations, or may be capable of displaying other than the special pattern variations. Also, the pattern display means may be capable of always displaying the special pattern variations, or may be capable of not displaying the special pattern variations.

The game control means may be capable of controlling only the game state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the game state. The game control means may be capable of always controlling the game state, or may be capable of not controlling the game state in some cases.

The presentation means may be capable of executing only multiple presentations, or may be capable of executing things other than multiple presentations. The presentation means may be capable of always executing multiple presentations, or may be capable of not executing multiple presentations.

The game control means may be capable of starting only the second time-shortening state, or may be capable of starting game states other than the second time-shortening state. The game control means may be capable of always starting the second time-shortening state, or may be capable of not starting the second time-shortening state in some cases.

The second time-saving state may be one in which a transition occurs when only the number of times stuck reaches the first number, or one in which a transition occurs when a number of times other than the number of times stuck reaches the first number.The second time-saving state may be one in which a transition occurs without fail when the number of times stuck reaches the first number, or one in which a transition does not occur when the number of times stuck reaches the first number.

Also, it may be possible to execute only the variable number of times effect including an effect in a manner that at least suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute an effect other than the variable number of times effect including an effect in a manner that at least suggests the remaining number of times. Also, it may be possible to always execute the variable number of times effect including an effect in a manner that at least suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible not to execute the variable number of times effect including an effect in a manner that at least suggests the remaining number of times.

It may also be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes only an effect that at least suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes an effect other than an effect that at least suggests the remaining number of times.

It may also be possible to execute a variable number of times presentation that includes a presentation that at least suggests only the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times presentation that includes a presentation that at least suggests something other than the remaining number of times.

It may be possible to execute a variable number of times display including a display that indicates the remaining number of times, or a variable number of times display including a display that notifies the remaining number of times.

Also, even if the power is cut off, only the remaining number of times may be stored and held, or even if the power is cut off, other numbers than the remaining number of times may be stored and held. Also, even if the power is cut off, the remaining number of times may always be stored and held, or even if the power is cut off, the remaining number of times may not be stored and held.

In addition, when the power supply is cut off and the backup is restored, play may be started only with the number of times remaining before the power supply was cut off, or when the power supply is cut off and the backup is restored, play may be started with a number of times other than the number of times remaining before the power supply was cut off. In addition, when the power supply is cut off and the backup is restored, play may always be started with the number of times remaining before the power supply was cut off, or when the power supply is cut off and the backup is restored, play may not always be started with the number of times remaining before the power supply was cut off.

Also, play may begin with the remaining number of turns before the power was cut off only when the backup is restored after the power was cut off, or even if the backup is restored after the power was cut off, play may begin with the remaining number of turns before the power was cut off. Also, play may begin with the remaining number of turns before the power was cut off only when the backup is restored after the power was cut off, or if the backup is restored other than after the power was cut off, play may begin with the remaining number of turns before the power was cut off.

In addition, if the power is cut off and then initialized and then restored, only the remaining number of times may be set to the first number and gameplay may begin, or if the power is cut off and then initialized and then restored, numbers other than the remaining number of times may also be set to the first number and gameplay may begin. In addition, if the power is cut off and then initialized and then restored, the remaining number of times may be set to the first number and gameplay may begin without fail, or if the power is cut off and then initialized and then restored, the remaining number of times may be set to the first number and gameplay may not begin.

Also, the remaining number of times may be set to the first number and gameplay may be started only when the power is cut off and then initialized and power is restored, or the remaining number of times may be set to the first number and gameplay may be started in any case other than when the power is cut off and then initialized and power is restored. Also, the remaining number of times may be set to the first number and gameplay may be started only when the power is cut off and then initialized and power is restored, or the remaining number of times may be set to the first number and gameplay may be started in any case other than when the power is cut off and then initialized and power is restored.

In addition, only the variable number of times presentation may be started in the same manner in the first case and the second case, or presentations other than the variable number of times presentation may be started in the same manner in the first case and the second case.In addition, the variable number of times presentation may always be started in the same manner in the first case and the second case, or there may be cases where the variable number of times presentation is not started in the same manner in the first case and the second case.

In addition, "in both the variable number of times presentation that is started in the first case and the variable number of times presentation that is started in the second case, the presentation is started in a manner that does not directly indicate the remaining number of times [for example, as shown in FIG. 66(e) and FIG. 66(e'), whether the backup is restored or the RAM is cleared, the display of the remaining number of starts until Yu-time is displayed as "??? times until Yu-time", making it difficult to recognize the remaining number of starts until Yu-time],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Here, in both the variable number of times presentation started in the first case and the variable number of times presentation started in the second case, only a presentation that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times may be started, or in both the variable number of times presentation started in the first case and the variable number of times presentation started in the second case, a presentation other than a presentation that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times may be started. Also, in both the variable number of times presentation started in the first case and the variable number of times presentation started in the second case, a presentation that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times may always be started, or in both the variable number of times presentation started in the first case and the variable number of times presentation started in the second case, a presentation that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times may not be started.

In addition, in both the variable number of times presentation that starts in the first case and the variable number of times presentation that starts in the second case, a presentation may be started in a manner that does not directly suggest only the remaining number of times, and in both the variable number of times presentation that starts in the first case and the variable number of times presentation that starts in the second case, a presentation may be started in a manner that does not directly suggest any number other than the remaining number of times.

In addition, when the second condition (for example, when 100 symbol change displays have been performed after the power is turned on) is met, a display that directly indicates the remaining number of times is started in the number of changes display (for example, as shown in Figures 66(e) to 66(h), when 100 symbol change displays have been performed after the power is turned on, the display of the remaining number of starts until the Yu-time, which was displayed as "??? times until Yu-time", changes to "292 times until Yu-time", and the remaining number of starts is notified, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect the first case to occur until the second condition is met.

Here, when the second condition is met, only a presentation that directly suggests the remaining number of times may be started in the variable number of times presentation, or a presentation other than a presentation that directly suggests the remaining number of times may be started in the variable number of times presentation when the second condition is met. Also, when the second condition is met, a presentation that directly suggests the remaining number of times may always be started in the variable number of times presentation, or a presentation that directly suggests the remaining number of times may not be started in the variable number of times presentation when the second condition is met.

Also, when the second condition is met, a presentation may be started in the variable number of times presentation in a manner that directly suggests only the remaining number of times, or when the second condition is met, a presentation may be started in the variable number of times presentation in a manner that directly suggests numbers other than the remaining number of times.Also, when the second condition is met, a presentation may be started in the variable number of times presentation in a manner that directly suggests the remaining number of times only, or when the second condition is met, a presentation may be started in a manner that directly suggests the remaining number of times in presentations other than the variable number of times presentation.

In addition, when only the second condition is met, a presentation that directly suggests the remaining number of times may be started in the variable number of times presentation, and when a condition other than the second condition is met, a presentation that directly suggests the remaining number of times may be started in the variable number of times presentation.

In addition, "in the first case, the second time-saving state may start before the second condition is met [for example, as shown in FIG. 67(c) to (f), if the number of pattern change displays since the end of the jackpot game reaches 555 before 100 pattern change displays have been executed since the power was turned on, the number of remaining starts until Yu-time will remain as "??? times until Yu-time", and the game will transition to Yu-time, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine can sometimes surprise players.

Here, in the first case, only the second time-shortened state may be initiated before the second condition is met, or in the first case, a game state other than the second time-shortened state may be initiated before the second condition is met. Also, in the first case, the second time-shortened state may always be initiated before the second condition is met, or in the first case, the second time-shortened state may not be initiated before the second condition is met.

In addition, in the first case, the second time-saving state may start only before the second condition is satisfied, or in the first case, the second time-saving state may start other than before the second condition is satisfied. In the first case, the second time-saving state may start before only the second condition is satisfied, or in the first case, the second time-saving state may start before a condition other than the second condition is satisfied. In addition, only in the first case, the second time-saving state may start before the second condition is satisfied, or in cases other than the first case, the second time-saving state may start before the second condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the first case, the big win game may start before the second condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by:
may be also possible.

In addition, "the display means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 208, etc.) capable of displaying a decorative pattern change display is provided,
In the first and second cases, the combination of decorative symbols displayed as the initial symbols is the same (for example, as shown in FIG. 66(e) and FIG. 66(e'), when the power is turned on, whether the backup is restored or the RAM is cleared, the combination of decorative symbols displayed as the initial symbols (first numbers in the morning) is the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is not a decorative symbol, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative pattern change display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the decorative pattern change display. The display means may be capable of always displaying the decorative pattern change display, or may be capable of not displaying the decorative pattern change display in some cases.

In addition, "the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The following is an additional note, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 0)
A symbol display means capable of executing a variable display of a special symbol;
A game control means capable of controlling a game state;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time-saving state,
The second time-saving state is a time-saving state into which a player may enter when the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol is continuously displayed without a jackpot after the jackpot game ends and the player enters a low probability state (hereinafter referred to as the "snap number") reaches a first number.
When the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is not a jackpot is displayed for the third number of times continuously without a jackpot after the second time-saving state is started, the second time-saving state ends,
The second time-saving state will not start until a jackpot is hit after the second time-saving state ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 1)
A production means capable of executing a plurality of productions;
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices;
A gaming machine equipped with
One type of notice among the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
There is a case where a first display is displayed during the execution of the first notice (hereinafter referred to as the "first case");
When a certain effect is executed after the first case occurs, the jackpot is more likely to be won than when the certain effect is executed without the first case occurring.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 2)
2. A gaming machine according to claim 1,
a certain indication is displayed suggesting that the first indication has been displayed in relation to the first case being reached;
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 3)
A gaming machine according to claim 2,
When the certain performance starts after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display is erased after the certain performance starts;
In the case where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting the certain performance after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
One type of notice among the multiple types of notices is a third notice,
The first notice and the third notice are separate notices,
When the certain performance is executed after the first case occurs, the third notice is executed,
If the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing the certain performance after the first case occurs, the third notice is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
One type of notice among the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
The first notice and the second notice are separate notices,
The first display may be displayed during the execution of the second notice,
In one symbol variation display, there is a case where both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed (hereinafter referred to as the "second case").
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 6)
A gaming machine according to claim 5,
The first display may be displayed in a first manner,
The first display may be displayed in a second manner,
The first aspect and the second aspect are at least partially different aspects,
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first display may also be displayed in the second manner in the second notice,
In the second case, there is no case where the first display is displayed in the first manner in the second notice after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
There are cases where the second display is displayed during the execution of the first notice (hereinafter referred to as the "third case").
The first representation and the second representation are representations that are at least partially different from each other,
A case where the certain performance is executed after the first case is reached is more likely to result in a jackpot than a case where the certain performance is executed after the third case is reached,
A case where the certain performance is not executed after the third case occurs is more likely to result in a jackpot than a case where the certain performance is not executed after the first case occurs.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The certain performance is a certain super reach performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The first display is a display that is not displayed after the start of the reach effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming control means capable of transitioning to one of a plurality of gaming states,
The game control means is a means for determining a variation time of the symbol variation display by using one of a plurality of types of variation pattern tables,
One type of gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One type of fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables is a first fluctuation pattern table,
One type of fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables is a second fluctuation pattern table,
The first variation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state,
The second variation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state,
The game control means is a means for determining a variation time of the pattern variation display using the second variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts after a first condition is established during the use of the first variation pattern table in the first game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 12)
12. The gaming machine according to claim 11,
The variation time of the pattern variation display is more likely to be shorter when the variation time of the pattern variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table than when the variation time of the pattern variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to claim 11 or 12,
A certain display may be displayed during a period in which the variation time of the pattern variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 11 to 13,
The first condition is not satisfied in the first game state that is started when the game is initialized upon power-on.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 15)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 11 to 14,
A first symbol display means capable of displaying a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means capable of displaying a second symbol variation display;
Equipped with
In the first game state to which the game state transitions after the end of a big win game, when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, the first condition is established.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 16)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 15,
Equipped with a directing means capable of executing a plurality of directing operations,
The content of the effect in the pattern change display executed using the first change pattern table and the content of the effect in the pattern change display executed using the second change pattern table are common.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 16,
The game control means is a means for determining a variation time of the pattern variation display using the first variation pattern table in the pattern variation display that starts after a second condition is established during the use of the second variation pattern table in the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 17,
One type of gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state including a non-electric support state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state including an electric support state,
There is a case where the first gaming state transitions to the second gaming state without a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the "first case").
In the first case, the first condition is not satisfied in the first gaming state that is started after the second gaming state ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 18,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Figure 78 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 78, a predetermined number of game media (e.g., game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, game media shot from the shooting means 901 into the game area 902 can be ejected from the game area 902 and supplied to the shooting means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 that displays information on the number of game media (prize balls, loaned balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front side of the game machine, and the upper tray 126 and lower tray 128 shown in FIG. 48 are not provided.

In addition, a mode may be adopted in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper tray 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 48 and described above, and further, a mode in which a touch panel is provided on this display means 903. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operation means. Then, a performance related to the operation of the performance button 136 may be executed by a single touch operation, a repeated operation, or a long press operation on the touch panel, or, when the long press auto-repeated function is in an enabled state, a pseudo repeated operation on the touch panel may be performed while the touch panel is continuously touched. Also, it may be configured not to enable the long press auto-repeated function. Also, in some performances, the long press auto-repeated function may be enabled. In other words, the long press auto-repeated function may be activated on the touch panel, or may not be activated, and may be configured to be activated many times or few times. Also, when there are multiple performances by repeated operations on the touch panel, it may be configured to be configured not to enable the long press auto-repeated function in many times or few times when performed on the touch panel.

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 78 is a machine in which balls are sealed inside and circulated within the machine for use. The sealed balls may be used as balls to be fired, and the payout of the balls may be carried out using credits.

Next, a slot machine (reel game machine) as a gaming machine applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 79. Here, Figure 79 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention, as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 79 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of patterns arranged on their outer periphery (not shown in Figure 79) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotated by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in an appropriate number, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 1010-1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010-1012 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010-1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each reel 1010-1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying combinations of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display means. Also, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back of each of the reels 1010-1012, a reel backlight (not shown) is arranged to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 1010-1012, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010-1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the winning lines 1014 that are valid. The winning lines that are valid are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid. When two medals are bet, three lines are valid, which are the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line. When three medals are bet, five lines are valid, which are the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line. Note that the number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the five lines of the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the lower right winning line, and the upper right winning line may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the valid winning lines may be called valid lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamps 1029 light up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 1021 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (inserted) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the term "inserting" includes both. The number of medals stored in the slot machine 1000 is an indicator for displaying the number of medals stored electronically. The game information indicator 126 is an indicator for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The number of medals paid out is an indicator for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the number of medals stored in the slot machine 1025, the game information indicator 1026, and the number of medals paid out are configured as 7-segment (SEG) indicators.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 1035 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037-1039 as an example of an operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each of the reels 1010-1012. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 1037-1039 will be referred to as a stop operation, with the first stop operation being the first stop operation, the next stop operation being the second stop operation, and the last stop operation being the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation being the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation being the third stop reel. Note that light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037-1039, and when the stop buttons 1037-1039 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is an outlet for paying out medals.

To the right of the medal insertion button 1032 is provided a chance button 1100 as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or operations related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. The chance button 1100 can be in multiple states, similar to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the valid period for operating the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling up a user menu (for example, a menu for setting the game history information of the individual player) and is composed of multiple buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operation means.

A title panel 1062 is provided below the stop button unit 1036 to display the model name and to attach various certificate stamps, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp that lights up the title panel 1062. A medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal receiving tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker installed inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and the sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the performance device 1060. This performance device 1060 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right shutters 1063a and left shutters 1063b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown, performance image display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 1000.

It is not necessary to use a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to display various performance images and various game information, it may be, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is square and configured so that the player can see it in its entirety. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. It is also possible to provide decorations (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

The gaming machine according to the present invention may be a casino machine 2000 as shown in FIG. 80(a), which "inputs a bill into a bill slot 2002, executes a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, displays the lottery result on a lottery result display device 2008, adds the number of bonus coins to the remaining credits when a win occurs, and issues a receipt from a receipt issuing machine 2010 containing a code corresponding to the remaining credits when cash out 2009 is selected."

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1(b), the present invention may be applied to a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, as shown in FIG. 1(c), a portable game console 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 3(b) includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data via a mobile phone line, a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game console 4000 in FIG. 1(c) comprises an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a specified storage medium (such as a DVD), a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in FIG. 1(d) comprises an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a specified storage medium (such as a DVD), a memory unit that stores the acquired game-related data (electronic data that realizes the present invention), and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the memory unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1(e), the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for implementing the present invention. There may be cases where the electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from this data server 6000 via an Internet line to a home video game console 5000 shown in FIG. 1(d).

The present invention can also be applied to game programs that simulate the operation of real machines such as pachinko machines for home gaming machines to execute games. In such cases, the recording medium for recording the game program can be a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium.

Furthermore, while the present invention has been described with reference to pachinko machines and slot machines as examples of gaming machines, the present invention is not limited to these and may also be applied to arrange ball gaming machines, Jankyu gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Note that even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. In other words, as long as there are no factors preventing the application, the constituent elements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. can be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc., and still form a unified technical idea.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to Figures 81 to 101. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 81 to 101 are used in principle only in the description using Figures 81 to 101, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 81 to 101 take precedence in the description using Figures 81 to 101.
<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 81. This figure is a perspective view of the exterior of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine where the player can win a profit when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a door member that is equipped with a locking function and serves as the base body of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 on the inside. The staff of the store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided to detect when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door member that is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely and is formed in a frame shape, with an opening on the inside. The staff of the game parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening of this front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 form a partitioned space in which the play area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. In this embodiment, a light source that is an LED is also called a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. In addition, a ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The ball storage tray door 108 includes a ball storage tray 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and having a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 from the ball storage tray 126 by the player's operation, a ball launching handle 134 for launching the game balls guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation into the game area 124 of the game board, a performance button 136 for changing the performance mode of various performance devices by the player's operation, a button lamp 138 built into the performance button 136 and illuminating the performance button 136, and a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade. Although not shown in FIG. 81, a return operation button for issuing an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit is also provided to the right of the ball lending operation button 140. It also has an operation key unit 190 with a cross key and a confirmation button.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104 and includes a launch rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launch rod 146. This launching device 110 launches the game ball toward the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is being continuously operated by the player, and corresponds to an example of a launching means.

Figure 82 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 81.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member and is equipped with a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown). The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a specified position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and by driving the payout motor to rotate it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of a gaming ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 84) when a gaming ball is passing, and outputs either a high or low signal when a gaming ball is not passing. The payout sensor is configured so that gaming balls that pass through it pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach a ball storage tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined awarding condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 awards (pays out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to the awarding condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see Figure 84) that performs control processing for the overall game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see Figure 84) that performs control processing for the presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see Figure 84) that performs control processing for the presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, an error reset case 167 that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 84) that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and resets errors by operation of a game store clerk, and The system is provided with a payout board case 172 housing a payout board 170 equipped with a switch 168, a launch board case 176 housing a launch board 174 constituting a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 84) that performs control processing related to the launch of game balls, a power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 constituting a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 84) that supplies power to various electric gaming devices and equipped with a power switch 178 that is operated by a gaming store clerk to turn the power on and off, and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on to output a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300, and an interface unit 606 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which at least one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The role ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 811(A), the role ratio/setting display 196 is a modularized 7-segment LED board with two digits arranged above and below, and a 7-segment LED board with one digit on the right side. The role ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the role ratio (YH) and the continuous role ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The role ratio/setting display 196 is composed of a single-color LED of red, for example, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors, red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a part of the role ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visible to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the rear surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 83 (a) is a simplified front view of the game board 200. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand may be called the left and the right hand may be called the right. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes called the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be called the top and the lower side may be called the bottom. Although not shown in Figure 83, in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 100 (sometimes called the front-back direction), the front side that is the player's side may be called the front side or front side, and the back side may be called the rear side or back side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, a structure can be used in which the left side 200a of the game board 200 as seen from the front is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front (the hinge part 112 side), and the game board 200 is rotated around this position while the right side 200b as seen from the front of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to set it in place. Such a structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201, which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the game board 201. When a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game so that the game cannot continue) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor, such as a magnetic sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 is defined in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

The area of the game board 200 other than the game area 124 may be called a non-game area. The game area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished from each other by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the launch strength of the game ball is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 may be called a flow-down area because the game ball flows down during play, and the non-game area may be called a non-flow-down area because the game ball does not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire game area 124 may be called a flow-down area, but an area through which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may be called a non-flow-down area.

A decorative pattern display device 208 is disposed approximately in the center of the game area 124. The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display different decorative patterns, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used in the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are configured to display various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The main control lamp board 254 is located below the play area 124.

Figure 83 (b) is an enlarged view of the various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), on the main control lamp board 254, there are arranged a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol reserved lamp 216, a special symbol 1 reserved lamp 218, a special symbol 2 reserved lamp 220, a high probability lamp RK, an electric support lamp RD, a right hit lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR. Note that hereinafter, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying general maps, and in this embodiment is configured with two vertical LEDs. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are each configured with two upper and lower rows, a total of eight LEDs.

The regular reserve lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved regular variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular variable games. The special 1 reserve lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special variable games. The special 2 reserve lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special variable games.

The high probability lamp RK is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or that it will become a high probability state. The electric support lamp RD is a lamp that indicates that the normal pattern variable display time is shortened and that the electric support state is in which the wing members 2311 of the electric tulip (electric chute) described below are likely to open for a long time. The right hit indicator lamp RM is a lamp that indicates that the jackpot game state, the probability state, and the electric support state are in a state where the player can obtain the benefits by hitting to the right. The round indicator lamp RR is a lamp that indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when a jackpot occurs.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 83(a) has a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where the game ball can roll. The warp device 242 ejects game balls that enter a warp entrance 242a located on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208 from a warp exit 242b to the stage 244. The stage 244 is located below and in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is the stage where the game balls that have passed through the warp device 242 perform movements such as reciprocating and rotating. In this stage 244, the game balls' reciprocating and rotating movements increase the time they stay in the stage 244.

In addition, the first performance movable body 7 is supported by the main body 104 and placed above the play area 124. The first performance movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light-emitting section 71 in which multiple light-emitting diodes capable of emitting light in full color are arranged. Furthermore, a second performance movable body 8 modeled after a human right arm is placed on the right side of the play area 124. This second performance movable body 8 is composed of an upper arm section 81 and a forearm section 82, and is equipped with an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm to the shoulder position, a forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm to the elbow position, and a finger motor (not shown) that bends and straightens the five fingers. The second performance movable body 8 moves in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 as a movable area by the upper arm motor and forearm motor.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), a part of the upper part of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative cover 203. In addition, the upper right part of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205, and a normal map start port 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal map start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the play area 124, and in this embodiment, one is arranged on the right side of the game board 200. A ball that passes through the normal map start port 228 is not discharged to the play island side, but if a ball enters the normal map start port 228, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one ball) are paid out, and the entered game ball may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the play island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable game by the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, a first special chart start hole 230 is disposed at the bottom center of the game board 200. A star-shaped performance lamp 206 is disposed directly below the first special chart start hole 230. Furthermore, a sub-liquid crystal display device 207 is disposed to the left of the first special chart start hole 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special chart start hole 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 82 is driven, a predetermined number of balls (for example, four balls) are discharged as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126, and a special chart variable game is started by the first special chart display device 212. The ball that entered the first special chart start hole 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, an attacca unit 23 is provided at the bottom right of the game area 124, and this attacca unit 23 is also provided with a separate electric chute type first special chart start hole. Hereinafter, the first special symbol start hole 230 provided at the bottom center of the game board 200 may be referred to as the first special symbol start hole (fixed) 230, and the electric chute type first special symbol start hole provided separately in the attacca unit 23 may be referred to as the first special symbol start hole (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The wing member 2311 of the first special symbol start hole (variable) 231 advances and retreats in the front and rear directions, and when advanced, it forms a ball passage making it difficult to win, and when retreated, it makes it easy to win. In the following explanation, when the wing member 2311 advances, it may be referred to as closed, and when retreated, it may be referred to as open. The attacca unit 23 also has a light-emitting diode (not shown) that can emit light in full color.

In addition to the first special starting hole (variable) 231, the attacca unit 23 also has a second special starting hole 232, a first variable winning hole 234, and a second variable winning hole 235. These variable winning holes are sometimes called "attacca". The first door member 2341 of the first variable winning hole (attacca) 234 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, and when advanced, it forms a ball passage and is in a difficult winning state, and when retreated, it is in an easy winning state. In the following explanation, the advancement of the first door member 2341 may be referred to as closed, and when retreated, it may be referred to as open. The second door member 2351 of the second variable winning hole (attacca) 235 also advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, but unlike the first door member 2341, when advanced, it forms a ball passage and is in an easy winning state, and when retreated, it is in a difficult winning state. In the following description, when the second door member 2351 is advanced, it is referred to as open, and when it is retreated, it is referred to as closed.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the first special starting hole (fixed) 230 located at the bottom center is configured such that it is difficult for the game ball to enter it when hit from the right due to its position. On the other hand, in the center of the above-mentioned stage 244, a special route 244a is provided that makes it easier for a ball that reaches the stage 244 to enter the first special starting hole (fixed) 230 located at the bottom center of the game board 200. It is also possible to aim for the first special starting hole (fixed) 230 from the left side without passing through the stage 244. Therefore, the first special starting hole (fixed) 230 located at the bottom center of the game board 200 is a starting hole where a ball can be expected to enter by hitting from the left.

Furthermore, although not shown, the game area 124 is provided with multiple general winning ports. When a ball enters a general winning port, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning ball has been entered into the general winning port, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., four balls) are discharged into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. Note that balls that enter a general winning port are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged toward the game island side.

In addition, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill and multiple play nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, an outlet 240 is provided to guide balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharge them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operation handle by the player, and shoots the balls through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launch rod and launch hammer into the play area 124. Then, the balls that reach the upper part of the play area 124 flow downward while changing their direction of travel by the shot direction conversion member 236 and the game nail, etc., and either win in various winning holes or starting holes, or reach the out hole 240 without winning in any winning hole or starting hole, or only by passing through the normal starting hole 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space portion 114 of the main body 104, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104. The out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the side of the game board 200. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have won in various winning ports) are received by this discharge ball receiving port and are discharged outside the pachinko machine 100 via a specified discharge passage, but only game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 84. This figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generating circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit has two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Additionally, the random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generating circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a ball storage tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification results and the comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, such as the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, such as the normal pattern display device 210, and various status display units. 328 (for example, the normal reserve lamp 216, the special reserve lamp 218, the special reserve lamp 220, the high probability lamp RK, the electric support lamp RD, the right hit lamp RM, the round display lamp RR, etc.), and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a drive means for driving the blade member 2311 of the first special start port (variable) 231 as a normal electric role, and a drive means for driving the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning port 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235 as a special electric role. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generating circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generating circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern start port 230, 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. The random number generation circuit 318 receives this signal and latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special pattern start port 230, 231 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special pattern 1. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special pattern start port 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special pattern start port 232 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special pattern 2.

In addition, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. When the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied, and when the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and number of times, and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. The ROM 406 may also be configured to be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game table frame lamp 452, and controls the lighting by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. The game board lamp 442 includes a star-shaped performance lamp 206, a light-emitting unit 71 provided on the first performance movable body 7, and a light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacca unit 23. The game table frame lamp 452 includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, and a button lamp 138 that illuminates the performance button 136.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the motors of various performance devices such as the first performance movable body 7 at the top and the second performance movable body 8 on the right side shown in FIG. 83(a), a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the various performance devices, and a button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190, to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and number of times, and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 and the sub liquid crystal display unit 207. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 506 is connected to the basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. In this embodiment, a memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when the power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use a RAM whose stored information becomes volatile when the power is cut off.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and the like to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1041 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. When the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open, these sensors detect this and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch hammer 148, and the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that indicates whether to allow or stop launch, and a control signal output by a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630, but power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device via another power supply path.

Next, using Figures 85 (a) to (d), the types of special and regular symbols that are displayed by the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained.

Special chart 1 variable play starts on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 start port 230, 231, and special chart 2 variable play starts on the condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 start port 232. When special chart 1 variable play starts, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play) by flashing some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lamp from the left in the lower row). Also, when special chart 2 variable play starts, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play) by flashing some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lamp from the left in the lower row). Then, when the change time determined before the start of the change of special chart 1 has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 displays the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 in a stopped state, and when the change time determined before the start of the change of special chart 2 has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 displays the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2 in a stopped state. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the change display of the special chart. This change display of the special chart may be performed multiple times in succession.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specification is such that the special chart change display starts regardless of whether one of the special charts, Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, is displaying the change of the other special chart (a pachinko machine with such a specification is sometimes called a "simultaneous change machine").

Figure 85(a) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of special pattern 1. Four types of special patterns, "Special Pattern A" to "Special Pattern D", are shown in this Figure 85(a). In Figure 85(a), the white parts in the figure indicate lamps that are turned off, and the black parts indicate lamps that are turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot patterns ("Special pattern A" and "Special pattern B") are prepared as the stopping pattern mode of the special pattern 1. "Special pattern A" is a 6 round (R) normal jackpot pattern, and when "Special pattern A" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234 opens, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state. Also, "Special pattern B" is a 6R sure-variable jackpot pattern, and when "Special pattern B" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234 opens, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot patterns are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot patterns may be prepared. Also, a jackpot that is practically difficult to win in some rounds (for example, difficult to win due to short opening) may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decision of whether or not a jackpot occurs in the special chart variable play is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the decision of whether to make it a normal jackpot or a special chance jackpot is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a normal jackpot and a special chance jackpot is whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high (special chance jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special chart variable play. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is high is referred to as a special chart high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special chart special chance" or simply "special chance"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special chart low probability state. In this embodiment, as described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special chart low probability state and the special chart high probability state, and the special chart variation time is configured to be significantly different between the special chart low probability state and the special chart high probability state. In addition, after the end of the jackpot play, there is a case where the time-saving state (electric support state) is entered. Here, the electric support state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state, for example by shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in a special chart variable game and the start of the next jackpot. The time-saving state will be described in detail later, but the time-saving state is called a normal chart high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes called "normal chart probability change"), and the state that is not in the time-saving state is called a normal chart low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time-saving state) is started on the condition that the jackpot game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is only a state related to normal charts, and the "time-saving state" is a state related to special charts or a state related to normal charts and special charts. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, it is in the electric support state and the normal chart high probability state. In the normal chart high probability state, it is easier to win the normal chart variable game compared to the normal chart low probability state (normal chart probability change). For example, the winning probability of the normal map variable play is 0/100 (i.e., it will always be a miss) in the normal map low probability state (non-electric support state), whereas it rises to 100/100 (i.e., it will always be a win) in the normal map high probability state (electric support state). Also, the variable time of the normal map variable play is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variable short). For example, the variable time of the normal map variable play, which is 10 seconds in the non-electric support state, is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Also, in the electric support state, the opening time of the wing member 2311 of the special 1 starting hole (variable) 231 in one opening is likely to be longer than in the non-electric support state (electric chute opening period extension). For example, the electric chute opening period of 0.5 seconds in the non-electric support state is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the electric support state, the wing member 2311 is likely to open more than in the non-electric support state (increased number of electric chute openings). For example, the wing member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for one winning entry into the normal starting hole 228, opens twice in the electric support state (open for 2 seconds, close for 1 second, and open again for 2 seconds). By extending the electric chute opening period or increasing the number of times the electric chute is opened, the probability of the ball entering the special starting hole (variable) 231 increases. The time-saving flag is set to off during a jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during a jackpot game. This is because, particularly in a jackpot game, if the game ball is picked up by the electric chute with a small number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls entering the first variable winning hole 234 or the second variable winning hole 235 decreases, it may cause a disadvantage to the player. In this embodiment, in the electric support state (time-saving state), all of the normal chart probability change, normal chart short change, electric chute opening period extension, and electric chute opening count increase are performed, but if at least one of these is performed, the player's advantage becomes high, and the electric support state (time-saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the electric chute opening period extension or the electric chute opening count increase, which increases the probability of the ball entering the special chart 1 starting hole (variable) 231, is performed, the electric support state (time-saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special chart 1 starting hole (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special chart 1 starting hole (variable) 231 changes between a difficult-to-enter state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-enter state in which the game ball is easy to enter. In the electric support state, the entrance of this special chart 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is in an easy-to-enter state for a longer period of time than in the non-electric support state. In this embodiment, when "Special Chart A" is displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 50 special chart variable plays after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, and the state transitions to a non-electric support state (normal chart low probability state) on the 51st play. On the other hand, if a jackpot without electric support ("Special Chart B") is won, the state does not transition to an electric support state after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "Special Chart A" is displayed, the control state becomes a special chart low probability, normal chart high probability state after the jackpot game ends. Also, when "Special Chart B" is displayed, the control state becomes a special chart high probability, normal chart low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the big win pattern, a small win pattern ("Special pattern C") is also prepared for the special pattern 1. When a small win occurs with "Special pattern C", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235 opens 12 times for 0.06 seconds after the pattern stops. The opening time and number of times of the second door member 2351 can be set appropriately. In a small win game, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second variable winning port 235, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small win game ends, and the second door member 2351 is not opened thereafter. During a small win game, the game transitions to a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, the control state returns to the state before the small win game starts.

As described above, this embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine, so when a small win occurs on special chart 1 and a transition to small win play occurs, a situation may occur in which special chart 2 is being displayed. In this case, when a small win occurs on special chart 1, the display of the special chart 2 is interrupted, and when the small win play related to the small win ends, the display of the special chart 2 is resumed. In addition, a situation may occur in which special chart 2 is being displayed when a big win occurs on special chart 1 and a transition to big win play occurs, or a situation in which special chart 1 is being displayed when a big win occurs on special chart 2 and a transition to big win play occurs. In this case, when a big win occurs on one special chart, the display of the other special chart is forcibly terminated, the result of the display of the change is discarded, and a miss result is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stopping pattern is prepared as a losing pattern. "Special pattern D" is the losing pattern.

Figure 85(b) shows an example of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2. In this Figure 85(b), five types of special charts, "special chart a" to "special chart e", are shown, of which three types of special charts are jackpot patterns ("special chart a" to "special chart c"). "Special chart a" is a 6R normal jackpot pattern, and when "special chart a" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234 opens, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state. Also, "special chart b" is a 6R sure-variable jackpot pattern, and when "special chart b" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning port 234 opens, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special chart high probability normal chart low probability state. "Special chart c" is a 10R sure-win pattern, and when "Special chart c" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning port 234 opens and the game transitions to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special chart high probability normal chart low probability state. Note that in some rounds, jackpots that are practically difficult to win (for example, difficult to win due to short opening) may be prepared. Also, although three types of jackpot patterns are prepared in special chart 2, three or more types of jackpot patterns may be prepared.

In addition to the big win pattern, the special chart 2 also has a small win pattern ("special chart d"). When a small win occurs with "special chart d", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235 opens once for 0.06 seconds after the pattern stops. Compared to the small win pattern ("special chart C") of special chart 1, more game balls are likely to enter the second variable winning port 235 when a small win occurs with special chart 1 (when "special chart C" is stopped) than when a small win occurs with special chart 2 (when "special chart d" is stopped), and more balls can be won. In other words, the game is such that no balls are won with a small win with special chart 2, but balls are won with a small win with special chart 1. The opening time and number of times of the second door member 2351 can be set appropriately.

In addition, special chart 2 also has one type of stopping pattern prepared as a losing pattern. "Special chart e" is the losing pattern.

Figure 85 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns in this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". On the condition that a ball has entered the special chart 1 starting hole (fixed) 230, the special chart 1 starting hole (variable) 231, or the special chart 2 starting hole 232, that is, the first starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 or the special chart 1 starting hole (variable) 231, or the second starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 starting hole 232, a "decorative pattern variable display" may be performed in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each of the pattern display areas of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays decorative patterns separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the stop pattern state, which is a combination of decorative patterns. In this embodiment, in the normal game state and the electric support state in which the special pattern 1 is mainly displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed according to the display of the special pattern 1, and in the special pattern state in which the special pattern 2 is mainly displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed according to the display of the special pattern 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the special pattern 2 is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed, and the pattern display is only performed in the fourth pattern and the second special pattern display device 214 described later, and in the special pattern state, even if the special pattern 1 is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed, and the pattern display is only performed in the fourth pattern and the first special pattern display device 212.

When the first special symbol display device 212 indicates a definite 6R special jackpot in the normal game mode or electric support mode, and when a jackpot or small jackpot is to be indicated in a manner other than when the second special symbol display device 214 indicates a definite 10R special jackpot in the special jackpot state, a combination of decorative symbols with three decorative symbols of the same number lined up other than "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4") is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when the first special symbol display device 212 notifies a 6R guaranteed jackpot ("Special symbol B") in the normal game mode or the electric support mode, and when the second special symbol display device 214 notifies a 10R guaranteed jackpot ("Special symbol c") in the guaranteed jackpot state, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" are statically displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when a losing symbol of "Special symbol D" or "Special symbol e" is to be notified, a combination of decorative symbols other than those described above (for example, scattered symbols) is statically displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" to the display of the stopped pattern mode of the decorative pattern may be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display (sometimes referred to as the "decorative pattern variable display"). The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 85(d) shows an example of the stop pattern mode of the normal map. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes for the normal map: "Normal Map A", which is a winning pattern, and "Normal Map B", which is a losing pattern. Based on the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detecting that the ball has passed through the normal map start hole 228, the normal map display device 210 performs a "normal map variable display" (normal map variable play) by alternately lighting two LEDs arranged vertically. Then, after the variable time has elapsed, one of the patterns "Normal Map A", which is a winning pattern, and "Normal Map B", which is a losing pattern, is stopped and displayed. In this Figure 85(d), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the lamps that are turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map changing display" to the stop display of the regular map's stopping pattern state may be referred to as the regular map changing display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 84 will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Note that Fig. 86 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 stores a special random number value, a special round determination random number value, a special electric support determination random number value, and a special pattern determination random number value. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. The RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special numbers, the winning random number value of the special numbers, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the reserved number of special numbers may be referred to as the reserved number storage area of the special numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage area for special numbers that is divided into areas of the maximum number (four in this example) that can be reserved for the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), and also has a random number storage area for normal numbers. In the start information storage area for special numbers, as described below, multiple types of start information are stored as one set, and these start information is stored in each area in order of winning (reservation order).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 86 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, an interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial value are set to WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value to WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the low voltage signal is monitored to see if it is on, i.e., if the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is on (if the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect a power cutoff), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a numerical value that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below is set in the timer circuit 312, a clear signal is output from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400), and settings are made to allow writing to the RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before the power was cut off (power failure) is to be restored, and if the state before the power failure is not to be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute the initialization process.

If it is not determined that the state before the power outage will be restored (step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 82 by a store employee or the like (step S113). In other words, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115), and if it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the role ratio/setting display 196 flashes with "1" indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor is showing "6", it returns to "1". In this embodiment, it is possible to select at least one of settings 1 to 6, which have different jackpot probabilities, and the setting is confirmed by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the role ratio/setting display 196, but it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by audio output, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, six settings are provided, from setting 1 to 6, but other than six settings are possible, or the settings may not be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was cut off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

In addition, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process in step S117.

In step S119, an initialization process is performed to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating a suspend, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (e.g., all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result is a specific value (e.g., 0) or not (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), an initialization process is performed to set the pachinko machine 100 to an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In this embodiment, even if initialization is performed, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained. Furthermore, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command described below, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S121, after the interrupt prohibition setting is performed, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and the stack pointer is reset (main setting). In addition, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure are read out and reset in each register, and then interrupt permission is set. After that, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the stack pointer and registers after resetting, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was lost. That is, the process is resumed from the next command after the command (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before the power failure and before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later). In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 82. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command indicates that the state has been restored to when the power was turned off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Note that Fig. 87 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 84, including various ball detection sensors, are input through the input port of I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, and are stored in a signal status storage area partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Taking the detection signals of the ball detection sensors as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times ago (about 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. In addition, the detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the current detection signal storage area described above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in each of the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and it is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which is repeatedly started at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is started several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, the above-mentioned step S205 checks the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. In other words, when the game ball starts to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal from the previous time, and there is a detection signal from the current time. In this embodiment, taking into consideration erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 84 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal before last, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal before last, and there is a detection signal this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning hole, the first variable winning hole 234, the second variable winning hole 235, the first special starting hole (fixed) 230, the first special starting hole (variable) 231, and the second special starting hole 232, or passed through the general starting hole 228. That is, it is determined that there has been a ball entering the general winning hole, these variable winning holes 234, 235, and these starting holes 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first starting hole sensor that detects a ball entering the first special starting hole (fixed) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, it is determined that there has been a winning entry into the first special starting hole (fixed) 230, that is, that a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning entry into the first special starting hole (fixed) 230 is performed, but when the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning entry into the first special starting hole (fixed) 230 is not performed and the processing is branched to the subsequent processing. In addition, winning judgment clear pattern information (information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before last, there is no detection signal last time, and there is no detection signal this time) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. After it is determined that a win has occurred, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning judgment clear pattern information. If it matches the winning judgment clear pattern information, from the next time onwards, it will be determined whether it matches the winning judgment pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes and basic random number update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value performed in step S121 is updated, and then the random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value and the special random number value used by the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Also, if it is determined that the random number counter has gone around once as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and set in the memory area of the random number counter. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, which varies in the range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and set in the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round, an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a special number has completed its round is provided in RAM 308.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the random number counter for generating random numbers for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including a normal pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the normal pattern display device 210, a special pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214, and timers for timing a specified winning performance time, a specified opening time, a specified closing time, a specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a winning slot counter update process is performed. In this winning slot counter update process, when a win occurs in winning slots 234, 235 or starting slots 230, 231, 232, the value of the prize ball count memory area provided for each winning slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

In addition, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. In the winning entry acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area in the start information storage section of RAM 308 according to the winning order (reserved order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 84 are composed of one byte, with strobe information in bit 7 (when on, indicates that data is being set), power-on information in bit 6 (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), the current processing type for encryption in bits 4 and 5 (0 to 3), and the payout request count after encryption processing in bits 0 to 3.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process is one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process in the middle of the normal map change display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), on/off drive control is performed to alternately blink the two LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 displays changes in the normal map (normal map change play).

In addition, in the normal pattern status update process at the timing when the normal pattern change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the two LEDs constituting the normal pattern display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the winning pattern is displayed, and if the winning flag is off, the two LEDs constituting the normal pattern display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the losing pattern is displayed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal pattern status update process. Here, the above-mentioned turning on and off drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal pattern is being stopped. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a confirmed display of either the winning pattern (normal pattern A shown in FIG. 85(d)) or the losing pattern (normal pattern B shown in FIG. 85(d)). Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of a timer for managing the normal symbol stop time provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Also, if the result of the normal map variable game is a win, the normal map win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal map win flag is on, in the normal map status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to normal map operation, and a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 84) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special map start port (variable) 231 to keep the blade member 2311 in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 2 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal drawing state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 84) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 provided in the attacker unit 23 in order to keep the blade member 2311 in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 500 ms), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the blade closed time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that starts when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the wing closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process at the end of the above-mentioned specified stop display period (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a lottery process related to the normal map is performed. In this lottery process, when the opening and closing control of the normal map variable game and the first special map start port (variable) 231 is not being performed (the normal map state is not operating), and the number of reserved normal map variable games is 1 or more, a random number lottery based on the normal map winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area is performed to determine whether the result of the normal map variable game is a win or a loss, and if it is a win, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If it is a loss, the win flag is set to OFF. Note that regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as the normal map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected from among multiple variable times based on the obtained normal map timer random number value, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. The number of reserved regular variable games is stored in a reserved regular number storage area in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved regular variable games minus 1 is stored in this reserved regular number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the special pattern pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the special pattern pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special patterns 1 and 2, pre-determines the stop pattern and the change time before the hit/miss determination process, and stores the pre-determination result (special pattern pre-reading result) in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2, but first, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, in the special chart 2 state update process during the special chart 2 variable display (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), a lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed to repeatedly light and extinguish a specific LED among the eight LEDs that make up the special chart 2 display device 214. By performing this control, the special chart 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special chart 2 (special chart 2 variable play). In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), a specific transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process is terminated. In addition, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times storage section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 6R jackpot flag, a small jackpot flag, a miss flag, a special symbol probability change flag, and a regular symbol probability change flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process described later. In the special chart 2 state update process which starts when the special chart 2 variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on, the special chart probability variation flag is also on, and the normal chart probability variation flag is off, the special chart c shown in FIG. 85 (b) is displayed; when the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special chart probability variation flag is also on, and the normal chart probability variation flag is off, the special chart b is displayed; when the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special chart probability variation flag is off, and the normal chart probability variation flag is on, the special chart a is displayed; when the small hit flag is on, the special chart d is displayed; and when the miss flag is on, the special chart e is displayed. A setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 2 is being stopped and displayed. By performing this control, the special chart 2 display device 214 displays one of the following patterns: 10R sure-win pattern (special chart e), 6R sure-win pattern (special chart b), 6R normal jackpot pattern (special chart a), small win pattern (special chart d), or miss pattern (special chart e). In the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, which is a simultaneous variation machine, the special chart 1 may be displayed while the special chart 2 is being displayed, but if the jackpot pattern is displayed at the timing when the special chart 2 variable display time has elapsed, regardless of the lottery result of the special chart 1, the lottery result is discarded in the special chart 1 at the timing of the jackpot pattern display of the special chart 2, and the miss pattern is displayed at the time of the jackpot pattern display of the special chart 2. In addition, if the special chart 1 variable display is being performed while the special chart 2 variable display is in progress, and the small win pattern is displayed stationary when the special chart 2 variable display time has elapsed, the progression of the special chart 1 variable display time will be interrupted at the timing of the small win pattern display of special chart 2, and as a result, the time from the start of the special chart 1 variable display to the special chart 1 pattern being displayed stationary will be extended by the time from the special chart 2 small win pattern being displayed stationary to the end of the small win game.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of special chart 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 is 0 and the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on, as described below. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special chart 2 state update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 2 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning performance period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for a specified winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the predetermined winning performance period ends (when the value of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 84) for driving the opening and closing of the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning port 234 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected entering the first variable winning port 234), to keep the first door member 2341 in an open state (retracted state), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning port opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 84) for driving the opening and closing of the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 for the specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) to keep the first door member 2341 in a closed state (advance state), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 6 rounds in this example), and in the special chart 2 state update process that starts at the timing of the end of the control, information indicating the effect waiting period is set in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to set the device to wait for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is being displayed. Also, if the normal chart probability fluctuation flag is set on, the time-saving count (for example, 50 times) is set in the time-saving count memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the jackpot game ends, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the normal chart probability fluctuation flag is set off, the time-saving count is not set in the time-saving count memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on. Also, if the special chart probability fluctuation flag is set on, the probability variable flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the jackpot game ends.

The time-saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine is in a state advantageous to the player, in order to shorten the time between the end of a jackpot in the special jackpot variation game and the start of the next jackpot. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the game is in a normal jackpot high probability state (normal jackpot probability change). In the normal jackpot high probability state, the probability of winning in the normal jackpot variation game is higher than in the normal jackpot low probability state. Also, in the normal jackpot high probability state, the variation time of the normal jackpot variation game is shorter than in the normal jackpot low probability state (normal jackpot short variation). Furthermore, in the normal jackpot high probability state, the opening time of the wing member 2311 of the special 1 starting hole (variable) 231 in one opening tends to be longer than in the normal jackpot low probability state (electric chute open extension). In addition, in the normal jackpot high probability state, the wing member 2311 tends to open more than in the normal jackpot low probability state. The state in which any of these normal jackpot probability change, normal jackpot short variation, and electric chute open extension is set is called the electric support state (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

As described above, the time-saving flag is set to OFF during a jackpot game (special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during a jackpot game. This is to solve the problem that if the normal high probability state is in place during a jackpot game, many game balls will enter the special 1 start port (variable) 231 before a certain number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234 during the jackpot game, and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot (number of balls dispensed) will increase, increasing the risk of gambling. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls for winning the special 1 start port (variable) 231 is "1", so the number of balls dispensed during the jackpot game does not increase substantially, and the time-saving flag may be left ON even during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 2 status update process, which starts when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to special chart 2 not in operation.

The above describes an example of a big win game using the first variable winning opening 234, but the same applies to a small win game using the second variable winning opening 235.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets special chart 2 not operating in the setting area of RAM 308. If special chart 2 is not operating, the special chart 2 status update process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, the processes described in the special chart 2 status update process above are performed according to the state of special chart 1. Each process performed in this special chart 1 status update process is the same as the process described in the special chart 2 status update process above, with "special chart 2" replaced with "special chart 1", so the explanation is omitted. Note that the order of the special chart 2 status update process and the special chart 1 status update process may be reversed.

After the special chart state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special chart related lottery process is performed for each of the special charts 1 and 2. The special chart 2 related lottery process (step S229) is executed using the first special chart 2 winning random number value and the special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value storage area, with the start condition that the special chart 2 variable play is not being performed, the special chart 2 state is inactive, neither the special chart 1 nor the special chart 2 is in a jackpot play, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable plays is 1 or more. The special chart 1 related lottery process is executed using the first special chart 1 winning random number value and the special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the start condition that the special chart 1 variable play is not being performed, the special chart 1 state is inactive, neither the special chart 1 nor the special chart 2 is in a jackpot play, and the number of reserved special chart 1 variable plays is 1 or more. That is, in this embodiment, special chart 1 can start variable play regardless of whether special chart 2 is in variable play or not, and special chart 2 is configured to be able to start variable play regardless of whether special chart 1 is in variable play or not (simultaneous variable play machine).

The result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol variable play has been won by the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified by the first sub-control unit 400, and in this embodiment, in the special symbol variable state, notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is given priority over notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special symbol 1 starting port (variable) 231, and in the normal play state and the time-saving state, notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special symbol 1 starting port (variable) 231 is given priority over notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232. However, when the result of the lottery for the special chart 1 variable play in the probability variable state is a jackpot, the result of the lottery for the lottery based on winning the special chart 2 start port 232 may be notified in parallel with the notification of the result of the lottery based on winning the special chart 2 start port 232, or the notification of the result of the lottery based on winning the special chart 2 start port 232 may be temporarily interrupted and the result of the lottery for the lottery based on winning the special chart 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special chart 1 start port (variable) 231 may be notified in parallel with the notification of the result of the lottery based on winning the special chart 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special chart 1 start port (variable) 231, or the notification of the result of the lottery based on winning the special chart 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special chart 1 start port (variable) 231 may be interrupted and the result of the lottery for the lottery based on winning the special chart 2 start port 232 may be notified.

In the case of the special chart 2 related lottery processing of step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number storage area, and determines whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss (win/lose judgment) using the win/lose judgment table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 winning random number in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the value of the special chart probability change flag in RAM 308. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 change display using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose judgment result. Next, the main control unit 300 uses various tables stored in the ROM 306 to determine the variable display time (timer number) of the special chart 2 based on, for example, the result of the winning/losing judgment, the stopped pattern, the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time of the winning/losing judgment, the acquired random number value for determining the special chart variable time, etc.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229) described above, the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special chart state update process and the special chart related lottery process are performed independently for special chart 1 and special chart 2, so that multiple special charts are changed simultaneously, but this is not limited to this, and the lottery process and the variable play for the reservation of the other special chart may not be performed depending on the state of one special chart. In this embodiment, as described later, when multiple special charts are changed simultaneously, in the normal game state and the time-saving state, the decorative pattern display device 208 performs a performance display according to the variable display of special chart 1, while not performing a performance display for the variable display of special chart 2, and in the probability variable state, the decorative pattern display device 208 performs a performance display according to the variable display of special chart 2, while not performing a performance display for the variable display of special chart 1, but the decorative pattern display device 208 may be provided with multiple areas that display the lottery results of each special chart, or multiple decorative pattern display devices that display the lottery results of each special chart may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately. In addition, when changes are being made to multiple special charts at the same time, the lottery results for the special chart that stopped changing first may affect the lottery results for the special chart that stops changing later.

In step S233, which is the next step after step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (in this example form, basic command, winning entrance command, ball out command, launch position command, special chart change start command, special chart change stop command, special chart stop type command (a command transmitted when special chart 1 and special chart 2 start changing, which specifies whether special chart 1 or special chart 2 will stop first), special chart hit start command, special chart hit end command, big winning entrance open command, big winning round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, pre-read result information command, setting command, or other information that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special chart fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, miss flags, and timer numbers selected in the special chart-related lottery process, and further includes stop pattern information that can identify the stop pattern when the special chart fluctuation start command is set in this embodiment. In the case of a special chart fluctuation stop command, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and miss flags, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds, etc. In the case of a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a win at the special chart 1 start port (fixed) 230, whether or not there is a win at the special chart 1 start port (variable) 231, whether or not there is a win at the special chart 2 start port 232, whether or not there is a win at the first variable win port 234, and whether or not there is a win at the second variable win port 235. In the case of a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special chart 1 and special chart 2, the look-ahead number stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stopping patterns stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, the command data includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned spin start setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and miss flags stored in RAM 308, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., is set in the command data.In the above-mentioned spin stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and miss flags stored in RAM 308, etc., is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning performance setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the performance control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub LCD display device 207, the various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the winning performance period, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., stored in RAM 308. In the above-mentioned end performance setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the performance control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub LCD display device 207, the various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the performance waiting period, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., stored in RAM 308. In the above-mentioned big prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the number of big win rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the process of sending the setting to close the big prize opening described above, information indicating the number of big prize rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in step S233, a general command special chart reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special chart reservation increase process, special chart identification information (information indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 are set in the command data.

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which is the next step after step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, the next step after step S235, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a ball storage tray full error. When a front frame door open error or a ball storage tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a ball storage tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special chart start port (variable) 231, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235, and the display data to be output to the normal chart display device 210, the special chart 1 display device 212, the special chart 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, etc. via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330 is set to the output port of the I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request quantity transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of I/O 310.

In step S239, which is the next step after step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not. If the low voltage signal is on (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interruption end process is performed. In this timer interruption end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 86. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as return data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the HALT state is entered.

Next, the judgment tables used in the normal drawing lottery process (step S223), the special drawing 2 lottery process (step S229), and the special drawing 1 lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 87 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. Here, FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal drawing hit/miss judgment table, FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing 1/2 hit/miss judgment table, and FIG. 88(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing determination allocation table.

The table for determining whether a normal drawing is a hit or a miss shown in FIG. 88(a) is a table for determining whether a normal drawing is a hit or a miss for a normal drawing used when determining whether a normal drawing is a hit or a miss. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 88(a), when this table for determining whether a normal drawing is a hit or a miss is used, in the low probability state of the normal drawing, there is no hit value, i.e., the hit probability is 0%, and in the high probability state of the normal drawing, the possible range of the random number is 0 to 65535, and the hit value is 0 to 65535. In other words, the hit probability is 65536/65536 (i.e., 100%). In the low probability state of the normal drawing (when the time-saving function is not activated), a hit may be determined with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal drawing (when the time-saving function is activated), a miss may be determined with a certain probability (for example, 1%).

The table for determining whether or not special charts 1 and 2 are correct, as shown in FIG. 88(b), is a table that is referenced when determining whether or not special charts 1 and 2 are correct, and the record to be referenced is selected depending on whether the setting is 1 to 6, and whether the special chart is in a low probability state or a high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 1, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (approximately 1/200) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2, and in the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (approximately 1/199) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In the low probability state of the special chart in setting 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (approximately 1/193) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 and special chart 2, and in the high probability state of the special chart, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (approximately 1/192) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 and special chart 2.

In the low probability state of the special chart in setting 3, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (approximately 1/181) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 and special chart 2, and in the high probability state of the special chart, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (approximately 1/180) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 and special chart 2.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 4, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (approximately 1/175) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2, and in the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (approximately 1/174) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In the low probability state of the special chart in setting 5, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (approximately 1/146) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 and special chart 2, and in the high probability state of the special chart, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (approximately 1/145) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 and special chart 2.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 6, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (approximately 1/94) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2, and in the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (approximately 1/93) as a result of the winning or losing judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In addition, regardless of whether the setting is 1 to 6, or whether the special chart is in a high probability state or a low probability state, the result of the big win lottery for special chart 1 is a small win with 12 openings and closings with a probability of 6580/65536 (approximately 1/10), and the result of the big win lottery for special chart 1 is a small win with 1 opening and closing with a probability of 6580/65536 (approximately 1/10). It is also possible to prevent small wins from occurring on special chart 1, and to have small wins (small wins with 12 openings and small wins with 1 opening and closing) occur only on special chart 2. The probability of a small win may also be made different for each setting.

In this embodiment, in all of settings 1 to 6, the probability of a jackpot in the special chart high probability state is slightly higher than the probability of a jackpot in the special chart low probability state, but they are set so that they can be considered to be almost the same probability. Also, in this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot differs depending on the setting, with the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a jackpot, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to win a jackpot. Therefore, the lower the setting, the harder it is to win a jackpot, but when the game transitions to a special probability state, there is a tendency for small jackpots to occur more frequently than with a high setting, which may give the game different gameplay.

In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot is set almost the same in the special chart high probability state and the special chart low probability state in either setting, but a major difference is the variable display time of the special chart 2. In this embodiment, the variable time of the special chart 2 in the special chart high probability state is selected to be, for example, 1 to 5 seconds. In the special chart high probability state, when hitting from the right, a large number of game balls are likely to enter the second special chart start port 232, and a large number of variable displays of the special chart 2 can be performed, resulting in a mechanism that increases the frequency of small hits. In this embodiment, the special chart high probability state can be said to be a state in which the frequency of small hits increases, so it is sometimes called a "small hit rush." In addition, when there are four reserved pattern variable displays of the special chart 2 (full), the time it takes to consume one pattern variable display of the special chart 1 is longer than the time it takes to consume all the pattern variable displays of the special chart 2, so it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the special chart 1. On the other hand, the variation time of the special chart 2 in the special chart low probability state is set to, for example, 580 seconds. Therefore, in the special chart low probability state, if you hit from the right, the frequency of the ball entering the special chart 2 starting hole 232 and the probability of a small win will not change, but since the time until the result of the special chart 2 variation display is displayed will be about every 10 minutes, hitting from the right is essentially disadvantageous to the player. Note that, in the special chart low probability state, the variation time of the special chart 2 is set to 580 seconds for misses and small wins, but the variation time for a big win is shorter than that, for example, set to 227 seconds.

Figure 88 (c) shows an example of a distribution table for determining special symbols, and the stopping symbols are determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This distribution table for determining special symbols specifies a random number range that corresponds to the stopping symbol state of the special symbol (see Figures 85 (a) and (b)) for each hit/miss judgment result.

First, if the result of the special chart 1 hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, one of "special chart A" and "special chart B" is selected. As mentioned above, "special chart A" is a 6R normal jackpot that opens the first variable winning hole 234, and "special chart B" is a 6R special jackpot that opens the first variable winning hole 234. The selection rate for each is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 1 hit/miss judgment is a small hit, "special chart C" is selected. As described above, "special chart C" is a small hit in which the second variable winning port 235 is repeatedly opened shortly up to 12 times.

Next, if the result of the special chart 2 hit/miss judgment is a hit, one of "special chart a" to "special chart c" is selected. As described above, "special chart a" is a 6R normal hit in which the first variable winning port 234 opens, "special chart b" is a 6R sure-win hit in which the first variable winning port 234 opens, and "special chart c" is a 10R sure-win hit in which the first variable winning port 234 opens. Regardless of the setting, the selection rate for each is 60/100 for "special chart a," 5/100 for "special chart b," and 35/100 for "special chart c."

Also, if the result of the special chart 2 hit/miss judgment is a small hit, "special chart d" is selected. As described above, "special chart d" is a small hit in which the second variable winning port 235 opens once.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 89 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 89 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the initial settings of the input/output ports and the initialization processing of the memory area in the RAM 408 are performed, etc.

In step S303, which is the next step after step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, which is the next step after step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which is the next step after step S307, a performance control process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, a process such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process for the performance data is performed.

In step S311, which is the next step after step S309, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and depending on the detection result, a process is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190.

In step S313, which is the next step after step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which follows step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read out in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. In this way, light emission control is performed for the button lamp 138 that illuminates the performance button 136, the star-shaped performance lamp 206, the light-emitting unit 71 provided on the first performance movable body 7, and the light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the attacca unit 23.

In step S317, which is the next step after step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read out in step S309 contains a command for the first performance movable body 7 at the top shown in FIG. 83(a) or the second performance movable body 8 located on the right side, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 89 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Figure 89 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 90 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 90 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the initial settings of the input/output ports and the initialization processing of the memory area in the RAM (not shown) are performed, etc.

In step S403, which is the next step after step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, which is the next step after step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which is the next step after step S407, a performance control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, a process is performed such as reading the performance data corresponding to this command (the performance data displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the performance data displayed on the sub LCD display device 207) from a ROM (not shown), and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process is performed on the performance data.

In step S411, which is the next step after step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

Figure 90 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM.

Figure 90 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle in response to this timer interrupt. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which is the next step after step S441, other processing such as updating the random number value for presentation is performed.

Figure 90 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-controller main process. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or the sub LCD display device 207. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc., in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which is the next step after step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the next step after step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the role ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to Figure 91. Here, Figure 91 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the role ratio/setting display 196, and Figure 91 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198.

As described above, the reel ratio/setting display 196 is configured with a reel ratio monitor and a setting monitor, where the reel ratio monitor displays the continuous reel ratio (RY) and the reel ratio (YH), and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the consecutive feature ratio refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature when the feature is activated consecutively (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the first variable winning opening 234 opening and winning during a jackpot game). It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning in the first variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. Also, the feature ratio refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the first special chart start opening (variable) 231, the first variable winning opening 234, and the second variable winning opening 235 opening and winning). It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning through the first variable winning hole 234, the second variable winning hole 235, the first special chart start hole (fixed) 230, the first special chart start hole (variable) 231, the second special chart start hole 232, and the general winning hole to the number of out balls.

In this embodiment, if the consecutive feature ratio is calculated and it is determined that the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit seven-segment LED that displays the consecutive feature ratio is made to flash, and then a security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may also be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. This may allow the type application test of the gaming machine to be carried out smoothly.

In addition, if the calculated ratio of the reels is judged to be greater than 70%, the two-digit seven-segment LED that displays the ratio of the reels is caused to flash, and then a security signal (YH) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the ratio of the reels exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In this embodiment, when the continuous feature ratio or feature ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, a specific 7-segment LED is made to blink, but for example, the light color may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 91(B), eight dip switches are provided on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch is read and the probability of the effect occurring can be changed. For example, it is possible to set the frequency with which setting suggestions are executed, the occurrence rate of previews, the rate at which the effect mode is entered, etc.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attack of the second variable winning port 235 is not opened during a big win game, but is opened only during a small win game. However, a big win in which the attack of the second variable winning port 235 is opened may be prepared. For example, as a big win of special chart 2, a 3R big win (effectively a 1R big win) or a 6R big win, in which the attack of the second variable winning port 235 is opened instead of the attack of the first variable winning port 234, may be prepared.

In addition, although small wins were prepared for both special chart 1 and special chart 2, small wins may be provided only for special chart 2. In other words, only for special chart 2, small wins in which the second variable winning port 235 repeats short opening a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) and small wins in which it only opens once may be provided. By doing this, in the special chart high probability normal chart low probability state, if the special chart 1 start port (variable) 231 is not in an easy winning state, the attacker of the first variable winning port 234 is in a difficult winning state, and the attacker of the second variable winning port 235 is also in a difficult winning state, most of the game balls hit to the right will enter the second special chart start port 232, and a big win or small win can be obtained in the special chart 2 variable game. In particular, since the probability of winning a small win is higher (e.g., about 10 times higher) than the probability of winning a big win, it is easier to win a small win in which the second variable winning port 235 repeatedly opens for a maximum of a certain number of times (e.g., 12 times), and it is expected that you can earn balls by playing this small win.

Next, we will explain a specific example of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 81.

Figure 92 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a presentation centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 81.

Figure 92 shows a decorative pattern display device 208. Note that the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 reserve lamp 218, the special pattern 2 reserve lamp 220, and the normal pattern reserve lamp 216 are omitted from the illustration (the same applies to the example shown in Figure 99).

Figure 92 also shows a star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92(a) displays a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" in a static display. Note that the background here is a plain white background, but a default background image is displayed. In the following explanation, when the background is a plain white background, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Also, a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and the variable display and static display are performed according to the decorative pattern displayed large in the center of the display screen.

The decorative pattern display device 208 has a fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the pattern is changing (or the pattern is stopped) or not and for notifying the reserved number, and a reserved number display area for special pattern 1 is provided in the upper left of the display area, and a reserved number display area for special pattern 2 is provided in the lower left. In addition, a pattern change notification area for special pattern 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a pattern change notification area for special pattern 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a pattern change notification area for regular patterns and a reserved number display area for regular patterns may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 is aligned with the reserved number indicated by the reserved lamp 218 for special pattern 1, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 2 is aligned with the reserved number indicated by the reserved lamp 220 for special pattern 2. In addition, in the pattern change notification area of the special chart 1, while the pattern of the special chart 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, if it is a big win, it is stopped with "○", if it is a small win, it is stopped with "△", and if it is a miss, it is stopped with "×". Also, while the pattern change of the special chart 1 is being displayed, the "-" display may flash, and it may be possible to recognize that the pattern change of the special chart 1 is being displayed. The display in the pattern change display area of the special chart 2 is the same as the display in the pattern change display area of the special chart 1, and the display mode changes in response to the pattern change display and stop display of the special chart 2. Note that the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth pattern, or the display mode of the number displayed in the reserved number display area may be changed to perform a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the pattern change display being executed. The fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 described above is also the same as the example shown in FIG. 99.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a variable icon display area 280 at the bottom center of the performance display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 92 is the normal game state (low probability of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol). In this normal game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a reserved icon display area 281 for special symbol 1 to the left of the variable icon display area 280 (the same as the example shown in FIG. 99). Note that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the reserved icon display area for special symbol 2 is omitted, but a reserved icon display area for special symbol 2 may be provided.

In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1, reserved icons representing reserved special chart 1 are displayed. The reserved number of special chart 1 is represented by the number of reserved icons of special chart 1, in addition to the number of lit reserved chart 1 lamps 218 and the number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 1, and the reserved number of special chart 2 is represented by the number of lit reserved chart 2 lamps 220 and the number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 2. It may also be represented by the number of reserved icons of special chart 2. In other words, the reserved icons correspond to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the reserved icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second reserved icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special chart 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the reserved icons on the right side are the ones that have won the prizes the oldest.

In FIG. 92(a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and both of these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

Figure 93 is a diagram showing the display mode of the reserved icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 81. All of the reserved icons shown in Figure 93 are round, but they may deform from this round shape, for example, into a character icon.

Figure 93 (a) shows a reserved icon in display mode A (default display mode). Display mode A (default display mode) is a display mode with no pattern and white. In the drawing, white is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. The reserved icon suggests the expected probability of a jackpot in the pre-reading preview depending on the display mode. In other words, it suggests the expected probability of a jackpot in the pattern change display that is performed when the reserved represented by the reserved icon is consumed. Display mode A (default display mode) suggests that the expected probability of a jackpot is 5%. It may also be suggested that the expected probability of a jackpot is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the expected probability of a jackpot in the first place.

Figure 93 (b) shows a pending icon in display mode B. Display mode B is a plain, green display mode. In the drawing, the green color is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B suggests that the probability of a jackpot is 25%.

Figure 93 (c) shows a pending icon in display mode C. Display mode C is a display mode with no pattern and a red color. In the drawing, the red color is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This display mode C suggests that the probability of a jackpot is 50%.

Figure 93 (d) shows a hold icon in display mode D. Display mode D is a display mode consisting of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background. In addition, yellow is represented by vertical hatching in the drawing. This display mode D is a display mode that symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that manufactured the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 81. In other words, this second display mode is a display mode that makes many players imagine a certain pachinko machine manufacturer when they see it, and it can be said to be a display mode that allows the pachinko machine manufacturer to be recognized. In other words, it is a display mode that is famous for being used by a certain pachinko machine manufacturer. It can also be said to be a display mode unique to the pachinko machine manufacturer, and if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, it can be said to be a display mode in which the same manufacturer pattern is commonly used across multiple models. This second display mode is called a manufacturer pattern. Examples of manufacturer patterns include animal patterns, such as patterns imitating animals, floral patterns, fruit patterns, fireworks patterns, striped patterns, checkered patterns, and other geometric patterns, as well as repeating patterns in which multiple constituent units are arranged regularly (or irregularly). Manufacturer patterns are patterns expressed using multiple colors, so they are broadly interpreted as being included in "colors." Note that a single specific color may symbolize a pachinko machine manufacturer, in which case it becomes the manufacturer's color. This second display mode suggests that the probability of a jackpot is 75%. Note that in addition to pachinko machine manufacturers, pachinko machine sales manufacturers (companies) may also be displayed, and even models (model patterns) may be displayed instead of manufacturers.

Figure 93 (e) shows a hold icon in display mode E. Display mode E is a rainbow-colored display mode. This rainbow color may be a mode in which the display color changes continuously one color at a time to display each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple), but here it refers to a mode in which the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed at once, dividing the display area. In the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This display mode E suggests that the probability of a jackpot is 100%. In other words, it suggests that a jackpot is confirmed.

In addition, a display mode F may be provided that is patternless and gold, indicating that the expected probability of a jackpot is 70%.

The five display modes described above appear less frequently the higher the expectation of a jackpot, but in the case of display mode D (maker pattern), it may appear less frequently than display mode E (rainbow color). In other words, the hold icon in display mode D (maker pattern) may appear the least frequently.

The five display modes shown in FIG. 93 are also used for the variable icons that change the pending icon, and function as a preview (normal preview) of the variable display of the decorative pattern that corresponds to that variable icon.

Furthermore, the star-shaped performance lamp 206 located directly below the first special chart start hole (fixed) 230 can emit light in a lighting mode that represents the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon.

93 shows the light emission mode of the star-shaped performance lamp 206. The performance lamp 206 can be illuminated in light emission mode A (white light emission mode) which represents the display mode A (default display mode) of the reserved icon and the variable icon. The performance lamp 206 can also be illuminated in light emission mode B (green light emission mode) which represents the display mode B (green display mode) of the reserved icon and the variable icon. The performance lamp 206 can also be illuminated in light emission mode C (red light emission mode) which represents the display mode C (red display mode) of the reserved icon and the variable icon. The performance lamp 206 can also be illuminated in light emission mode D (rainbow light emission mode) which represents the display mode E (rainbow display mode) of the reserved icon and the variable icon. The rainbow light emission mode of the performance lamp 206 is a mode in which the seven colors that make up the rainbow are illuminated and displayed at the same time by dividing the light emission area. These light emission modes also suggest the same expectation of a jackpot as the display modes of the reserved icon and the variable icon.

Strictly speaking, the colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, i.e., the colors of the pending icon and variable icon, and the light-emitting color of the performance lamp 206 will differ in hue due to the different display media, but the colors of both will be described as being within the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the performance lamp 206 does not have a lighting pattern that represents the second display pattern (manufacturer pattern) of the pending icon and the variable icon, and the performance lamp 206 does not light up in a lighting pattern that is the same as or similar to the manufacturer pattern.

In addition, a further light emission mode E may be provided that is a gold light emission mode, indicating that the expected probability of a jackpot is 70%.

In addition, other displays (e.g., background display of the title, etc.) in the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 93. In other displays, the display mode may also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, or the display mode in other displays may be unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot.

The display on the sub LCD display 207 (for example, the lord's kimono, etc.) may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 93, excluding the second display mode (maker pattern). The display on the sub LCD display 207 may also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, or may be unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot.

In addition, lamps other than the performance lamp 206 (such as the game board lamp 442 and the game frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. 84) can also emit light in a light emission mode that represents other display modes except the second display mode. For example, the light emitting unit 71 provided on the first performance movable body 7 and the unillustrated light emitting diodes arranged in the attacca unit 23 can emit white, green, red, and rainbow colors. In addition to the case where the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the light emission area, the light emission color may change continuously one by one to display each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow. Such rainbow color change light emission may also be performed as the light emission mode D of the performance lamp 206. The light emission mode of the lamps other than the performance lamp 206 may also indicate the same expectation of a jackpot as the display mode of the reserved icon and the variable icon, or the light emission mode of the lamps other than the performance lamp 206 may be a light emission mode that is unrelated to the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, except for display mode D (manufacturer pattern) and display mode E (rainbow colors), it is also used as the color of decorative objects.

Figure 94 shows the decorative body provided on the second performance movable body 8.

In the second movable body 8, which resembles a human right arm, the four fingers, excluding the fifth finger (pinky finger), are decorative. All four fingers are difficult to see when bent, but when extended, the decoration on the palm side becomes visible.

Figure 94(a) shows the second performance movable body 8 with the forearm 82 raised and the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 extended. In the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 94(a), decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824. In other words, it is painted white.

Figure 94(b) shows the second performance movable body 8 with the third finger (middle finger) 823 extended while the forearm 82 is raised. In the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 94(b), decoration B (green) is applied to the palm side of the third finger 823. In other words, it is painted green.

Figure 94(c) shows the second performance movable body 8 with the second finger (index finger) 822 extended while the forearm 82 is raised. In the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 94(c), decoration C (red) is applied to the palm side of the second finger 822. In other words, it is painted red.

Figure 94(d) shows the second performance movable body 8 with the first finger (thumb) 821 extended while the forearm 82 is raised. In the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 94(d), the palm side of the first finger 821 is decorated with decoration D (gold color). In other words, it is painted gold.

In addition, in the second performance movable body 8, there is no decoration on the palm side of the fifth finger (pinky finger) 825.

Note that here too, strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the color of the decorative body are different shades due to the different display media, but these colors will be described as being within the same or similar range.

Furthermore, each decoration on the second performance movable body 8 indicates the expected probability of a jackpot, just like the reserved icon and variable icon. Therefore, when the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, it indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 5%, when the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, it indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%, when the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, it indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%, and when the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended, it indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 70%.

On the other hand, there are no manufacturer-patterned decorations or rainbow-colored decorations. Therefore, the decorations do not provide high-probability predictions with an expected jackpot rate of 75% or more.

Although the icon indicates the probability of a big hit like the reserved icon and variable icon, the value of the probability may be different from the value of the reserved icon and variable icon. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) may be 60%, and decoration D (gold) may be 90%.

Returning to Figure 92, in order to make it easier to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special chart 1, hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines in Figure 92 (a).

On the other hand, the value shown in the reserved number display area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and there are no reserved special charts 2. This is because, as mentioned above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 92 is the normal game state (low probability of special chart, low probability of normal chart), and therefore the variable display time of special chart 2 is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds) in most cases (when there is a miss or a small win), and winning at the special chart 2 starting hole 232 does not have much meaning. In the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in FIG. 92, the value shown in the reserved number display area for special chart 2 remains 0, and the fourth pattern of special chart 2 remains stopped as an "X".

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reserved icon display area of the special chart 1 or special chart 2, whichever is more likely to display the display result, is displayed depending on the control state (game state). That is, in this embodiment, when the control state is the normal game state or the electric support state (special chart low probability, normal chart high probability state), as described above, the display result of special chart 1 is more likely to be displayed, so as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1 is displayed in the performance display area 208d, and when the control state is the probability change state (special chart high probability, normal chart low probability state), conversely, the reserved icon display area of special chart 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in Special Drawing 2 is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon in Special Drawing 1, but may be different.

In addition, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 92(a) is lit in the default illumination state (white illumination state), which is the illumination state that represents the display state of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In this embodiment, the display of the special pattern change starts in the following order: change starts on the special pattern display device → display of the fourth pattern change starts → animation of the pending icon starts or disappears → decorative pattern change starts, but this order may be reversed.

In FIG. 92(b), the display of the pattern change of special pattern 1 has begun. That is, the pattern change has begun in the first special pattern display device 212, and the display of the change of the fourth pattern and mini pattern has also begun, the movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change of the decorative pattern has also begun. The number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display has begun to flash in the fourth pattern of special pattern 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one to the right, and reserved icon h11, which was previously the first reserved icon, is now displayed as variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280.

In FIG. 92(c), one ball enters the first special chart starting hole (fixed) 230, and the reserved icon of special chart 1 is increased. This increased reserved icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second reserved icon h12, and functions as a pre-reading notice. In accordance with the timing of the start of display of the red reserved icon h12 (display mode C), an eighth note performance sound (appearance sound) is output from the speaker 120. In addition, in response to the increase in the reserved icon represented by this red (display mode C) reserved icon h12, the star-shaped performance lamp 206, which had been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode), changes to light emission mode C (red light emission mode) representing the display mode of the reserved icon h12 representing the increased reserved icon. In other words, the light emission mode of the performance lamp 206 becomes a light emission mode with the same or similar color as the red of the reserved icon h12. The timing of the start of displaying the red reserved icon h12 (display mode C) and the timing of the change of the star-shaped performance lamp 206 to the light emission mode C may be simultaneous, or the reserved icon h12 may be earlier, or the performance lamp 206 may be earlier (the same is true for the examples shown up to FIG. 99). In the figure, the reserved icon h12 and the performance lamp 206 are shown to be about the same size, but in reality, the performance lamp 206 is larger. For this reason, the performance lamp 206 is more noticeable than the reserved icon h12, and if the performance lamp 206 changes earlier, it may be possible to give the player a stronger sense of the jackpot expectation suggested by the red color. Note that the number shown in the reserved number display area of the special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has increased by one to 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92(d), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed frozen. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen as a combination of "358". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In Figure 92 (e), the display of the pattern change of special chart 1 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display has started to flash on the fourth pattern of special chart 1. The red reserved icon (display mode C) has moved one position and is displayed in the display position of the first reserved icon (reserved icon h11). In addition, the star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92(f), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen as the combination "814". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In FIG. 92(g), the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon has been consumed, and the display of the pattern change of special chart 1 has begun. That is, the decorative pattern is displaying a change, and the red (display mode C) hold icon is displayed as a red (display mode C) change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. Also, the star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C. Note that the value shown in the hold number display area of special chart 1 in the fourth pattern/hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the "-" display has begun to flash on the fourth pattern of special chart 1.

In FIG. 92(h), the decorative pattern variable display enters a reach state, and in FIG. 92(i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 disappear. That is, in FIG. 92(i), the variable icon h0 in red (display mode C) becomes non-displayed, and the star-shaped performance lamp 206 also turns off in response to the non-display of this variable icon h0. In FIG. 92 to FIG. 97, the state in which the performance lamp 206 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching. The timing when the variable icon h0 becomes non-displayed and the timing when the star-shaped performance lamp 206 turns off may be simultaneous, or the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the performance lamp 206 may be earlier (the same applies to the examples shown in FIG. 99). In addition, the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern changes that were previously displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and are displayed in a reduced size. Meanwhile, the mini pattern in the upper left corner continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 92(j), it has progressed to a super reach (jii reach). The reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92(j). The reach title LT1 here is displayed as "jii reach" in black letters on a green background. In this reach title LT1, the background is the same or similar to the green color used for the reserved icon and decoration to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, but as shown in FIG. 100, the background color of the reach title LT1 for "jii reach" is set to a color other than green. In other words, the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, and the green color does not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92(k), an old man character appears, and then an animation of the old man character is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92(l) following the animation of the old man character, a dejected-looking old man character is displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern variation display displayed in reduced size in the lower right corner shows the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4". Note that the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 remain off, but the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 and mini patterns are displayed. The mini patterns continue to display variations for all patterns until the patterns are confirmed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92(m), the reduced display at the bottom right returns to the original size, and decorative pattern combinations are displayed frozen in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c. Here, the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen in the combination "434". In FIG. 92(m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

The star-shaped performance lamp 206 that is turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0 remains in the off state until the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, but may continue to emit light in the light-emitting mode C until the game develops into a super reach (until the timing of FIG. 92(j)). Alternatively, the light may continue to be emitted in the light-emitting mode C until the background display changes and the decorative pattern variable display displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner starts to sway (until the timing of FIG. 92(l)). Furthermore, the light may continue to be emitted in the light-emitting mode C until the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed (until the timing of FIG. 92(m)).

The example shown in Figure 92 described above is an example in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped performance lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442, are related.

Figure 95 shows a step-by-step example of a presentation in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background when displaying the reach title are related.

Figure 95 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the performance lamp 206. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 95 (a) displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" in a stopped state.

In addition, in FIG. 95(a), the hold icon h11 of one special chart 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special chart 1, and this hold icon h11 of special chart 1 is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the performance lamp 206 shown in FIG. 95(a) is lit in the default light emission mode A (white light emission mode), which is the light emission mode that represents the display mode of the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 95(b), the display of the pattern change of the special pattern 1 has started. That is, the pattern change in the first special pattern display device 212 has started, and the display of the change of the fourth pattern and the mini pattern has also started, the movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change of the decorative pattern has also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the display of "-" has started to flash in the fourth pattern of the special pattern 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one to the right, and the reserved icon h11, which was in the display position of the first reserved icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. When the reserved icon h11, which was in the default display mode, is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when it changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). The variable icon h0 that has changed to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) normally functions as a notice. In accordance with the timing of the start of display of the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) (timing of the change in the display mode), the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect (changing sound) represented by a quarter note. In addition, the star-shaped performance lamp 206, which has been emitting light in the default light emission mode A (white light emission mode) up until now, has changed to light emission mode C (red light emission mode) in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). In other words, the performance lamp 206 has changed to a light emission mode different from the light emission mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and is not emitting light in a light emission mode of the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). More specifically, the performance lamp 206 has changed to a light emission mode suggesting a lower expectation of a jackpot than the expectation of a jackpot suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0. In addition, the performance lamp 206 may change to a light emission mode (light emission mode D (rainbow color)) that suggests a higher expectation of a jackpot than the display mode D of the variable icon h0, or may be made to emit light in a color not used in the reserved icon or variable icon, or may be made to emit light in a different light emission mode even if it is a color used in the reserved icon or variable icon (for example, flashing light in red). In addition, the timing of the start of displaying the variable icon h0 and the timing of the change of the performance lamp 206 may be simultaneous, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the performance lamp 206 may be earlier (the same is true for the example shown in FIG. 99). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the performance lamp 206 are written to be about the same as the reserved icon, but in reality, the performance lamp 206 is larger. For this reason, if the performance lamp 206 is more noticeable than the variable icon h0 and the timing of the change of the performance lamp 206 is earlier, the player will first recognize the expectation of a jackpot suggested by the red color, and then see the manufacturer pattern of the variable icon h0, which will further increase the expectation of a jackpot. In addition, by not emitting light in the same or similar pattern as display mode D (manufacturer pattern), the rarity of the highly anticipated manufacturer pattern is improved, and the sense of expectation and exclusivity of the manufacturer pattern can be enhanced.

In FIG. 95(c), the display of the decorative pattern changes to a reach state, and in FIG. 95(d), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 disappear. That is, in FIG. 95(d), the variable icon h0 of display mode D (manufacturer pattern) becomes non-display, and the star-shaped performance lamp 206 also goes out in response to the non-display of this variable icon h0. Note that the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the display of the decorative pattern changes that was previously performed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c has moved to the lower right corner and is displayed in a reduced size. Meanwhile, the mini pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

95(e), it has developed into a super reach (swordmaster reach). The reach title LT2 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95(e). The reach title LT2 is displayed in black letters on a rainbow background display, and is written as "swordmaster reach". In other words, the same display mode as that used as the display mode of the reserved icon and the variable icon is also used for the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the expectation of a big win. In addition, the first performance movable body 7, which was arranged above the decorative pattern display device 208, has descended to a position in front of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and overlapping the display screen. Furthermore, the rectangular light-emitting portion 71 arranged on the first performance movable body 7 is lit in a light-emitting mode D (rainbow light-emitting mode) that represents rainbow colors. In other words, the light-emitting portion 71 of the first performance movable body 7 emits light in the same or similar light-emitting mode as the rainbow color of the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the expectation of a big win. Furthermore, the background display of the reach title LT2 may be a display mode that represents the display mode E (rainbow), which is the display mode of the reserved icon and the variable icon. In other words, the background display of the reach title LT2 is the same as or similar to the display mode E (rainbow), and even if the shape of the single-color display area is slightly different from the display mode E (rainbow) used as the display mode of the reserved icon and the variable icon, as long as the player can imagine the display mode E (rainbow), it will be a display mode similar to the display mode E (rainbow) (the same applies to the reach title LT3 in Figure 97 (j) described later).

As shown in FIG. 100(a), the background color of this reach title LT2 can be selected from "white", "red", "manufacturer pattern", and "rainbow", with the expected probability of a jackpot for "white" being "20%", for "red" being "35%, for "manufacturer pattern" being "75%, and for "rainbow" being "100%". In other words, unlike the "jii reach" mentioned above, the type of background color of the reach title LT2 indicates the expected probability of a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), the light color of the light-emitting unit 71 can be selected from "white", "red" and "rainbow". The expected probability of a jackpot for "white" is "20%, "for red" is "45%, and "for rainbow" is "100%". In other words, unlike the types of background colors of the reach title LT2, the types of light-emitting colors of the light-emitting unit 71 are not set to "manufacturer patterns". Note that the background color of the reach title LT2 and the light-emitting color of the light-emitting unit 71 may be related to each other (the same color). However, even in this case, the "manufacturer pattern" is not set as the light-emitting color of the light-emitting unit 71, and the light-emitting unit 71 will emit light in another color (for example, "gold light" or "flashing red" is set instead of "manufacturer pattern").

In the state shown in Figure 95 (e), the descending first performance movable body 7 does not overlap the background display in the reach title LT2, but if the first performance movable body 7 could descend to a position where it overlaps with the background display, when the display mode of the background display is the manufacturer pattern, it will only descend to a position where it does not overlap with the background display. Furthermore, the performance movable body is configured not to overlap not only the background display, but also the pending icon and variable icon of the manufacturer pattern.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be the manufacturer's pattern, but the light-emitting unit 71 in the first performance movable body 7 may not be able to light up in a light-emitting mode that represents the manufacturer's pattern, and may also not be able to light up in a light-emitting mode that represents rainbow colors. In such a case, the light-emitting unit 71 may remain off, or may light up in a light-emitting mode that represents red.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95(f), the display of an animation of a duel scene between the main character, a lord, and the opposing swordsman is started. This animation continues until FIG. 95(i). In FIG. 95(i), the main character, a lord, defeats the opposing swordsman, and the decorative pattern fluctuation display displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner shows the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4". Note that the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 remains off, but the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 and mini patterns are displayed. The mini patterns continue to display fluctuations for all patterns until the patterns are confirmed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95(j), the display returns from the reduced display at the bottom right to its original size, and decorative symbol combinations are displayed frozen in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Here, the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed frozen as a "circle", and the mini symbols are also displayed frozen in the combination "444". In FIG. 95(j), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

Figure 96 shows a step-by-step example of a zone presentation in which animation is displayed on the sub LCD display device.

Figure 96 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the performance lamp 206. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 96 (a) displays a frozen decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7". The performance lamp 206 shown in Figure 96 (a) is also in an off state. In addition, Figure 96 also shows the sub-LCD display device 207 located to the left of the first special pattern start hole (fixed) 230. The sub-LCD display device 207 shown in Figure 96 (a) is in a state where nothing is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 96(a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and both of these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 96(b), the display of the pattern change of the special pattern 1 has started. That is, the pattern change in the first special pattern display device 212 has started, and the display of the pattern change of the fourth pattern and the mini pattern has also started, and the movement of the reserved icon has also ended. The reserved icon has shifted one to the right, and the reserved icon h11, which was the first reserved icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280 in the default display mode without changing the display mode in this example. Also, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96(b), the display of the decorative pattern change has started in each of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c, but the zone title ZT representing the title of the zone performance is displayed so as to overlap the display of the decorative pattern change, making the display of the decorative pattern change difficult to see. The display of the zone title ZT is written as "Training Zone" in red letters on a plain blue oval background. In this zone title ZT, "Training Zone" is written in the same or similar color as the red color that indicates the expectation of a jackpot with the reserved icon or decoration. However, this red color does not indicate the expectation of a jackpot. In other words, when this zone title ZT is displayed, "Training Zone" is always written in red characters, and "Training Zone" is never written in any other color. Note that neither the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 92(j) nor the character color of this zone title ZT indicates the expectation of a jackpot, but the character color may indicate the expectation of a jackpot. On the other hand, the manufacturer pattern only indicates the expectation of a jackpot, and there is no case where it does not indicate the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, the manufacturer pattern is not used in the display of various settings (for example, tone from the speaker 120, game mode, etc.) that the player can change on the gaming machine, the display of the number of games played, the display of the number of consecutive jackpots, etc. Whenever a maker pattern is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot is always indicated, and a jackpot can be expected with a fairly high probability. If a maker pattern with a high expectation is used when the expectation of a jackpot is not indicated, the player will mistakenly believe that the expectation of a jackpot is high and will have excessive expectations. However, by not using a maker pattern with a high expectation when the expectation of a jackpot is not indicated, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and to reduce excessive excitement over expectations.

In FIG. 96(b), where the zone title ZT described above is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub LCD display device 207 starts displaying an animation of the zone performance, and an animation of the main character, a lord wearing a red kimono, training in swordsmanship is displayed. The color of the lord's kimono can be selected from "white", "green", "red" and "rainbow" as shown in FIG. 100(c), and the expected jackpot probability of "white" is "20%, "the expected jackpot probability of "green" is "30%, "the expected jackpot probability of "red" is "45%, "the expected jackpot probability of "rainbow" is "100%". Note that it is not displayed in the "maker pattern". This animation continues to FIG. 96(i). Note that the number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. 96(b) changes from 2 to 1, and the "-" display starts flashing in the fourth pattern of special pattern 1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96(c), the background display is switched to the background display of the wilderness, which is the background display of the training zone. This background display of the wilderness also continues to FIG. 96(i). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96(c), the variable display of the decorative pattern performed in each of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c is visible. In addition, in FIG. 96(c), one ball enters the first special pattern start hole (fixed) 230, and the reserved icon of the special pattern 1 is increased. This increased reserved icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) at the display position of the second reserved icon, and functions as a pre-reading notice. In accordance with the timing of the start of display of the reserved icon h12 in green (display mode B), a performance sound (appearance sound) represented by a 16th note is output from the speaker 120. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not light up in response to an increase in the reserved number represented by the green reserved number icon h12 (fifth display mode), and the effect lamp 206 remains off. Note that the number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has increased by one to 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96(d), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed as a frozen combination. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "358". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 remains off.

In Figure 96 (e), the display of the pattern change of special chart 1 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display starts flashing on the fourth pattern of special chart 1. The green reserved icon (display mode B) has moved one position and is displayed in the display position of the first reserved icon (reserved icon h11). Also, the star-shaped performance lamp 206 remains off.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96(f), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is displayed as a frozen combination. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as a frozen "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "814". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 remains off.

In FIG. 96 (g), the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon is consumed, and the display of the pattern change of the special pattern 1 has begun. That is, the decorative pattern is displayed in a changing manner, and the green (display mode B) hold icon is displayed as a green (display mode B) change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The star-shaped performance lamp 206, which was in an off state, begins to emit light in the light emission mode B (green light emission mode) representing green (display mode B) in response to the start of the pattern change display by the first special pattern display device 212 based on the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon that had been displayed until then. That is, the performance lamp 206 begins to emit light in a light emission mode of the same or similar color as the green of the change icon h0. In this example, the performance lamp 206 does not begin to emit light until the change that is the subject of the notice begins. The timing when the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 starts to be displayed and the timing when the star-shaped performance lamp 206 starts to emit light due to the light emission mode B may be simultaneous, or the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the performance lamp 206 may be earlier. In addition, the number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and the "-" display starts flashing in the fourth pattern of special chart 1.

96(h), the decorative pattern display goes into a reach state, but in this example, it does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96(i) displays the missing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" frozen. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is frozen as an "x", and the mini pattern is also frozen as a combination of "434". In addition, the green (fifth display mode) variable icon h0 is hidden in response to the end of the pattern variable display by the first special pattern display device 212. The timing of the end of the pattern variable display and the timing of the variable icon h0 being hidden may be simultaneous, the pattern variable display may be earlier, or the variable icon h0 may be earlier. In addition, the performance lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0.

The effects executed by the sub-LCD display device 207 (second display means) are not limited to the display of the animation of the above-mentioned zone effect, and various effects may be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the pseudo-successive notice is changed again, a lord may be displayed on the sub-LCD display device 207, and the color of the lord's kimono may be used to indicate the expectation of a jackpot. Even in this case, the "maker pattern" is not displayed. In other words, the sub-LCD display device 207 is configured not to display the "maker pattern" under any circumstances. In this way, by not displaying the "maker pattern" on the sub-LCD display device 207, the rarity of the manufacturer pattern with high expectation is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the manufacturer pattern can be enhanced. Note that the "pseudo-successive notice" means a notice in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then changed again during the change display of the special pattern corresponding to one big win lottery, and is a notice in which the change display and temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may be performed multiple times.

Figure 97 shows an example of a step-by-step presentation in which the display mode of the hold icon and the illumination mode of the star-shaped presentation lamp 206 are related, and a super reach is then performed.

Figure 97 also shows a decorative pattern display device 208 and a performance lamp 206. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 97 (a) displays a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4 - decoration 1 - decoration 7" in a stopped state.

In addition, in FIG. 97(a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and both of these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 97(a) is lit in the default illumination state (white illumination state), which is the illumination state that represents the display state of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In FIG. 97(b), the display of the pattern change of special pattern 1 has begun. That is, the pattern change has begun in the first special pattern display device 212, and the display of the change of the fourth pattern and mini pattern has also begun, the movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change of the decorative pattern has also begun. The number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has changed from 2 to 1, and the "-" display has begun to flash in the fourth pattern of special pattern 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one to the right, and reserved icon h11, which was previously the first reserved icon, is now displayed as variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280.

In FIG. 97(c), one ball enters the first special pattern start hole (fixed) 230, and the reserved icon of special pattern 1 is increased. This increased reserved icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second reserved icon h12, and functions as a pre-reading notice. In time with the start of display of the reserved icon h12 in red (display mode C), the speaker 120 outputs an eighth note sound effect (appearance sound). Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 92, in this example, the star-shaped performance lamp 206, which had been emitting light in the default light-emitting mode (white light-emitting mode), changes to light-emitting mode C (red light-emitting mode) that represents the display mode of the reserved icon h12, which represents the increased reserved icon. Note that the number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has increased by one to 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 97(d), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed as a frozen combination. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as a frozen "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "358". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C.

In FIG. 97(e), the display of the pattern change of the special pattern 1 is started again, and the decorative pattern is displayed changing. The value shown in the reserved number display area of the special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the display of "-" starts flashing in the fourth pattern of the special pattern 1. The reserved icon in red (display mode C) moves one and is displayed in the display position of the first reserved icon (reserved icon h11). When the reserved icon that was red (display mode C) is displayed in the display position of the first reserved icon, the display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the reserved icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (manufacturer pattern). In accordance with the timing of the change in the display mode of the reserved icon, a performance sound (changing sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the performance lamp 206 that was emitting light in the red light emission mode (light emission mode C) maintains its light emission mode, and the light emission mode does not change even if the display mode of the reserved icon changes. The performance lamp 206, which is more noticeable than the reserved icon, does not change its light emission mode, but on closer inspection, the reserved icon h11, which appears least frequently, is displayed in display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), and a player who discovers this may find the game significantly more interesting. In addition, in response to the reserved icon h11 changing to display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), the performance lamp 206 may also change to a light emission mode (e.g., light emission mode F (gold light emission mode)) different from the light emission mode representing display mode D (manufacturer's pattern).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 97(f), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen as the combination "814". The reserved icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C.

In FIG. 97(g), the reserved icon h11 in display mode D (maker pattern) is consumed, and the display of the pattern change of special pattern 1 is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 97(g), the display of the decorative pattern change is started, and the reserved icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. In this example, when the reserved icon h11 in display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when it changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to display mode E (rainbow), and the variable icon h0 is displayed in display mode E (rainbow). The variable icon h0 in display mode E (rainbow) functions as a normal notice of a confirmed jackpot. Even in accordance with the timing of the change in the display mode of the reserved icon here, a performance sound (changing sound) represented by a half note is output from the speaker 120. In addition, in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in display mode E (rainbow), the star-shaped performance lamp 206, which had been emitting light in light emission mode C until now, changes to light emission mode D (rainbow light emission mode) showing rainbow colors (display mode E). In other words, it starts emitting light in a light emission mode with a color that is the same as or similar to the rainbow color of the variable icon h0. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and the "-" display starts flashing in the fourth pattern of special chart 1.

In this example, the display mode changes from display mode D (manufacturer pattern) to display mode E (rainbow colors), but the display mode may not change from display mode D (manufacturer pattern) to display mode E (rainbow colors) (change rate is 0%), and may change to display mode E (rainbow colors) only from other display modes (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) other than display mode D (manufacturer pattern). Alternatively, the rate at which the display mode changes from the other display modes to display mode E (rainbow colors) may be higher than the rate at which the display mode changes from display mode D (manufacturer pattern) to display mode E (rainbow colors).

In FIG. 97(h), the decorative pattern variable display enters a reach state, and in FIG. 97(i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 disappear. In FIG. 97(i), the variable icon h0 in display mode E (rainbow color) becomes non-display, but the star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode). In this way, the performance lamp 206 may continue to emit light even if the variable icon h0 becomes non-display only when it is emitting light in light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode) that confirms a jackpot. Note that the performance lamp 206 may continue to emit light or turn off based on the result of the performance lottery, regardless of the light emission mode. Note that the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern changes that were previously displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and are displayed in a reduced size. Meanwhile, the mini pattern in the upper left corner continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 97(j), it has progressed to a super reach (tono reach). The star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light-emitting mode D (rainbow). The reach title LT3 is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 97(j). The reach title LT3 is displayed in black letters on a rainbow background as "tono reach". The background color of this reach title LT3 can be selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow" as shown in FIG. 100(a), and the expectation of a big win for "white" is "20%," the expectation of a big win for "red" is "35%," the expectation of a big win for "maker pattern" is "75%," and the expectation of a big win for "rainbow" is "100%". In other words, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the expectation of a big win is suggested by the type of background color of the reach title LT3. In addition, the illumination mode D (rainbow illumination mode) of the performance lamp 206 is the same as or similar to the display mode of the background display in reach title LT3.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 97 (k) displays an animation of the Lord's character, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following Figure 97 (l) displays a Lord's character looking proud. Also, the decorative pattern variation display displayed in reduced size in the lower right corner displays the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4". Note that the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1 remain off, but the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 and mini patterns are displayed. The variable display of the mini patterns continues for all patterns until the pattern is confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97(m), the reduced display at the bottom right returns to the original size, and decorative symbol combinations are displayed frozen in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Here, the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed frozen as a "circle", and the mini symbols are also displayed frozen in the combination "444". In FIG. 97(m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the performance lamp 206, which continued to emit light in light emission mode D (rainbow colors) even after the start of the Super Reach (Tono Reach), continues to emit light in light emission mode D (rainbow colors) during the Super Reach, and continues to emit light even after the decorative pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state, and continues to emit light in light emission mode D (rainbow colors) until the subsequent jackpot game start performance begins. Note that the performance lamp 206 may be turned off when the pattern change display by the first special pattern display device 212 ends.

Figure 98 is a diagram showing in stages an example of a presentation in which the display mode of the pending icon and the display mode of the decorative body provided on the second presentation movable body 8 are related.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is also shown in Figure 98. Also, in Figure 98, the star-shaped performance lamp 206 is omitted from the illustration, and instead, the second performance movable body 8 arranged to the right of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown. As explained above, the performance lamp may emit light by changing the light emission mode in accordance with the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon. Alternatively, in this example, the performance lamp 206 may remain off or in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode).

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98(a) displays a combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" frozen. Also, in FIG. 98(a), one reserved icon h11 of special chart 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1, and this reserved icon h11 of special chart 1 is displayed in the default display mode.

The second performance movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98(a) is located in the initial position. The second performance movable body 8 located in the initial position is in a position that does not overlap the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front and avoids the display screen, and both the upper arm portion 81 and the forearm portion 82 are facing downward.

In FIG. 98(b), the display of the pattern change of special pattern 1 has started. That is, the pattern change has started in the first special pattern display device 212, and the display of the change of the fourth pattern and mini pattern has also started, the movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change of the decorative pattern has also started. The number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the display of "-" has started to flash in the fourth pattern of special pattern 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one to the right, and the reserved icon h11, which had previously been in the display position of the first reserved icon, is now displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The reserved icon h11, which was in the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even after changing to the variable icon h0.

The second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 98 (b) remains in its initial position.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 where the display of the decorative pattern change has started, a button effect starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98(c), an operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed to encourage the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 showing the remaining time of the valid period are displayed to the right of the Lord's character image. Although the display of the decorative pattern change is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special pattern is changing by the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, etc. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 98(d), the effective period is decreasing, and in FIG. 98(e), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, the success or failure result of the button effect is notified. In this example, if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is ranked up, it is successful, and the variable icon h0 that has changed from the default display mode to display mode C (red) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280 shown in FIG. 98(f). In other words, the button effect is successful, and the normal notice has started. In accordance with the timing of the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, the speaker 120 outputs an effect sound (changing sound) represented by an eighth note. In addition, the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may also emit light in a red light emission mode. In addition, if the button effect fails, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change even if the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period. In addition to the above, if the button is successful, a warning will be given that you will enter a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 98(f), even if the result of the button performance is notified, the second performance movable body 8 remains in the initial position, but as shown in FIG. 98(g), when the decorative pattern variable display enters a reach state, the second performance movable body 8 starts to operate. That is, the upper arm 81 starts to rotate upward and the forearm 82 also starts to rotate upward. As a result, the second performance movable body 8 starts to overlap a part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front side. In the following FIG. 98(h), the background image is switched from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special pattern 1 are disappeared. As a result, the variable icon h0 of the display mode C (red) is also hidden. The upper arm 81 of the second performance movable body 8 rotates further upward, and the forearm 82 is raised up. In addition, the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern changes that were previously displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and are displayed in a reduced size. Meanwhile, the mini pattern in the upper left corner continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 98(i), it has progressed to a super reach (tono reach). The reach title LT4 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98(i). The display of the reach title LT4 here is written as "tono reach" in black letters on a red background display. Also, in the second performance movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98(i), the forearm 82 vibrates while being raised high, and the second finger (index finger) 822 is stretched, and the decoration C (red) is visible. This decoration C is a display mode that represents red, and is the same or similar to the display mode C (red) that was the display mode of the variable icon h0 that changed in the button performance. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also suggests the expectation of a jackpot. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decoration of the second performance movable body 8 are the same or similar display modes, but may be different display modes.

The background display of the reach title LT4 may also be a display mode that represents the color red. In other words, the background display of the reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to display mode C (red), and even if the color is slightly different from display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the pending icon or variable icon, for example, as long as the player can imagine display mode C (red), it will be a display mode similar to display mode C (red).

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98(j) displays an animation of the lord's character, and the second performance movable body 8, which has the second finger (index finger) 822 extended with the forearm 82 raised high, begins to return to its initial position. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98(k) displays a proud-looking lord's character, and the second performance movable body 8 has returned to its initial position. In addition, the decorative pattern change display displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner displays the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". Note that the display of the change icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special pattern 1 remain off, but the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 and mini patterns are displayed. The mini patterns continue to display the changes for all patterns until the patterns are confirmed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98(l), the reduced display at the bottom right returns to the original size, and decorative pattern combinations are displayed frozen in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c. Here, the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as a "circle", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen in the combination "444". In FIG. 98(l), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

Figure 99 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a performance similar to the performance in which the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 98 operates, and the explanation focuses on the differences from the example of the performance shown in Figure 98.

Figures 99(a) to 99(e) are the same as Figures 98(a) to 98(e), and button effects are being executed.

In Figure 99 (f), the button effect is also successful, and the variable icon h0 that has changed from the default display mode to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in time with the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, a performance sound (changing sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120. Note that the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 does not emit light in the light emission mode representing the manufacturer pattern, but may emit light in a red light emission mode.

In the next FIG. 99(g), as in FIG. 98(g), the decorative pattern is in a reach state in the variable display, and the second performance movable body 8 starts to operate. For example, when the variable icon h0 is displayed in display mode B (green), the second performance movable body 8 may not operate and may remain stationary at the initial position. That is, when the display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed, the second performance movable body 8 may be more likely to operate than when the display mode B (green) is displayed. Also, when the display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed, the second performance movable body 8 may be more likely to operate than when the display mode C (red) shown in FIG. 98(g) is displayed. In other words, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that the second performance movable body 8 is to operate. When the display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed, the second performance movable body 8 may always operate.

In Figure 99(h), like Figure 98(h), the background image has been switched from the default background image to hidden, and in this example, the variable icon h0 of display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is also hidden. Also, like Figure 98(h), the forearm 82 of the second performance movable body 8 is raised significantly.

In FIG. 99(i), the game progresses to a super reach (tono reach), and the reach title LT5 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The reach title LT5 is displayed in black letters on the background display of the maker pattern, and is written as "tono reach". In addition, the second performance movable body 8 shown in FIG. 99(j) is the same as the second performance movable body 8 shown in FIG. 98(j), in that the forearm 82 is raised high and vibrates, and the second finger (index finger) 822 is stretched out. As a result, the decoration C is visible, but the decoration C is a display mode that shows red, and is a decoration in a different mode from the display mode D (maker pattern) that was the display mode of the variable icon h0 that changed in the button performance. In other words, in terms of the expectation of a jackpot, it is a decoration one step lower. In addition, the first finger (thumb) 821 may be stretched out, and the decoration D (see FIG. 94(e)) with an expectation of a jackpot of 70% may be visible. However, even in this case, it is lower than the expected jackpot rate (75%) suggested by display mode D (maker pattern). The player can see the variable icon h0 of display mode D (maker pattern), which appears the least frequently, and furthermore, the player can see the maker pattern in the display mode of the background display in reach title LT5, so he or she is feeling quite excited, and the decoration of the second performance movable body 8 may calm the player's feelings a little.

The background display of the reach title LT5 may be a display mode that represents display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is the display mode of the reserved icon and variable icon. In other words, the background display of the reach title LT5 is the same as or similar to the manufacturer pattern, and even if the shape of the polka dots is slightly different from the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is the display mode of the reserved icon and variable icon, as long as the player can imagine display mode D (manufacturer pattern), it will be a display mode similar to display mode D (manufacturer pattern).

The following Figures 99(i) to 99(l) are the same as Figures 98(i) to 98(l), and the winning decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" is displayed, resulting in a jackpot.

Figure 100 (a) shows a reach title background color determination table stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the reach title background color determination table shown in FIG. 100(a) in the performance control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 90(a). At this time, as described above, the background color of the reach title LT1 of the "Jii Reach" is always green, and this background color does not indicate the expected degree of a jackpot. On the other hand, the background color of the reach title LT2 of the "Kengou Reach" and the background color of the reach title LT3 (LT4) of the "Lord Reach" indicate the expected degree of a jackpot, and the CPU 504 determines the background color based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400. The background color of the reach title LT2 of the "Kengou Reach" and the reach title LT3 of the "Lord Reach" includes a manufacturer pattern. Note that the same relationship between the background color and the expected degree of a jackpot is used for both reach titles LT2 and LT3, but different colors may be used.

Figure 100 (b) shows the emission color determination table stored in ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

The CPU 0404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the light color of the light-emitting unit 71 in the first performance movable body 7 using the light color determination table shown in FIG. 100(b) in the performance control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 89(a). The light color of the light-emitting unit 71 indicates the expectation of a jackpot, and the CPU 404 determines the light color based on the command received from the main control unit 300. White, red, and rainbow light colors are available, and no manufacturer pattern light colors are available. In addition, the expectation of a jackpot suggested by the red light color is different from the expectation of a jackpot suggested by the red background color of the reach title described above. Furthermore, the expectation of a jackpot suggested by the red display mode of the reserved icon and the variable icon described using FIG. 93 is also different.

Figure 100 (c) shows the Lord's kimono color determination table stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

This determination table is the table that determines the color of the lord's kimono displayed on the sub LCD display device 207 in the zone presentation described with reference to Figure 96. As with the background color determination described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the color of the lord's kimono based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the presentation control process (step S409) shown in Figure 90 (a). At this time, the determination table shown in Figure 100 (c) is used. As described above, manufacturer patterns are not displayed on the sub LCD display device 207, so manufacturer patterns are not prepared for the color of the lord's kimono. The color of the lord's kimono also indicates the likelihood of a jackpot.

In the above explanation, the sound effects such as the appearance sound of the reserved icon or the variable icon and the change sound of the display mode are output from the speaker 120, and the shortest sound effect of a sixteenth note is output in response to the display mode B (green) (Fig. 96 (c)), a short sound effect of an eighth note is output in response to the display mode C (red) (Fig. 92 (c), Fig. 97 (c), Fig. 98 (f)), a long sound effect of a quarter note is output in response to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) (Fig. 95 (b), Fig. 97 (e), Fig. 99 (f)), and the longest sound effect of a half note is output in response to the display mode E (rainbow) (Fig. 97 (g)). In other words, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the longer the sound effect is output. Although the sound effects were different for each display mode, the sound effects may be different for display modes with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot (display modes D and E higher than 50%) and display modes with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot (display modes B and C below 50%). That is, a special sound effect may be output only when the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high. Furthermore, a specific sound effect different from that for other display modes may be output only for the appearance sound of the reserved icon or variable icon in display mode D (manufacturer pattern) or the change sound to display mode D (manufacturer pattern). The specific sound effect here may be a sound effect related to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) or a sound effect representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern). For example, if the manufacturer pattern is an animal pattern, the sound of the animal in the animal pattern may be output as the specific sound effect.

In the above explanation, the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 92(j) and the character color of the zone title ZT shown in FIG. 96(b) do not indicate the expectation of a jackpot. Conversely, the background display of the reach title LT2 shown in FIG. 95(e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in FIG. 97(j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. 98(i), and the background display of the reach title LT5 shown in FIG. 99(i) indicate the expectation of a jackpot. However, the display mode of the title characters may indicate the expectation of a jackpot, in which case the title characters will be displayed in different display modes depending on the expectation of a jackpot. Conversely, the background display of the title may not indicate the expectation of a jackpot, in which case the title background display will always be displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the title characters and background display, the display mode of the characters, background display, and frame display of the cut-in preview, or the display mode of the characters, background display, and speech bubble display of the dialogue preview, may suggest the likelihood of a jackpot by the display mode (color and pattern) of the pending icon and variable icon. For example, in these previews, the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) appears. On the other hand, the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) does not appear during the demo performance.

During jackpot play, the light emitting means (performance lamp 206, light emitting portion 71 of first performance movable body 7, game board lamp 442 such as light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in attacca unit 23, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, game table frame lamp 452 such as button lamp 138, etc.) may emit light in a rainbow light emitting pattern. For this reason, unless the pattern fluctuation display is in progress, the rainbow light emitting pattern (light emitting pattern D) may not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Even during jackpot play, the light emitting means will not emit light in a light emitting pattern that represents the manufacturer pattern (display pattern D).

The frequency of appearance of the manufacturer pattern may be higher in the second game state (e.g., special pattern high probability state) than in the first game state (e.g., special pattern low probability state). The frequency of appearance of the manufacturer pattern may be a specification that cannot be changed by the player's setting operation, but if it can be changed in the custom mode, the frequency of appearance of the manufacturer pattern may be higher in the second mode (e.g., custom mode) than in the first mode (e.g., non-custom mode (normal mode)).

Also, as in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when hitting the right hand in a state where the special chart probability is low, it takes a long time for the result of the variable display of special chart 2 to be displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player, so the manufacturer pattern may not appear, but in a state where the special chart probability is high and a small win rush can be expected, the manufacturer pattern may appear. Alternatively, in a one-type two-type mixed machine in which a V is won via a small win, the manufacturer pattern may not appear in the variable performance when a small win is won in the normal play state, but may appear in the variable performance when a small win is won in the time-saving play state.

Although the manufacturer's pattern appears least frequently, its frequency of appearance may be set to the same as that of the rainbow colors. Alternatively, the manufacturer's pattern may appear less frequently than the red color but more frequently than the rainbow colors. As mentioned above, this frequency of appearance may be changeable by the player's settings.

In addition, what was previously displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed on the sub LCD display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub LCD display device 207 instead of the decorative pattern display device 208.

As a display means in place of the sub-LCD display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 may be installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. This light guide plate is an optical member that emits light incident from the side toward the front, and can switch the light emission mode depending on the color of the incident light. It is also possible to display patterns and designs when emitting light toward the front. Note that even when a light guide plate is used instead of the sub-LCD display device 207, the manufacturer's design is not displayed.

In addition, in the explanations of Figures 92 to 99, the colors white, green, red, gold, and rainbow, which may (but may not) represent the likelihood of a jackpot, manufacturer patterns, which always represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and blue, which never represents the likelihood of a jackpot, are used, but other colors and patterns may also be used.

In addition, when changing the display mode of the pending icon or the variable icon, it may be possible to change from the default display mode to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) but not to the default display mode to display mode E (rainbow). In this case, display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed only from display mode C (red) or may be changed from display mode C (red) and display mode B (green). Conversely, it may be possible to change from the default display mode to display mode E (rainbow), but not to the default display mode to display mode D (manufacturer pattern). In this case, display mode E (rainbow) may be changed only from display mode C (red) or may be changed from display mode C (red) and display mode B (green). In addition, display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed from display mode C (red) and display mode B (green) in addition to the default display mode.

As described above, various effects using colors have been explained, but the predetermined colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (the predetermined colors displayed in the background display of the reach title, the reserved icon, the variable icon, and the zone title), the predetermined colors emitted by the light-emitting means (the performance lamp 206, the light-emitting portion 71 of the first performance movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacca unit 23, the game table frame lamps 452 such as the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, and the button lamp 138), the predetermined color displayed on the sub LCD display device 207 (the lord's kimono), and the predetermined color of the decoration of the decorative body provided on the second performance movable body 8 are different in display media and effects, so strictly speaking, the color shades will be different in each display.

However, even if the hues are slightly different, if the player can imagine that they are a "prescribed color" (for example, red), then it can be said that the "prescribed colors" displayed on each display represent the same "prescribed color," and they can also be said to be the same or similar "prescribed colors."

Figure 101 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the front side (player side).

This slot machine 1000 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of patterns arranged on their outer periphery (not shown in FIG. 101) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotated by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in an appropriate number, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each of the reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed vertically in roughly three rows through a symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display means. In addition, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown in FIG. 101) is provided on the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the winning lines 1014 that are valid. The winning lines that are valid are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid. When two medals are bet, three lines are valid, which are the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line. When three medals are bet, five lines are valid, which are the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line. Note that the number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the five winning lines, which are the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the lower right winning line, and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals, two medals are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 1021 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal insertion slot 1034; the term "inserting" includes both. The number of medals stored display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The number of medals paid out display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 1035 is called the start operation of the game. In this slot machine 1000, an internal lottery process is executed based on the operation of the start lever 1035, which determines which of multiple types of roles has been won, and it is determined whether the slot machine 1000 is in a relatively advantageous or relatively unfavorable state for the player.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each of the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 will be referred to as a stop operation, with the first stop operation being the first stop operation, the next stop operation being the second stop operation, and the last stop operation being the third stop operation. Note that light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies can be lit up to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is an outlet for paying out medals.

In addition, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, an operation key unit 1090, which is the same as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, is provided between the MAX BET button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Furthermore, next to the operation key unit 1090, there is provided an effect button 1091, which is the same as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81, and this effect button 1091 also lights up with a button lamp (not shown).

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker installed inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right sides of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps to liven up the game. A performance device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. This performance device 1080 is equipped with a door (shutter) member 1063 consisting of two right doors 1063a and left doors 1063b that can be opened and closed horizontally, a liquid crystal display device 1057 arranged on the back side of this door member 1063, and a performance movable body 1058 that is the same as the second performance movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81. When the two right doors 1063a and left doors 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (player side), and the performance movable body 1058 also appears on the right side. The right door 1063a and the left door 1063b are provided with light-emitting diodes (not shown) that can emit light in full color. The performance movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 101 also has a decorative body described using FIG. 94. It should be noted that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured to display various presentation images and various game information, such as a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may also be a square flat surface. It is also possible to provide decorations (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may be curved.

In addition, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101, a sub LCD display device may be provided in addition to the LCD display device 1057.

Display modes A to E are used on the liquid crystal display 1057 and/or the sub liquid crystal display to display the title text, the title background, the preview background, the preview frame, the preview text, and the like. That is, the manufacturer pattern display of display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each display of display mode A to display mode E is a suggestive image that indicates the expectation of transitioning to the AT state and the expectation of winning a bonus. Also, the side lamp 1044, the unillustrated light-emitting diodes arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, and the unillustrated button lamp that illuminates the performance button 1091 can emit light in the light-emitting modes A to E, but do not emit light in the light-emitting modes that represent the manufacturer patterns.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type pachinko machine. In an enclosed type pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (e.g., game balls) are circulated inside the game table. In other words, the game media fired from the firing means into the game area can be discharged from the game area and supplied to the firing means again. Also, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, loaned balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area on the front side of the game table, and the ball storage tray 126 shown in FIG. 81 is not provided. In this enclosed type pachinko machine, balls are sealed in and the enclosed balls are circulated inside the pachinko machine for use, and the enclosed balls may be used as fired balls and the balls may be paid out by credit.

According to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means [e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208],
The display means is capable of displaying an icon image (e.g., a hold icon, a variable icon) using a first display mode (e.g., a white display mode),
the display means is capable of displaying the icon image using a second display mode (e.g., a green display mode or a red display mode);
the display means is capable of displaying the icon image using a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a manufacturer's pattern],
The display means is capable of displaying an image (hereinafter referred to as a "first title image") related to a first performance (e.g., a swordsman reach or a lord reach) (e.g., a reach title LT2 to LT5),
The display means is capable of displaying an image (hereinafter referred to as a "second title image") related to a second performance (e.g., a reach title LT1 or a zone title ZT),
the first title image is an image suggesting the expectation that a player will have an advantage due to a display mode used as a display mode of the first title image,
the second title image is an image that does not suggest the degree of expectation by a display mode used as a display mode of the second title image,
The display means is capable of displaying the first title image [for example, a reach title in a display mode identical or similar to the red display mode] using the second display mode [for example, FIG. 100(a)],
The display means is capable of displaying the first title image [for example, a reach title in a display mode identical or similar to the display mode of a manufacturer pattern] using the third display mode [for example, FIG. 100(a)],
When the first title image is displayed using the third display mode [for example, an expectation rate of 75%], the expectation rate is higher than when the first title image is displayed using the second display mode [for example, an expectation rate of 35%],
The display means is capable of displaying the second title image using the second display mode (e.g., FIG. 92(j) or FIG. 96(b));
the display means does not display the second title image in the third display manner,
The icon image can be displayed before the first title image is displayed (for example, FIG. 95(a) to (c)), but the icon image is not displayed while the first title image is being displayed (for example, FIG. 95(e)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

Also,
" Equipped with light-emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light-emitting modes [for example, the performance lamp 206, the light-emitting portion 71 of the first performance movable body 7, a game board lamp 442 such as a light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacca unit 23, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, a game table frame lamp 452 such as a button lamp 138, etc.],
The light emitting means may emit light in a light emitting manner showing the second display mode (e.g., FIG. 93(b) and FIG. 93(c)), but may not emit light in a light emitting manner showing the third display mode (e.g., FIG. 93(d));
The third display mode [for example, the display mode of the manufacturer pattern] is a display mode that can identify the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to the above description,
"A display means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub LCD display device 207, an LCD display device 1057, etc.) capable of displaying suggestive images (e.g., a hold icon, a variable icon, a title text display, a title background display, a notice background display, a notice frame display, a notice text display, etc.) that suggest the degree of expectation that the player will gain an advantage (e.g., a jackpot expectation, a transition to an AT state, a bonus expectation, etc.),
A light-emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light-emitting modes (for example, the performance lamp 206 shown in FIG. 83, the light-emitting portion 71 of the first performance movable body 7, a game board lamp 442 (see FIG. 84) such as a light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the attacca unit 23, a game table frame lamp 452 (see FIG. 84) such as the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, and the button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 83, a side lamp 1044, a light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, and a button lamp (not shown) that illuminates the performance button 1091, etc.) shown in FIG. 101,
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a first display mode (e.g., the white display mode shown in FIG. 93(a) and FIG. 100(a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 93(b), or the red display mode shown in FIG. 93(c) and FIG. 100(a)).
The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a second display mode (for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background as shown in FIG. 93(d) and FIG. 100(a));
the second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the expectation is higher (for example, 75%) than the first display mode,
the light-emitting means may emit light in a first light-emitting mode representing the first display mode (e.g., a white light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 93(a) and FIG. 100(b), a green light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 93(b), or a red light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 93(c) and FIG. 100(b), etc.);
the light-emitting means does not emit light in a second light-emitting mode representing the second display mode (e.g., a light-emitting mode of green and yellow polka dots on a white background);
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 81 and a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 101)."
He explained:

This gaming machine may increase the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high expectation, and may increase the sense of expectation and exclusivity of the second display mode.

The expectation level may be the expectation of a big win.

The light emitting means may be a panel lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light emitting body provided on a component such as a movable means.

The first light-emitting mode may be somewhat different from the first display mode as long as it is generally recognized to have a relationship with the first display mode. Furthermore, the light-emitting means does not emit light in a light-emitting mode that is generally recognized to have a relationship with the second display mode.

The display means may be capable of displaying the suggestion image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher than the fourth display mode. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, i.e., a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is lower than the first display mode, a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 0%, or a display mode that does not suggest the expectation level.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a third display mode [for example, a rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIG. 93(e) and FIG. 100(a)],
the third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the expectation is higher (for example, 100%) than the second display mode,
The light-emitting means may emit light in a third light-emitting mode (e.g., a rainbow light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 93( e) or FIG. 100( b)) that represents the third display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first light-emitting mode is a light-emitting mode that is the same as or similar to the first display mode,
the second light-emitting mode is a light-emitting mode that is the same as or similar to the second display mode,
The third light-emitting mode is a light-emitting mode that is the same as or similar to the third display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The first light-emitting mode may be a light-emitting mode related to the first display mode, the second light-emitting mode may be a light-emitting mode related to the second display mode, and the third light-emitting mode may be a light-emitting mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the only difference between the first light-emitting mode and the first display mode is due to differences in media, such as the light-emitting means and the display means, then the first light-emitting mode can be said to be the same light-emitting mode as the first display mode, and the third light-emitting mode can be said to be the same light-emitting mode as the third display mode.

Also,
"The second display mode is a display mode using multiple colors [e.g., yellow and green],
The third display mode is also a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, the seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the expectation rate is 100%.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode that indicates that a jackpot has been confirmed.

Also,
The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine [for example, a manufacturer pattern or manufacturer color].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The second display mode may be a display mode that allows the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine to be recognized.

According to the above description,
"A display means capable of displaying suggestive images (e.g., a hold icon, a variable icon, a title text display, a title background display, a notice background display, a notice frame display, a notice text display, etc.) that suggest the degree of expectation that the player will gain an advantage (e.g., a jackpot expectation, a transition to an AT state, a bonus expectation, etc.), and
A movable means having a movable area on the player side of the display means (for example, the first performance movable body 7 and the second performance movable body 8 shown in FIG. 83, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b shown in FIG. 101, and the performance movable body 1058)
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a first display mode (for example, the white display mode shown in FIG. 93(a) and FIG. 100(a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 93(b), or the red display mode shown in FIG. 93(c) and FIG. 100(a));
The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a second display mode (for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background as shown in FIG. 93(d) and FIG. 100(a));
the second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the expectation is higher (for example, 75%) than the first display mode,
the movable means includes a first decoration according to a display mode representing the first display mode [for example, a white decoration shown in FIG. 94(a), a green decoration shown in FIG. 94(b), or a red decoration shown in FIG. 94(c)],
The movable means does not include a second decoration according to the display mode representing the second display mode [for example, a decoration of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background] [for example, see FIG. 94],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

This gaming machine increases the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high expectation, and may increase the sense of expectation and specialness of the second display mode. In addition, since the movable means, which has a movable area closer to the player than the display means, does not include the second decoration, it is possible to prevent the mistaken belief that the second display mode has appeared and reduce excessive excitement over the expectation.

The expectation level may be the expectation of a big win.

The moving means may also be a moving means for stage effects (props).

The first decoration may be somewhat different from the first display mode, as long as it is generally recognized to have a relationship with the first display mode. Furthermore, the movable means is not provided with a decoration that is generally recognized to have a relationship with the second display mode.

The decoration may be a part that is painted with a color or pattern. In other words, it may be a part that does not change color or pattern. Alternatively, it may be a part that displays a color or pattern (such as a liquid crystal display device or light-emitting diode), or it may be a part that can display a changeable color or pattern.

The display means may be capable of displaying the suggestion image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher than the fourth display mode. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, i.e., a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is lower than the first display mode, a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 0%, or a display mode that does not suggest the expectation level.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a third display mode [for example, a rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIG. 93(e) and FIG. 100(a)],
the third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the expectation is higher (for example, 100%) than the second display mode,
The movable means does not include a third decoration [e.g., rainbow decoration] according to a display mode showing the third display mode [e.g., see FIG. 94];
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The movable means may be provided with a first portion [e.g., a second finger (index finger) 822] on which a display in a display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means may be capable of taking a state in which the first portion is invisible to the player and a state in which the first portion is visible to the player, and the movable means may not be provided with a second portion on which a display in a display mode representing the second display mode is displayed. Also, the movable means may not be provided with a third portion on which a display in a display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 94).

Also,
"The first decoration is a decoration in a display manner identical or similar to the first display manner,
The second decoration is a decoration in a display manner that is the same as or similar to the second display manner,
The third decoration is a decoration in a display manner that is the same as or similar to the third display manner.
He also explained:

The first decoration may be a decoration in a display mode related to the first display mode, the second decoration may be a decoration in a display mode related to the second display mode, and the third decoration may be a decoration in a display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the only difference between the first decoration and the first display mode is due to differences in media, such as the movable means and the display means, the first decoration can be said to be the same display mode as the first display mode.

The second display mode may be a display mode using multiple colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using multiple colors.

Furthermore, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 100%.

Also,
"The movable means is more easily movable when the suggestive image in the second display mode is displayed on the display means [e.g., FIG. 99(g)] than when the suggestive image in the first display mode is displayed on the display means [e.g., FIG. 98(g)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine. "
He also explained:

The second display mode may be a display mode that allows the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine to be recognized.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, even if a constituent element is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, or various examples described above, that constituent element may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, or various examples. In other words, as long as there is no factor preventing the application, even if a constituent element included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, or various examples is applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, or various examples, it will still form a unified technical idea.

Next, using Figures 102 to 124, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 102 to 124 will, in principle, be used only in the explanation using Figures 102 to 124, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 102 to 124 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 102 to 124.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 102. Fig. 102 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine where the player can win a profit when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a door member that is equipped with a locking function and serves as the base body of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 on the inside. The staff of the store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 104S is provided to detect when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door member that is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely and has a frame shape, with an opening 116 on the inside. The front frame door 106 can also be opened and closed by the staff of the game arcade, and a front frame door sensor 106S is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 form a partitioned space in which the play area 124 is provided. In this embodiment, a lamp is also called a lamp when the light source is an LED.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing an opening lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. In addition, a ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The ball storage tray door 108 comprises an upper tray 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and having a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. The pachinko machine 100 includes a ball launch handle 134 that launches balls into the game area 124 of the board, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 104) when operated by the player, a chance button lamp 138 that is built into the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to light up, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade, a return operation button 142 that issues an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the status of the card unit. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102 also includes a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is full of game balls. It also includes an operation key unit 190.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104 and includes a launch rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launch rod 146. This launching device 110 launches the game ball toward the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is being continuously operated by the player, and corresponds to an example of a launching means.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front, and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. After the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104, the play area 124 can be observed through the opening 116. Note that the specific configuration of the play area 124 is omitted in Figure 102, and its specific configuration is shown in Figure 104.

Figure 103 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 102.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member and is equipped with a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown). The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a specified position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and by driving the payout motor to rotate it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of a gaming ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 105) when a gaming ball passes through, and outputs either a high or low signal when a gaming ball does not pass through. The payout sensor is configured so that gaming balls that pass through the payout sensor pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined award condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 awards (pays out) to the player an amount of gaming value (game balls) according to the award condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see Figure 105) that performs control processing for the overall game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see Figure 105) that performs control processing for the presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see Figure 105) that performs control processing for the presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, an error reset case 167 that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 105) that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and resets errors by operation of a game store clerk, and a The system is provided with a payout board case 172 housing a payout board 170 equipped with a switch 168, a launch board case 176 housing a launch board 174 constituting a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 105) that performs control processing related to the launch of game balls, a power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 constituting a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 105) that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices and equipped with a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off when operated by a gaming store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface unit 606 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which the machine can be set to one of a number of settings with different at least jackpot probabilities. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the machine may be configured so that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The role ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store staff. As shown in FIG. 111(A), the role ratio/setting display 196 is a modularized 7-segment LED board with two digits arranged above and below, and a 7-segment LED board with one digit on the right side. The role ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the role ratio (YH) and the continuous role ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The role ratio/setting display 196 is composed of a single-color LED of, for example, red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors, red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a part of the role ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visible to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the rear surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 104 is a simplified front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes called the front-to-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the near side sometimes called the front or front, and the far side sometimes called the back or rear. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-to-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the left hand sometimes called the left and the right hand sometimes called the right when viewed from the front. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes called the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher side sometimes called the top and the lower side sometimes called the bottom.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, a structure can be used in which the left side 200a of the game board 200 as seen from the front is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front (the hinge part 112 side), and the game board 200 is rotated around this as the rotation center while the right side 200b as seen from the front of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to set it in place. Such a structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the main body 201. If a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game so that the game cannot continue) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor, such as a magnetic sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 is defined in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

The area of the game board 200 other than the game area 124 may be called a non-game area. The game area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished from each other by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the launch strength of the game ball is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 may be called a flow-down area because the game ball flows down during play, and the non-game area may be called a non-flow-down area because the game ball does not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire game area 124 may be called a flow-down area, but an area through which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may be called a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area 124. Below the play area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol reserve lamp 216, a first special symbol reserve lamp 218, and a second special symbol reserve lamp 220 are disposed. Note that, hereinafter, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative patterns and various displays used for performance, and in this embodiment is configured with a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a performance display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display different decorative patterns, and the performance display area 208d displays an image used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are configured to display various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying general maps, and in this embodiment is configured with a 7-segment LED. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are configured with a 7-segment LED.

The regular symbol reserved lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved regular symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular symbol variable games. The first special symbol reserved lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. The second special symbol reserved lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games.

There are also a time-saving lamp TL, a right-hit indicator lamp RL, and a high-probability lamp HL. The time-saving lamp TL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, in which the normal map's variable display time is shortened and the wing member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chute), which will be described later, is likely to open for a long time. The right-hit indicator lamp RL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state, in which the player can benefit by hitting the right. The high-probability lamp HL is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high-probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or that it will become a high-probability state.

Around the periphery of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are arranged predetermined ball entrances, such as general winning openings 226a, 226b, a general symbol start opening 228, a first special symbol start opening 230, a second special symbol start opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234.

One or more general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on each of the left and right sides of the play area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the play area 124 is referred to as the general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the play area 124 is referred to as the general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning entry into the general winning opening 226a, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls) are discharged as prize balls to the upper tray 126. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning entry into the general winning opening 226b, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 1 ball) are discharged as prize balls to the upper tray 126. The balls discharged into the upper tray 126 can be freely removed by the player, and these configurations allow prize balls to be paid out to the player based on the winning. In this embodiment, the game balls that enter the general winning opening 226a and the game balls that enter the general winning opening 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. In addition, if multiple general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the play area 124, the ball paths that guide the game balls that have entered may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor, or each may be detected by a different ball detection sensor. In addition, if multiple general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the play area 124, the ball paths that guide the game balls that have entered may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor, or each may be detected by a different ball detection sensor. Note that the balls that enter the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the play island side.

The normal map start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or through chucker, which is used to determine whether or not the ball has passed through a specified area of the play area 124, and in this embodiment, one is provided on the right side of the play board 200. Unlike balls that enter the general winning port 226, balls that pass through the normal map start port 228 are not discharged to the play island side. When a specified ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable play using the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special chart start hole 230 is arranged at the bottom center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special chart start hole 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (for example, three balls) as prize balls into the upper tray 126, and a special chart variable game is started by the first special chart display device 212. The ball that entered the first special chart start hole 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special chart start hole 230, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first special chart start hole 230 when hitting from the right. In this embodiment, the specification is such that the variable display of special chart 2 is started in priority to special chart 1 (a pachinko machine with such a specification may be called a "special chart 2 priority variable machine").

The second special chart start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chute) and is located below the first special chart start port 230. It has a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible for a ball to enter the normal chart variable game. When a player wins the game and the normal chart display device 210 displays the winning pattern, the wing member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special chart start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (e.g., three balls) as prize balls into the upper tray 126, and the special chart variable game is started by the second special chart display device 214. The ball that enters the second special chart start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal starting hole 228 (due to the game pins not shown), it is difficult for a game ball to enter the normal starting hole 228 when hitting from the left. Therefore, as a rule, it is not possible to win the normal variable game during left hitting, and therefore the blade member 232a does not open or close as a rule. On the other hand, when hitting from the right, it is possible to expect a game ball to enter the normal starting hole 228, and therefore the blade member 232a may open or close when the game is won in the normal variable game. In other words, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning the second special starting hole 232 during left hitting, but there is a possibility of winning the second special starting hole 232 during right hitting.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacca, and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 is equipped with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed freely. When the door member 234a is closed, balls cannot enter the winning opening. When the player wins the special variable game and the special display device displays a big winning pattern, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (e.g., opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 times, 3 times, or 10 times). When a ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15 balls) are discharged as prize balls into the upper tray 126.

In this embodiment, the variable winning port 234 and the general winning port 226b are integrally formed with the ball entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V-shutter VS and a V-passing switch VC. The V-passing switch VC opens upward, allowing game balls to pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects game balls passing through. The V-shutter VS is disposed above the V-passing switch VC and moves forward and backward by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by the drive circuit 334. When the V-shutter VS is in an advanced state (corresponding to a closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V-passing switch VC, and when the V-shutter VS is in a retreated state (corresponding to an open state), the game ball can pass through the V-passing switch VC. A gaming ball that enters the variable winning opening 234 and passes through a ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided to the front, then rolls to the V shutter VS, and may pass through the V passing switch VC, or may not be able to pass through and be guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100. The V passing switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the V passing switch VC, it determines that a V winning has occurred.

In this embodiment, the V shutter VS remains closed (advanced) from the start of the jackpot game until a specific round (for example, the final round), and in the specific round the V shutter VS opens (moves backwards), making it possible to win a V prize. If a V prize can be won, the control state transitions to a special prize high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and if a V prize cannot be won, the control state remains in a special prize low probability state after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the transition to the special prize high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V pass switch VS.

In addition, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill and multiple play nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, an outlet 240 is provided to guide balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharge them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and shoots the balls through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 by the launch rod and launch hammer into the play area 124. Then, the balls that reach the top of the play area 124 flow downward while changing their direction of travel by the ball direction changing member 236 and the play nails, etc., and either win in the winning hole (general winning hole 226a, 226b, variable winning hole 234) or the starting hole (first special starting hole 230, second special starting hole 232), or reach the out hole 240 without winning in any winning hole or starting hole, or only passing through the normal starting hole 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104. The out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the out port 240 and game balls that have won in various winning ports) are received by this discharged ball receiving port and are configured to be discharged outside the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage.

In addition, performance device 2 is disposed at the top of play area 124, performance device 3 is disposed at the bottom, and performance device 4 is disposed on the left and right sides. In this embodiment, these performance devices 2 to 4 are supported by main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 105. This figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generating circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit has two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Additionally, the random number generating circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generating circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a bottom tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, such as the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214, and a display control circuit 325 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, such as the normal pattern display device 210. A drive circuit 326 for controlling the display, a drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status display units 328 (for example, the normal reserve lamp 216, the special reserve lamp 218, the special reserve lamp 220, the high probability lamp, etc.), and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special reserve opening 232 as a normal electric role, a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric role, and a drive means for driving the V shutter VS are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generating circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generating circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern start hole 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. The random number generation circuit 318 receives this signal and latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special pattern start hole 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the first special pattern start hole 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special pattern start hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special pattern start hole 232 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special pattern start hole 232.

In addition, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. When the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied, and when the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Also, the dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and number of times, and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. The ROM 406 may also be configured to be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game frame lamp 452, and controls the lighting between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450 via serial communication.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the performance devices 2-4, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the performance devices 2-4, etc., and a button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190, to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and number of times, and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 506 is connected to the basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. In this embodiment, a memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when the power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use a RAM whose stored information becomes volatile when the power is cut off.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and the like to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 106S that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. When the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open, these sensors detect this and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch hammer 148, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that indicates whether to allow or stop launch, and a control signal output by a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630, but power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device via another power supply path.

Next, using Figures 106 (a) to (d), the types of special and regular symbols that are displayed by the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained.

Special chart 1 variable play starts on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 start port 230, and special chart 2 variable play starts on the condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 start port 232. When special chart 1 variable play starts, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play) in which all seven segments are lit up and the central segment is lit up repeatedly. Also, when special chart 2 variable play starts, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play) in which all seven segments are lit up and the central segment is lit up repeatedly. Then, when the change time determined before the start of the change of special chart 1 has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 displays the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 in a stopped state, and when the change time determined before the start of the change of special chart 2 has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 displays the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2 in a stopped state. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the change display of the special chart. This change display of the special chart may be performed multiple times in succession.

Figure 106(a) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of special pattern 1. Three types of special patterns, "special pattern a" to "special pattern c", are shown in this figure. In Figure 106(a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that will be turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments that will be turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot patterns ("Special pattern a" and "Special pattern b") are prepared as the stopping pattern form of the special pattern 1. "Special pattern a" is a 3 round (R) special jackpot pattern that is expected to acquire a special jackpot, and "Special pattern b" is a 3R normal jackpot pattern with no chance of acquiring a special jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 in this embodiment, acquiring a special jackpot (transition to a special pattern high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V-pass switch VS. When the special pattern a is displayed as stopped on the first special pattern display device 212, and the game enters the 3rd round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, the V-shutter VS opens (retracts), allowing the game ball to pass through the V-pass switch VS. If the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS (if a V-winning is obtained), the control state transitions to the special chart high probability state after the big win game ends, and the transitioned special chart high probability state is maintained for 120 times of special chart pattern variation display after the big win game ends. In this embodiment, if the V-shutter VS opens, there is enough time to maintain the open state, and the probability of the game ball passing through the V-pass switch VS is high, so the "special chart a" can be said to be a big win that is expected to win a probability change (the same applies to the "special chart A" and "special chart B" described later). On the other hand, if the special chart b is stopped and displayed on the first special chart display device 212, the V-shutter VS will not open even if the game enters the third round, which is the final round of the big win game, and the game ball will not pass through the V-pass switch VS (no V-winning can be obtained), and the control state remains in the special chart low probability state after the big win game ends. In this way, a V win was necessary to transition to the special chart high probability state, but the transition to the normal chart high probability state begins on the condition that the jackpot game ends. In other words, if there is a jackpot, the state transitions to the normal chart high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and the normal chart high probability state is maintained until the special chart pattern change display is performed 120 times in the case of special chart a, or 50 times in the case of special chart b, after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of losing pattern ("Special pattern c") is prepared as the stopping pattern mode of Special pattern 1.

Figure 106(b) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of special chart 2. Four types of special charts, "Special Chart A" to "Special Chart D", are shown in this Figure 106(b), of which two types of special charts are jackpot patterns ("Special Chart A" and "Special Chart B"). "Special Chart A" is a 10R sure-win jackpot pattern that is expected to result in a sure-win, and "Special Chart B" is a 2R sure-win jackpot pattern that is expected to result in a sure-win. In other words, if special chart A wins a V in the 10th round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state will transition to a special chart high probability state or a normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for the 120 times the special chart pattern change display has been performed since the jackpot game ended. If special chart B wins a V in the second round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state will transition from special chart high probability state to normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained until the special chart pattern change display is performed 120 times after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of losing patterns ("Special Pattern C" and "Special Pattern D") are prepared as the stopping pattern mode of Special Pattern 2. "Special Pattern C" is a general losing pattern like "Special Pattern c", but "Special Pattern D" is a special pattern called a time-saving pattern, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decision of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special chart variable play is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the jackpot pattern to be stopped is decided by drawing a software random number. In addition, in the special chart 2 variable play for a specific period, the decision of whether or not the "sudden time-saving" has been won is made by drawing a hardware random number, and if the "sudden time-saving" has been won, the "time-saving pattern" is stopped and displayed on the second special chart display device 214. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, after the end of the jackpot play, the game transitions to a normal chart high probability state. The normal chart high probability state is called a time-saving play state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving play state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of a non-time-saving play state, for example by shortening the time from the end of a jackpot in the special chart variable play to the start of the next jackpot. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to normal figures, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to special figures or a state related to normal figures and special figures. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, the state is a time-saving game state and a normal figure high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, it is easier to win the normal figure variable game (normal figure probability change) than in the normal figure low probability state. For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal figure low probability state (non-time-saving game state), while it increases to 99/100 in the normal figure high probability state (time-saving game state). Also, the time-saving game state has a shorter fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game than the non-time-saving game state (normal figure short fluctuation). For example, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game, which is 10 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the opening time of the wing member 232a of the special chart 2 starting hole 232 is likely to be longer in one opening than in the non-time-saving game state (extension of the electric chute opening period). For example, the electric chute opening period of 0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state is extended to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, the wing member 232a is likely to open more than in the non-time-saving game state (increase in the number of electric chute openings). For example, the wing member 232a that opens only once in the non-time-saving game state for one winning entry into the normal chart starting hole 228 opens twice in the time-saving game state (open for 2 seconds, close for 1 second, and open again for 2 seconds). The extension of the electric chute opening period and the increase in the number of electric chute openings increase the probability of the ball entering the special chart 2 starting hole 232. The time-saving flag is set to off during a jackpot game. Therefore, the non-time-saving game state is maintained during a jackpot game. This is because, particularly during jackpot play, if game balls are picked up by an electric chute with a small number of winning balls, and the number of game balls entering the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, the player may suffer a disadvantage. Note that in this embodiment, the term "non-time-saving play state" is used to exclude jackpot play.

In this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the following are performed: normal chance, normal short, electric chute open period extension, and electric chute open count increase. However, if at least one of these is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the time-saving game state may be set. In this case, the one that is executed among the normal chance, normal short, electric chute open period extension, and electric chute open count increase may be changed in each time-saving game state of the a time-saving, b time-saving, and c time-saving described later. For example, in the a time-saving, normal chance, normal short, electric chute open period extension, and electric chute open count increase are all performed, but in the b time-saving and c time-saving, one or two of the normal chance, normal short, electric chute open period extension, and electric chute open count increase may be executed. Alternatively, if either one of the electric chute open period extension or electric chute open count increase, which increases the probability of the ball entering the special chute 2 starting hole 232, is performed, the time-saving game state may be set. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special chart 2 starting hole 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special chart 2 starting hole 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter and an easy-to-win state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter. The entrance of this special chart 2 starting hole 232 is in an easy-to-win state for a longer period of time in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. As described above, in this embodiment, when the "special chart a", "special chart A", and "special chart B" are stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (normal chart high probability state) is maintained until the special chart is displayed 120 times after the end of the jackpot game that is performed thereafter, and the state transitions to the non-time-saving game state (normal chart low probability state) at the 121st time. In addition, when the "special symbol b" is displayed, the time-saving game state (normal symbol high probability state) is maintained until the special symbol is displayed 50 times after the end of the jackpot game, and the non-time-saving game state (normal symbol low probability state) is entered at the 51st time. In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern of all the special symbols is set to switch to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, but a jackpot pattern (non-time-saving jackpot pattern) that does not switch to the time-saving game state may be provided, and if a jackpot is won with a non-time-saving jackpot pattern, the time-saving game state may not be switched to after the jackpot game ends, and the non-time-saving game state may remain. In addition to the jackpot pattern, a small jackpot pattern may be prepared, and in the small jackpot game, the door member 234a of the variable winning hole 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 234a maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In addition, when the door member 234a is opened for a small win, for example, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter during the first opening, or if a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the door will not open a second time or thereafter. During a small win, the game transitions to a special game low probability/normal game low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, the control state returns to the state before the small win game started.

Figure 106 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative patterns of this embodiment include 11 types, "decoration 1" to "decoration 11". On the condition that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting hole 230 or the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, that is, the first starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting hole 230, or the second starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, a "decorative pattern variable display" is performed in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each of the pattern display areas of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. In other words, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays decorative patterns in a variable manner, separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, the stop pattern pattern, which is a combination of decorative patterns, is displayed in a static state.

When an ordinary jackpot (a 3R ordinary jackpot of "Special Chart B") is to be notified, a combination of decorative patterns with three decorative patterns of the same number lined up (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2") is displayed statically in the pattern display areas 208a-208c. On the other hand, when an extremely likely jackpot (a 3R extremely likely jackpot of "Special Chart A", a 10R extremely likely jackpot of "Special Chart A", or a 2R extremely likely jackpot of "Special Chart B") is to be notified, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed statically in the pattern display areas 208a-208c. Also, when an unsuccessful pattern of "Special Chart C" or "Special Chart C" is to be notified, a combination of decorative patterns other than those described above (for example, scattered patterns) is displayed statically in the pattern display areas 208a-208c. Furthermore, when suddenly notifying the player that they have won the time-saving bonus, three "Decoration 11"s will be displayed in a row, rather than a combination of "Decoration 1" through "Decoration 10."

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" to the display of the stopped pattern mode of the decorative pattern may be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display. The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 106(d) shows an example of the stop pattern mode of the normal map. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes for the normal map: "Normal Map A" which is a winning pattern, and "Normal Map B" which is a losing pattern. Based on the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detecting that the ball has passed through the normal map start hole 228, the normal map display device 210 performs a "normal map variable display" (normal map variable play) in which all seven segments are lit and the central segment is lit repeatedly. Then, after the variable time has elapsed, one of the patterns "Normal Map A" which is a winning pattern and "Normal Map B" which is a losing pattern is stopped and displayed. In this Figure 106(d), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map change display" to the stop display of the regular map's stopping pattern state may be referred to as the regular map change display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 105 will be described with reference to Fig. 107. Note that Fig. 107 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 stores a special random number value, a special round determination random number value, a special electric support determination random number value, and a special pattern determination random number. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. The RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special numbers, the winning random number value of the special numbers, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the reserved number of special numbers may be referred to as the reserved number storage area of the special numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage area for special numbers that is divided into areas of the maximum number (four in this example) that can be reserved for the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), and also has a random number storage area for normal numbers. In the start information storage area for special numbers, as described below, multiple types of start information are stored as one set, and these start information is stored in each area in order of winning (order of reservation).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 107 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, an interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial value are set to WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value to WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors whether the low voltage signal is ON or not, that is, whether the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). Then, if the low voltage signal is ON (if the CPU 304 detects that the power supply has been cut off), the process returns to step S103, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply has been cut off), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a numerical value that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below is set in the timer circuit 312, a clear signal is output from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400), and settings are made to allow writing to the RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before the power was cut off (power failure) is to be restored, and if the state before the power failure is not to be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute the initialization process.

If it is not determined that the state before the power outage will be restored (step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the operation of the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 103 by a store employee or the like (step S113). In other words, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115), and if it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the role ratio/setting display 196 flashes with "1" indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor is showing "6", it returns to "1". In this embodiment, it is possible to select at least one of settings 1 to 6, which have different jackpot probabilities, and the setting is confirmed by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the role ratio/setting display 196, but it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by audio output, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, six settings are provided, from setting 1 to 6, but other than six settings are possible, or the settings may not be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was cut off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

In addition, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process in step S117.

In step S119, an initialization process is performed to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating a suspend, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (e.g., all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result is a specific value (e.g., 0) or not (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), an initialization process is performed to set the pachinko machine 100 to an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In this embodiment, even if initialization is performed, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained. Furthermore, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command described below, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S121, after the interrupt prohibition setting is performed, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. Also, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure are read out and reset to each register, and then interrupt permission is set. After that, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the stack pointer and registers after resetting, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was lost. That is, the process is resumed from the next command after the command (predetermined in step S121) executed immediately before the power failure and before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later). Also, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 103. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command indicates that the state has been restored to when the power was turned off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 108. Note that Fig. 108 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 105, including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, and are stored in a signal status storage area partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Taking the detection signals of the ball detection sensors as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times ago (about 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. In addition, the detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the current detection signal storage area described above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in each of the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and it is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which is repeatedly started at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is started several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, the above-mentioned step S205 checks the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. In other words, when the game ball starts to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal from the previous time, and there is a detection signal from the current time. In this embodiment, taking into consideration the erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after the absence of a detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 105 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal before last, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal before last, and there is a detection signal this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the first special starting hole 230, and the second special starting hole 232, or passed through the general starting hole 228. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been won in these winning holes 234, 226 and these starting holes 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of a ball into the first special pattern start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first special pattern start port 230, that is, that a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and the subsequent processing associated with the winning into the first special pattern start port 230 is performed. However, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the winning into the first special pattern start port 230 is not performed and the processing branch is made to the subsequent processing. In addition, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning judgment clear pattern information (information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before last, there is no detection signal last time, and there is no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a winning has occurred once, it is not determined that a winning has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning judgment clear pattern information, and if it matches the winning judgment clear pattern information, it is determined whether it matches the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information from the next time onwards.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes and basic random number update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value performed in step S121 is updated, and then the random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value and the special random number value used by the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Also, if it is determined that the random number counter has gone around once as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and set in the memory area of the random number counter. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, which varies in the range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and set in the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round, an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a special number has completed its round is provided in RAM 308.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the random number counter for generating random numbers for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including a normal pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the normal pattern display device 210, a special pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214, and timers for timing a specified winning performance time, a specified opening time, a specified closing time, a specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a winning slot counter update process is performed. In this winning slot counter update process, when a win occurs in winning slots 234, 226 or starting slots 230, 232, the value of the prize ball count memory area provided for each winning slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

In addition, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. In the winning entry acceptance process, if certain conditions are met, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area in the start information storage section of RAM 308 according to the winning order (reserved order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 105 are composed of one byte, with strobe information in bit 7 (when on, indicates that data is being set), power-on information in bit 6 (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), the current processing type for encryption in bits 4 and 5 (0 to 3), and the payout request count after encryption processing in bits 0 to 3.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process is one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process in the middle of the normal map change display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a change display of the normal map (normal map change play).

In addition, in the normal pattern status update process at the timing when the normal pattern change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the normal pattern display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that the winning pattern is displayed, and if the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LED constituting the normal pattern display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that the losing pattern is displayed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal pattern status update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-mentioned turning on and off drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal pattern is stopped. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a confirmed display of either the winning pattern (normal pattern A shown in FIG. 106(d)) or the losing pattern (normal pattern B shown in FIG. 106(d)). Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of a timer for managing the normal symbol stop time provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Also, if the result of the normal map variable play is a win, the normal map win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal map win flag is on, in the normal map status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to normal map operation, and a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a of the second special map start port 232 to keep the blade member 232a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 2 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade open time changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a to keep the blade member 232a in a closed state for a specified closed period (e.g., 500 ms), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the timer for managing the blade closed time provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that starts when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the wing closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process at the end of the above-mentioned specified stop display period (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a lottery process related to the normal map is performed. In this lottery process, when the normal map variable play and the second special map start port 232 are not open/closed (the normal map state is not in operation), and the number of reserved normal map variable plays is one or more, a random number lottery based on the normal map winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area is used to determine whether the result of the normal map variable play is a win or a loss, and if it is a win, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If it is a loss, the win flag is set to OFF. Note that regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as a normal map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected from among multiple variable times based on the obtained normal map timer random number value, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. The number of reserved regular variable games is stored in a reserved regular number storage area in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved regular variable games minus 1 is stored in this reserved regular number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the special pattern pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the special pattern pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special patterns 1 and 2, pre-determines the stop pattern and the change time before the hit/miss determination process, and stores the pre-determination result (special pattern pre-reading result) in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2, but first, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, in the special chart 2 state update process during the special chart 2 variable display (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special chart 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off repeatedly. By performing this control, the special chart 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of special chart 2 (special chart 2 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a miss flag, a special chart probability change flag, and a normal chart probability change flag are prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop pattern in the special chart 2 related lottery process described later. In the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the special chart 2 change display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on, the special chart A shown in FIG. 106 (b) is displayed, when the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special chart B is displayed, when the miss flag is on, the special chart C is displayed, and when the normal chart probability change flag is on, the special chart D is displayed, and a setting is made in the setting area of the RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 2 is being stopped. By performing this control, the special chart 2 display device 214 displays one of the following patterns: a 10R guaranteed jackpot pattern (special chart A), a 2R guaranteed jackpot pattern (special chart B), a losing pattern (special chart C), or a time-saving pattern (special chart D).

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stopped display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed special chart 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special chart 2 state update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 2 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for a specified winning presentation period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special drawing 2 state update process that starts when the specified winning performance period ends (when the value of the special drawing 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 to keep the door member 234a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected entering the variable winning opening 234), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 for the specified closed period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) to keep the door member 234a in a closed state, and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large prize opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Furthermore, in the special chart 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with probability change (10 rounds for special chart A, 2 rounds for special chart B), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in an open state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the V shutter VS for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the V shutter opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. Then, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in a closed state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the V shutter VS. Also, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special chart probability change flag is turned on. In addition, to wait for the period during which an image is displayed informing the player that the game ball has passed through the V-pass switch VC and has acquired a special chance (the V-winning performance period (e.g., 3 seconds)), information indicating the V-winning performance period is set in the memory area of the timer for managing the special chart 2 waiting time provided in RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V-winning performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC, the special chart probability change flag is not turned on.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (9 rounds or 1 round excluding the first time), and in the special chart 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the control ends, information indicating the effect waiting period is set in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to set it to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 has ended.

In addition, if the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, the number of time-saving times (120 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned ON. In the case where the 2R jackpot flag is set to ON, the number of time-saving times (120 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned ON. In the case where the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of time-saving times (950 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned ON.

The time-saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine is in a state advantageous to the player, in order to shorten the time between the end of a jackpot in the special jackpot variation game and the start of the next jackpot. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the game is in a high probability state (normal probability change). In the high probability state, the probability of winning in the normal jackpot variation game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, in the high probability state, the variation time of the normal jackpot variation game is shorter than in the low probability state (normal probability short). Furthermore, in the high probability state, the opening time of the pair of wing members 232a of the special 2 starting hole 232 is likely to be longer in one opening (electric chute opening extension) than in the low probability state. In addition, in the high probability state, the pair of wing members 232a is likely to open more than in the low probability state. The state in which any of these normal probability change, normal probability short, and electric chute opening extension is set is called the electric support state (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

As mentioned above, the time-saving flag is set to off during a jackpot (special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during a jackpot. This is to solve the problem that if the normal high probability state is in place during a jackpot, many game balls may enter the special game 2 start port 232 before a certain number of game balls enter the variable winning port 234 during the jackpot, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot and increasing the risk of gambling.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end performance setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the special chart 2 status update process, which starts when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to special chart 2 not in operation.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 2 stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 2 not operating in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special chart 2 status update process when the special chart 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 1.

For example, in the special chart 1 state update process during the special chart 1 variable display (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special chart 1 display device 212. By performing this control, the special chart 1 display device 212 performs special chart 1 variable display (special chart 1 variable play). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a miss flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop pattern in the special chart 1 related lottery process described later. In the special chart 1 state update process that starts when the special chart 1 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on, the special chart a shown in FIG. 106 (a) is displayed, when the 3R jackpot flag B is on, the special chart b is displayed, and when the miss flag is on, the special chart c is displayed. The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special chart 1 is being stopped. By performing this control, the special chart 1 display device 212 will display one of the following confirmed patterns: a 3R guaranteed jackpot pattern (special chart a), a 3R normal jackpot pattern (special chart b), or a losing pattern (special chart c).

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of special chart 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 1 variable play is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result becomes 0 from 1, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), a predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and special pattern 1 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 1 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 1 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special chart 1 state update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 1 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 in order to wait for a specified winning presentation period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special drawing 1 state update process that starts when the specified winning performance period ends (when the value of the special drawing 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 to keep the door member 234a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected entering the variable winning opening 234), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 1 state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 to keep the door member 234a in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large prize opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Furthermore, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to on, in the special chart 1 state update process in the final round (3rd round), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in an open state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the V shutter VS for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the V shutter opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. Then, in the special chart 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in a closed state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the V shutter VS. Also, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special chart probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, to wait for the period during which an image is displayed informing the player that the game ball has passed through the V-pass switch VC and has acquired a special chance (the V-winning performance period (e.g., 3 seconds)), information indicating the V-winning performance period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V-winning performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC, the special chart probability change flag is not turned on.

In addition, in the special chart 1 state update process, which starts when the door member opening/closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first time), in order to set the device to wait for a predetermined end performance period (for example, three seconds), that is, the period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot is ending by the decorative pattern display device 208, information indicating the performance waiting period is set in the memory area of the performance waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set on, the time-saving number of times (120 times) is set in the time-saving number of times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the jackpot game ends, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Even if the 3R jackpot flag B is set on, the time-saving number of times (50 times) is set in the time-saving number of times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the same time as the jackpot game ends, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. In addition, in the special chart 1 state update process, the normal chart probability fluctuation flag is not set on.

Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 1 status update process that starts when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to special chart 1 not in operation.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 1 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 1 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 1 stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 1 not operating in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special chart 1 status update process when the special chart 1 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S229.

After the special chart status update process in steps S225 and S227 is completed, the special chart-related lottery process is performed for each of special charts 1 and 2. Here too, the special chart-related lottery process for special chart 2 (special chart 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery process for special chart 1 (special chart 1 related lottery process) is performed (step S231). The special chart 2 related lottery process is executed using the first special chart 2 winning random number value and the special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value storage area, with the start conditions being that no variable play for special charts 1 and 2 is being performed, both the states of special charts 1 and 2 are inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable plays is 1 or more. The lottery process related to special chart 1 is executed using the first special chart 1 winning random number value and the special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that variable play of special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, the status of both special chart 1 and special chart 2 is inactive, and the number of reserved variable play of special chart 1 is 1 or more.

As for these special chart-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special chart 2-related lottery process before the special chart 1-related lottery process, so that even if the start conditions for the special chart 2 variable game and the start conditions for the special chart 1 variable game are met at the same time, the special chart 2 variable game will be variable first, so the special chart 1 variable game will not start variable. Also, if the number of reserved numbers for the special chart 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process and variable game for the reserved special chart 1 variable game will not be performed. Also, the notification of the result of the judgment of whether or not the special chart variable game is a win by the decorative pattern display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special chart 2 start port 232 is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special chart 1 start port 230. In this example, a highly advantageous special pattern variable game (in this example, special pattern 2 variable game) is prioritized over a less advantageous special pattern variable game (in this example, special pattern 1 variable game). This may make it easier to create differences in the advantageous degrees of the game states.

In the case of the special chart 2 related lottery processing of step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (oldest stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number storage area, and determines whether to determine a jackpot or a miss (win/lose judgment) using the win/lose judgment table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 winning random number in the acquired special chart 2 start information. Also, even if the special chart 1 is judged to be a win or a miss, it is determined to be a jackpot or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 is displayed in a variable manner using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose judgment result. Next, the main control unit 300 uses various tables stored in the ROM 306 to determine the variable display time (timer number) of the special chart 2 based on, for example, the result of the winning/losing judgment, the stopped pattern, the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time of the winning/losing judgment, the acquired random number value for determining the special chart variable time, etc.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229) described above, the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special chart 2 priority variation was given as an example in which the highly advantageous special chart 2 variation game is started in preference to the less advantageous special chart 1 variation game, and the reserved special chart 2 is consumed in preference to the reserved special chart 1. However, the special chart 1 priority variation may be a special chart 1 priority variation in which the less advantageous special chart 1 variation game is started in preference to the more advantageous special chart 2 variation game, and the reserved special chart 1 is consumed in preference to the reserved special chart 2. Also, the start gate winning order variation may be a variation in which the special chart variation games related to the reserved special charts 1 and 2 are started in the order of the winning of the start gate, without giving priority to either the highly advantageous special chart 2 variation game or the less advantageous special chart 1 variation game. In the start gate winning order variation, the upper limit of the reserved number is eight regardless of the special chart 1 and the special chart 2, so that the upper limit of the reserved number can be increased compared to the priority variation in which the upper limit of the reserved number is four in each of the special charts 1 and 2.

In the above explanation, the lottery process or variable play for the reservation of one special chart is not performed depending on the state of the other special chart, but this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special chart state update process and special chart related lottery process may be performed independently for special chart 1 and special chart 2, so that multiple special charts can be changed simultaneously. In addition, when multiple special charts are changed simultaneously in this manner, multiple areas for displaying the lottery results of each special chart may be provided in the decorative pattern display device 208, or multiple decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the lottery results of each special chart, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of multiple special charts. In addition, when changes are being made to multiple special charts at the same time, the lottery result of the special chart that stopped changing first may affect the lottery result of the special chart that stops changing later.

In step S233, which is the next step after step S231, a command setting and sending process is performed. In this command setting and sending process, various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this example form, information that can identify the type of command, such as a basic command, a pattern change start command, a pattern change stop command, a winning performance start command, an end performance start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a look-ahead result information command, and a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a pattern change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, loss flags, and timer numbers selected in the special pattern related lottery process, and if the command type is a pattern change stop (rotation stop) command, it includes various jackpot flags and loss flag values, and if the command type is a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the number of jackpot rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a win in the special pattern 1 start port 230, whether or not there is a win in the special pattern 2 start port 232, whether or not there is a win in the variable win port 234, etc. In the case of a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, the look-ahead number stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop pattern stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned spin start setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., is set in the command data.In the above-mentioned spin stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, loss flags, etc., stored in RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning performance setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the performance control information stored in RAM 308 to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning performance period, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned end performance setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the performance control information stored in RAM 308 to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the performance waiting period, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned big prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. In the process of sending the setting to close the big prize opening described above, information indicating the number of big prize rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

In addition, in step S233, a general command special chart reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special chart reservation increase process, special chart identification information (information indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 are set in the command data.

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which is the next step after step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, the next step after step S235, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error. When a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the display data to be output to the normal display unit 210, the special display unit 1 display unit 212, the special display unit 2 display unit 214, the various status display units 328, etc., is set to the output port of the I/O 310 by driving various solenoids 332 to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239, which is the next step after step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not. If the low voltage signal is on (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 107. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as return data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the HALT state is entered.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 109 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 109 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial settings of the input/output ports and the initialization process of the memory area in the RAM 408 are performed, etc.

In step S303, which is the next step after step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, which is the next step after step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which is the next step after step S307, a performance control process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, a process such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process for the performance data is performed.

In step S311, which is the next step after step S309, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and depending on the detection result, a process is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190.

In step S313, which is the next step after step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which is the next step after step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S317, which is the step following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for performance devices 2 to 4, this command is output to drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 109 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Figure 109 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 110 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 110 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. This initialization process includes initial settings of the input/output ports and initialization of the memory area in the RAM (not shown).

In step S403, which is the next step after step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, which is the next step after step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which is the next step after step S407, a performance control process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S407, a process is performed in which the performance data corresponding to this command (performance data from the decorative pattern display device 208) is read from a ROM (not shown), and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process is performed on the performance data.

In step S411, which is the next step after step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

Figure 110 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM.

Figure 110 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle in response to this timer interrupt. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which is the next step after step S441, other processing such as updating the random number value for presentation is performed.

Figure 110 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-controller main process. In step S451, an instruction is given to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, which will be described later). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which is the next step after step S451, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the next step after step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the role ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. Here, FIG. 111(A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the role ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 111(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198.

As described above, the reel ratio/setting display 196 is configured with a reel ratio monitor and a setting monitor, where the reel ratio monitor displays the continuous reel ratio (RY) and the reel ratio (YH), and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

The consecutive feature ratio here refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature when the feature is activated consecutively (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the variable winning opening 234 opening and winning during a jackpot game). It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. The feature ratio also refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the second special chart start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234 opening and winning).

In this embodiment, if the consecutive feature ratio is calculated and it is determined that the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit seven-segment LED that displays the consecutive feature ratio is made to flash, and then a security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may also be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. This may allow the type application test of the gaming machine to be carried out smoothly.

If the calculated ratio of the reels is found to exceed 70%, the two-digit seven-segment LED that displays the ratio is made to flash, and then a security signal (YH) is output. The security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the ratio of the reels exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In this embodiment, when the continuous feature ratio or feature ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, a specific 7-segment LED is made to blink, but for example, the light color may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 111(B), eight dip switches are provided on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch is read and the probability of the effect occurring can be changed. For example, it is possible to set the frequency with which setting suggestions are executed, the occurrence rate of advance notices, the rate of entry into the effect mode, etc.

Next, we will explain the gameplay of the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 102, although some of this will overlap with what has been explained so far.

Figure 112 (a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game status after a jackpot.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102, when setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. 107, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/320, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/315, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/90. When setting 3 is selected, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/310, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/305, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/87. When setting 5 is selected, the probability of winning with a low probability of a special chart is 1/300, and the probability of winning with a high probability of a special chart is 1/85. When setting 6 is selected, the probability of winning with the special low probability is 1/295, and the probability of winning with the special high probability is 1/84. The higher the setting number, the easier it is to win a jackpot.

In addition, the probability of winning a regular draw when the regular draw probability is low is 1/100, while the probability of winning a regular draw when the regular draw probability is high is 99/100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 112 (a), in Special Drawing 1, the breakdown between Special Drawing A and Special Drawing B is equal (50% each), and in Special Drawing 2, the breakdown between Special Drawing A and Special Drawing B is 7:3.

In addition, in special chart a of special chart 1, the V shutter VS opens only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. If the game ball passes through this V passing switch VC (when the special chart operating area is ON), a special chart is activated, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a special chart high probability normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for 120 times of the special chart pattern change display. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC (when the special chart operating area is OFF), the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for 120 times of the special chart pattern change display.

In special chart b of special chart 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for the period during which the special chart pattern change display is performed 50 times.

In special chart A of special chart 2, the V shutter VS opens only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V pass switch VC. In special chart B, the V shutter VS opens only in the 2nd round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V pass switch VC. Whether it is special chart A or special chart B, if the game ball passes through the V pass switch VC (when the special chart operation area is ON), the game state after the big win game ends will be a special chart high probability normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for 120 times of special chart pattern change display. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V pass switch VC (when the special chart operation area is OFF), the game state after the big win game ends will be a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for 120 times of special chart pattern change display.

After the special high probability/normal high probability state or the special low probability/normal high probability state has been maintained a certain number of times, it will transition to the normal state (special low probability/normal low probability state). The time reduction that starts after a jackpot is called time reduction A.

Figure 112 (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 102.

In the normal state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state), it is recommended to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area in order to aim for the special chart 1 starting hole 230. In other words, in the special chart low probability normal chart low probability state, even if the ball enters the normal chart starting hole 228, it is almost impossible to win the normal chart variable game, so the player should not hit to the right, but should shoot the game ball toward the left side (hit to the left). Note that the normal state refers to a non-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special low probability normal high probability state or a special high probability normal high probability state, it is easier to win a normal variable game, so it is recommended to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the game area where the normal start hole 228 is located in order to aim for the normal start hole 228. That is, as shown in the breakdown in FIG. 112(a), the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability change (special a) is 50% in special 1, while the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability change is 100% in special 2. Also, the number of times the time-saving game state is maintained after a jackpot game may be 50 times in special 1, but is always 120 times in special 2. Therefore, since it is easier for a player to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in special 2 than in special 1, the player should aim for a jackpot in special 2 by having the ball enter the second special start hole 232. Therefore, the player should shoot the ball toward the right side area (hit to the right).

In addition, in the case of a jackpot game, the game ball is shot (hit to the right) toward the right area of the game area where the variable winning hole 234 is located, aiming for the variable winning hole 234. Figure 112(b) shows that after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state may be maintained for 120 times or for 50 times.

Also, in Figure 112(b), if the special chart is not hit even once during the 950 times of special chart pattern change display in the special chart low probability state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state), i.e., if there are 950 consecutive special chart misses, the time-saving game state will be maintained during the 1100 times of special chart pattern change display. The period during which the time-saving game state is maintained as a result of a predetermined number of consecutive special chart misses is called play time, and this time reduction is called b-time reduction. The b-time reduction game state can only be entered once before the first hit after the power is turned on, and once a jackpot has been hit, it can only be entered once before the next jackpot is hit. Therefore, if there are 950 consecutive misses on the special chart in the b time-saving game state, there is no new transition to the b time-saving game state, and the b time-saving game state continues, and if there are 1100 consecutive misses on the special chart, there is a transition to the non-time-saving game state (normal state). Note that the count of the number of consecutive misses, which is the condition for transitioning to the b time-saving game state, also includes the number of consecutive misses in the a time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state described below.

As shown in Fig. 106(a) and (b), the time-saving symbol may be displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2. The time-saving game state to which the time-saving symbol is displayed and transitions is called the c-time-saving. This time-saving symbol may win the c-time-saving in the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2, which is performed as a result of the special symbol 2 reservation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "special symbol 2 remaining reservation") remaining at the time when the time-saving game state (special symbol high probability normal symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability normal symbol high probability state) ends being consumed in the non-time-saving game state. When the c-time-saving is won, the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the second special symbol display device 214 (see Fig. 104), and three "decorative symbols 11" (decorative symbols for time-saving) shown in Fig. 106(c) are displayed in a line on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the time-saving game state (special low probability, normal high probability state) will be maintained while the special pattern change display is performed 950 times. In other words, it will transition to the c time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game. The probability of winning the sudden time-saving game is 1/90. In addition to the special pattern 2 remaining reserve at the end of the time-saving game state that started after the jackpot game ends, and the special pattern 2 remaining reserve at the end of the b time-saving game state that started after 950 consecutive special pattern misses, it is also possible to win the sudden time-saving game again in the special pattern 2 remaining reserve at the end of the time-saving game state that started after winning the sudden time-saving game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving pattern may be won even in the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and the b time-saving game state. In this case, the time-saving pattern is displayed still on the second special pattern display device 214 (see FIG. 104). However, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not display three "decorations 11" (decorative patterns for time-saving) shown in FIG. 106(c) in a row, but displays a random pattern that indicates a miss. In this embodiment, the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and the b time-saving game state are prioritized over the c time-saving game state, so even if the time-saving pattern is displayed still on the second special pattern display device 214, the time-saving pattern is invalidated and the game does not transition to the c time-saving game state.

Furthermore, even if a right shot is made in a non-time-saving game state, and a normal game with a probability of 1/100 is won, and the ball enters the second special game starting hole 232 (electric chute), it may also win the c time-saving game, and the game state will be switched to the c time-saving game state without being invalidated. In other words, not only the remaining special game 2 reserve, but also a new special game 2 reserve may be switched to the c time-saving game state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special game starting hole 232 (electric chute) in a non-time-saving game state. For example, it may be possible to prevent a game ball from winning the normal game even if the game ball enters the normal game starting hole 228, or the opening pattern of the wing member 232a may be an opening pattern that makes it extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special game starting hole 232 (electric chute) even if the game ball enters the normal game.

In addition, the condition for transitioning to the b time-saving play state may be satisfied by all misses in the c time-saving play state (950 consecutive misses on the special chart), resulting in a transition from the c time-saving play state to the b time-saving play state.

In this embodiment, the time-saving pattern is displayed stationarily on the second special pattern display device 214 even in the special pattern high probability, normal pattern high probability state, special pattern low probability, normal pattern high probability state, and b time-saving play state, but it may not be displayed stationarily. In other words, it may not be displayed stationarily except in the pattern change display of special pattern 2 in the non-time-saving play state.

Next, we will explain a specific example of game progress in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 102.

Figure 113 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the time-saving play state ending and transitioning to a non-time-saving play state shortly before the time-saving play state ends.

Each diagram shown in FIG. 113 shows a decorative pattern display device 208, a time-saving lamp TL, a right-hit display lamp RL, and a high probability lamp HL. Each lamp is displayed in black when lit and in white when off (the same as the example shown in FIG. 123). In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(a) has a fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the pattern is changing (or the pattern is stopped) and for notifying the number of reserved numbers, and a reserved number display area for special pattern 1 is provided in the upper left, and a reserved number display area for special pattern 2 is provided in the lower left. In addition, a pattern change notification area for special pattern 1 is provided in the upper right, and a pattern change notification area for special pattern 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a pattern change notification area for normal patterns and a reserved number display area for normal patterns may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special chart 1 is aligned with the reserved number shown by the reserved lamp 218 of the special chart 1, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special chart 2 is aligned with the reserved number shown by the reserved lamp 220 of the special chart 2. In addition, in the pattern change notification area of the special chart 1, while the pattern of the special chart 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a miss, it is stopped and displayed as "×". In addition, during the pattern change display of the special chart 1, the display of "-" may flash, and it may be possible to recognize that the pattern change display of the special chart 1 is being performed. The display in the pattern change display area of the special chart 2 is the same as the display in the pattern change display area of the special chart 1, and the display mode here changes in response to the pattern change display and stop display of the special chart 2. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or flashing mode of the fourth pattern, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the reserved number display area, a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the pattern change display being performed may be performed. The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 described above is the same as the example shown in FIG. 123.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(a) displays a static combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7." A mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the display changes and stops according to the decorative pattern displayed large in the center of the display screen.

The decorative pattern display device 208 also has a variable icon display area 280 at the bottom center of the performance display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change. In FIG. 113(a), the pattern change display of the special pattern has ended, so the variable icon has disappeared and is not displayed.

The control state (game state) shown in FIG. 113(a) is a time-saving game state. More specifically, it is a state of low probability of special chart and high probability of normal chart. The time-saving lamp TL shown in FIG. 113(a) is lit, and the high probability lamp HL is off. Also, as explained using FIG. 112(b), right-hitting is recommended in the time-saving game state, and the right-hitting indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 113(a) is also lit. In addition, the right-hitting first indicator RH1 that encourages right-hitting is displayed to the left of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(a). This right-hitting first indicator RH1 is an indicator that continues to be displayed even after the special symbol pattern change display ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the display transitions to the demo screen. The right-hitting indicator lamp RL also continues to be lit even after the display transitions to the demo screen.

The time-saving game state in FIG. 113(a) is a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) that is started when the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the V-passing switch VC, or a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that is started when 950 consecutive special pattern misses have occurred. The background of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(a) is the background of a castle town that represents the time-saving game state. Also, the state in FIG. 113(a) is a state in which the time-saving game state will transition to a non-time-saving game state if the special pattern change display is performed four more times. In the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(a), the characters "4 remaining" are displayed as a time-saving game state remaining number display, indicating that the time-saving game state will continue only four times. The background on the decorative pattern display device 208 may be different depending on whether the time-saving game state is started after the end of a jackpot game (time-saving game state a), the time-saving game state is started after 950 consecutive special pattern misses (time-saving game state b), or the time-saving game state is started after a sudden time-saving win (time-saving game state c). The background on the decorative pattern display device 208 may be different between the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state and the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining number display may also be different.

In addition, in the time-saving play state, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a reserved icon display area 282 for special pattern 2 to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

In the reserved icon display area 282 of the special chart 2, reserved icons representing reserved special chart 2 are displayed. The number of reserved special chart 2 is represented by the number of reserved icons of the special chart 2, in addition to the number of lit reserved chart 2 lamps 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special chart 2. In other words, the reserved icons correspond to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the reserved icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second reserved icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 282 of the special chart 2, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the closer to the variable icon display area 280 the reserved icon (the reserved icon on the right) is the older the winning reserved icon.

In FIG. 113(a), three reserved icons h21, h22, and h23 of the special chart 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special chart 2, and all of these three reserved icons h11, h12, and h23 of the special chart 2 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode). The default display mode is a round, patternless, and white display mode. In the drawing, white is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. The reserved icon suggests the expected probability of a jackpot in the pre-reading notice depending on the display mode. In other words, it suggests the expected probability of a jackpot in the pattern change display that is performed when the reserved represented by the reserved icon is consumed. The default display mode suggests that the expected probability of a jackpot is 5%. It may be suggested that the expected probability of a jackpot is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the expected probability of a jackpot in the first place. In the following explanation, if the default display mode is used, the explanation of that effect may be omitted.

In addition, in Figure 113 (a), in order to make it easier to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special chart 2, hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines.

In FIG. 113(b), the display of the pattern change of the special pattern 2 has started. That is, the pattern change has started in the second special pattern display device 214 (see FIG. 104), which is not shown in this figure, and the display of the change of the fourth pattern and the mini pattern has also started, the movement of the reserved icon has ended, and the display of the change of the decorative pattern has also started. The number shown in the reserved number display area of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 2, and the display of "-" has started to flash in the fourth pattern of the special pattern 2. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one to the right, and the reserved icon h21, which was the first reserved icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The display mode of this variable icon is also the default display mode (a round, patternless, white display mode). In addition, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 has decreased by one and is displayed as "3 remaining".

Furthermore, when the display of the special pattern changes starts, a song selection display MC that allows the selection of a song to be output from the speaker 120 starts to be displayed above the reserved icon display area 282 of special pattern 2. The song selection display MC displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(b) displays the song title "Song 1," and here, Song 1 is being output from the speaker 120 (not shown). This song output will be explained in more detail from FIG. 118 onwards.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(c), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed frozen. In the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 2 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen in the combination "358". The song selection display MC disappears each time a decorative pattern is displayed frozen, and is displayed again each time the display of the changing decorative patterns begins.

In FIG. 113(d), the display of the pattern change of special pattern 2 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display starts flashing in the fourth pattern of special pattern 2. Also, the reserved icon has shifted one to the right, and only one reserved icon h21 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special pattern 2. In addition, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 has decreased by one and is now displayed as "2 remaining."

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(e), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is displayed as a frozen combination. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 2 is displayed as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "814".

In FIG. 113(f), the display of the pattern of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving game state starts, and the decorative symbol changes. The value shown in the reserved number display area of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of "-" starts flashing in the fourth symbol of special symbol 2. In addition, the reserved icon shifts one to the right, and no reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special symbol 2, and the reserved number becomes 0. In addition, the reserved icon h21 in the default display mode, which was the first reserved icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 113(f) is a red display mode that is different from the default display mode. Red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching on the drawing. The variable icon h0 in the red display mode suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in the currently performed pattern changing display is 50%, and the so-called normal notice is being executed. In addition, the right-hit first display RH1 continues to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and next to it, the word "LAST" is displayed, indicating that it is the pattern change display of the last special pattern that can maintain the time-saving game state. The remaining number of times in the time-saving game state displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 has disappeared and is not displayed, but it may be displayed as "1 remaining". Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(f), the display of the right-hit second display RH2, which encourages right-hitting in a display mode different from the right-hit first display RH1, has started. The right-hit second display RH2 indicates, in a right-facing arrow figure, that the reservation of the special pattern 2 should be saved by aiming for the second special pattern start hole 232 (electric chute). This is a notification that recommends acquiring the remaining reservation of the special pattern 2 that will suddenly lead to a time-saving win. At the stage of FIG. 113(f), the reserved number of special chart 2 is 0, but even if the reserved number of special chart 2 is full (4 pieces), the right-hit second display RH2 is displayed. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts a right-hit notification (a voice output of "hit right and save reserved") to encourage right-hitting and save reserved special chart 2. Also, the speaker 120 continues to output music 1. Note that while the voice of the right-hit notification is being output, the output sound of music 1 may be reduced, or music 1 may be completely muted. Whether it is a right-hit notification by the right-hit second display RH2 or a right-hit notification from the speaker 120, execution starts when the pattern change display of the last special chart that can maintain the time-saving game state starts. Note that the display start timing of the right-hit second display RH2 may be the same as the start timing of the change display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern change display of the last special chart, or it may be the timing after the change display of the decorative pattern starts. In addition, the start timing of the right hit notification from the speaker 120 may be the same as the start timing of the display of the decorative pattern change corresponding to the display of the pattern change of the last special pattern, or it may be a timing after the display of the decorative pattern change has started, or it may be a timing after the pattern change has started in the second special pattern display device 214 (not shown) (see FIG. 104) and before the display of the decorative pattern change has started.

In Figure 113 (g), there are two winnings at the second special chart start port 232, and the number of reserved jackpots for special chart 2 increases by two, so the number of reserved jackpots displayed in the reserved jackpot number display area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved jackpot number display area 284 becomes 2, and two reserved jackpot icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the reserved jackpot icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

In Fig. 113 (h), the decorative pattern change display has entered a reach state. In addition, there is one more win at the second special pattern start port 232, and the reserved number of special pattern 2 increases by one, so the number shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 3, and a third reserved icon h23 is also displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special pattern 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 113, the game entered a reach state in FIG. 113 (h), but did not develop into a super reach, and the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" is displayed as a missing decoration pattern on the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (i). In addition, the fourth pattern of the special pattern 2 is displayed as a "x" in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, and the mini pattern is also displayed as a "434" combination. In addition, the word "end" is displayed in the upper center of the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (i), indicating that the pattern change display of the last special pattern that can maintain the time-saving game state has ended. When the pattern change display of the last special pattern ends, the right-hit first display RH1 and the right-hit second display RH2 that had been displayed until then disappear and become hidden. In addition, the right-hit notification that had been output from the speaker 120 until then has also ended. The timing of these ends may be simultaneous with the end of the decorative pattern change display, or may be after the decorative pattern change display has ended. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the pattern change display of the last special pattern has ended and before the decorative pattern change display has ended, or it may be the timing before the pattern change display of the last special pattern has ended. The reserve for special pattern 2 eventually accumulates to four, reaching a full state. The number shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. 113(i) is 4, and the fourth reserved icon h24 is also displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special pattern 2.

In addition, the second right-hit display RH2 may be made invisible (cleared) when four reserved special symbols 2 have been accumulated, and a display indicating that four reserved special symbols 2 have been accumulated (for example, a text display of "reservations full" or "preparation complete") may be displayed. In this case, if four reserved special symbols 2 have not been accumulated by the time the decorative pattern changing display ends, the second right-hit display RH2 may be made invisible (cleared) when the decorative pattern changing display ends.

In FIG. 113(j), the time-saving game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state). The time-saving lamp TL shown in FIG. 113(j) is off, and the high probability lamp HL is also off. When the time-saving game state transitions to the non-time-saving game state, if the reserved special chart 2 remains, the reserved special chart 2 is consumed preferentially because it is a special chart 2 priority variable machine. As described above, the time-saving pattern shown in FIG. 106(c) may be displayed only when the reserved special chart 2 is consumed in the non-time-saving game state, and the pattern change display of the reserved special chart 2 is performed as a result of the reserved special chart 2 being consumed in the non-time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the "pullback period"), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 becomes a dedicated background. In this example, an animation of the main character, the lord, running is displayed, and the text "One-shot reversal" is displayed.

During the pullback period, the remaining reserved numbers for special chart 2 are consumed, so in order to more clearly indicate how many reserved numbers for special chart 2 remain, the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2 continues to be displayed from the time-saving play state. Note that the reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 may also be displayed together, or neither the reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1 nor the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2 may be displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(j), the display of changing decorative patterns has begun, and three reserved icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special pattern 2. In addition, the value shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 also becomes 3, and the "-" display has begun to flash in the fourth pattern of special pattern 2.

As explained using FIG. 112(b), in the non-time-saving play state, left-hitting is recommended, the right-hitting indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 113(j) is turned off, and the first right-hitting indicator RH1 is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(j). However, during the pull-back period, even in the non-time-saving play state, the left-hitting notification that encourages left-hitting is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 113(j), even if the time-saving game state is switched to the non-time-saving game state, the left-hand hit notification is not executed during the pull-back period. In FIG. 113(k), the previous right-hand hit is continued, and the game ball is launched toward the right-hand region of the game area 124. The same applies if the game ball is changed from right-hand hit to left-hand hit, but happens to be hit to the right due to excess momentum. In the non-time-saving game state, if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure start hole 228 provided in the right-hand region, a left-hand hit notification (left-hand hit second display LH2) is executed (see FIG. 114(m) etc.). In FIG. 113(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal figure start hole 228, but the left-hand hit notification is not executed. This is because, as explained using FIG. 106(a), the special figure 1 does not have a time-saving pattern, and even if you hit it from the left, you will not be able to suddenly win the time-saving, so we do not recommend hitting it from the left. However, even if you hit from the right, it is extremely rare for you to win the regular prize and have the ball land in the special prize 2 starting hole 232, so hitting from the right is not recommended. Ultimately, it is a good idea not to shoot the game ball during this pullback period.

In addition, even if a power outage occurs during the pullback period and the power is restored, the left hit notification is not executed during the recovery display. In addition, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal start port 228 during this recovery, the left hit notification is not executed. On the other hand, in a non-time-saving game state that is not a pullback period, if a power outage occurs and the game ball is restored during the recovery display, if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal start port 228, the left hit notification is executed. In addition, the left hit notification during this recovery display may be a notification with a left hit display and a left hit notification sound, similar to the left hit notification described later in FIG. 114, etc., or may be a notification that only displays the left hit display, or may be a notification that only displays the left hit notification sound. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (m), the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the time saving was not suddenly won. Additionally, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a frozen "X", and the mini symbols are also displayed as a frozen "541" combination.

In Fig. 113(n), the display of the pattern change for special chart 2 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The "-" display has started to flash on the fourth pattern for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284. In this Fig. 113(n), the number of remaining reserved numbers for special chart 2 has decreased by one, the number shown in the reserved number display area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 2, and two reserved icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(o), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 2-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed as a frozen combination, and the player did not win the sudden time-saving bonus. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 2 is displayed as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "245".

Figure 114 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 113.

In Fig. 114(a), which follows Fig. 113(o), the display of the pattern change for special pattern 2 has begun, and the decorative pattern is changing. The "-" display has begun to flash on the fourth pattern for special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284. In this Fig. 114(a), the number of remaining reserved special pattern 2 balls has decreased by one again, the number shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has become 1, and only one reserved icon h21 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special pattern 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(b), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 1-Decoration 9-Decoration 5" is displayed as a frozen combination, and the player did not win the sudden time-saving bonus. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 2 is displayed as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "195".

In FIG. 114(c), the display of the pattern change for the last remaining reserved special chart 2 starts, and the decorative pattern changes. The fourth pattern of special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 starts to flash "- ", the number shown in the reserved number display area for special chart 2 becomes 0, and no reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(d), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 1" is displayed frozen, and in this example, the player did not win the sudden time-saving bonus. In the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 2 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen in the combination of "261". The pull-back period ends with FIG. 114(d). In this example, the pull-back period is the period from FIG. 113(j) to FIG. 114(d). The length of the pull-back period varies depending on the number of reserved special patterns 2 and the duration of the pattern change display for each special pattern.

In FIG. 114(e), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed due to the end of the pullback period. A background (a plain white background) representing a non-time-saving game state is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(e). In addition, due to the end of the pullback period, the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1 is displayed to the right of the variable icon display area 280, replacing the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2.

Furthermore, when the pullback period ends, the first left-hit display LH1 is displayed over the left-hit notification period to encourage left-hitting. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(e), the first left-hit display LH1 is displayed above the decorative pattern change display. The display form of this first left-hit display LH1 is a display form in which the word "left-hit" is written inside a deformed left-facing arrow. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts a left-hit notification (audio output of "please hit left") to encourage left-hitting. In FIG. 114(e), the display of the reserved pattern of the one remaining special pattern 1 starts, and the decorative pattern is displayed. In the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the display of "-" starts flashing, and the number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 is set to 0. In addition, no reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the newly displayed special pattern 1.

The player sees the first left-hand hit display LH1, starts a left-hand hit, and aims for the special chart 1 starting hole 230. In FIG. 114(f), the number of reserved special chart 1 balls increases by two, the number of reserved special chart 1 balls displayed in the reserved special chart 1 number display area in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 2, and two reserved icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 for special chart 1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(g), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is displayed frozen. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen as a combination of "923". In addition, one more reserved pattern for special pattern 1 is added, so the number shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 3, and a third reserved icon h13 is also displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1.

In FIG. 114(h), the pattern change display of a new special pattern 1 is started, and the decorative pattern is changing. The value shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 2, and the "-" display starts flashing in the fourth pattern of special pattern 1. In addition, the reserved icon is shifted to the left, and two reserved icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1. Even when the pattern change display of a new special pattern 1 is started, the left hit first display LH1 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, but the left hit first display LH1 disappears and is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(i). The left hit notification period that starts when the pullback period ends is a predetermined period with a predetermined time length, and depending on the time length of the pattern change display of the special pattern, it may end within one pattern change display, or it may be displayed across multiple pattern change displays. The left hit notification period may end after a certain number of symbol changes (e.g., once), or when a certain number of reserved special symbols 1 (e.g., one or four) are accumulated. In such cases, the left hit notification period becomes an indefinite period.

If a power outage occurs during the left hit notification period and is then restored, execution of the first left hit display LH1 continues. Also, the left hit notification during the left hit notification period may be performed only by the first left hit display LH1, or may be performed only by the left hit notification from the speaker 120.

In Figure 114 (i), two more reserved numbers are added to Special Chart 1, the number shown in the reserved number display area for Special Chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 4, and four reserved icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 for Special Chart 1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(j), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is displayed as a frozen combination. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "729".

In Figure 114 (k), the display of the pattern change of special chart 1 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 3, and the "-" display has started to flash on the fourth pattern of special chart 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one to the left, and three reserved icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1.

In FIG. 114(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal starting hole 228. In other words, a right hit is detected. Then, as shown in FIG. 114(m), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the second left hit display LH2, which encourages left hits. This second left hit display LH2 is a display in a different display mode from the first left hit display LH1, and is a text display such as "Please return to left hit." The second left hit display LH2 is displayed for a certain period of time each time a right hit is detected. In addition to displaying the second left hit display LH2, a left hit notification (for example, please return to left hit) may be made from the speaker 120.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 114(n), the second left-hit display LH2 disappears, the reserved number of special pattern 1 increases again, the number shown in the reserved number display area of special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 4, and four reserved icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of special pattern 1. In addition, the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 4" is displayed as a frozen combination, and in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as a frozen "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "924".

Figure 115 is a diagram showing in stages an example in which the length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in Figure 114. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 114, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 114, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 was four, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 115, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 was only one. That is, in the pattern change display of the last special chart 2 that can maintain the time-saving game state, which started with the reserved ball number of special chart 2 being 0 in FIG. 115(f), only one prize was awarded in the special chart 2 start hole 232. As a result, the number shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115(i) where the pattern change display of the last special chart has ended is 1, and only one reserved icon h21 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 115(j), the time-saving game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state). In FIG. 115(j), the pattern change display of the only one reserved ball for special chart 2 starts immediately, and the decorative pattern is displayed. That is, the pullback period has started. Even during this pullback period, a right hit is detected (FIG. 115(k)), but the left hit second display LH2 is not executed (FIG. 115(l)), and the pattern change display of the special chart 2 remaining reservation is ended, and the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 115(m). Even in this example, the sudden time reduction was not won. The pullback period ends with this FIG. 115(m). The pullback period in this example is the period from FIG. 115(j) to FIG. 115(m), which is a shorter period than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 114. However, if the period length of the pattern change display of the only one special chart 2 remaining reservation is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 114. Also, even if the number of remaining reservations in Special Chart 2 is two or three, the pullback period may be longer than the example shown in FIG. 114, or it may be shorter than the example shown in FIG. 115.

In the example shown in FIG. 115, as the pullback period ends, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to a background representing a non-time-saving game state (a patternless white background), as shown in FIG. 115 (n). Also, as the pullback period ends, the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1 is displayed to the right of the variable icon display area 280, replacing the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2.

Furthermore, as the pullback period has ended, the display of the first left-hit display LH1 has begun. Furthermore, the speaker 120 has also begun to issue a left-hit notification (voice output of "Please hit with your left hand") encouraging the player to hit with their left hand. In FIG. 115(n), the display of the remaining reserved symbol 1's changing pattern has begun, and the display of the decorative symbol's changing pattern has also begun, and in FIG. 115(o), the display of the decorative symbol's changing pattern continues.

Figure 116 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 115.

In FIG. 116(a), which follows FIG. 115(o), the pullback period ends and the display of the first special pattern 1 pattern change ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 3" in a stopped state. In this example, from the start of the pattern change display of the special pattern 1 (the display of the left-hit first display LH1 begins) until the display of the pattern change ends, there was no winning at the special pattern 1 starting hole 230, and the reserve of the special pattern 1 could not be accumulated. For this reason, the display of the pattern change of the special pattern 1 does not start immediately following FIG. 116(a), and the decorative pattern also remains stopped as shown in FIG. 116(b). Even if the display of the pattern change of the special pattern 1 does not start, the left-hit first display LH1 remains displayed until the end of the left-hit notification period, which is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 116(b) continues to display the left-hit first display LH1. During this time, the player continues to hit with the left hand, aiming to win at the special chart 1 starting hole 230, but there is still no winning at the special chart 1 starting hole 230, and eventually the left hand hit notification period ends, and the first left hand hit display LH1 disappears and becomes invisible (Figure 116 (c)). Even though the first left hand hit display LH1 disappears, there is still no winning at the special chart 1 starting hole 230, and in Figure 116 (d), there is finally a winning at the special chart 1 starting hole 230, the pattern change display of the special chart 1 begins, and the decorative pattern also begins to change.

In the example shown in FIG. 116, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal starting hole 228 (FIG. 116(g)), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the second left-hand hit display LH2, which encourages left-hand hit, as shown in FIG. 116(h).

Figure 117 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example when there is no pullback period. Below, the differences from the example shown in Figure 114 will be mainly explained, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 114, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is 4, and in the example shown in FIG. 115, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is 1, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 117, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is 0. That is, in the pattern change display of the last special chart 2 in which the time-saving game state can be maintained, which started with the reserved ball number for special chart 2 in FIG. 117(f), there was no winning at all in the special chart 2 start port 232. As a result, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 117(i) where the pattern change display of the last special chart has ended is 0, and not a single reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2. In this state, when the time-saving play state is switched to the non-time-saving play state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state), there is no pullback period, and as shown in FIG. 117(j), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 changes from the castle town background representing the time-saving play state to a patternless white background representing the non-time-saving play state. Also, instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of special chart 2, the reserved icon display area 281 of special chart 1 is displayed to the right of the variable icon display area 280. Furthermore, the display of the first left hit display LH1 has started. Furthermore, the speaker 120 has also started a left hit notification (audio output of "Please hit left") to encourage left hits.

In FIG. 117(j), the pattern change display of the reserved special pattern 1, which was the only one remaining, is started, and the decorative pattern change display is also started, and in the following FIG. 117(k), the pattern change display of the special pattern 1 is ended, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 3" in a stopped state. In the example shown in FIG. 117, as in the example shown in FIG. 116, from the start of the pattern change display of the special pattern 1 (the display of the first left-hit display LH1 is started) to the end of the pattern change display, there was no winning at all in the special pattern 1 start port 230, and the reserved special pattern 1 could not be saved. For this reason, the pattern change display of the special pattern 1 is not started immediately following FIG. 117(k), and in this example, even during the predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) from the end of the pattern change display of the special pattern to the start of the demo display, there was no winning at all in the special pattern 1 start port 230, and the demo display is started on the decorative pattern display device 208. A pattern demo is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 117(l). In the demo display, a setting menu is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 by operating the performance button 136 shown in FIG. 104. From the setting menu, for example, it is possible to adjust the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122. As shown in FIG. 117(l), even if the display switches to the demo display, the left-hit first display LH1 continues to be displayed until the left-hit notification period has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 117(m), when the left hit notification period has elapsed, the first left hit display LH1 disappears and is no longer displayed. In this example, there is still no winning entry into the special chart 1 starting hole 230, and the demo display continues to be displayed. With the demo display displayed, the game ball continues to be fired, and when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the regular chart starting hole 228 (FIG. 117(n)), as shown in FIG. 117(o), the second left hit display LH2, which encourages the player to hit left, is displayed on the demo display screen. Note that the left hit notification in the demo display may be output as a sound together with the display, or only a sound may be output instead of a display. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 117, a pattern demo is displayed as the demo display, but the same applies when an animation demo is displayed.

In addition, right-hit notification can be made by displaying on the decorative pattern display device 208, outputting sound from the speaker 120, or by flashing the right lamp of the frame lamp 122.In addition, left-hit notification can be made by displaying on the decorative pattern display device 208, outputting sound from the speaker 120, or by flashing the left lamp of the frame lamp 122.

Furthermore, the display modes of the first left-hand hit display LH1 during the left-hand hit notification period and the second left-hand hit display LH2 that is displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal play start hole 228 were different, but they may be the same display mode. Also, the display period lengths of the first left-hand hit display LH1 and the second left-hand hit display LH2 are different, but they may be the same period length.

In addition, when a power outage occurs and the game is being restored, the notification of the way to hit is executed depending on the actual game state. For example, if the game is restored during a pullback period, the notification of a left hit is not executed even if a right hit is detected. On the other hand, if the game is restored during a change in the pattern of the special chart in a non-time-saving game state, the notification of a left hit is executed if a right hit is detected.

Next, the selection of music will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 102, the music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 102. The music that can be selected changes depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is met. In this pachinko machine 100, the setting value with a different probability of winning can be changed by pressing the setting change button 194 shown in FIG. 103. Normally, the player does not know which setting value is set. Which setting value is set is an important concern for the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, a setting suggestion that suggests the setting value is performed using music. The above-mentioned predetermined condition is not met until a jackpot is won in the pattern change display of the special chart 2, which is performed as a result of the remaining reserved special chart 2 being consumed in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won in the pattern change display of the special chart 2 in the time-saving game state, the predetermined condition is not met. In other words, the specified condition is that a jackpot is won in the pattern change display of Special Chart 2, which is displayed as a result of being consumed in a non-time-saving play state.

The predetermined condition may be, instead of hitting a jackpot on the special chart 2 remaining reserve, or in addition to hitting a jackpot on the special chart 2 remaining reserve, that among the reserves during a jackpot game, there is another reserve that will be a jackpot as a result of a look-ahead (so-called reserve consecutive wins). Or, it may be winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, a jackpot with the greatest number of rounds or the greatest number of time-saving times). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for the player is special chart A, which is a 10R special jackpot. Conversely, it may be winning the least advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds (special chart B, which is a 2R special jackpot) or a jackpot with the smallest number of time-saving times (special chart B, which is a 3R normal jackpot). It may also be winning the 10th consecutive jackpot.

In addition to or instead of a setting suggestion that indicates a setting value, the music may suggest that there are pending jackpots during a jackpot game that will result in another jackpot as a result of forward reading (so-called pending consecutive jackpots), or the music may suggest the type of jackpot (for example, whether or not there is a special chance, or that a round promotion will occur), or the music may suggest that it is the 10th consecutive jackpot. Furthermore, if the game information suggested by the music is game information that the player would not normally be able to know, the suggested content will be useful.

Figure 118 (a) shows a list of songs that can be selected when a specified condition is not met.

Music selection is possible during jackpot play, time-saving play, and non-time-saving play. Music cannot be selected while the special symbol is stopped, and therefore music cannot be selected while the demo is being displayed. However, music may be selected from the settings menu mentioned above.

Note that music may be selectable even when the special image is stopped.

In addition, if the specified condition is not met, the music that suggests the setting value cannot be selected, so the music that can be selected remains the same regardless of the setting value (settings 1 to 6) that the pachinko machine 100 is set to.

When the specified conditions are not met, there are five songs that can be selected: Song 1 to Song 5. Song 1 is the default song, and is set when the RAM is cleared. Song 1 is also set each time the game moves to a non-time-saving play state. For example, in the example shown in Figure 113, Song 1 remains set from the beginning, but if a song other than Song 1 is selected, Song 1 will be set at the timing shown in Figure 113 (j).

Figure 118 (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs that are selected when a predetermined condition is met. The predetermined condition is met when a jackpot is won in the pattern change display of the special chart 2, which is performed as a result of the remaining reserved special chart 2 being consumed in a non-time-saving play state, and one song is selected and set as a result of an internal lottery during the winning jackpot play. In other words, the song is not selected by the player, but is automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100. The selection rate shown in Figure 118 (b) corresponds to the allocation rate by lottery. Among the songs selected here, there is a song that suggests a setting value. Song 6 is not a song that suggests a setting value like songs 1 to 5, but song 7 is a song that suggests a setting of 3 or more, and will not be selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to a setting of 3 or more. Song 8 is a song that suggests a setting of 5 or 6, and will not be selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to a setting of 5 or 6. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, song 6 is selected with a 100% probability.

Even after the specified condition is met once, it may be met again, and a song will be selected by lottery in the same way when the specified condition is met from the second time onwards. If the specified condition is met multiple times, the same song may be selected. It is also possible to increase the number of songs and prevent songs that have been selected once from being selected again.

The number of songs described above using FIG. 118 is just one example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from speaker 120 is less when the specified condition is met than when the specified condition is not met. Also, under this relationship, songs 1 to 5 may include songs 6 to 8. Furthermore, when the specified condition is met, only one song is selected by lottery, but under the above relationship, multiple songs may be selected by lottery and the player may ultimately choose one song.

Figure 119 shows a list of songs that are selected after a predetermined condition is met at least once. Note that Figure 118(b) is referenced for the jackpot gaming state when a predetermined condition is met, and the jackpot gaming state in Figure 119 refers to the jackpot gaming state after a predetermined condition is met at least once, but when the predetermined condition is not met.

In the non-time-saving game state, as explained with reference to FIG. 118(a), the player can select songs 1 to 5 by operating the up button 191 or down button 192 of the operation key unit 190. Also, if song 6 has been selected by lottery at least once during a big win game that was started when a predetermined condition was met, this song 6 is released until the RAM is cleared, and can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same way as songs 1 to 5. Even if the predetermined condition is met at least once and song 7 or song 8 is selected, songs 7 and 8 are not released in the non-time-saving game state, and cannot be selected by the player's operation. In other words, when song 6 is released, if the up button 191 is repeatedly operated, the song selection display MC displays the song titles 1 to 6 in order, and if the up button 191 is operated while the song title 6 is displayed, it returns to the song title 1, and the song selection display MC never displays the song titles 7 and 8 in the first place.

In the time-saving game state or the jackpot game state where the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, a jackpot game state started by winning a jackpot in the pattern change display of the special chart 2 in the time-saving game state), songs 1 to 5 can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as in the non-time-saving game state. Also, if song 6 is released, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as songs 1 to 5. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, songs 7 and 8 are not selected by lottery even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, so they are not released. If the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 3 or 4, song 7 may be selected by lottery when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and if selected, it is released and can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190, but song 8 is not selected by lottery and is not released. In actuality, when the pachinko machine 100 is set to setting 5 or 6, music 7 or music 8 may be selected by lottery if a predetermined condition is met, and if selected, it is released and can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190. As described above, in the time-saving game state or the big win game state where the predetermined condition is not met, music 6 to music 8 can be selected by the player after one lottery selection, but if they have never been selected by lottery, they cannot be selected by the player. Similarly, here, when music 6 is released and music 7 and music 8 cannot be selected, if the up button 191 is repeatedly operated, the music selection display MC displays the song titles of music 1 to music 6 in order, and if the up button 191 is operated while the song title of music 6 is displayed, it returns to the song title of music 1, and the song selection display MC never displays the song titles of music 7 or music 8 in the first place.

Figure 120 is a diagram continuing from Figure 113(h) and showing a step-by-step example different from the example shown in Figure 113.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 120(a), which is a continuation of FIG. 113(h), displays the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" in a static manner, just like the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113(i), and displays the word "End," indicating that the display of the pattern changes of the last special pattern that can maintain the time-saving game state has ended.

The third reserved icon h23 shown in FIG. 120(a) has changed from the default display mode to a gold display mode. In the drawing, the gold color is represented by vertical and horizontal cross-hatching. A reserved icon in a gold display mode corresponds to a so-called pre-reading notice, which suggests that the expected probability of a jackpot is 75% in the pattern change display of the reserved icon represented by that reserved icon.

In Fig. 120(b), as in Fig. 113(j), the game moves from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state), the time-saving lamp TL is off, and the high probability lamp HL is also off. In addition, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to a special background displaying the text "One Shot Reversal," and the display of the music selection display MC begins. Music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

Furthermore, the display mode of the first reserved icon h21 shown in FIG. 120(b) has changed from the default display mode to the time-saving display mode. This time-saving display mode is a display mode of a pre-reading notice suggesting that the time-saving will be won suddenly, and is a display mode that has changed from the default display mode when the game has transitioned to a non-time-saving game state (when the remaining reserved amount for Special Chart 2 has been consumed). In other words, the pre-reading notice suggesting that the time-saving will be won suddenly starts when the pull-back period begins. Note that the reserved icon with the gold display mode has become the second reserved icon h22.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 120(c), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed frozen, and in the following FIG. 120(d), the pattern change display of special pattern 2 starts again, and the decorative pattern is displayed changing. In the change icon display area 280, the change icon h0 of the time-saving display mode is displayed, and the normal preview is being executed. In other words, the currently ongoing pattern change display suggests that there is a 75% chance of winning the time-saving mode. The reserved icon in the gold display mode is the first reserved icon h21.

In FIG. 120(e), the time-saving pattern (special pattern D) shown in FIG. 106(b) is displayed on the second special pattern display device 214. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 120(e), the word "success" is displayed, and three "decorative patterns 11" (decorative patterns for time-saving) shown in FIG. 106(c) are displayed in a row. In other words, it is notified that the time-saving pattern has been won suddenly. However, since the time-saving pattern has been won suddenly but not the jackpot, the fourth pattern of the special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is displayed as an "X". Furthermore, the mini pattern is displayed as a specific combination of numbers (321) rather than the combination of decorative patterns 11. Note that this specific combination is displayed only when the time-saving pattern that is not displayed as a stop is won in the event of a miss or jackpot.

Due to the sudden win of the time-saving mode, the game moves to the time-saving mode without going through the jackpot mode. The time-saving mode lamp TL shown in FIG. 120(f) is on, and the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the background of a castle town, which indicates the time-saving mode. Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "949 remaining" are displayed as the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode, which indicates that the time-saving mode will continue for another 949 times. Furthermore, due to the transition to the time-saving mode, the right-hit first display RH1 is displayed, and the right-hit display lamp RL is also on. In addition, the icon in the gold display mode that was the first reserved icon h21 up until now has become the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. The variable icon h0 in the gold display mode is a normal notice that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in the pattern variable display that has started here is 75%. Note that the speaker 120 continues to output the music 1, and the display of the music selection display MC has also started.

In Fig. 120(g), the decorative pattern change display indicates that the game has entered a reach state. Then, in Fig. 120(h), this develops into a super reach, and the reserved icon display area 282 and the change icon display area 280 of special pattern 2 disappear, and the song selection display MC also disappears, along with the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, such as "949 remaining." The decorative pattern change display is also displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner. Instead of song 1, which had been continuously output up until now, song A, which is exclusive to the super reach, is now being output from the speaker 120.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 120(i), the display returns from the reduced display in the lower right to the original size, and a combination of decorative patterns is displayed frozen in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c. Here, the decorative pattern combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for the jackpot is displayed frozen, and a 2R special jackpot (special pattern B) has been won. In addition, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 2 is displayed frozen as a "○", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen as a "777" combination. The jackpot here is a jackpot on the remaining reserved special pattern 2, but since the time-saving mode was suddenly won first and the game transitioned to the time-saving mode, the specified condition is not met.

In FIG. 120(j), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the text "Congratulations on the jackpot". In addition, since the variable winning hole 234 is located in the right area, the right-hit first display RH1 is displayed, and the right-hit display lamp RL is also lit. The time-saving lamp TL is turned off. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening performance), a right-hit second display RH2 is displayed in addition to the right-hit first display RH1, encouraging the player to hit to the right. This right-hit second display RH2 is a display mode in which the text "Hit to the right" is displayed between right-facing arrows spaced apart vertically, and is a larger display than the right-hit first display RH1. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a right-hit notification sound saying "Hit to the right".

Since the jackpot game was started without the specified conditions being met, at least songs 1 to 5 can be selected, and the song selection display MC is displayed except for a certain period during the jackpot game. The song selection display MC displays a display UD imitating the up button 191 and down button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 102, and while the song selection display MC is displayed, a song can be selected by operating the up button 191 or down button 192. The song selection display MC displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 120(j) displays the song name "Song 1," and the speaker 120 outputs Song 1 along with the sound output of the right hit notification. Note that while the sound of the right hit notification is being output, the output sound of Song 1 may be lowered or Song 1 may be completely muted.

In FIG. 120(k), the first round has started, and the second right-hit display RH2 has disappeared and is no longer displayed, but the first right-hit display RH1 is still displayed. The right-hit notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only song 1 is being output. Furthermore, a music video corresponding to song 1 being output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the first round has started. The music video here is an animation in which the main character, a lord, demonstrates swordsmanship to the tune of song 1, and the lyrics of song 1 are also displayed. The song selection display MC is also displayed.

In FIG. 120(l), the second round has begun. In the case of a 2R special jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), making it possible to win a V prize. When the second round has begun, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the text "Aim for the V" to encourage the game ball to pass through the V pass switch VS, and although the music video continues to be displayed, the music selection display MC has disappeared and is no longer displayed. In other words, in the round (final round) in which a V prize can be won, music selection cannot be performed. Note that the speaker 120 continues to output music 1.

In FIG. 120(m), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decorative pattern display device 208 issues a V-winning notification to notify the player that a V-winning has been obtained. In other words, the player is notified that a transition to a high probability state will occur after the big win game ends. When the V-winning notification is issued, the music video is hidden, but may continue to be displayed together with the V-winning notification. Meanwhile, music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, but the V-winning notification sound may also be output from the speaker 120 together with music 1, or may be output instead of music 1. Also, even after a V-winning is obtained, music selection cannot be made until the end of the second round, but as long as a V-winning is obtained, music selection may be made during the remaining period of the second round.

In FIG. 120(n), the end performance of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the text "Jackpot End". In addition, the right-hit first display RH1 continues to be displayed during the jackpot game, and is also displayed in this end performance. In addition, music 1 is also output from the speaker 120 continuously during the jackpot game, and is also output in this end performance. In addition, in the end performance, the display of the music selection display MC is resumed, and music can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192. However, the end performance may also be set so that music selection cannot be performed, just like the round in which a V prize can be obtained. In this way, music selection cannot be performed during a part of the jackpot game. In addition, music selection cannot be performed during the period in which the super reach of FIG. 120(h) is being performed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 120(a), FIG. 120(c), and FIG. 120(i), music selection cannot be performed during the special pattern stop. Additionally, you will not be able to select songs when the device is set to a specific mode or when the settings menu is displayed.

By hitting the right hand during the jackpot game, the second special symbol start port 232 is also won, and the reserved number of special symbols 2 is accumulated to four. When the jackpot game ends, the state transitions to the special symbol high probability normal symbol high probability state, and the reserved number of special symbols 2 accumulated to four is consumed and the variable display starts. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120(o), the background of the castle town indicating the time-saving game state is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "119 remaining" are displayed as the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state will continue for another 119 times. In addition, the time-saving lamp TL and the high probability lamp HL shown in FIG. 120(o) are also lit. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the right-hit first display RH1, and the right-hit display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, the song selection display MC showing the song title "Song 1" is also displayed, and Song 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

Figure 121 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example in which the first reserved icon h21 among the reserved icons of special chart 2 is displayed in gold at the time when the pattern change display of the last special chart that can maintain the time-saving game state has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 120, the third reserved icon h21 among the reserved icons of special chart 2 was displayed in gold at the time when the pattern change display of the last special chart ended, but in this example, the first reserved icon h21 is displayed in gold. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the example shown in FIG. 120, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

The first reserved icon h21 shown in FIG. 121(a) in a gold display mode becomes a variable icon h0 in a gold display mode when the consumption of the remaining reserved amount of Special Chart 2 starts (when the pullback period starts) (see FIG. 121(b)).

Here, the result of the pre-reading is that the currently performed special pattern 2 pattern change display (pattern change display corresponding to the gold display mode change icon h0) is a pattern change display of a jackpot. Also, the next special pattern 2 pattern change display (pattern change display corresponding to the first reserved icon h21 shown in FIG. 121(b)) will suddenly win the time-saving mode. As a result of this pre-reading, since the preceding pattern change display will win the jackpot, the pattern change display corresponding to this first reserved icon h21 will be performed in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state acquired by the jackpot will not be updated by the time-saving mode suddenly, but the sudden time-saving win will be invalidated in order to prioritize the time-saving game state acquired by the jackpot. For this reason, it will not be displayed in the time-saving display mode like the first reserved icon h21 shown in FIG. 120(b), and in FIG. 121(b), the first reserved icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. In other words, even if there is a reserved time-saving symbol that is expected to win, if there is a reserved time-saving symbol that will win the jackpot before the reserved time-saving symbol is consumed, pre-reading predictions for the time-saving symbol are prohibited.

In Fig. 121(c), the display of the decorative symbols changes to indicate a reach state. Then, in Fig. 121(d), it develops into a super reach, and instead of the music 1 that had been output up until that point, the speaker 120 outputs music A, which is exclusive to super reaches. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 121(e), the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for the jackpot is displayed frozen, and a 2R special jackpot (special symbol B) has been won. The jackpot here is a jackpot in the display of the special symbol 2 symbols that occurs as a result of the remaining reserved special symbol 2 being consumed in a non-time-saving play state, and a specified condition is met.

In FIG. 121(f), the opening performance of the big win game has started. As a predetermined condition has been met, the music selection display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the name of music 8 is displayed on the music selection display MD, and it is announced that music 8 has been selected by lottery. Music 8 is also output from the speaker 120. Music 8 is a music that suggests a setting of 5 or 6, and a player who knows this will know that the pachinko machine 100 currently being played is a high-setting pachinko machine. Music 8 is also a rare music that may only be selected on pachinko machines 100 that are actually set to 5 or 6, and the selection rate is low, so that listening to music 8 may increase the player's interest in the game. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 121(f) displays the right-hit first display RH1 and the right-hit second display RH2, and the speaker 120 outputs the right-hit notification sound "Hit to the right" along with the music 8.

121(g), the first round has started, and the right-hit second display RH2 has disappeared and is not displayed, but the right-hit first display RH1 is still displayed. The speaker 120 also no longer outputs the sound of the right-hit notification, and only the song 8 is output. Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208, where the first round has started, displays a music video corresponding to the song 8 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation of a banchou in a loincloth style striking a pose to the song 8, and the lyrics of the song 8 are also displayed. As shown in FIG. 120(k) and FIG. 120(l), the lyrics display of the song 1, which does not suggest a setting, is a first color of text (e.g., black text), while the lyrics display of the song 8, which suggests a high setting, is a second color of text (e.g., gold text). The lyrics display of the song 7 may be a third color of text (e.g., red text). The song selection confirmation display MD is also displayed in FIG. 121(g).

In FIG. 121(h), the second round has begun. In the example in FIG. 121, the text display "Aim for V" is still displayed, and the song video continues to be displayed, but the song selection confirmation display MD has disappeared and is no longer displayed. Note that song 8 continues to be output from speaker 120.

In FIG. 121(i), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a V-winning notification to notify the player that a V-winning has been obtained, and the music video is hidden. The music selection confirmation display MD also remains hidden. Meanwhile, music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 121(j), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection confirmation display MD has resumed. Music 8 has also been output from speaker 120 continuously during the jackpot game, and is also output during this end effect.

In FIG. 121(k), the game transitions to a time-saving game state, the reserved special chart 2 is consumed and the display starts to change, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the background of a castle town, which indicates the time-saving game state, and starts to display the decorative patterns. In addition, as a predetermined condition is met and song 8 is selected by lottery, the song selection display MC starts to display, showing the name of song 8 in the time-saving game state. Song 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game.

In FIG. 121(l), the symbol change display of the special symbol 2 is displayed as a stop, and the combination of the missing symbol symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8" is displayed as a stop on the decorative symbol display device 208. This stop-displayed symbol change display of the special symbol 2 is the reserved symbol change display represented by the first reserved icon h21 at the time when the consumption of the remaining reserved symbol 2 starts (the time when the pullback period starts). As described above, the symbol change display would have been a sudden win in the time-saving mode, but since the jackpot with the time-saving mode was won first, the time-saving symbol is not displayed as a stop on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game does not move to a time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol. In other words, in the time-saving game state, the stop display of the time-saving symbol is restricted, and the time-saving symbol can be said to be a symbol that is displayed as a stop only in the non-time-saving game state. However, the time-saving symbol may be displayed as a stop even in the time-saving game state.

In Figure 121 (m), which follows Figure 121 (l), the number of remaining plays in the time-saving game state is decreased by one, the words "118 remaining" are displayed, the decorative pattern display begins to change, and in Figure 121 (n), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 8 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 4" is displayed frozen.

In addition, in FIG. 121(o), the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is displayed is decreased by one, the text "117 remaining" is displayed, and the display of the decorative patterns begins to change. In addition, the song selection display MC showing the name of song 8 is displayed, and song 8 continues to be output from speaker 120.

Figure 122 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed.

In the examples so far, even when the music selection display MC was displayed, the operation key unit 190 was not operated, but in the example shown in FIG. 122, the operation key unit 190 is operated. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the example shown in FIG. 121, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(a), the missing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" is displayed stationary, and the display of the pattern variation of the last special pattern that allows the time-saving game state to be maintained has ended.

In FIG. 122(b), like FIG. 113(j), the game moves from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (low probability of special game and low probability of normal game), the time-saving lamp TL is off, and the high probability lamp HL is also off. In addition, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to a special background displaying the text "One Shot Reversal," and the display of the song selection display MC showing the name of Song 1 begins. Song 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 122(c), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(d), the song selection display MC displays the title of song 2, and song 2 begins to be output from the speaker 120 a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the up button 191 is pressed. In other words, the song is determined a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the operation of the operation key unit 190. If the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the predetermined time has elapsed, the song title in the song selection display MC is changed, and the song output from the speaker 120 is also changed. Also, the song may be determined if the OK button on the operation key unit 190 is pressed even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

In Fig. 122(e), the display of the decorative symbols changes to a reach state, which then progresses to a super reach in Fig. 122(f), with the speaker 120 outputting the super reach-specific music A instead of the newly set music 2. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 122(g), the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed frozen, resulting in a 2R special jackpot (special symbol B), and the specified conditions being met.

In FIG. 122(h), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started. As a result of a certain condition being met, the song selection decision display MD is displayed instead of the song selection display MC. In this example, the song title of song 6 is displayed on the song selection decision display MD. In addition, song 6 is output from the speaker 120. Song 6 is a song that does not suggest a setting. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 122(h) displays the right hit first display RH1 and the right hit second display RH2, and the speaker 120 also outputs a right hit notification sound saying "Hit to the right" along with song 6.

In Figure 122(i), the first round has started, and the right-hit notification sound is no longer being output from the speaker 120; only song 6 is being output. Furthermore, when the first round has started, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a song video corresponding to song 6 being output from the speaker 120. The song video here is an animation of the Gakuran Style Banchou striking a pose in time with song 6, and the lyrics of song 6 are also displayed. Also, in Figure 122(i), the song selection confirmation display MD is displayed.

In FIG. 122(j), the second round has begun. In the example in FIG. 122, the text display "Aim for V" is still displayed, and the song video continues to be displayed, but the song selection confirmation display MD has disappeared and is no longer displayed. Note that song 6 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VS, so no V-winning notification is made, and in FIG. 122(k), the end presentation of the jackpot game begins. In the end presentation of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection confirmation display MD resumes. Music 6 is also output from the speaker 120 continuously throughout the jackpot game, and is also output in this end presentation.

In Fig. 122 (l), the game has transitioned to a time-saving game state, the reserved special symbol 2 has been consumed, and the display has begun to change. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of a castle town, which indicates the time-saving game state, and the display of the decorative symbols has begun to change. Note that, since there was no V win, the game has not entered a high probability state, and the high probability lamp HL remains off.

In addition, as a result of the predetermined condition being met and song 6 being selected by lottery, the song selection display MC showing the name of song 6 begins to be displayed during the time-saving game mode. Song 6 continues to be output from the speaker 120 from the time of the big win game.

In FIG. 122(m), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(n), the song selection display MC displays the name of the default song 1, and when song 1 is selected after a predetermined time has elapsed, song 1 begins to be output from the speaker 120. In this example, songs 7 and 8 have not been released, and after song 6, the game returns to song 1.

In addition, if a specific operation (e.g., pressing the down button 192 or pressing and holding the OK button) is performed during a specific period (e.g., the period of the opening presentation during a jackpot game as shown in FIG. 122(h)), song 6 may be released even if a predetermined condition is not met. Even in this case, it is preferable that the setting suggestion song is not released.

Figure 123 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game that is started without the specified conditions being met.

In FIG. 123(a), unlike the examples in FIG. 121 and so far, the display of the special symbol pattern change ends in a non-time-saving play state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a missing decorative symbol combination of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4" frozen. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(a), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special symbol 1 is displayed on a plain white background representing a non-time-saving play state. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special symbol 1, three reserved icons h11 to h13 are displayed, of which the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in a gold color. In addition, the time-saving lamp TL, the right-hit display lamp RL, and the high probability lamp HL are all turned off. Furthermore, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 123(a).

In FIG. 123(b), the display of the pending pattern change represented by the first pending icon h11 in a gold display mode has begun, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(b) has begun displaying the decorative pattern change. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 displays the variable icon h0 in a gold display mode, and a normal preview is being performed.

In Fig. 123(c), the display of the decorative symbols changes and the game enters a reach state. Then, in Fig. 123(d), the game progresses to a super reach, and instead of music 1, music A, which is exclusive to super reaches, is output from the speaker 120. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 123(e), the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for the jackpot is displayed as a static display, and a 3R special jackpot (special symbol a) has been won. Since the jackpot in this case is not a jackpot in the special symbol 2 remaining reserve, the specified condition is not met. Also, in this example, this jackpot is the first jackpot, and the specified condition has not been met even once since the power was turned on (since the RAM was cleared).

In FIG. 123(f), the opening performance of the jackpot game has begun. Because the specified condition has not been met, the song selection display MC is displayed instead of the song selection decision display MD. The song title "Song 1" is displayed in the song selection display MC shown in FIG. 123(f), and Song 1 is output from the speaker 120 along with the audio output of the right hit notification.

In FIG. 123(g), the first round has started, and the right-hit notification sound is no longer being output from the speaker 120; only song 1 is being output. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a song selection display MC showing the name of "Song 1," as well as a song video featuring the main character, the lord, who appears in the song 1.

As shown in FIG. 123(h), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times in the middle of the first round. The song selection display MC switches between the titles of song 2, song 3, song 4, and song 5, in that order, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(i) displays the song selection display MC showing the title of "Song 5," and a song video with lyrics corresponding to song 5 is displayed. Additionally, song 5 is output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 123 (j), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. When the second round begins, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 123 (k) displays a song selection display MC showing the song title "Song 1", and a song video with lyrics corresponding to Song 1 is displayed. In other words, the game returns to Song 1 that was output in the first round, and the output of Song 1 is resumed from the continuation of Song 1 that was output partway through in the first round. However, it may also be configured to output the song from the beginning each time a song is selected.

When the third and final round begins on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(l), the song selection display MC disappears and song selection cannot be performed. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display a song video with lyrics corresponding to song 1. Also, song 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123(m), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decorative pattern display device 208 issues a V-winning notification to notify the player that a V-winning has been won, and the music video goes hidden. The music selection display MC also remains hidden. Meanwhile, music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123(n), the performance of ending the big win game has started, and the display of the music selection display MC has resumed. In addition, music 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 123(o), the game has transitioned to a time-saving game state, the reserved special chart 2 has been consumed, and the variable display has begun. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the background of a castle town, which represents the time-saving game state, and the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the song selection display MC, which displays the song title "Song 1," and the speaker 120 also outputs Song 1 without interruption when switching from a jackpot game to a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state. Note that even if there is no change in song when switching from a jackpot game to a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, the song may not be output continuously, but may be interrupted and then resumed, or the song may be output again from the beginning when switching to a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state.

The predetermined condition for selecting a song was that a jackpot was won in the pattern change display of Special Chart 2, which is performed as a result of the remaining reserved Special Chart 2 being consumed in a non-time-saving play state. However, for example, during a 10R jackpot play, a song can be selected as shown in FIG. 123(h) or (j), and during a 2R jackpot play, a song cannot be selected as shown in FIG. 121(f), etc.

The present invention can also be applied to so-called type 1 and type 2 hybrid machines, in which a small win occurs during time-saving play and a big win is won when the ball enters the V winning area in the attacka.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a notification means [e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, etc.],
In a non-time-saving game state, the notification means may execute a first notification [for example, a left-hit notification such as a left-hit first display LH1 or a left-hit second display LH2] to prompt the launch of the game ball toward the first game area,
The notification means, when a first condition [for example, that there are four reserved special figures 2] is satisfied when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state,
The first notification is not executed during the first period after the transition from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state [for example, the period during which the pattern change display of the special chart 2 is performed as a result of the remaining reserved special chart 2 being consumed in the non-time-saving game state (the pull-back period), which is the period from FIG. 113(j) to FIG. 113(o) to FIG. 114(d)] [for example, FIG. 113(l)],
After the first period ends, the first notification (e.g., the left hit notification of the left hit first display LH1) is executed over a second period (e.g., the left hit notification period of FIG. 114 (e) to FIG. 114 (h)).
This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the fact that
He explained:

This gaming machine makes it possible to give appropriate notifications depending on the game situation.

The first notification is always executed during the second period.

The notification means may also not execute the first notification even if a power outage occurs during the first period and is subsequently restored.

Also,
"When the second condition [for example, there is only one reserved special symbol 2] is satisfied when the time-saving game state is switched to the non-time-saving game state, the notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208]
The first notification is not executed during a third period (e.g., the period from FIG. 115(j) to FIG. 115(m)) that is shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state (e.g., FIG. 115(l)),
After the third period ends, the first notification [for example, the left hit notification of the left hit first display LH1] is executed over the second period [for example, the left hit notification period of Figure 115 (n) to (o) to Figure 116 (b)].
This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the fact that
He also explained:

This gaming machine is also capable of providing appropriate notifications depending on the game situation.

Also,
"When the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state [for example, when the remaining reserved special symbol 2 is 0], the notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] may execute the first notification [for example, the left hit notification of the left hit first display LH1] over the second period [for example, the period from FIG. 117(j) to FIG. 117(l)] after transition from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state [for example, it may be executed as in the example shown in FIG. 117, or if the remaining reserved special symbol 2 is 2 or 3, the left hit first display LH1 may not be executed immediately].
This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the fact that
He also explained:

This gaming machine is also capable of providing appropriate notifications depending on the game situation.

Also,
"A second starting hole [e.g., a second special starting hole 232] arranged in a second game area [e.g., a right area],
A second pattern display means [e.g., a second special pattern display device 214] capable of executing a second pattern change display [e.g., a pattern change display of a special pattern 2] based on a winning entry into the second starting port;
Equipped with
The notification means [e.g., the decorative pattern display device 208] executes a second notification [e.g., a right-hit first display RH1] to prompt the player to launch the game ball toward the second game area in the time-saving game state,
The notification means executes a reserved number notification that indicates the reserved number of the second pattern change display [for example, a number notification in the reserved number display area of the special pattern 2 that is the lower left of the fourth pattern / reserved number display area 284],
The notification means, during the execution of the last second pattern change display (hereinafter referred to as the "last second pattern change display") in the time-saving game state [for example, FIG. 113(f) to FIG. 113(h)], executes a third notification [for example, a right-hit second display RH2] which is a notification mode different from the second notification and encourages the launch of the game ball toward the second game area,
The notification means executes the third notification in the final second pattern change display, while executing the notification mode of the reserved number notification that has been executed before the final second pattern change display is started without changing it [for example, FIG. 113 (f) to (h)].
He also explained:

In the final second symbol change display, if the player does not save up any reserved balls for the second symbol change display, the player will incur a loss. First, the reserved number notification is executed without changing the notification mode, so the player can check the reserved number for the second symbol change display. Then, by executing a special notification such as the third notification, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area is emphasized, preventing the player from incurring a loss.

The notification means may be configured to always execute the third notification during the execution of the final second pattern change display.

Moreover, the notification means executes the first notification in response to detection that a game ball is shot toward the second game area in the non-time-saving game state after the second period ends,
The notification means does not execute the first notification during the first period even if it is detected that a game ball is being launched toward the second game area.

Also,
"A first starting hole [e.g., a first special starting hole 230] arranged in the first game area [e.g., the left side area],
A first pattern display means [e.g., a first special pattern display device 212] capable of executing a first pattern change display [e.g., a pattern change display of a special pattern 1] based on a winning entry into the first starting port;
Equipped with
The first symbol display means does not stop and display a time-saving symbol [for example, a time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in FIG. 106(b)] in the first symbol variation display in the non-time-saving game state,
The second symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbol in the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving game state [for example, FIG. 120(e)],
When the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol variation display, the game moves to the time-saving game state without going through a big win game [for example, FIG. 120(f)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Even in the same non-time-saving game state, if there is a reserved ball in the second pattern change display, the time-saving pattern may be won, and there is a higher possibility of transitioning to the time-saving game state again than if there is no reserved ball. For this reason, the first notification is not issued to prevent the player from pointlessly aiming at the first starting hole.

In addition, a pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice suggesting that the time-saving pattern will be stopped and displayed is provided,
The above-mentioned look-ahead notification means may not execute the look-ahead notification for the second reserved symbol changing display reservation (hereinafter referred to as the "second reserved symbol") which stops displaying the time-saving symbol when the reserved symbol which is consumed before the second reserved symbol has won a certain type of jackpot.

In addition, if the reserved ball that is consumed before the second reserved ball is consumed and a jackpot with a special probability is won, the game may not transition to the time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol even if the second reserved ball is consumed after the jackpot game with the special probability is played.

In other words, after the end of the jackpot game of the special jackpot, the game transitions to the time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol is not displayed in a stopped state even if the second reserved ball is consumed. Also, the game is already in the time-saving game state when the second reserved ball is consumed.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type pachinko machine. In an enclosed type pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (e.g., game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. In other words, the game media that are fired from the firing means into the game area are ejected from the game area and can be supplied to the firing means again. Also, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, loaned balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area on the front side of the game machine, and the upper tray 126 and lower tray 128 shown in FIG. 102 are not provided.

As explained above, this type of pachinko machine encloses balls and circulates the balls inside the machine. The enclose- ed balls are used as balls to be fired, and the payout of the balls may be carried out by credit.

Next, a slot machine (reel game machine) as a gaming machine applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 124. Here, FIG. 124 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention, as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 124 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of patterns arranged on their outer periphery (not shown in FIG. 124) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotated by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 124, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in an appropriate number, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each of the reels 1010-1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010-1012 are displayed vertically in roughly three rows through a symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 1010-1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010-1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display means. Also, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 124 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back of each of the reels 1010-1012, a reel backlight (not shown) is arranged to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 1010-1012, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010-1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the winning lines 1014 that are valid. The winning lines that are valid are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid. When two medals are bet, three lines are valid, which are the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line. When three medals are bet, five lines are valid, which are the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line. Note that the number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the five lines of the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the lower right winning line, and the upper right winning line may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the valid winning lines may be called valid lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamps 1029 light up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 1021 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (inserted) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the term "inserting" includes both. The number of medals stored in the slot machine 1000 is an indicator for displaying the number of medals stored electronically. The game information indicator 126 is an indicator for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The number of medals paid out is an indicator for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 124, the number of medals stored in the slot machine 1025, the game information indicator 1026, and the number of medals paid out are configured as 7-segment (SEG) indicators.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 1035 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037-1039 as an example of an operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each of the reels 1010-1012. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 1037-1039 will be referred to as a stop operation, with the first stop operation being the first stop operation, the next stop operation being the second stop operation, and the last stop operation being the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation being the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation being the third stop reel. Note that light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037-1039, and when the stop buttons 1037-1039 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is an outlet for paying out medals.

To the right of the medal insertion button 1032 is provided a chance button 1100 as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or operations related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. The chance button 1100 can be in multiple states, similar to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the valid period for operating the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling up a user menu (for example, a menu for setting the game history information of the individual player) and is composed of multiple buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation means.

A title panel 1062 is provided below the stop button unit 1036 to display the model name and to attach various certificate stamps, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp that lights up the title panel 1062. A medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal receiving tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker installed inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and the sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the performance device 1060. This performance device 1060 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right shutters 1063a and left shutters 1063b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown, performance image display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 1000.

It is not necessary to use a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to display various performance images and various game information, it may be, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can see it in its entirety. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 124, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. It is also possible to provide decorations (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen look irregular. The display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

Furthermore, while the present invention has been described with reference to pachinko machines and slot machines as examples of gaming machines, the present invention is not limited to these and may also be applied to arrange ball gaming machines, Jankyu gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 124, the predetermined conditions for selecting a song include winning the nth consecutive bonus, winning a bonus by lining up specific symbols (e.g., red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by lining up symbols on a specific winning line (e.g., the horizontal winning line in the middle row), winning the AT for the 10th consecutive win, winning an additional win for a specified number of sets or a specified number of games, winning the AT that lines up a specified hand, etc.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state in the examples shown in Figures 113 to 123 will be a bonus gaming state, an ART state, an AT state, etc. in the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 124. In addition, the time-saving gaming state will be an ART state, an AT state, etc. if the jackpot gaming state is a bonus gaming state, and will be an AT state, an RT state, etc. if the jackpot gaming state is an ART state.

In addition, the timing for resetting the song release information was when the RAM was cleared, but it could also be reset when a power outage occurs across two dates, or it could be set so that it is not reset if the power is restored up until a certain time (for example, 6:00 a.m.) across two dates.

In addition, when power is restored after a power outage, the selected song will be set to the default song that was previously selected.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a sound output means [e.g., a speaker 120] capable of outputting music,
The sound output means is capable of outputting a musical piece in a first advantageous state (e.g., a big win game state, a bonus game state, an ART state),
The first advantageous state is a state that is advantageous to the player,
A predetermined condition [for example, winning a jackpot in the pattern change display of Special Chart 2 which is performed as a result of the remaining reserved Special Chart 2 being consumed in a non-time-saving play state, there being a reserved that will become a jackpot again as a result of a look-ahead during a jackpot play (so-called reserved consecutive jackpots), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, a jackpot with the greatest number of rounds or the greatest number of time-saving times), winning the most disadvantageous jackpot for the player (for example, a jackpot with the least number of rounds or the least number of time-saving times), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, a specific pattern (for example, red 7 pattern) lining up to win a bonus, a specific winning line (for example, the first number of musical pieces that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the following conditions are not met: winning a bonus by lining up symbols on the horizontal winning line in the middle row, winning the AT for the 10th consecutive win, or the fulfillment of a specified AT start condition (for example, winning an additional predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT for lining up predetermined roles, etc.) is not met [for example, "5" in FIG. 118(a), and "5 to 8" (see FIG. 119) after the specified condition is fulfilled at least once] is different from the second number of musical pieces that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the specified condition is fulfilled [for example, "1" for one musical piece determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 118(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, when the specified condition is met, the number of songs played is different from when the specified condition is not met, which enhances the sense of exclusivity in the first advantageous state when the specified condition is met, and makes the game more interesting.

Also,
"The second number of songs [e.g., 1] is less than the first number of songs [e.g., 5 or more and 8 or less].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

By reducing the number of songs that can be output in the first advantageous state when the specified conditions are met, the special feeling of the first advantageous state when the specified conditions are met can be enhanced, making the game more interesting.

Also,
" Equipped with a display means [e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208],
the sound output means is capable of outputting a musical piece even in the second advantageous state,
The second advantageous state is a state that is advantageous to the player, different from the first advantageous state [for example, a time-saving gaming state, an ART state or an AT state when the first advantageous state is a bonus gaming state, and an AT state or an RT state when the first advantageous state is an ART state],
The display means does not display a video corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the second advantageous state (e.g., Figures 113(a) to 113(i), 121(k) to 121(o)),
The display means displays a video corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state (e.g., Figures 121(g) to 121(h), 123(g) to 123(k)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, in the first advantageous state, a video can be displayed along with the output of music to liven up the game, and in the second advantageous state, the output of music can liven up the game while preventing interference with the variable presentation that notifies the player of whether or not they have won, for example.

Also,
"When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state can suggest game information (for example, a set value, a reserve during a jackpot game that will become a jackpot again as a result of a look-ahead (so-called reserve consecutive wins), a win type (whether or not there is a probability bonus), and a number of consecutive wins)."
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine suggests game information when the specified condition is met, which can increase the player's desire to play and achieve the specified condition.

The game information may be information about the game that the player would not normally be able to know.

Also,
" Equipped with an operation means [e.g., an operation key unit 190],
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music to be output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [e.g., FIG. 123(h) or (j)], whereas in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music to be output by the sound output means cannot be selected using the operation means [e.g., a music selection confirmation display MD as shown in FIG. 122(h) etc. is displayed and the music cannot be selected].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, by making the song unselectable in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is met, it is possible to suggest that the song is a special song (a song that suggests information), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The device may also include a display means, which is capable of displaying a song selection display showing songs that the player can select.

Furthermore, the display means does not display the song selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is established,
The display means may be capable of displaying the song selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not met.

Moreover, the display means does not display lyrics of the music being output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state,
The display means may be configured to display lyrics of the music being output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is met, a first song [e.g., song 7 or song 8] is added as a song that the player can select in a certain advantageous state [e.g., a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state] that occurs after the predetermined condition is met, and the first song can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first song may not be selectable in a normal game state [e.g., a non-time-saving game state] [e.g., FIG. 119].

During a certain period in the first advantageous state [e.g., a jackpot game state] [e.g., a round (final round) in which a V prize can be obtained], it may be possible to prevent the selection of a song using the operating means.

It may also be possible that the selection of a song using the operating means is not possible even during a certain period in the second advantageous state [for example, a time-saving game state] [for example, a super reach period, a period during which a special symbol is displayed stationary, a period during which a demo display is being executed, or a period during which a menu display is being executed in a demo display].

Alternatively, during a certain period in the normal game mode (e.g., non-time-saving game mode), it may be impossible to select a song using the operating means.

Also, if a power outage occurs while a song is selected and then power is restored, a preset initial song may be treated as the selected song.

The following is an additional note, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Music can be output during special games (e.g., big win games, etc.),
The number of songs that can be output during a special game when the predetermined condition is not met is a predetermined number, whereas the number of songs that can be output during a special game when the predetermined condition is met is a specific number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 2)
2. A gaming machine according to claim 1,
The specific number is a number that is less than a predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 3)
A gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A predetermined number of songs can be output even during advantageous play (for example, time-saving play, etc.),
During special play, a video corresponding to the type of music being played is displayed, but during advantageous play, a video corresponding to the type of music being played is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a piece of music is output during a special game to suggest predetermined information related to the game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
During a special game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the player can select a piece of music to be output using the operation means, but during a special game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player cannot select a piece of music to be output using the operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 6)
In the non-time-saving game state,
This is a game state in which the game ball should be launched toward the first game area (left side area),
Time-saving play state is
This is a game state in which the game ball should be launched toward the second game area (right side area),
If the first condition is met when transitioning from a time-limited play state to a non-time-limited play state,
The execution of a first shot notification (left shot notification) that notifies the player that a ball should be shot in a first game area during a first period after a transition from a time-saving game state to a non-time-saving game state is restricted;
After the first period ends, the first hitting style notification is executed for a third period.
This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the following.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to claim 6,
If a second condition different from the first condition is met when transitioning from a time-limited play state to a non-time-limited play state,
The execution of the first hitting method notification is restricted during a second period that is shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized in that after the second period ends, the first playing style notification is executed over the third period.

(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine according to claim 6 or 7,
If the first and second conditions are not met when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state,
There is a case where the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period after transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 6 to 8,
The first condition is to remember the first number's special two-reservation,
The second condition is that the second number of special reserves less than the first number is stored.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 6 to 9,
When the non-time-saving game state is transitioned to the time-saving game state, a second shot notification (right shot notification) is executed to notify the player that the ball should be shot in the second game area;
In the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state,
A third shot notification (reserved save notification) is executed in a manner different from the second shot notification executed in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation, which notifies the player that the ball should be shot into the second game area, while displaying the reserved number in the same manner as the reserved number displayed in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 6 to 10,
In a special game judgment based on special 1 in a non-time-saving game state, the special symbol (time-saving symbol) will not be won, while in a special game judgment based on special 2 (special symbol 2 remaining reservation) in a non-time-saving game state, the special symbol may be won,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the special symbol is won, the game machine shifts to a time-saving game state without going through a special game.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Note that even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. In other words, as long as there are no factors preventing the application, the constituent elements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. can be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc., and still form a unified technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 124 Play area 136 Performance button 136aN Button image 136bN Blue meter display 136cN Black character display 136aB Large button image 136bB Large blue meter display 136cB Large black character display 137aN Lever image 137bN Blue meter display 137cN Black character display CTM Green cut-in image CTR Red cut-in image CTG Gold cut-in image

Claims (2)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
the display means is capable of displaying an icon image using a first display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying the icon image using a second display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying the icon image using a third display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying an image related to a first effect (hereinafter referred to as a "first title image");
the display means is capable of displaying an image related to a second effect (hereinafter referred to as a "second title image");
the first title image is an image suggesting the expectation that a player will have an advantage due to a display mode used as a display mode of the first title image,
the second title image is an image that does not suggest the degree of expectation by a display mode used as a display mode of the second title image,
the display means is capable of displaying the first title image using the second display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying the first title image using the third display mode,
When the first title image is displayed using the third display mode, the expectation is higher than when the first title image is displayed using the second display mode,
the display means is capable of displaying the second title image using the second display mode,
the display means does not display the second title image in the third display manner,
The icon image can be displayed before the first title image is displayed, but the icon image is not displayed while the first title image is being displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light emitting modes is provided,
the light-emitting means may emit light in a light-emitting manner representing the second display mode, but may not emit light in a light-emitting manner representing the third display mode;
The third display mode is a display mode that can identify the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images